January 2024 Drainage Handbook

Water Management
Drainage Handbook
Specifications
Specifications
ADS, Inc. Drainage Handbook Specifications ♦ 1-1
1-0 SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
N-12® ST IB Pipe (ASTM F2648) Specification ......................................................................................... 3
N-12 WT IB Pipe (per ASTM F2648) Specification.................................................................................... 4
N-12 ST IB Pipe (per AASHTO) Specification ........................................................................................... 5
N-12 WT IB Pipe (per AASHTO) Specification .......................................................................................... 6
N-12 Mega Green TM ST IB Pipe Specification .......................................................................................... 7
N-12 Mega Green WT IB Pipe Specification ............................................................................................. 8
N-12 WT Series 35 Pipe Specification ....................................................................................................... 9
N-12 Plain End Pipe (per ASTM F2648) Specification ........................................................................... 10
N-12 Plain End Pipe (per AASHTO) Specification.................................................................................. 11
N-12 Mega Green Plain End Pipe Specification ..................................................................................... 12
Landmax Retention/Detention Pipe System Specifiaction ................................................................... 13
HP Storm 12”- 60” Pipe Specification ..................................................................................................... 15
SaniTite® HP 12”- 60” Pipe Specification ............................................................................................... 16
N-12 Low Head Pipe Specification .......................................................................................................... 17
Single Wall Pipe Specification ................................................................................................................. 19
Single Wall Heavy Duty Pipe Specification ............................................................................................ 21
Grain-Aire® Pipe Specification ................................................................................................................. 22
AdvanEdge® Pipe Specification............................................................................................................... 23
SB2® Pipe Specification ........................................................................................................................... 24
ADS 3000 TripleWall® Pipe Specification ............................................................................................... 25
Smoothwall Sewer & Drain Pipe Specification ...................................................................................... 26
Channel-Flow® Pipe Specification ........................................................................................................... 27
Channel Muck Pipe Specification ............................................................................................................ 28
Duraslot® Pipe Specification .................................................................................................................... 29
Duraslot XL Pipe Specification ................................................................................................................ 31
Injection Molded Fitting Specification .................................................................................................... 33
Mar Mac® Polyseal Repair Coupler Specification .................................................................................. 35
PVC Coupling Specification ..................................................................................................................... 36
Waterstop™ Gasket Specification .......................................................................................................... 37
Flared End Section Specification ............................................................................................................ 38
Mitered End Section Specification .......................................................................................................... 39
Taylor End Plug Specification ................................................................................................................. 40
Storm Water Quality Unit Specification .................................................................................................. 41
BiodiffuserTM Septic Leaching Chamber Specification ......................................................................... 43
 ADS, Inc., January 2024

Arc TM Septic Leaching Chamber Specification ..................................................................................... 44

Sump Pump Well Specification ............................................................................................................... 45
Radon Dual Purpose Vented Sump Specification ................................................................................. 46
Sewage Ejector Sump Specification ....................................................................................................... 47
Filter Sock Specification .......................................................................................................................... 48

N-12® ST IB PIPE (ASTM F2648) SPECIFICATION

Scope
This specification describes 4- through 30-inch (100 to 750 mm) N-12 ST IB pipe (per ASTM F2648) for
use in gravity-flow land drainage applications.
Pipe Requirements
N-12 ST IB pipe (per ASTM F2648) shall have a smooth interior and annular exterior corrugations.
• 4- through 30-inch (100 to 750 mm) pipe shall meet ASTM F2648.
• Manning’s “n” value for use in design shall be 0.012.
Joint Performance
Pipe shall be joined using a bell & spigot joint meeting ASTM F2648. The joint shall be soil-tight and
gaskets for diameters 12- through 30-inch (300-750 mm), shall meet the requirements of ASTM F477. For
diameters 4- through 10-inch, the joint shall be soil-tight using an engaging dimple connection. Gaskets
shall be installed by the pipe manufacturer and covered with a removable, protective wrap to ensure the
gasket is free from debris. A joint lubricant available from the manufacturer shall be used on the gasket
and bell during assembly.
Fittings
Fittings shall conform to ASTM F2306. Bell and spigot connections shall utilize a welded bell and valley or
saddle gasket meeting the soil-tight joint performance requirements of ASTM F2306.
Material Properties
Material for pipe production shall be an engineered compound of virgin and recycled high density
polyethylene conforming with the minimum requirements of cell classification 424420C (ESCR Test
Condition B) for 4- through 10-inch (100 to 250 mm) diameters, and 435420C (ESCR Test Condition B)
for 12- through 30-inch (300 to 750 mm) diameters, as defined and described in the latest version of
ASTM D3350, except that carbon black content should not exceed 4%. The design engineer shall verify
compatibility with overall system including structural, hydraulic, material, and installation requirements for
a given application.
Installation
Installation shall be in accordance with ASTM D2321 and ADS recommended installation guidelines, with
the exception that minimum cover in trafficked areas for 4- through 30-inch (100 to 750 mm) diameters
shall be one foot (0.3 m) in single run applications. Backfill for minimum cover situations shall consist of
Class 1 (compacted) or Class 2 (minimum 90% SPD) material. Maximum fill heights depend on
embedment material and compaction level; please refer to Technical Note 2.02. Contact your local ADS
representative or visit our website at www.adspipe.com for a copy of the latest installation guidelines.
Pipe Dimensions
Pipe I.D. 4 6 8 10 12 15 18 24 30
in (mm) (100) (150) (200) (250) (300) (375) (450) (600) (750)
Pipe O.D.* 4.8 6.9 9.1 11.4 14.5 18 22 28 36
in (mm) (122) (175) (231) (290) (368) (457) (559) (711) (914)
*Pipe O.D. values are provided for reference purposes only, values stated for 12 through 30-inch are ±1 inch.
Contact a sales representative for exact values
**All diameters available with or without perforations.

N-12® WT IB PIPE (PER ASTM F2648) SPECIFICATION

Scope
This specification describes 4- through 60-inch (100 to 1500 mm) N-12 WT IB pipe (per ASTM F2648) for
Pipe Requirements
N-12 WT IB pipe (per ASTM F2648) shall have a smooth interior and annular exterior corrugations.
Joint Performance
Pipe shall be joined using a bell & spigot joint meeting ASTM F2648. The joint shall be watertight
according to the requirements of ASTM D3212. Gaskets shall meet the requirements of ASTM F477.
Gaskets shall be installed by the pipe manufacturer and covered with a removable, protective wrap to
ensure the gasket is free from debris. A joint lubricant available from the manufacturer shall be used on
the gasket and bell during assembly. 12- through 60-inch (300 to 1500 mm) diameters shall have an
exterior bell wrap installed by the manufacturer.
Fittings
saddle gasket meeting the watertight joint performance requirements of ASTM F2306.
Field Pipe and Joint Performance

To assure watertightness, field performance verification may be accomplished by testing in accordance
with ASTM F2487. Appropriate safety precautions must be used when field-testing any pipe material.
Contact the manufacturer for recommended leakage rates.
Material Properties
Material for pipe production shall be an engineered compound of virgin and recycled high-density
Installation
shall be one foot (0.3 m) and for 60-inch (1500 mm) diameter the minimum cover shall be 2 ft. (0.6 m) in
single run applications. Backfill for minimum cover situations shall consist of Class 1 (compacted) or
Class 2 (minimum 90% SPD) material. Maximum fill heights depend on embedment material and
compaction level; please refer to Technical Note 2.02. Contact your local ADS representative or visit our
website at www.adspipe.com for a copy of the latest installation guidelines.
Pipe Dimensions
Pipe I.D. 4 6 8 10 12 15 18 24 30 36 42 48 60
in (mm) (100) (150) (200) (250) (300) (375) (450) (600) (750) (900) (1050) (1200) (1500)
Pipe O.D.* 4.8 6.9 9.1 11.4 14.5 18 22 28 36 42 48 54 67
in (mm) (122) (175) (231) (290) (368) (457) (559) (711) (914) (1067) (1219) (1372) (1702)
*Pipe O.D. values are provided for reference purposes only, values stated for 12 through 60-inch are ±1 inch. Contact a sales representative for exact
values

N-12® ST IB PIPE (PER AASHTO) SPECIFICATION

Scope
This specification describes 4- through 30-inch (100 to 750 mm) N-12 ST IB pipe (per AASHTO) for use in
gravity-flow land drainage applications.
Pipe Requirements
N-12 ST IB pipe (per AASHTO) shall have a smooth interior and annular exterior corrugations.
• 4- through 10-inch (100 to 250 mm) pipe shall meet AASHTO M252, Type S or SP.
• 12- through 30-inch (300 to 750 mm) pipe shall meet AASHTO M294, Type S or SP, or ASTM
F2306.
Joint Performance
Pipe shall be joined using a bell & spigot joint meeting the requirements of AASHTO M252, AASHTO
M294, or ASTM F2306. The joint shall be soil-tight and gaskets for diameters 12- through 30-inch (300-
750 mm), shall meet the requirements of ASTM F477. For diameters 4- through 10-inch, the joint shall be
soil-tight using an engaging dimple connection. Gaskets shall be installed by the pipe manufacturer and
covered with a removable, protective wrap to ensure the gasket is free from debris. A joint lubricant
available from the manufacturer shall be used on the gasket and bell during assembly.
Fittings
Fittings shall conform to AASHTO M252, AASHTO M294, or ASTM F2306. Bell and spigot connections
shall utilize a welded bell and valley or saddle gasket meeting the soil-tight joint performance
requirements of AASHTO M252, AASHTO M294, or ASTM F2306.
Material Properties
Material for pipe and fitting production shall be high density polyethylene conforming with the minimum
requirements of cell classification 424420C for 4- through 10-inch (100 to 250 mm) diameters, and
435400C for 12- through 30-inch (300 to 750 mm) diameters, as defined and described in the latest
version of ASTM D3350, except that carbon black content should not exceed 4%. The 12- through 30-
inch (300 to 750 mm) pipe material shall comply with the notched constant ligament-stress (NCLS) test as
specified in Sections 9.5 and 5.1 of AASHTO M294 and ASTM F2306, respectively.
Installation
Class 1 (compacted), Class 2 (minimum 90% SPD) or Class 3 (minimum 95% SPD) material. Maximum
fill heights depend on embedment material and compaction level; please refer to Technical Note 2.01.
Contact your local ADS representative or visit our website at www.adspipe.com for a copy of the latest
installation guidelines.
Build America, Buy America (BABA)

N-12 ST IB pipe (per AASHTO), manufactured in accordance with AASHTO M252, AASHTO M294 or
ASTM F2306, complies with the requirements in the Build America, Buy America (BABA) Act.
Pipe Dimensions
Pipe I.D. 4 6 8 10 12 15 18 24 30
in (mm) (100) (150) (200) (250) (300) (375) (450) (600) (750)
Pipe O.D.* 4.8 6.9 9.1 11.4 14.5 18 22 28 36
in (mm) (122) (175) (231) (290) (368) (457) (559) (711) (914)

N-12® WT IB PIPE (PER AASHTO) SPECIFICATION

Scope
This specification describes 4- through 60-inch (100 to 1500 mm) N-12 WT IB pipe (per AASHTO) for use
in gravity-flow land drainage applications.
Pipe Requirements
N-12 WT IB pipe (per AASHTO) shall have a smooth interior and annular exterior corrugations.
• 4- through 10-inch (100 to 250 mm) pipe shall meet AASHTO M252, Type S.
• 12- through 60-inch (300 to 1500 mm) pipe shall meet AASHTO M294, Type S or ASTM F2306.
Joint Performance
Pipe shall be joined using a bell & spigot joint meeting the requirements of AASHTO M252, AASHTO
M294, or ASTM F2306. The joint shall be watertight according to the requirements of ASTM D3212.
Gaskets shall meet the requirements of ASTM F477. Gaskets shall be installed by the pipe manufacturer
and covered with a removable, protective wrap to ensure the gasket is free from debris. A joint lubricant
available from the manufacturer shall be used on the gasket and bell during assembly. 12- through 60-
inch (300 to 1500 mm) diameters shall have an exterior bell wrap installed by the manufacturer.
Fittings
Fittings shall conform to AASHTO M252, AASHTO M294, or ASTM F2306. Bell and spigot connections
shall utilize a welded bell and valley or saddle gasket meeting the watertight joint performance
requirements of AASHTO M252, AASHTO M294, or ASTM F2306.

Material Properties
Material for pipe and fitting production shall be high-density polyethylene conforming with the minimum
inch (300 to 1500 mm) pipe material shall comply with the notched constant ligament-stress (NCLS) test
as specified in Sections 9.5 and 5.1 of AASHTO M294 and ASTM F2306 respectively.
Installation
shall be one foot. (0.3 m) and for 60-inch (1500 mm) diameter the minimum cover shall be 2 ft. (0.6 m) in
single run applications. Backfill for minimum cover situations shall consist of Class 1 (compacted), Class
2 (minimum 90% SPD) or Class 3 (minimum 95%) material. Maximum fill heights depend on embedment
material and compaction level; please refer to Technical Note 2.01. Contact your local ADS
representative or visit our website at
www.adspipe.com for a copy of the latest installation guidelines.

N-12 WT IB pipe (per AASHTO), manufactured in accordance with AASHTO M252, AASHTO M294 or
Pipe Dimensions
Pipe I.D. 4 6 8 10 12 15 18 24 30 36 42 48 60
in (mm) (100) (150) (200) (250) (300) (375) (450) (600) (750) (900) (1050) (1200) (1500)
Pipe O.D.* 4.8 6.9 9.1 11.4 14.5 18 22 28 36 42 48 54 67
in (mm) (122) (175) (231) (290) (368) (457) (559) (711) (914) (1067) (1219) (1372) (1702)
values

N-12® MEGA GREENTM ST IB PIPE SPECIFICATION

Scope
This specification describes 4- through 30-inch (100 to 750 mm) N-12 MEGA GREENTM ST IB pipe for
Pipe Requirements
N-12 MEGA GREEN ST IB pipe shall have a smooth interior and annular exterior corrugations.
Joint Performance
Pipe shall be joined using a bell & spigot joint meeting ASTM F2648. The joint shall be soil-tight and
gaskets for diameters 12- through 30-inch (300-750 mm), shall meet the requirements of ASTM F477. For
diameters 4- through 10-inch, the joint shall be soil-tight using an engaging dimple connection. Gaskets
shall be installed by the pipe manufacturer and covered with a removable, protective wrap to ensure the
gasket is free from debris. A joint lubricant available from the manufacturer shall be used on the gasket
and bell during assembly.
Fittings
saddle gasket meeting the soil-tight joint performance requirements of ASTM F2306.
Material Properties
Installation
Class 1 (compacted) or Class 2 (minimum 90% SPD) material. Maximum fill heights depend on
embedment material and compaction level; please refer to Technical Note 2.02. Contact your local ADS
representative or visit our website at www.adspipe.com for a copy of the latest installation guidelines.
Pipe Dimensions
Pipe I.D. 4 6 8 10 12 15 18 24 30
in (mm) (100) (150) (200) (250) (300) (375) (450) (600) (750)
Pipe O.D.* 4.8 6.9 9.1 11.4 14.5 18 22 28 36
in (mm) (122) (175) (231) (290) (368) (457) (559) (711) (914)

N-12® MEGA GREENTM WT IB PIPE SPECIFICATION

Scope
This specification describes 4- through 60-inch (100 to 1500 mm) N-12 MEGA GREENTM WT IB pipe for
Pipe Requirements
N-12 MEGA GREEN WT IB pipe shall have a smooth interior and annular exterior corrugations.
Joint Performance
Pipe shall be joined using a bell & spigot joint meeting ASTM F2648. The joint shall be watertight
according to the requirements of ASTM D3212. Gaskets shall meet the requirements of ASTM F477.
Gaskets shall be installed by the pipe manufacturer and covered with a removable, protective wrap to
ensure the gasket is free from debris. A joint lubricant available from the manufacturer shall be used on
the gasket and bell during assembly. 12- through 60-inch (300 to 1500 mm) diameters shall have an
exterior bell wrap installed by the manufacturer.
Fittings
saddle gasket meeting the watertight joint performance requirements of ASTM F2306.

Material Properties
Installation
Pipe Dimensions
42 48 60
Pipe I.D. 4 6 8 10 12 15 18 24 30 36
(1050 (1200 (1500
in (mm) (100) (150) (200) (250) (300) (375) (450) (600) (750) (900)
) ) )
42 48 54 67
Pipe O.D.* 4.8 6.9 9.1 11.4 14.5 18 22 28 36
(1067 (1219 (1372 (1702
in (mm) (122) (175) (231) (290) (368) (457) (559) (711) (914)
) ) ) )
values

N-12® WT SERIES 35 PIPE SPECIFICATION

Scope
This specification describes 4- through 24-inch (100 to 600 mm) N-12 WT Series 35 pipe for use in
gravity-flow land drainage applications.
Pipe Requirements
N-12 WT Series 35 pipe shall have a smooth interior and annular exterior corrugations.
Joint Performance
Pipe shall be joined with the N-12 WT Series 35 joint meeting the requirements of AASHTO M252,
AASHTO M294 or ASTM F2306. The joint shall be watertight according to the requirements of ASTM
D3212. Gaskets shall meet the requirements of ASTM F477. Gaskets shall be installed by the pipe
manufacturer and covered with a removable, protective wrap to ensure the gasket is free from debris. A
joint lubricant available from the manufacturer shall be used on the gasket and bell during assembly.
Bells shall be bell-bell couplers manufactured from PVC. Bell-bell couplers shall be installed on one side
by the manufacturer.
Fittings
Fittings shall conform to AASHTO M252, AASHTO M294, or ASTM F2306. Joint connections shall utilize
a PVC bell-bell coupler and valley gasket meeting the watertight joint performance requirements of
AASHTO M252, AASHTO M294, or ASTM F2306.
Material Properties
inch (300 to 600 mm) pipe material shall comply with the notched constant ligament-stress (NCLS) test as
specified in Sections 9.5 and 5.1 of AASHTO M294 and ASTM F2306 respectively.
Bells shall be manufactured from PVC pipe stock, utilizing a thermo-molding process to reform the pipe
stock to the specified coupler. The pipe stock used to manufacture the bell-bell coupler shall meet the
performance requirements for fabricated fittings as specified in ASTM D3034.
Installation
Class 1 (compacted), Class 2 (minimum 90% SPD), or Class 3 (minimum 95%) material. Maximum fill
heights depend on embedment material and compaction level; please refer to Technical Note 2.01.
Contact your local ADS representative or visit our website at www.adspipe.com for a copy of the latest

N-12 WT Series 35 pipe, manufactured in accordance with AASHTO M252, AASHTO M294 or
Pipe Dimensions
Pipe I.D. 4 6 8 10 12 15 18 24
in (mm) (100) (150) (200) (250) (300) (375) (450) (600)
Pipe O.D.* 4.8 6.9 9.1 11.4 14.5 18 22 28
in (mm) (122) (175) (231) (290) (368) (457) (559) (711)
values

N-12® PLAIN END PIPE (PER ASTM F2648) SPECIFICATION

Scope
This specification describes 4- through 60-inch (100 to 1500 mm) N-12 plain end pipe (per ASTM F2648)
for use in gravity-flow land drainage applications.
Pipe Requirements
N-12 plain end pipe (per ASTM F2648) shall have a smooth interior and annular exterior corrugations.
Joint Performance
Pipe shall be joined with coupling bands covering at least two full corrugations on each end of the pipe.
Standard connections shall meet or exceed the soil-tight requirements of ASTM F2648.
Gasketed connections shall incorporate a closed-cell synthetic expanded rubber gasket meeting the
requirements of ASTM D1056 Grade 2A2. Gaskets, when applicable, shall be installed by the pipe
manufacturer.
Fittings
Fittings shall conform to ASTM F2306.
Material Properties
Installation
Pipe Dimensions
Pipe I.D. 4 6 8 10 12 15 18 24 30 36 42 48 60
in (mm) (100) (150) (200) (250) (300) (375) (450) (600) (750) (900) (1050) (1200) (1500)
Pipe
4.8 6.9 9.1 11.4 14.5 18 22 28 36 42 48 54 67
O.D.*
(122) (175) (231) (290) (368) (457) (559) (711) (914) (1067) (1219) (1372) (1702)
in (mm)
values

N-12® PLAIN END PIPE (PER AASHTO) SPECIFICATION

Scope
This specification describes 4- through 60-inch (100 to 1500 mm) N-12 plain end pipe (per AASHTO) for
Pipe Requirements
N-12 plain end pipe (per AASHTO) shall have a smooth interior and annular exterior corrugations.
• 4- through 10-inch (100 to 250 mm) pipe shall meet AASHTO M252, Type S or SP.
• 12- through 60-inch (300 to 1500 mm) pipe shall meet AASHTO M294, Type S or SP, or ASTM
F2306.
Joint Performance
Standard connections shall meet or exceed the soil-tight requirements of AASHTO M252, AASHTO
M294, or ASTM F2306.
manufacturer.
Fittings
Fittings shall conform to AASHTO M252, AASHTO M294, or ASTM F2306.
Material Properties
Material for pipe and fitting production shall be high density polyethylene conforming with the minimum
inch (300 to 1500mm) pipe material shall comply with the notched constant ligament-stress (NCLS) test
as specified in Sections 9.5 and 5.1 of AASHTO M294 and ASTM F2306 respectively.
Installation
2 (minimum 90% SPD) or Class 3 (minimum 95%) material. Maximum fill heights depend on embedment

N-12 Plain End pipe (per AASHTO), manufactured in accordance with AASHTO M252, AASHTO M294 or
Pipe Dimensions
Pipe I.D. 4 6 8 10 12 15 18 24 30 36 42 48 60
in (mm) (100) (150) (200) (250) (300) (375) (450) (600) (750) (900) (1050) (1200) (1500)
Pipe
4.8 6.9 9.1 11.4 14.5 18 22 28 36 42 48 54 67
O.D.*
(122) (175) (231) (290) (368) (457) (559) (711) (914) (1067) (1219) (1372) (1702)
in (mm)
values

N-12® MEGA GREEN PLAIN END PIPE SPECIFICATION

Scope
This specification describes 4- through 60-inch (100 to 1500 mm) N-12 MEGA GREENTM plain end pipe
for use in gravity-flow land drainage applications.
Pipe Requirements
N-12 MEGA GREEN plain end pipe shall have a smooth interior and annular exterior corrugations.
Joint Performance
Standard connections shall meet or exceed the soil-tight requirements of ASTM F2648.
manufacturer.
Fittings
Material Properties
Installation
Pipe Dimensions
Pipe I.D. 4 6 8 10 12 15 18 24 30 36 42 48 60
in (mm) (100) (150) (200) (250) (300) (375) (450) (600) (750) (900) (1050) (1200) (1500)
Pipe
4.8 6.9 9.1 11.4 14.5 18 22 28 36 42 48 54 67
O.D.*
(122) (175) (231) (290) (368) (457) (559) (711) (914) (1067) (1219) (1372) (1702)
in (mm)
values

LANDMAX® RETENTION/DETENTION PIPE SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

Scope
This specification describes LandMax Retention/Detention Pipe Systems for use in non-pressure gravity-
flow storm water collection systems utilizing a continuous outfall structure.
Pipe Requirements
Retention/Detention systems may utilize any of the various pipe products below:
• N-12® ST IB pipe (per AASHTO) shall meet AASHTO M294, Type S or ASTM F2306
• N-12 ST IB pipe (per ASTM F2648) shall meet ASTM F2648
• N-12 MEGA GREENTM ST IB shall meet ASTM F2648
• N-12 WT IB pipe (per AASHTO) shall meet AASHTO M294, Type S or ASTM F2306
• N-12 WT IB pipe (per ASTM F2648) shall meet ASTM F2648
• N-12 MEGA GREENTM WT IB shall meet ASTM F2648
All products shall have a smooth interior and annular exterior corrugations. All ST IB pipe products are
available as perforated or non-perforated. WT IB pipe products are only available as non-perforated.
Product-specific pipe specifications are available in the Drainage Handbook Section 1 Specifications.
Joint Performance
Plain End/Soil-tight (ST IB)
ST IB pipe shall be joined using a bell & spigot joint. The bell & spigot joint shall meet the soil-tight
requirements of ASTM F2306 and gaskets shall meet the requirements of ASTM F477.
Plain End pipe & fittings connections shall be joined with coupling bands covering at least two full
corrugations on each end of the pipe. Gasketed soil-tight coupling band connections shall incorporate a
closed-cell synthetic expanded rubber gasket meeting the requirements of ASTM D1056 Grade 2A2.
Gaskets, when applicable, shall be installed by the pipe manufacturer.
Watertight (WT IB):
WT IB pipe shall be joined using a bell & spigot joint. The joint shall be watertight according to the
requirements of ASTM D3212. Gaskets shall meet the requirements of ASTM F477. 12- through 60-inch
(300 to 1500 mm) diameters shall have an exterior bell wrap installed by the manufacturer.
Pipe & fitting connections shall be with a bell and spigot connection utilizing a welded bell and valley or
saddle gasket. The joint shall meet the watertight requirements of ASTM D3212 and gaskets shall meet
the requirements of ASTM F477. Detention systems are subject to greater leakage than typical single run
storm sewer application and therefore are not appropriate for applications requiring long-term fluid
containment or hydrostatic pressure. For additional details refer to Technical Note 7.01 Rainwater
Harvesting with HDPE Cisterns.
Fittings
Fittings shall conform to ASTM F2306 and meet joint performance requirements indicated above for fitting
connections. Custom fittings are available and may require special installation criterion.
Installation
the exception that minimum cover in non-traffic areas for 12- through 60-inch (300 to 1500mm) diameters
shall be one foot (0.3m). Minimum cover in trafficked areas for 12- through 36-inch (300 to 900mm)
diameters shall be one foot (0.3m) and for 42- through 60-inch (1050 to 1500mm) diameters, the
minimum cover shall be two feet (0.6m). Backfill shall consist of Class 1 (compacted) or Class 2
(minimum 90% SPD) material, with the exception that 60-inch fittings shall use Class 1 (compacted)
material only. Minimum cover heights do not account for pipe buoyancy. Refer to ADS Technical Note
5.05 HDPE Pipe Flotation for buoyancy design considerations. Maximum cover over system using
standard backfill is 8 feet (2.4m); contact a representative when maximum fill height may be exceeded.

Additional installation requirements are provided in the Drainage Handbook Section 6

Retention/Detention.
TYPICAL RETENTION/DETENTION CROSS SECTION
H H H
(GRASS AREA) (FLEX PVMT.) (RIGID PVMT.)
FILTER FABRIC UNDISTURBED

(WHERE REQUIRED EARTH
BY ENGINEER) X
* CLASS I OR II MATERIAL
* BEDDING (CLASS I OR II MATERIAL)
PLACED AND COMPACTED IN C SUITABLE = 4" MIN. FOR 12" - 24" PIPE
ACCORDANCE WITH FOUNDATION = 6" MIN. FOR 30" - 60" PIPE
ASTM D2321 IN PIPE ZONE
MINIMUM H (GRASS) = 12" FOR 12" THROUGH 60" HDPE PIPE * CLASS I BACKFILL REQUIRED AROUND 60" DIAMETER FITTINGS.
MINIMUM H (FLEX PVMT), H (RIGID PVMT) = 12" FOR UP TO AND INCLUDING 36" HDPE PIPE
= 24" FOR 42" THROUGH 60" HDPE PIPE
MAXIMUM FILL HEIGHT LIMITED TO 8-FT OVER FITTINGS FOR STANDARD INSTALLATIONS. CONTACT
REPRESENTATIVE WHEN MAXIMUM FILL HEIGHTS EXCEED 8-FT FOR INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS.
ADDITIONAL REFERENCES
Drainage Handbook Section 6 Retention/Detention
Technical Note 6.01 Retention/Detention System Maintenance
Technical Note 7.01 Rainwater Harvesting with HDPE Pipe
Standard Detail 701 Retention-Detention System (Plan View)
Standard Detail 702 Retention-Detention System (Cross-Section)
Standard Detail 703 Retention-Detention System (Riser & Cleanout)
Standard Detail 704 Flowable Fill Installation (Nyloplast Riser)
All references are available for download at www.adspipe.com

HP STORM 12”- 60” PIPE SPECIFICATION

Scope
This specification describes 12- through 60-inch (300 to 1500 mm) HP Storm pipe for use in gravity-flow
storm drainage applications.
Pipe Requirements
HP Storm pipe shall have a smooth interior and annular exterior corrugations.
• 12- through 60-inch (300 to 1500 mm) pipe shall meet ASTM F2881 or AASHTO M330
• Manning’s “n” value for use in design shall be 0.012
Joint Performance
Pipe shall be joined using a bell & spigot joint meeting the requirements of ASTM F2881 or AASHTO
M330. The joint shall be watertight according to the requirements of ASTM D3212. Gaskets shall meet
the requirements of ASTM F477. Gasket shall be installed by the pipe manufacturer and covered with a
removable, protective wrap to ensure the gasket is free from debris. A joint lubricant available from the
manufacturer shall be used on the gasket and bell during assembly. 12- through 60-inch (300 to 1500
mm) diameters shall have an exterior bell wrap installed by the manufacturer.
Fittings
Fittings shall conform to ASTM F2881 or AASHTO M330. Bell and spigot connections shall utilize a
welded or integral bell and valley or inline gaskets meeting the watertight joint performance requirements
of ASTM D3212.

with ASTM F1417 or ASTM F2487. Appropriate safety precautions must be used when field-testing any
pipe material. Contact the manufacturer for recommended leakage rates.
Material Properties
Polypropylene compound for pipe and fitting production shall be impact modified copolymer meeting the
material requirements of ASTM F2881, Section 5 and AASHTO M330, Section 6.1.
Installation
the exception that minimum cover in traffic areas for 12- through 48-inch (300 to 1200 mm) diameters
2 (minimum 90% SPD), or Class 3 (minimum 95%) material. Maximum fill heights depend on embedment

HP Storm pipe (per AASHTO), manufactured in accordance with ASTM F2881 or AASHTO M330,
complies with the requirements in the Build America, Buy America (BABA) Act.
Pipe Dimensions
Nominal Pipe I.D. 12 15 18 24 30 36 42 48 60
in (mm) (300) (375) (450) (600) (750) (900) (1050) (1200) (1500)
Average Pipe I.D. 12.2 15.1 18.2 24.1 30.2 36.0 42.0 47.9 59.9
in (mm) (310) (384) (462) (612) (767) (914) (1067) (1217) (1521)
Average Pipe O.D. 14.5 17.7 21.4 28.0 35.5 41.5 47.4 54.1 67.1
in (mm) (368) (450) (544) (711) (902) (1054) (1204) (1374) (1704)
Minimum Pipe Stiffness * 75 60 56 50 46 40 35 35 30
@ 5% Deflection #/in./in. (kN/m2) (517) (414) (386) (345) (317) (276) (241) (241) (207)
*Minimum pipe stiffness values listed; contact a representative for average values.

SANITITE® HP 12”- 60” PIPE SPECIFICATION

Scope
This specification describes 12- through 60-inch (300 to 1500 mm) SaniTite HP pipe for use in gravity-
flow sanitary sewer applications.
Pipe Requirements
12”-30” (300 to 750mm) SaniTite HP dual wall pipe shall have a smooth interior and annular exterior
corrugations; 30”-60” (750 to 1500mm) SaniTite HP triple wall pipe shall have a smooth interior and
exterior surfaces with annular inner corrugations.
• 12- through 30-inch (300 to 750 mm) dual wall pipe shall meet ASTM F2764
• 30- through 60-inch (750 to 1500 mm) triple wall pipe shall meet ASTM F2764
• 12- through 60-inch (300 to 1500 mm) pipe shall have a minimum pipe stiffness of 46 pii when
tested in accordance with ASTM D2412.
Joint Performance
Pipe shall be joined using a bell and spigot joint meeting the requirements of ASTM F2764. The joint
shall be watertight according to the requirements of ASTM D3212, with the addition of a 15 psi pressure
requirement. Gaskets shall meet the requirements of ASTM F477. Gaskets shall be installed by the pipe
manufacturer and covered with a removable, protective wrap to ensure the gaskets are free from debris.
A joint lubricant available from the manufacturer shall be used on the gasket and bell during assembly.
12- through 60-inch (300 to 1500 mm) diameters shall have a reinforced bell with a polymer composite
band installed by the manufacturer.
Fittings
Fittings shall conform to ASTM F2764. Bell and spigot connections shall utilize a welded or integral bell
and valley or inline gaskets meeting the watertight joint performance requirements of ASTM D3212.

Material Properties
Polypropylene compound for pipe and fitting production shall be an impact modified copolymer meeting
the material requirements of ASTM F2764.
Installation
the exception that minimum cover in traffic areas for 12- through 48-inch (300 to 1200 mm) diameters
shall be one foot (0.3 m) and for 60-inch (1500mm) diameter the minimum cover shall be 2-ft (0.6m) in

SaniTite HP pipe, manufactured in accordance with ASTM F2764, complies with the requirements in the
Build America, Buy America (BABA) Act.
Pipe Dimensions
Nominal Pipe I.D. 12 15 18 24 30 36 42 48 60
in (mm) (300) (375) (450) (600) (750) (900) (1050) (1200) (1500)
Average Pipe I.D. 12.1 14.9 18.0 24.1 30.1 35.7 41.8 47.3 59.3
in (mm) (307) (378) (457) (612) (765) (907) (1062) (1201) (1506)
Average Pipe O.D. 14.5 17.6 21.2 28.0 35.5 41.5 47.4 54.1 67.1
in (mm) (368) (447) (538) (711) (902) (1054) (1199) (1374) (1705)
*OD values listed above are NOT for manhole connector sizing. See ADS Standard Detail 205A-F for the recommended manhole connector based on product and diameter.

N-12® LOW HEAD PIPE SPECIFICATION

Scope
This specification describes 24- through 60-inch (600 to 1500 mm) N-12 Low Head pipe for use in low
head / low pressure applications.
Pipe Requirements
N-12 Low Head pipe shall have a smooth interior and annular exterior corrugations.
• 24- through 60-inch (600 to 1500 mm) pipe shall meet AASHTO M294, Type S or ASTM F2306
with the modifications listed herein.
• Where low head applications sustain continuous pressure, the sustained pressure shall not
exceed 5psi and the surge pressure shall not exceed 10 psi.
Joint Performance
Pipe shall be joined using a bell and spigot joint meeting the requirements of AASHTO M294 or ASTM
F2306. The joint shall be watertight according to the requirements of ASTM D3212. Gaskets shall meet
the requirements of ASTM F477. Gaskets shall be installed by the pipe manufacturer and covered with a
removable, protective wrap to ensure the gaskets are free from debris. A joint lubricant available from the
manufacturer shall be used on the gasket and bell during assembly. 12- through 60-inch (300 to 1500
mm) diameters shall have a reinforced bell with a polymer composite band installed by the manufacturer.
Fittings
Fittings shall conform to AASHTO M294 or ASTM F2306. Bell & spigot connections shall utilize a welded or
integral bell & inline, valley or saddle gaskets meeting watertight joint performance requirements of ASTM
D3212.

Material Properties
requirements of cell classification 435400C for the corrugated exterior profile, and 445464C, for the
interior liner as defined and described in the latest version of ASTM D3350, except that carbon black
content should not exceed 4%. The 24- through 60-inch (600 to 1500mm) pipe material shall comply with
the notched constant ligament-stress (NCLS) test as specified in Sections 9.4 and 5.1 of AASHTO M294
and ASTM F2306 respectively. The interior liner resin shall have a material designation code of
PE3408/PE3608 by the Plastic Pipe Institute and a Hydrostatic Design Basis of 1600 psi.
Installation
the exceptions that minimum cover in traffic areas for 24- through 48-inch (600 to 1200mm) diameters
shall be one foot (0.3m) and for 60-inch (1500mm) diameter the minimum cover shall be 2-feet (0.6m) in
website at www.adspipe.com for a copy of the installation guidelines.

N-12 Low Head pipe, manufactured in accordance with AASHTO M294 or ASTM F2306, complies with
the requirements in the Build America, Buy America (BABA) Act.

Pipe Dimensions
Pipe I.D. 24 30 36 42 48 60
in (mm) (600) (750) (900) (1050) (1200) (1500)
Pipe O.D.* 27.8 36 42 48 54 67
in (mm) (719) (914) (1067) (1219) (1372) (1702)
Minimum Pipe Stiffness 28 28 22 20 18 14
@ 5% Deflection #/in./in. (kN/m2) (195) (195) (150) (140) (125) (95)

SINGLE WALL PIPE SPECIFICATION

Scope
This specification describes 3- through 15-inch (75 to 375 mm) single wall high density corrugated
polyethylene pipe for use in gravity-flow land drainage applications.
Pipe Requirements
Single wall high density corrugated polyethylene pipe shall have annular interior and exterior
corrugations.
Joint Performance
Joints for 3- to 15- inch (75 – 375 mm) shall be made with split or snap couplings. Standard connections
shall meet the requirements of the ASTM F667. Gasketed connections shall incorporate a closed-cell
synthetic expanded rubber gasket meeting the requirements of ASTM D1056 Grade 2A2. Gaskets, when
applicable, shall be installed by the pipe manufacturer.
Fittings
Material Properties
Pipe and fitting material shall be high density polyethylene conforming with the minimum requirements of
cell classification 323410C or 333410C as defined and described in the latest version of ASTM D3350.
Installation
shall be one foot (0.3 m). Maximum fill heights depend on embedment material and compaction level;
please refer to Technical Note 2.03. Contact your local ADS representative or visit our website at
www.adspipe.com for a copy of the installation guidelines.
Pipe Dimensions
Pipe I.D. 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 15
in (mm) (75) (100) (125) (150) (200) (250) (300) (375)
Pipe O.D.* 3.6 4.6 5.8 7.0 9.5 12.0 14.5 18.0
in (mm) (91) (117) (147) (178) (241) (305) (368) (457)
values

SINGLE WALL HEAVY DUTY PIPE SPECIFICATION

Scope
polyethylene heavy duty pipe for use in gravity-flow land drainage applications.
Pipe Requirements
Single wall high density corrugated polyethylene heavy duty pipe shall have annular interior and exterior
corrugations.
Joint Performance
Joints for 3- to 15- inch (75 – 375 mm) shall be made with split or snap couplings. Standard connections
shall meet the requirements of the ASTM F667. Gasketed connections shall incorporate a closed-cell
synthetic expanded rubber gasket meeting the requirements of ASTM D1056 Grade 2A2. Gaskets, when
applicable, shall be installed by the pipe manufacturer.
Fittings
Material Properties
Pipe and fitting material shall be high density polyethylene conforming with the minimum requirements of
cell classification 323410C or 333410C as defined and described in the latest version of ASTM D3350.
Installation
www.adspipe.com for a copy of the installation guidelines.
Pipe Dimensions
3 4 5 6 8 10 12 15
Pipe I.D.
(75) (10 (12 (15 (20 (25 (30 (37
in (mm)
0) 5) 0) 0) 0) 0) 5)
Pipe 3.6 4.6 5.8 7.0 9.5 12.0 14.5 18.0
O.D.* (91) (11 (14 (17 (24 (30 (36 (45
in (mm) 7) 7) 8) 1) 5) 8) 7)
values

SINGLE WALL HIGHWAY PIPE SPECIFICATION

Scope
polyethylene highway pipe, for use in gravity-flow land drainage applications.
Pipe Requirements
Single wall high density corrugated polyethylene highway pipe shall have annular interior and exterior
corrugations.
• 3- through 10-inch (75 to 250 mm) pipe shall meet AASHTO M252, Type C or CP.
• 12- through 15-inch (300 to 375 mm) pipe shall meet AASHTO M294, Type C or CP.
Joint Performance
Joints for 3- to 15- inch (75 – 375 mm) shall be made with split or snap couplings. Standard connection
shall meet the soil-tightness requirements of AASHTO M252 or M294. Gasketed connections shall
incorporate a closed-cell synthetic expanded rubber gasket meeting the requirements of ASTM D1056
Grade 2A2. Gaskets, when applicable, shall be installed by the pipe manufacturer.
Fittings
Fittings shall conform to AASHTO M252 or AASHTO M294.
Material Properties
Pipe and fittings shall be made of polyethylene compounds that comply with the cell classification
424420C for 4- through 10-inch (100 to 250 mm) diameters, or 435400C for 12- through 15-inch (300 to
375 mm) diameters, as defined and described in ASTM D3350, except that carbon black content should
not exceed 4%. The 12- through 15-inch (300 to 375 mm) pipe material shall comply with the notched
constant ligament-stress (NCLS) test as specified in Sections 9.5 of AASHTO M294.
Installation
Installation shall be in accordance with ASTM D2321 and ADS recommended installation guidelines with

Single Wall Highway pipe, manufactured in accordance with AASHTO M252 or AASHTO M294, complies
with the requirements in the Build America, Buy America (BABA) Act.
Pipe Dimensions
Pipe I.D. 3 4 5 6 8 10 12 15
in (mm) (75) (100) (125) (150) (200) (250) (300) (375)
Pipe O.D.* 3.6 4.6 5.8 7.0 9.5 12.0 14.5 18.0
in (mm) (91) (117) (147) (178) (241) (305) (368) (457)
values

GRAIN-AIRE® PIPE SPECIFICATION

Scope
This specification describes 18- through 36-inch (450 to 900 mm) Grain-Aire pipe for use in metering air
and providing uniform flow air in flat storage structures.
Pipe Requirements
Grain-Aire pipe shall have a smooth interior and annular exterior corrugations covered with a
polypropylene protective screen to provide unrestricted air flow.
Joint Performance
Pipe shall be joined with split or snap couplers covering at least two full corrugations on each end of the
pipe.
Material Properties
Pipe and fittings shall be high density polyethylene conforming with the minimum requirements of cell
classification 424400C as defined and described in the latest version of ASTM D3350.
Perforations
Nominal Diameter Corrugations Per Foot Number of Holes Per Foot Min. Hole Diameter Open Area Per Foot
18” (450 mm) 4.7 24 5/8" (16 mm) 7.36
24" (600 mm) 4.7 24 5/8" (16 mm) 7.36
30" (750 mm) 2.9 32 1/2" (13 mm) 6.28
36" (900 mm) 2.4 32 1/2" (13 mm) 6.28
Protective Screen
Material Polypropylene Test Method
Bursting Strength (lbs/in2) 484 ASTM D3786
Weight (oz/yd2) 5.3 ASTM D3776
% Open Area 25 ASTM D475
Tensile Strength (lbs) 425 (Wrap)
ASTM D5034
(Grab Test) 273 (Fill)

ADVANEDGE® PIPE SPECIFICATION

Scope
This specification describes 12-inch (300 mm) AdvanEdge oblong corrugated pipe for use in subsurface
drainage applications.
Product Requirements
AdvanEdge shall have annular interior and exterior corrugations.
• 12-inch (300 mm) shall meet ASTM D7001.
AdvanEdge outside dimensions shall be 1.5” (38 mm) thick x 12.5” (318 mm) wide. AdvanEdge shall
have internal bracing adjoining each long wall to prevent crushing under typical loading. AdvanEdge shall
be made available with or without an external geotextile wrap.
When geotextile is provided, product shall meet the requirements of Class B Geocomposite as defined in
ASTM D7001.
Material Properties
All pipe and fittings shall be made of polyethylene with a minimum cell classification of 424420C as
defined and described in the latest version of ASTM D3350.
Perforations
Nominal Pipe Size, in (mm) 12 (300)
Slot Length (avg.), in (mm) 1.125 (29)
Slot Width (avg.), in (mm) 0.125 (3.2)
Water Inlet Area (approx..), In2/ft 15
Filter Fabric
Fabric Properties Test Method Minimum Average Roll Values
Grab Tensile Strength (lbs) – weakest principle
direction ASTM D4632 112
Grab Elongation (%) – weakest principle direction ASTM D4632 50
Trapezoidal Tear (lbs) – weakest principle direction ASTM D4533 40
Puncture (lbs) ASTM D4833 40
Permittivity (sec-1) ASTM D4491 0.5
AOS (U.S. Sieve Size) ASTM D4751 60
U.V. Resistance ASTM D4355 50

SB2® PIPE SPECIFICATION

Scope
This specification describes SB2 pipe available in 8- and 10-inch (200 and 250 mm) diameters for use in
on-site waste disposal applications.
Pipe Requirements
SB2 pipe shall have a corrugated interior and corrugated exterior a pre-installed septic fabric.
• 8- and 10-inch (200 and 250 mm) pipe shall meet the requirements of ASTM F667.
• There shall be two ½ inch (12.7 mm) holes 120 degrees apart on the length of the pipe.
• The 8-inch (200 mm) and 10-inch (250mm) pipe shall have 1.0 square inches per foot of open
area.
Joint Performance
Pipe shall be joined with internal or external snap couplers covering at least two full corrugations on each
end of the pipe.
Fittings
Material Properties
Pipe material shall be high density polyethylene conforming with the minimum requirements of cell
classification 424410C as defined and described in the latest version of ASTM D3350; or ASTM D1248
Type III, Class C, Category 4, Grade P33.
Filter Fabric Properties

Material Nylon (100%)
Fabric Spun Bond
Fiber Size (denier per filament) 5
Weight (ounces per yd2, ASTM D3776) 0.85
Burst Strength (pounds per in2, ASTM D3786) 28
Air Permeability (CFM per ft2, ASTM D737) 650
Equivalent Opening Size (Army Corps of Engineers, W 02215) 50
Water Flow Rate (gal/min/ft2, ASTM D4491) 163
Melt Temperature (ASTM D3786) 218˚ C (425˚ F)
Installation
Installation shall be in accordance with ADS recommended installation instructions and those issued by a
local health department. For leachfield applications, installation shall be in accordance with ASTM F481
and as regulated by regional, state, and local agencies. Proper authorization for specific applications and
designs should be obtained prior to installation to ensure suitability in certain locales. Contact your local
ADS representative or visit our website at www.adspipe.com for a copy of the installation guidelines.

ADS 3000 TRIPLEWALL® PIPE SPECIFICATION

Scope
This specification describes 4-inch (100 mm) ADS 3000 TripleWall pipe for use in gravity-flow drainage
and leach field applications.
Pipe Requirements
ADS 3000 TripleWall pipe shall have a smooth interior and exterior.
• 4-inch (100 mm) pipe shall meet the requirements of ASTM F810.
• Manning's "n" value for use in design shall not be less than 0.009.
Joint Performance
Pipe joints shall be bell-and-spigot. Bell ends shall be integrally formed on the pipe at one end to form a
soil-tight connection.
Material Properties
Pipe material shall be high-density polyethylene conforming with the minimum requirements of cell
classifications 424410C or E as defined and described in the latest version of ASTM D3350. The material
formulation shall include recycled polyethylene.
Installation
For gravity-flow drainage applications, installation shall be in accordance with ASTM D2321 and ADS
recommended installation guidelines with the exception that minimum cover in traffic areas shall be one
foot (0.3 m). For leachfield applications, installation shall be in accordance with ASTM F481 and as
regulated by regional, state, and local agencies. Proper authorization for specific applications and
White Skin
Black Core Bell End Spigot
I.D.
O.D.
Perforation Options*
Nominal Pipe I.D. 4
in (mm) (100)
Average Pipe I.D. 3.875
in (mm) (98.5)
Average Pipe O.D. 4.215
in (mm) (107)
*Only available in a limited area. Check with your
sales representative for availability.
**Perforation sizes are based on customer
requirements and availability by region.
**All diameters available with or without perforations

SMOOTHWALL SEWER & DRAIN PIPE SPECIFICATIONS

Scope
This specification describes Smoothwall Sewer & Drain pipe in 3- and 4-inch (75 and 100 mm) diameters
for use in gravity flow drainage and leach field applications.
Pipe Requirements
Smoothwall Sewer & Drain pipe shall have a smooth interior and exterior.
• 3- and 4-inch (75 and 100 mm) pipe shall meet the requirements of ASTM F810.
• Manning's "n" value for use in design shall not be less than 0.009.
Joint Performance
Pipe joints shall be bell-and-spigot. Bell ends shall be integrally formed on the pipe at one end to form a
soil-tight connection.
Material Properties
Pipe material shall be high-density polyethylene conforming with the minimum requirements of cell
classifications 424410C or E as defined and described in the latest version of ASTM D3350. The material
formulation shall include recycled polyethylene.
Installation
For gravity-flow drainage applications, installation shall be in accordance with ASTM D2321 and ADS
recommended installation guidelines with the exception that minimum cover in traffic areas shall be one
foot (0.3 m). For leachfield applications, installation shall be in accordance with ASTM F481 and as
regulated by regional, state, and local agencies. Proper authorization for specific applications and
ADS representative or visit our website at www.adspipe.com for a copy of the latest installation
guidelines.
White Skin
Black Core Bell End Spigot
I.D.
O.D.
Perforation Options**
Nominal Pipe I.D. 3 4
in (mm) (75) (100)
Average Pipe O.D. 3.250 4.215
in (mm) (83) (107)
SDR Rating* 38 38
Pipe Stiffness 19 11
pii (kPa) (131) (76)
*Check with a sales representative for availability by
region; other SDR rated pipe may be available.
**Perforation sizes are based on customer
requirements and availability by region.
***All diameters available with or without perforations

CHANNEL-FLOW® PIPE SPECIFICATIONS

Scope
This specification describes Channel-Flow pipe in 4-inch (100 mm) diameter for use in on-site waste
applications.
Pipe Requirements
Channel-Flow pipe shall have a corrugated interior and corrugated exterior.
• 4-inch (100 mm) pipe shall meet the requirements of ASTM F667 and SCS 606.
• Perforations shall be spaced every 4.2-inches (107 mm) on the length of the pipe.
Joint Performance
Pipe shall be joined with self-coupling stubs located at the ends of each pipe section.
Fittings
Material Properties
Installation
Installation shall be in accordance with ASTM F481 and those issued by the local health department.
*Check with sales representative for perforation option availability by region.

CHANNEL-MUCK PIPE SPECIFICATIONS

Scope
This specification describes Channel-Muck pipe in 4- through 6-inch (100 to 150mm) diameters for use in
agricultural drainage applications.
Pipe Requirements
Channel-Muck pipe shall have a corrugated interior and corrugated exterior.
• 4- through 6-inch (100 to 150mm) pipe shall meet the requirements of ASTM F667 and SCS 606.
• There shall be three perforations every 4.2-inch (107 mm) on the length of the pipe.
Joint Performance
Pipe shall be joined with self-coupling stubs located at the ends of each pipe section.
Fittings
Material Properties
Installation
Installation shall be in accordance with ADS recommended installation instructions and those issued by
regional, state or local agencies.
* Check with sales representative for perforation option availability by region.

DURASLOT® SLOTTED DRAIN SPECIFICATION

Scope
This specification describes 4- through 36-inch (100 to 900 mm) Duraslot slotted drain for use in surface
drain and conveyance applications.
Pipe Requirements
Duraslot pipe, as manufactured and distributed by ADS, Inc., shall have a smooth interior and annular
exterior corrugations with an aluminum slot grate frame mounted longitudinally along the length of the
pipe to accept the grate while maintaining the original pipe diameter.
The aluminum slot grate frame shall be manufactured from 0.063-inch (1.6 mm) tempered commercial
aluminum meeting the requirements of ASTM B209, consisting of two parallel plates separated by
spacers spanning the slot on 6-inch (150 mm) centers. The aluminum slot grate frame shall be coated
with a primer to protect the aluminum when installed in concrete. The grate shall be ½ - #13 galvanized
steel or ½ - #13 304 stainless steel per ASTM F1267. Alternatively, aluminum slot grate may be left open
top. The grate shall have diamond-shaped openings with a 52% open area and be ADA compliant. The
flange at the bottom of the aluminum slot grate frame shall be riveted to the pipe with a minimum of two
rivets per linear foot.
Fittings
Duraslot fittings shall be modified from fittings which conform to AASHTO M252, AASHTO M294 or
ASTM F2306.

Duraslot pipe, manufactured in accordance with AASHTO M252, AASHTO M294 or ASTM F2306,
complies with the requirements in the Build America, Buy America (BABA) Act.
Installation
Installation shall be in accordance with ADS recommended installation instructions. Contact your local
ADS representative or visit www.adspipe.com for a copy of the latest installation guidelines.

Duraslot Standard Dimensions
Nominal Pipe Diameter in (mm)

10” 12” 15” 18” 24” 30” 36”
4” (100) 6” (150) 8” (200)
(250) (300) (375) (450) (600) (750) (900)
L - Drain Grate
118.0 (2997) 116.0 (2946)
Length)
E - Pipe End
1.0 (25) 2.0 (51)
Length
4.75 5.25
H -.5” slot 2.75 (70) 3.0 (76) 3.0 (76) 3.0 (76) 3.5 (89) 3.75 (95) 4.0 (102) 5.0 (127)
(121) (133)
H – 6.0” slot 6.25 7.25 8.25 8.25
6.5 (165) 6.5 (165) 6.5 (165) 7.0 (178) 7.0 (178) 7.0 (178)
(159) (184) (210) (210)
O – Opening Width 1.25 (32) 1.75 (44) 1.75 (44) 1.75 (44) 1.75 (44) 1.75 (44) 1.75 (44) 1.75 (44) 1.75 (44) 1.75 (44)
S – Slot Width 1.75 (44) 2.25 (57) 2.25 (77) 2.25 (77) 2.25 (77) 2.25 (77) 2.25 (77) 2.25 (77) 2.25 (77) 2.25 (77)
W - Pipe Width with
0.34 (9) 0.46 (12) 0.61 (15) 0.73 (19) 1.15 (29) 1.30 (33) 1.57 (40) 1.86 (47) 2.55 (65) 2.85 (72)
Corrugations
Note: Custom slot heights available upon request. Production of custom slots will require approval by the Duraslot Project Engineer.
Signed shop drawings also required from interested party.
10.0’ (3.0 m) Nominal length
2.5” or 6” (65 or 150

mm) Nominal length

DURASLOT® XL SPECIFICATION
Scope
This specification describes 6- through 36-inch (150 to 900 mm) Duraslot XL pipe for use in surface
drain and conveyance applications.
Pipe Requirements
Duraslot XL pipe, as manufactured and distributed by ADS, Inc., shall have a smooth interior and annular
exterior corrugations with an aluminum slot grate frame mounted longitudinally along the length of the pipe
to accept the grate, while maintaining the original pipe diameter.
The aluminum slot grate frame shall be manufactured from 0.063” (1.6 mm) tempered commercial
aluminum meeting the requirements of ASTM B209, consisting of two parallel plates separated by
spacers spanning the slot width. The aluminum slot grate frame shall be coated with a primer to
protect the aluminum when installed in concrete. Grates furnished by ADS shall be made of ductile iron
with a 4.81-inch (122 mm) width and 19.69-inch (500 mm) length. The grate pattern, open area and
load rating will vary based on the chosen design. The flange at the bottom of the aluminum slot grate
frame shall be riveted to the pipe with a minimum of two rivets per linear foot.
Fittings
Duraslot XL fittings shall be modified from fittings which conform to AASHTO M252, AASHTO M294 or
ASTM F2306.
Installation
Installation shall be in accordance with ADS recommended installation instructions. Contact your
local ADS representative or visit www.adspipe.com for a copy of the latest installation guidelines.

Duraslot XL Standard Dimensions
Nominal Pipe Diameter in (mm)

6” (150) 8” (200) 10” (250) 12” (300) 15” (375) 18” (450) 24” (600) 30” (750) 36” (900)
L – Drain Grate Length 118.5 (3010)
4.75 5.25
H – 2.5” (62.5 mm) Slot 3.0 (76) 3.0 (76) 3.0 (76) 3.5 (89) 3.75 (95) 4.0 (102) 5.0 (127)
(121) (133)
H – 6.0” (160 mm) Slot 7.25 8.25 8.25
6.5 (165) 6.5 (165) 6.5 (165) 7.0 (178) 7.0 (178) 7.0 (178)
(184) (210) (210)
O – Opening Width 5.0 (127)
R – Slot Width 0.316 (8)
S – Slot Width 2.25 (57)
W – Pipe Width with
0.46 (12) 0.61 (15) 0.73 (19) 1.15 (29) 1.30 (33) 1.57 (40) 1.86 (47) 2.55 (65) 2.85 (72)
Corrugation
Note:
1. Custom slot heights available upon request. Production of custom slots will require approval by the Duraslot Project Engineer.
Signed shop drawings also required from interested party.
2. Other grate material options available upon request. Contact local ADS representative for availability of grate material
option.
2.5” or 6” (65 or 150

mm) Nominal length
Note: 2.5” (65 mm) Standard

Duraslot XL is available in 6" –
12" (150-300 mm) Ø pipe and 6”
(150 mm) Standard Duraslot XL
is available in 6” – 36” (150-900
mm) Ø pipe.

INJECTION MOLDED FITTING SPECIFICATION

Scope
This specification describes 4- through 12-inch (100 to 300 mm) Injection Molded Fittings for use in
joining gravity-flow drainage and sewer pipe. Available fittings include tees, wyes, bends, couplers, and
reducing fittings.
Fitting Requirements
Injection Molded Fittings shall have a smooth interior and exterior.
• 4- through 10-inch (100 to 250mm) shall meet the fitting requirements of AASHTO M252.
• 12-inch (300mm) shall meet AASHTO M294 or ASTM F2306.
Joint Performance
The fittings shall provide a joint meeting AASHTO M252, AASHTO M294 or ASTM F2306. For non-
gasketed fittings, dimples in the bell shall engage the corrugation to provide a soil-tight connection. For
gasketed fittings, the joint shall be watertight according to the requirements of ASTM D3212. Gaskets
shall be made of EPDM meeting the requirements of ASTM F477. Gaskets shall be supplied by the pipe
manufacturer. A joint lubricant supplied by the manufacturer shall be used on the gasket and bell during
assembly.
Material Properties
Material for fitting production shall be high density polyethylene conforming with the minimum
requirements of cell classification 314420C or 314420E for 4- through 12-inch (100 to 300mm) diameters,
as defined and described in the latest version of ASTM D3350, except that carbon black content should
not exceed 4%.

Injection Molded Fittings, manufactured in accordance with AASHTO M252, AASHTO M294 or
SIZE-ON-SIZE OR REDUCING
SIZE-ON-SIZE OR REDUCING TEE 90-DEG BEND
BELL-BELL COUPLER
SPIGOT-BELL REDUCER SIZE-ON-SIZE OR REDUCING

45-DEG WYE 45-DEG BEND
Refer to the Product Catalog for a complete listing of available fittings. Availability may vary for each fitting type based on diameter
or joint performance.

Injection Molded Fittings Joint System

(Joint configuration & availability subject to change without notice. Product detail may differ slightly from actual product appearance.)

MAR MAC® POLYSEAL REPAIR COUPLER SPECIFICATION

Scope
The Mar Mac Polyseal Repair Coupler is a connection for 8- through 60-inch (200 to 1500 mm) ADS pipe.
Material Properties
The Mar Mac PolySeal Repair Coupler, as manufactured by Mar Mac® Construction Products, Inc. and
distributed by ADS, Inc., consists of a mastic adhesive base layer, a woven polypropylene mesh middle
layer, and a cross-laminated polyethylene film outer layer, with mechanical compression bands integrated
into the coupler.
Installation
Installation shall be in accordance with Mar Mac Construction Products, Inc. recommended installation
instructions. Polyseal Repair Coupler, in conjunction with corrugated HDPE pipe, is considered a soil-tight
connection unless otherwise approved by local governing body.
Standard Double Wide

Strap Length (S) Length (L) Width (W) Length (L) Width (W)
Nominal Pipe Diameter*, in. (mm)
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
8 40 36 9 36 12
(200) (1016) (914) (229) (914) (305)
10 45 45 9 45 12
(250) (1143) (1067) (229) (1067) (305)
12 54 54 9 54 12
(300) (1372) (1372) (229) (1372) (305)
15 67 64 9 64 16
(375) (1702) (1626) (229) (1626) (406)
18 79 76 12 76 16
(450) (2007) (1930) (305) (1930) (406)
24 102 101 12 101 20
(600) (2591) (2565) (305) (2565) (508)
30 122 122 16 122 28
(750) (3099) (3099) (406) (3099) (711)
36 145 142 20 142 28
(900) (3683) (3607) (508) (3607) (711)
42 162 162 20 162 28
(1050) (4115) (4155) (508) (4115) (711)
48 183 183 20 183 32
(1200) (4648) (4648) (508) (4648) (813)
60 222 222 28 222 42
(1500) (5639) (5639) (711) (5639) (1067)
*4”, 6” and 54” standard couplers may be available by special order. Contact an ADS representative.

PVC COUPLING SPECIFICATION

Scope
This specification describes the PVC Coupling for use in joint repair of surface drainage applications.
Requirements
PVC couplings are manufactured from SDR 35 Sewer PVC pipe stock.
All PVC couplings shall be manufactured to meet the mechanical property requirement for fabricated
fittings as described in ASTM D3034 and F679.
Joint Performance
Joints created by the PVC coupler shall be manufactured with a bell coupling sized to accept dual wall
corrugated HDPE pipe with a rubber gasket. A joint lubricant supplied by the manufacturer shall be used
on the gasket and bell during assembly Gaskets supplied with the coupling shall meet the requirements of
ASTM F477.
The joint shall be watertight according to the laboratory requirements of ASTM D3212. Joints shall
remain watertight when subjected to a 1.5 degree axial misalignment.
Material Properties
PVC coupling shall be manufactured from SDR 35 Sewer PVC pipe stock meeting ASTM D3034 for 4-
through 15-inch diameters or F679 for 18- through 24-inch diameters.
Installation
Installation shall be in accordance with ADS pipe installation instructions using typical flexible pipe
installation methods. Contact your local ADS representative or visit www.adspipe.com for latest
installation instructions.

WATERSTOP™ GASKET SPECIFICATION

Scope
This specification describes the WaterStop gasket available in 12- to 60- inch (300 to 1500 mm)
diameters and used for a field installed seal that prevents water infiltration or exfiltration at manhole
connections.
Material Properties
The WaterStop gasket is made of a polyisoprene compound which meets the physical property
requirements of ASTM C923.
Installation
Installation shall be in accordance with ADS recommended installation instructions. Contact your local
ADS representative or visit www.adspipe.com for a copy of the latest installation guidelines.
Nominal Pipe I.D., in. (mm) Recommended Minimum Hole Diameter, in. (mm) Minimum Distance Pipe Invert to Structure Invert, in (mm)
12 (300) 19.5 (495) 3.7 (4)
15 (375) 23 (584) 4 (102)
18 (450) 26.5 (673) 4.2 (107)
24 (600) 33.3 (846) 4.5 (114)
30 (750) 40.5 (1029) 5.2 (132)
36 (900) 47 (1194) 5.5 (140)
42 (1050) 53 (1346) 5.7 (145)
48 (1200) 59 (1499) 5.7 (145)
54 (1375) 65 (1651) 6.4 (163)
60 (1500) 72 (1829) 6.4 (163)
* Check with Sales Representative for availability

FLARED END SECTION SPECIFICATION

Scope
This specification describes 12- through 36-inch (300 to 900mm) Flared End Sections for use in culvert
and drainage outlet applications.
Requirements
The Flared End Section shall be high density polyethylene meeting ASTM D3350 minimum cell
classification 213320C; contact manufacturer for additional cell classification information. When provided,
the metal threaded fastening rod shall be stainless steel.
Installation
Installation shall be in accordance with ADS installation instructions and with those issued by state or
local authorities. Contact your local ADS representative or visit www.adspipe.com for the latest installation
instructions.

The ADS Flared End Section complies with the requirements in the Build America, Buy America (BABA)
Act.
PIPE DIAMETER, in (mm)
Diameter 12 15 18 24
in (mm) (300) (375) (450) (600)
A 6.5 6.5 7.5 7.5
in (mm) (165) (165) (191) (191)
B (max) 10.0 10.0 15.0 18.0
in (mm) (254) (254) (381) (475)
H 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5
in (mm) (165) (165) (165) (165)
L 25.0 25.0 32.0 36.0
in (mm) (635) (635) (813) (914)
W 29.0 29.0 35.0 45.0
in (mm) (737) (737) (889) (1143)
*Product detail may differ slightly from actual product appearance

MITERED END SECTION SPECIFICATION

Scope
This specification describes 12- through 60-inch (300 to 1500mm) Mitered End Sections for use in culvert
and drainage outlet applications.
Requirements
The invert of the pipe and the end section shall be at the same elevation. Mitered End Section shall be
high-density polyethylene conforming with the minimum requirements of cell classification 335400C as
defined and described in ASTM D3350 except that carbon black content should not exceed 4%. The 12-
through 60-inch (300 to 1500mm) pipe material shall comply with the notched constant ligament-stress
(NCLS) test as specified in Sections 9.5 and 5.1 of AASHTO M294 and ASTM F2306 respectively.

Mitered End Section, manufactured in accordance with AASHTO M294 or ASTM F2306, complies with
the requirements in the Build America, Buy America (BABA) Act.
Installation
Installation shall be in accordance with ASTM D2321 and ADS installation guidelines. Contact your local
Slope x:1 Slope 2:1 Slope 3:1 Slope 4:1 Slope 6:1
Pipe Dia. C* D B OAL B OAL B OAL B OAL
in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm)
12 (300) 3 (76) 3 (76) 12 (305) 20 (508) 18 (457) 26 (660) 24 (610) 32 (813) 36 (914) 44 (1118)
15 (375) 4 (102) 4 (102) 14.8 (376) 24.5 (622) 22 (559) 31.9 (810) 29.4 (747) 39.1 (993) 41.6 (1057) 51.4 (1306)
18 (450) 4.2 (107) 4 (102) 21 (533) 33 (838) 30 (762) 42 (1067) 39 (991) 51 (1295) 60 (1524) 72 (1829)
24 (600) 6 (152) 6 (152) 24 (610) 40 (1016) 36 (914) 52 (1321) 48 (1219) 64 (1626) 72 (1829) 88 (2235)
30 (750) 6 (152) 6 (152) 36 (914) 52 (1321) 56 (1422) 72 (1829) 72 (1829) 88 (2235) 108 (2743) 124 (3150)
36 (900) 6.9 (175) 6 (152) 48.1 (1222) 64.6 (1641) 73.9 (1877) 92.3 (2344) 96.9 (2461) 115.4 (2931)
42 (1050) 5.2 (132) 6 (152) 64.4 (1636) 82 (2083) 93.6 (2377) 111.3 (2827) 122.9 (3122) 140.5 (3569)
48 (1200) 5.4 (137) 6 (152) 76.1 (1933) 93.6 (2377) 111.2 (2825) 128.7 (3269) 146.4 (3719) 163.9 (4163)
54 (1375) 5.4 (137) 6 (152) 85.1 (2162) 108.4 (2753)
60 (1500) 3.6 (91) 6 (152) 100.6 (2555) 123.9 (3147)
*The “C” dimension varies slightly for some diameters depending on the slope
Note: ADS recommends that the product be installed with a concrete collar/edge to support and close
corrugations per DOT specifications. The Channel at the bottom of the taper must be shaped to prevent
toe lift by the inlet water flow.

TAYLOR END PLUG PRODUCT SPECIFICATION

Scope
This specification describes 4- through 60-inch (100 to 1500mm) Taylor End Plugs, as manufactured by
Taylor Made Plastics, Inc., for use in temporary storm drainage, gravity-flow applications.
Requirements
Taylor End Plug shall be made of polyethylene with a gasket sized in order to fit in the spigot end of
corrugated polyethylene pipe.
Joint Performance
The end plug shall provide a soil-tight joint per ASTM F2306.
Installation
Installation shall be in accordance with Taylor Made Plastics, Inc installation instructions. End plugs are
not intended for permanent use or vertical applications.

STORM WATER QUALITY UNIT PRODUCT SPECIFICATION

Scope
This specification describes 36- through 60-inch (900 to 1500 mm) Storm Water Quality Units for use in
on-site point source storm water treatment applications.
Requirements
Storm Water Quality Units shall have a smooth interior and annular exterior corrugations meeting the
requirements of ASTM F2737.
The unit shall have at least three containment zones, each zone separated from the next by use of a weir
or baffle plate
Weir and baffle plates shall be welded at all interfaces between the plate and water quality unit. First weir
plate shall incorporate a saw tooth design and shall be reinforced with stiffeners positioned horizontally on
the downstream side of the plate to be retained.
Storm Water Quality Units shall provide adequate clean-out and inspection access.
Joint Performance
Connections for the bypass line and the unit shall utilize the same joint quality as specified for the main
storm sewer pipe. Couplers for the bypass line may be either split couplers, in-line bell couplers, snap
couplers, bell-bell couplers, or welded bell couplers.
Material Properties
Material for pipe and fittings used to produce Storm Water Quality Units shall be high density
polyethylene conforming with the minimum requirements of cell classification 424420C for 4- through 10-
inch (100 to 250 mm) diameters, and 435400C for 12- through 60-inch (300 to 1500mm) diameters as
defined and described in the latest version of ASTM D3350. The pipe material shall be evaluated using
the notched constant ligament-stress (NCLS) test as specified in Sections 9.5 and 5.1 of AASHTO M294
and ASTM F2306, respectively. All smooth baffle and weir plates shall be high density polyethylene.

Storm Water Quality Unit, manufactured in accordance with AASHTO M294 or ASTM F2306, complies
with the requirements in the Build America, Buy America (BABA) Act.
Installation
Installation shall be in accordance with the ADS recommended installation guidelines, utilizing a class I
(ASTM D2321) structural backfill material or flowable fill (CLSM –Controlled Low Strength Material).
Contact your local ADS representative or visit www.adspipe.com for the latest installation instructions.
Performance
Water Quality Units shall remove a minimum of 80% of the first flush total suspended solids (TSS) based
on flow rates and corresponding sieve sizes shown in Table 1. Water Quality units shall be installed
“offline” to prevent re-suspension of solids in high flow situations. Offline installation shall be constructed
utilizing an ADS By-Pass structure. Flow through the unit shall be controlled by an orifice fabricated on
the outlet end of the structure.

Table 1: Storm Water Quality Unit Dimensions and Specifications (based on mathematical
calculations)
Treated Flow Sediment Floatables
I.D. Inlet Size Outlet Size Length
Rate Volume Volume Sieve Size
in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) ft (m)
cfs (cms) ft3(m3) ft3 (m3)
10 (254) 10 (254) 20 (6.1) 1.50 (0.04) 65 (1.8) 30 (0.8) 140
10 (254) 10 (254) 40 (12.2) 2.38 (0.07) 137 (3.9) 63 (1.8) 140
36 (900)
10 (254) 10 (254) 20 (6.1) 0.70 (0.002) 65 (1.8) 30 (0.8) 200
10 (254) 10 (254) 40 (12.2) 1.60 (0.05) 137 (3.9) 63 (1.8) 200
12 (305) 12 (305) 20 (6.1) 1.73 (0.05) 83 (2.4) 38 (1.1) 140
12 (305) 12 (305) 40 (12.2) 3.66 (0.10) 175 (5.0) 81 (2.3) 140
42 (1050)
12 (305) 12 (305) 20 (6.1) 0.86 (0.02) 83 (2.4) 38 (1.1) 200
12 (305) 12 (305) 40 (12.2) 1.83 (0.05) 175 (5.0) 81 (2.3) 200
12 (305) 12 (305) 20 (6.1) 2.26 (0.06) 116 (3.3) 55 (1.6) 140
12 (305) 12 (305) 40 (12.2) 3.94 (0.11) 245 (6.9) 115 (3.3) 140
48 (1200)
12 (305) 12 (305) 20 (6.1) 1.13 (0.03) 116 (3.3) 55 (1.6) 200
12 (305) 12 (305) 40 (12.2) 2.39 (0.07) 245 (6.9) 115 (3.3) 200
15 (381) 15 (381) 20 (6.1) 2.95 (0.08) 183 (5.2) 87 (2.5) 140
15 (381) 15 (381) 40 (12.2) 6.23 (0.17) 385 (10.9) 184 (5.2) 140
60 (1500)
15 (381) 15 (381) 20 (6.1) 1.47 (0.04) 183 (5.2) 87 (2.5) 200
15 (381) 15 (381) 40 (12.2) 3.12 (0.09) 385 (10.9) 184 (5.2) 200
STORM WATER QUALITY UNIT

(Unit configuration & availability subject to change without notice. Product detail may differ slightly from actual product appearance.)
HDPE ACCESS RISER HDPE ACCESS RISER

(SEDIMENT RISER) (FLOATABLES RISER)
INLET STUB
OUTLET STUB
CHAMBER
STIFFINER PLATES
SEDIMENT CHAMBER
FLOATABLES
(SAW TOOTH)
STAND PIPE CHAMBER
WEIR PLATE
(BAFFLE, DISPERSION TUBE) (INVERTED)
WEIR PLATE
STIFFINER PLATE
OUTLET ORIFICE
STIFFINER PLATE
SEDIMENT CHAMBER FLOATABLES CHAMBER
ENDPLATE
ENDPLATE

BIODIFFUSERTM SEPTIC LEACHING CHAMBER SPECIFICATION

Scope
This specification describes the Standard, High-Capacity, Bio 2, and Bio 3 BioDiffuser units for use in
onsite wastewater disposal applications.
Chamber Requirements
BioDiffuser chambers are manufactured from high-density polyethylene with an open bottom, solid top
and louvered sidewalls. Sidewall louvers shall be designed to minimize soil intrusion.
Chamber shall meet the load rating of H-10 (16,000 lb per axle) with a minimum of 12-inches (300 mm) of
cover when tested in accordance with IAPMO PS 63 and installed in accordance with ADS installation
procedures.
The 16” (400 mm) high capacity chamber is also available in H-20 (32,000 lb per axle) rated version. To
order the H-20 ARC chamber model, please contact an ADS representative.
Chamber Connection
Each chamber shall interlock with the beginning of the next chamber by overlapping post and dome while
engaging overlapping flanges.
Material Properties
Each chamber shall be manufactured from high density polyethylene resin as defined and described in
IAPMO PS 63.
Installation
Installation shall be in accordance with ADS installation procedures and those issued by the local health
department regulations.
Chamber Dimensions
16” High Capacity

Model No. 1600BD
Length (A) in (mm) 76” (1930)
Repeat Length (E) in (mm) 75” (1905)
Side Wall Height (B) in (mm) 11.2” (285)
Overall Height (C) in (mm) 16” (406)
Overall Width (D) in (mm) 34” (864)
3 3
Capacity ft (m ) 13.6 cu ft (0.39)
Weight lbs (kg) 35 (15.9)
Units/Pallet 45
Truck Load Quantity* 18 pallets
*End Caps may reduce truck load pallet quantity.
(Unit configuration & availability subject to change without notice. Product detail may differ slightly from actual product appearance.)
16” (400 mm) High Capacity Chamber
C
B
A D

ARC TM SEPTIC LEACHING CHAMBER SPECIFICATIONS

Scope
This specification describes the Arc chamber units for use in onsite wastewater disposal applications.
Chamber Requirements
Arc chambers are manufactured from high-density polyethylene with an open bottom, solid top and
louvered sidewalls. Sidewall louvers shall be designed to minimize soil intrusion.
Chamber shall meet the load rating of H-10 (16,000 lb per axle) with a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) of
cover when tested in accordance with IAPMO PS 63 and installed in accordance with manufacturers
installation procedures.
Chamber Connection
Each chamber shall interlock with an integral articulating joint. Articulating joints shall have a free range
of horizontal rotation of 20 degrees, with a maximum of 10 degrees in either direction. Articulating joint
shall be constructed by placing the dome with engaging knuckle of the incoming chamber over the post
end of the previously-installed chamber.
Material Properties
Each chamber shall be manufactured from high-density polyethylene as defined and described in IAPMO
PS 63.
Installation
Installation shall be in accordance with ADS installation procedures as well as all state and local health
department regulations.
Arc 18 Arc 24 Arc 36 Arc 36 HC Arc 36 LP

Length (A) in (mm) 67 (1701) 67 (1701) 63 (1600) 63 (1600) 63 (1600)
Repeat Length (E) in (mm) 60 (1524) 60 (1524) 60 (1524) 60 (1524) 60 (1524)
Side Wall Height (B) in (mm) 7.7 (196) 7.5 (191) 7.13 (181) 10.75 (273) 5.5 (140)
Overall Height (C) in (mm) 12 (305) 12 (305) 13 (330) 16 (406) 8 (203)
Overall Width (D) in (mm) 16 (406) 22.5 (572) 34 (864) 34 (864) 34 (864)
Capacity ft3 (m3) 3.42 (0.09) 5.02 (0.14) 8 (0.22) 10.7 (0.30) 5.80 (0.16)
Pallet Quantity 135 chambers 120 chambers 70 chambers 60 chambers 60 chambers
Truck Load Quantity* 16 pallets 16 Pallets 24 Pallets 24 Pallets 24 Pallets
*End Caps may reduce truck load pallet quantity.
POST END WITH DOME END WITH

RECEIVING AREA "KNUCKLE"
E
C
B
A
D

SUMP PUMP WELL SPECIFICATION

Scope
This specification describes the sump pump well for use in residential drainage applications.
Requirements
The sump pump well shall be available in both 14-gallon (53 liters) and 19-gallon (72 liters) sizes. Each
well shall have three pre-formed inlet collars sized to fit 4-inch (100mm) corrugated polyethylene drainage
lines. Each well shall have a molded side panel designed to accept the outside basement perimeter line
at any elevation along the well wall. Both wells shall have a twist-locking lid.
Material Properties
Sump pump well material shall be high density polyethylene.
Installation
Installation shall be in accordance with ADS installation instructions and those issued by regional, state,
or local agencies.
A B C D E F G H I J
14-gallon 12” 8” 14.25” 4.75” 20.38” 18.13” 24” 20.88” 18.38” 20.5”
53 liters 305mm 203mm 362mm 121mm 518mm 460mm 610mm 530mm 467mm 521mm
19-gallon 12” 13” 14.25” 4.75” 20.38” 24” 31.75” 20.88” 18.38” 20.5”
72 liters 305mm 330mm 362mm 121mm 518mm 610mm 806mm 530mm 467mm 521mm

RADON DUAL PURPOSE VENTED SUMP SPECIFICATION

Scope
This specification describes the Radon Dual Purpose Vented Sump System for use in residential
drainage and ventilation of toxic or noxious gas applications.
Requirements
The Radon Dual Purpose Vented Sump shall be available in 14-gallon (53 liter) capacity. The sump well
shall have three pre-formed inlet collars sized to fit 4-inch (100 mm) corrugated polyethylene drainage
lines. Each well shall have a molded side panel designed to accept the outside basement perimeter line
at any elevation along the well wall. The lid shall be pre-drilled to accept 1¼-inch (32mm), 1½-inch
(38mm), 2 inch (50mm), or 3-inch (75mm) vent and discharge pipes. Rubber o-rings for these pipes, as
well as rubber pump wire plug shall be included with the lid kit.
Material Properties
Radon Dual Purpose Vented Sump shall be high density polyethylene.
Installation
or local agencies.
A B C D E F G H
14-gallon 12” 8” 14.25” 4.75“ 20.38” 18.13” 24” 20.06”
53 liter 305mm 203mm 362mm 121mm 518mm 460mm 610mm 510mm
Items Included With Lid Kit

Qty.
1 Gasket for 4” Sch 40 or SDR 35
PVC inlet line
1 Gasket for 2” and 3” Sch 40 PVC
vent pipe
1 Gaskets for 2”, 1 ½”, and 1 ¼”
Sch 40 PVC pump discharge
pipes
1 Electrical Cord Stopper
1 1” Adhesive Foam Tape
Items Needed For Lid Kit (Sold

Separately)
Qty.
4 Hex Head Lag Screws
¼” x 1 ½” (minimum)
4 Flat Washers ¼”
4 Concrete Floor Anchors

SEWAGE EJECTOR SUMP SPECIFICATION

Scope
This specification describes the Sewage Ejector Sump System for use in residential sewage applications.
Requirements
The Sewage Ejector Sump shall be available in 19-gallon (72 liter) capacity. The sump well shall have
one pre-drilled inlet hole with an o-ring gasket adapter for standard 4-inch (100mm) SDR 35 sewer pipe
or a PVC hub for standard 4-inch (100 mm) schedule 40 sewer pipe. Each well shall have three molded
side panels designed to accept an extra inlet line at 90-degree increments around its circumference. The
lid shall be pre-drilled to accept 1¼-inch (32 mm), 1½-inch (38 mm), 2-inch (50 mm) or 3-inch (75 mm)
vent and discharge pipes. Rubber o-rings for these pipes, as well as rubber pump wire plug shall be
included in the lid kit.
Material Properties
Sewage Ejector Sump shall be high-density polyethylene.
Installation
or local agencies.
A B C D E F G H
19-gallon 12” 13” 14.25” 4.75” 20.38” 24” 31.75” 20.06”
72 liter 305mm 330mm 362mm 121mm 518mm 610mm 806mm 510mm
Items Included With Lid Kit

Qty.
1 Gasket for 4” Sch 40 or SDR
35 PVC inlet line
1 Gasket for 2” and 3” Sch 40
PVC vent pipe
1 Gaskets for 2”, 1 ½”, and 1
¼” Sch 40 PVC pump
discharge pipes
1 Electrical Cord Stopper
1 1” Adhesive Foam Tape
Items Needed For Lid Kit (Sold

Separately)
Qty.
4 Hex Head Lag Screws
¼” x 1 ½” (minimum)
4 Flat Washers ¼”
4 Concrete Floor Anchors

FILTER SOCK SPECIFICATION

Scope
This specification describes 2- through 48-inch (50- to 1200 mm) SOCK synthetic wrap.
Filter Fabric Requirements

The SOCK shall meet the requirements of ASTM D6707.
ADS sock products as listed on this specification meet Ontario Provincial Standard Specification 1860,
Material Specifications for Geotextiles, dated March 1998.
Filter Fabric Properties

Property Test Method Material
Material - Polyester
Fabric - Knitted
Permitivity (min.) ASTM D4491 5.5 sec-1
Puncture Resistance (min.) ASTM D6241 1000 N
0.600 mm
AOS (max.) ASTM D4751
30 U.S. Sieve
FOS (max.) CAN/CGSB-148.1, M10-94 450 microns
3.0-3.9 oz/yd2
Mass (relaxed) ASTM D3887
101.7-132.2 g/cm2
2.7-3.5 oz/yd2
Mass (applied minimum)
91.5-118.7 g/cm2
24.0 mils
Thickness (min.) ASTM D4491
609.6 microns
Permeability (K) (min.) ASTM D4491 0.390 cm/sec
Burst Strength (min.) ASTM D3786 760 kpa
700 ft3/ft2/min
Air Permeability (min.) ASTM D737
213 m3/m2/min
300 gal/min/ft2
Water Flow Rate (min.) ASTM D4491 (2” constant head)
12,224 L/min/m2
Yarn Denier - 150
Specific Gravity - 1.3
450o F
Melt Temperature -
232o C

Structures
ADS, Inc. Drainage Handbook Structures ♦ 2-1
2-0 STRUCTURES
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2-1 Overview of Structural Considerations .................................... 2-2
2-2 Introduction.................................................................................. 2-3
2-3 Design Criteria ............................................................................. 2-4
Pipe Section Properties ................................................................. 2-5
Material Properties......................................................................... 2-6
Installation Conditions and Soil Factors ........................................ 2-8
Loads ........................................................................................... 2-12
2-4 Thermoplastic Pipe Design Procedure ................................... 2-17
Load and Resistance Factors...................................................... 2-17
Wall Thrust .................................................................................. 2-18
Buckling ....................................................................................... 2-21
Compressive Strain ..................................................................... 2-23
Bending Strain ............................................................................. 2-22
Combined Strain .......................................................................... 2-24
2-5 Research and Installations ....................................................... 2-26
Figures
2-1 AASHTO H-25 and HS-25 Highway Load .................................. 2-12
2-2 Typical and Idealized Corrugation Profiles.................................. 2-19
Tables
2-1 General Section Properties for N-12, N-12 STIB, and N-12 WTIB
Pipe .............................................................................................. 2-5
2-2 General Section Properties for HP Storm Pipe ..………………...2-5
2-3 General Section Properties for SaniTite HP Pipe ……..………2-6
2-4 General Section Properties for Singlewall Pipe ........................... 2-6
2-5 Mechanical Properties for Thermoplastic Pipe ............................ 2-7
2-6 Classes of Embedment and Backfill Materials .......................... 2-10
2-7 Secant Constrained Soil Modulus, Ms ....................................... 2-11
2-8 Shape Factors, Df ...................................................................... 2-12
2-9 AASHTO Highway Loads Carried by Wheel Set ...................... 2-13
2-10 Live Load Data for AASHTO H-25, HS-25 and Cooper E-80 ... 2-14
2-11 Load Factors .............................................................................. 2-18
2-12 Resistance Factors .................................................................... 2-18
2-13 Load Modifiers............................................................................ 2-18
BUYER/USER IS RESPONSIBLE FOR SERVICEABILITY OF THE PRODUCT IN ANY GIVEN

APPLICATION. SELLER IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR INJURY OR DAMAGE RESULTING
FROM IMPROPER INSTALLATION, NONCOMPLIANCE WITH THESE GUIDELINES FOR
INSTALLATION OF PRODUCT, OR USE OUTSIDE THE GUIDELINES SET FORTH HEREIN.
© ADS, Inc., May 2019

2-1 OVERVIEW OF STRUCTURAL

CONSIDERATIONS
All pipe, whether flexible or rigid, rely on the backfill structure to transfer
loads into the bedding. Pipe must be installed as designed to perform as
expected.
This section sets forth the design methodology for thermoplastic pipes,
specifically, corrugated high density polyethylene and polypropylene pipe
based on AASHTO LRFD Bridge Design Specifications Section 12:
Buried Structures and Tunnel Liners (2008 Interim Revision). Section
properties for both, corrugated polyethylene and corrugated
polypropylene pipes are presented. Material properties, backfill criteria,
and load conditions also factor into the procedure. The design procedure
evaluates wall thrust, bending, buckling, and strain and establishes limits
on each condition. The procedure yields conservative results and is
applicable to all thermoplastic pipes. ADS is a manufacturer of both
polyethylene and polypropylene products for a variety of applications. All
pipe products with the exception of our HP, including HP Storm and
SaniTite HP, are manufactured from high density polyethylene; our HP
product lines are manufactured from polypropylene. When using this
design procedure, the engineer shall specify both the product and
material used in design assumptions.
Minimum and Maximum burial depths can vary greatly depending on the
application, product, backfill material, and compaction level; please refer
to Appendix A-5 in the Installation section for a listing of appropriate
technical literature and standard details related to ADS products and
applications. All technical literature listed in this chart is available on the
ADS website or from your local ADS representative. For custom
applications, contact ADS application engineering for a review of specific
project needs.
Thermoplastic pipe performance has been heavily researched through
the laboratory and the field. Much of this work documents the
conservatism of this design procedure. Several of the research projects
are briefly discussed at the end of this section. These and other
materials are available through ADS.

2-2 INTRODUCTION
Pipe behavior can be broadly classified as flexible or rigid, depending on
how it performs when installed. Flexible pipe must move, or deflect, to
transfer the overburden load to the surrounding soil. ADS N-12, HP
Storm, SaniTite, SaniTite HP and Singlewall pipes are all examples of
flexible pipe. Flexible pipe, therefore, is not designed to carry overburden
loads directly. Rigid pipe is commonly defined as a pipe that does not
deflect more than 2% without structural distress, and as such, it must be
designed to carry the majority of the load directly. Reinforced and non-
reinforced concrete pipe are both examples of rigid pipe.
Both flexible and rigid pipe depend on proper backfill. In the case of
flexible pipe, deflection allows loads to be transferred to and carried by
the backfill. Rigid pipe transmits most of the load through the pipe wall
into the bedding. In both cases, proper backfill is very important in
allowing this load transfer to occur.
Many research projects have investigated the behavior of flexible pipe.
Thermoplastic pipe performance has been investigated through use of
actual field installations, post-installation inspections, load cell tests, and
finite element computer analyses. Now, three decades after its
introduction, the behavior of thermoplastic pipe, including corrugated
polyethylene and corrugated polypropylene pipes, has probably been
analyzed more than any other conventional drainage pipe.
The information in subsequent areas of this section provides a step-by-
step guide for the structural design of nonpressure corrugated
polyethylene and polypropylene pipe. The methodology is based on the
AASHTO design procedure, and has been proven through test
installations and actual projects to be highly conservative. More
discussion on actual installations is included in Section 2-5.

2-3 DESIGN CRITERIA

Design of thermoplastic pipe requires an understanding of pipe section
properties, material properties, installation conditions, and the loading
situation. All of these elements define the behavior of the pipe in some
respect. This section describes the criteria that enter into the design
procedure presented in Section 2-4.
PIPE SECTION PROPERTIES

As in the design of other structural components, the shape of the pipe
profile helps determine how it will perform in the pipe/soil structure. Pipe
properties include the moment of inertia of the wall profile (I), distance
from the inside diameter to the neutral axis (c), and the section area of a
longitudinal section (As). Pipe stiffness (PS) is a measure of the flexibility
of a prescribed length of pipe and is measured in the laboratory by
gauging the force required to deflect the pipe 5% of its inside diameter.
Pipe stiffness is primarily a quality check not used directly in the design
procedure and should not be interpreted to be a limiting pipe property.
General properties of N-12, N-12 STIB, and N-12 WTIB are shown in
Table 2-1, HP Storm in Table 2-2, SaniTite HP in Table 2-3, and
Singlewall pipes are shown in Table 2-4. In order to complete design
calculations listed in this structures section, general profile properties in
conjunction with detailed section properties are necessary. Detailed
section properties by product type and by diameter are found in ADS
Product Notes 2.01 thru 2.05; please contact an ADS representative for
this information.

Table 2-1
General Section Properties for N-12, N-12 ST IB, and N-12 WT IB Pipe
Nominal Outside
Pipe Stiffness,
Pipe Diameter,
PS
Diameter OD
in mm in mm pii kPa
4 100 4.8 121 50 340
6 150 6.9 175 50 340
8 200 9.1 231 50 340
10 250 11.4 290 50 340
12 300 14.5 368 50 345
15 375 18.0 457 42 290
18 450 22.0 559 40 275
24 600 28.0 711 34 235
30 750 36.0 914 28 195
36 900 42.0 1067 22 150
42 1050 48.0 1219 20 140
48 1200 54.0 1372 18 125
54 1350 61.0 1549 16 110
60 1500 67.0 1702 14 97
Table 2-2
General Section Properties for HP Storm Pipe
Nominal Outside
Pipe Stiffness,
Pipe Diameter,
PS
Diameter OD
in mm in mm Pii kPa
12 300 14.5 368 75 520
15 375 17.7 450 60 411
18 450 21.4 544 56 385
24 600 28.0 711 50 343
30 750 35.5 902 46 320
36 900 41.5 1054 40 275
42 1050 47.4 1204 35 241
48 1200 54.1 1374 35 241
60 1500 67.1 1704 30 207

Table 2-3
General Section Properties for SaniTite HP Sanitary Pipe
Profile Nominal Outside
Pipe Stiffness,
Type Pipe Diameter,
PS
Diameter OD
in mm in mm pii kPa
12 300 14.5 368 46 320
Dual Wall
15 375 17.6 447 46 320

18 450 21.2 538 46 320
24 600 28.0 711 46 320
30 750 35.5 902 46 320
30 750 35.5 902 46 320
Triple Wall
36 900 41.5 1054 46 320

42 1050 47.4 1199 46 320
48 1200 54.1 1374 46 320
60 1500 67.1 1705 46 320
* OD values listed above are NOT for manhole connector sizing. See ADS Standard Detail 205A-F for the
recommended manhole connector based on product and diameter.
Table 2-4
General Section Properties for Singlewall Pipe
Nominal Outside
Pipe Stiffness,
Pipe Diameter,
PS
Diameter OD
in. mm. in. mm pii kPa
3 75 3.6 91 35 240
4 100 4.6 117 35 240
6 150 7.0 178 35 240
8 200 9.5 241 35 240
10 250 12.0 305 35 240
12 300 14.5 368 50 340
15 375 18.0 457 42 290
18 450 22.0 559 40 275
24 600 28.0 711 34 235
Thermoplastic pipe products made by other manufacturers may have

slightly different section properties depending on their design. Data for
those products should be obtained from the respective manufacturer for
use in this design procedure.
MATERIAL PROPERTIES
Behavior of viscoelastic materials differs from elastic materials like steel.
When polyethylene and polypropylene are subjected to a constant force,
the stress/strain curve that results gives the impression that the material
loses strength with time. Tests that describe perfectly the behavior of
elastic materials can, and in this case do, provide misleading results
when used on viscoelastic materials.
Tests show that polyethylene and polypropylene do not weaken over

time. The same stress/strain curve for the material can be duplicated
repeatedly. What remains unaccounted for in the test is stress
relaxation, which is a property unique to viscoelastics. Stress relaxation
is decay in stress under a constant strain. In other words, a pipe that is
held in a deflected position will initially experience relatively high stress
levels that then quickly subside. Additional deflection causes a similar
response: stress levels increase, and then soon decrease. This
phenomenon has been documented in the laboratories at the University
of Massachusetts. Tests there showed that when the pipe was held in a
deflected position, the apparent modulus decreased. When deflection
was increased, the pipe responded with a much higher modulus.
(Additional information regarding this research is located in Section 2-5.)
Accounting for the time-dependent behavior in the design of
thermoplastic pipe can become cumbersome. The procedure described
in Section 2-5 explains how and when to use short term or long term
material properties. See table 2-5 for materials properties list of
polyethylene and polypropylene.
(Note: The tensile strength is used in some design computations although
the predominant wall forces are compressive. Tests to determine the
maximum compressive strength of polyethylene and polypropylene have
to date been inconclusive because of a lack of a definite failure point or
limit. However, the ASCE Structural Plastics Design Manual states "A
general rule is that compressive strength of plastics is greater than tensile
strength." Use of the tensile strength in design in lieu of the more
appropriate compressive strength will yield conservative results. (ASCE
Manuals and Reports on Engineering Practice No. 63, ASCE: NY, NY,
1984, p. 163.))
Table 2-5
Mechanical Properties for Thermoplastic Pipe1
Initial 75-Year
Fu E Fu
Allowable psi psi psi E
Product Material Strain, % (MPA) (MPA) (MPA) psi (MPA)
N-12 ST IB, WT IB, 3000 110000 900 21000
Plain End, SaniTite, Polyethylene 5
Low Head (20.7) (758) (6.21) (144)
3500 175000 1000 28000

N-12 HP Storm and
Polypropylene 4
SaniTite HP Sanitary (24.1) (1206) (6.89) (193)

INSTALLATION CONDITIONS AND SOIL FACTORS

The structural performance of pipe depends on the interaction between
the embedment, or backfill envelope, and the pipe, and is commonly
referred to as pipe/soil interaction. The backfill envelope must provide
structural and drainage characteristics appropriate for the application.
Structural considerations of the backfill include the type of material and
compaction level, dimensions of the backfill envelope, and native soil
conditions. The information presented here is, with few exceptions,
consistent with requirements established in ASTM D2321 "Standard
Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers
and Other Gravity-Flow Applications." Additional information regarding
dimensions of the backfill envelope and native soil considerations are
discussed in more detail in the Installation section (Section 5) of the
Drainage Handbook.
The type of material (sand, gravel, clay, etc.) and compaction level
(standard Proctor density) determine overall strength of the backfill. As a
general rule, material particles that are relatively large and angular
require less compaction than particles that are smaller and less angular
to produce structures having equal strength.
The strength of the backfill can be described using different parameters.
One way is by describing it in terms of the modulus of soil reaction (E’),
which is an empirical value developed by the Bureau of Reclamation to
calculate deflection. Another parameter used to describe backfill strength
is the secant constrained soil modulus (MS). Although this property can
be measured in the laboratory, values appropriate for design are shown
in Table 2-7. This value must be used in the following calculations.
While E’ and Ms do have similar units, they are not considered
interchangeable.
The native soil and other locally available materials may be considered
for backfill. If they meet the criteria of Table 2-6 and Table 2-7, they may
be acceptable materials and should be considered to minimize material
and hauling costs. When in doubt about the appropriate material to use
in an installation, consult an ADS engineer.
Mechanical compaction is not always necessary; some backfill materials
can be dumped and others can meet minimum compaction criteria simply
by being walked in around the pipe. On the other hand, mechanical
compaction can make placement of some backfill materials much faster.
Additional information regarding the types of mechanical compactors
available and the soil types with which they work best is located in the
Installation section (Section 5).
Another backfill material that has gained in application over the past few
years is flowable fill. This material is similar to a very low strength
concrete. It is poured around the pipe and hardens to form a solid
backfill structure. The final cured strength of this material is highly
dependent on mix design and should be determined by the design
engineer. In order to take advantage of the strength of this material, the
backfill strength of the surrounding native material must be adequate.

Where flowable fill is used, soft materials must be over-excavated and

replaced with suitable bedding and side fill material. The major
disadvantages of this material are that it can be very costly both in terms
of material costs and installation time, and it will cause the pipe to float if
precautions are not taken. Properly designed and installed, however, it
can be used as an alternative to typical granular backfill. ADS engineers
and some textbooks can provide additional guidance in the use of this
material.

Table 2-6
Classes of Embedment and Backfill Materials
ASTM D2321 (A)
(A) AASHTO AASHTO Atterberg
ASTM D2321 ASTM D2487 Percentage Passing Sieve Sizes Coefficients
M43 M145 Limits
Class Description Notation Description
Notation Notation 1 ½ in. No. 4 3/8” No. 200
LL PI Cu Cc
(40mm) (4.75mm) (9.5mm) (0.075mm)
Angular crushed stone or
5, 56,
Crushed rock, rock, crushed gravel,
I(B) N/A 57(D), 6, N/A 100% ≤15% <25% <12% Non Plastic N/A
angularC crushed slag; large voids
67(D)
with little or no fines
Well-graded gravel,
GW gravel-sand mixtures; little 5, 6 >4 1 to 3
or no fines <50% of
“Coarse
Poorly-graded gravels, Fraction”
56, 57, <1 or
GP gravel-sand mixtures; little <4
67 >3
Clean, coarse- or no fines
100% - <5% Non Plastic
grained soils Well-graded sands,
II SW gravelly sands; little or no A1, A3 >6 1 to 3
fines >50% of
“Coarse
Poorly-graded sands, Fraction” <1 or
SP gravelly sands; little or no <6
>3
fines
Coarse-Grained Sands and gravels which are Same as for
GW-GC,
Soils, borderline borderline between clean N/A 100% Varies - 5% to 12% Non Plastic GW, GP, SW
SP-SM
clean to w/fines and with fines and SP
Gravel &
<4 or
Silty gravels, gravel-sand- sand with
GM <”A”
silt mixtures <10% <50% of Line
fines “Coarse
Fraction” <7 &
Clayey gravels, gravel-
GC >”A”
Coarse-grained sand-clay mixtures 12% to
A-2-4, A- N/A Line
soils with fines 2-5, A-2- 50%
>4 or
Silty sands, sand-silt 6, or A-4
SM <”A”
mixtures or A-6 >50% of Line
soils with “Coarse
III 100% Fraction” - >7 & N/A
Clayey sands, sand-clay more
SC >”A”
mixtures than 30%
Line
retained
Inorganic silts and very fine on #200 <4 or
sands, rock flour, silty or sieve > 30%
ML <”A”
clayey fine sands, silts with (Retained)
Line
Inorganic fine- slight plasticity
100% <50
grained soils Inorganic clays of low to
>7 &
medium plasticity; gravelly, > 30%
CL >”A”
sandy, or silty clays; lean (Retained)
Line
clays
Inorganic silts and very fine A-2-7 or <4 or
sands, rock flour, silty or A-4 or A-
ML N/A <”A”
clayey fine sands, silts with 6 soils Line
Inorganic fine- slight plasticity with 30% < 30%
IV(E) 100% 100% - <50 N/A
grained soils Inorganic clays of low to or less (Retained)
retained >7 &
medium plasticity; gravelly,
CL N/A on #200 >”A”
sandy, or silty clays; lean
sieve Line
clays
Inorganic silts, micaceous or
<”A”
MH diatomaceous fine sandy or N/A
Inorganic fine- Line
silty soils, elastic silts 100% 100% - >50% >50 N/A
grained soils
Inorganic clays of high >”A”
CH N/A
plasticity, fat clays Line
V A5, A7 <4 or
Organic silts and organic silty
OL N/A <50 <”A”
clays of low plasticity
Line
Organic soils or
Organic clays of medium to 100% 100% - >50% N/A
Highly organic OH N/A
high plasticity, organic silts <”A”
soils >50
Peat and other high organic Line
PT N/A
soils
Notes:
A) Refer to ASTM D2321 for more complete soil descriptions.
B) Class I materials allow for a broader range of fines than previous versions of D2321. When specifying Class I
material for infiltration systems, the engineer shall include a requirement for an acceptable level of fines.
C) All particle faces shall be fractured.
D) Assumes less than 25% passes the 3/8” sieve.
E) Class IV materials require a geotechnical evaluation prior to use and should only be used as backfill under the
guidance of a qualified engineer.

Table 2-7
Secant Constrained Soil Modulus, MS
Soil Type and Compaction Level (standard Proctor density)

Class II Class III
Gravelly Sand Sandy Silt
Class I
Crushed Stone GM, SM, ML(1) and GC and SC
GW, GP, SW, SP with <20% passing the 200
sieve
Geostatic
Load Psp
compacted uncompacted 100% 95% 90% 85% 95% 90% 85%
Equation
2-1
psi psi psi psi psi psi psi psi psi psi
(MPa) (MPa) (MPa) (MPa) (MPa) (MPa) (MPa) (MPa) (MPa) (MPa)
1.04 2350 1275 2350 2000 1275 470 1415 670 360
(0.007) (16.20) (8.79) (16.20) (13.79) (8.79) (3.24) (9.76) (4.17) (2.48)
5.21 3450 1500 3450 2600 1500 520 1670 740 390
(0.036) (23.79) (10.34) (23.79) (17.93) (10.34) (3.59) (11.51) (5.10) (2.69)
10.42 4200 1625 4200 3000 1625 570 1770 750 400
(0.072) (28.96) (11.20) (28.96) (20.68) (11.20) (3.93) (12.20) (5.17) (2.76)
20.83 5500 1800 5500 3450 1800 650 1880 790 430
(0.144) (37.92) (12.41) (37.92) (23.79) (12.41) (4.48) (12.96) (5.45) (2.97)
41.67 7500 2100 7500 4250 2100 825 2090 900 510
(0.287) (51.71) (14.48) (51.71) (29.30) (14.48) (5.69) (14.41) (6.21) (3.52)
62.50 9300 2500 9300 5000 2500 1000
(0.431) (64.12) (17.24) (64.12) (34.47) (17.24) (6.89)
Notes:
1) Ms values presented in the table assume that the native material is at least as strong as the intended backfill
material. If the native material is not adequate, it may be necessary to increase the trench width. Refer to the
Installation section (Section 5) for information on over excavation.
2) Ms may be interpolated for intermediate cover heights.
3) For Ms values of Class IV materials, contact ADS Application Engineering.
Another soil property used in design, the shape factor (Df), is a

function of pipe stiffness, type of backfill material, and the compaction
level. The shape factor relates deflection and bending behaviors.
Table 2-8 lists shape factors for a variety of typical installation
conditions.

Table 2-8
Shape Factors, Df
Gravel Sand
GW, GP, GW-GC, GW-GM, GP- SW, SP, SM, SC, GM, GC
GC and GP-GM (includes or mixtures
crushed stone)
Pipe Dumped to Moderate to Dumped to Moderate
Stiffness, Slight High Slight to High
PS(1) (<85% SPD) (≥85% SPD) (<85% SPD) (≥85% SPD)
pii (kPa)
14 (97) 4.9 6.2 5.4 7.2
16 (110) 4.7 5.8 5.2 6.8
18 (125) 4.5 5.5 5.0 6.5
20 (140) 4.4 5.4 4.9 6.4
22 (150) 4.3 5.3 4.8 6.3
28 (195) 4.1 4.9 4.4 5.9
34 (235) 3.9 4.6 4.1 5.6
35 (240) 3.8 4.6 4.1 5.6
40 (275) 3.7 4.4 3.9 5.4
42 (290) 3.7 4.4 3.9 5.3
46 (320) 3.7 4.3 3.9 5.2
50 (345) 3.6 4.2 3.8 5.1
72 (496) 3.3 3.8 3.5 4.5
Notes:
1) Interpolate for intermediate pipe stiffness values.
2) For other backfill materials, use the highest shape factor for the pipe stiffness.
3) Modified from AASHTO LRFD Section 12, 2008, Table 12-12-3-5-4b-1.
LOADS
Loads are considered to be either a live load or a dead load. Live
loads change in position or magnitude, whereas dead loads remain
constant throughout the design life of the drainage system. The most
commonly considered live loads in pipe applications are vehicular
loads, usually from trucks, railroads, and aircraft. The soil load is
often the sole dead load consideration; however forces from high
groundwater, surcharge, and foundations are also types of dead
loads and should be incorporated into the design when appropriate.
LIVE LOADS
Vehicular loads are based on the AASHTO H- or HS- vehicle
configurations. Figure 2-1 represents the two types of design truck
configurations and the associated loading distribution. Table 2-9
provides the critical controlling load that is exerted at each wheel set
or tire area, from the design truck configurations represented in
Figure 2-1 or a design tandem rear axle truck (not shown). In railroad
applications, the standard load is represented by the Cooper E-80
configuration at 80,000 lbs/ft (1167 kN/m) of track.

Figure 2-1
AASHTO Highway Loads
H-25 10,000 lbs. 40,000 lbs. HS-25 10,000 lbs. 40,000 lbs. 40,000 lbs.
H-10 4,000 lbs. 16,000 lbs.
0.2W
0.8W
0.8W
0.2W
0.8W W = TOTAL WEIGHT

14'-0"
OF TRUCK AND LOAD 14'-0" 14'-0" to 30'-0" *
R = 0.4W R = 0.4W
F = 0.1W R = 0.4W F = 0.1W
F = 0.1W R = 0.4W F = 0.1W

R = 0.4W R = 0.4W
* USE SPACING THAT PRODUCES THE MAXIMUM STRESSES
Source: AASHTO Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges
Table 2-9
AASHTO Highway Loads Carried by Wheel Set
H-15 or H-20 or H-25 or
H-10
HS-15 HS-20 HS-25
lbs (kN)
lbs (kN) lbs (kN) lbs (kN)
20,000 30,000 40,000 50,000
W
(89.0) (133.4) (178.0) (222.4)
2,000 3,000 4,000 5,000
F
(8.9) (13.3) (17.8) (22.2)
8,000 12,000 16,000 20,000
R
(35.6) (53.4) (71.2) (89.0)
16,000 24,000 32,000 40,000
RAXEL (71.1) (106.7) (142.3) (177.9)
Note: “F” and “R” are represented in Figure 2-1. RAXEL represents
the truck’s axel load
In applications where the pipe is buried relatively shallow it can

experience an additional force from the rolling motion of the vehicle. To
account for this additional force, the stationary vehicular load is multiplied
by an 'impact factor.' For determination of impact factor for highway
loads, AASHTO provides the following equation.
IM = 33(1.0 − 0.125 H ) ≥ 0% Equation 2-1
Where:
IM = impact factor, %
H = burial depth, ft
Table 2-10 provides information about the resultant H-25 and E-80
vehicular forces at various cover heights with impact included in the
shallow cover situations. Resultant loads for H-20 vehicles can be
estimated by decreasing the values in Table 2-10 by 20%. These values
are widely used throughout the industry, although values based on
alternative computation methods can be substituted.
The intensity of the vehicular load decreases as the depth increases,
conversely, the area over which the force acts increases. As shown in
Table 2-10, for H-25 loading, live load is negligible beyond 8-feet of fill.
Table 2-9 lists the live load distribution width showing this relationship for
an AASHTO H-25 or HS-25 load. This width is based on AASHTO
information and assumes that the pipe is installed perpendicular to the
direction of traffic. Other AASHTO H or HS loads would have identical
live load distribution widths. If desired, alternative ways of calculating this
value may be used.
Table 2-10
Live Load Data for AASHTO H-25, HS-25, and Cooper E-80
AASHT O Cooper AASHTO Cooper
H-25 or HS-25(1) E-80(1) H-25 or HS-25(1) E-80(1)
Cover, Live Load Live Load Live Load Cover, Live Load Live Load Live Load
ft. (m) Transferred to Distribution Transferred to ft. (m) Transferred to Distribution Transferred to
Pipe, psi Width, Lw Pipe, psi Pipe, psi Width, Lw Pipe, psi
(MPa) in. (mm) (MPa) (MPa) In. (mm) (MPa)
1 (0.3) 32.0 (0.220) 34 (860) N/R 14 (4.3) negligible N/A 4.17 (0.288)
2 (0.6) 13.9 (0.958) 48 (1210) 26.39 (0.182) 16 (4.9) negligible N/A 3.47 (0.239)
3 (0.9) 7.6 (0.524) 61 (1561) 23.61 (0.163) 18 (5.5) negligible N/A 2.78 (0.192)
4 (1.2) 4.9 (0.338) 147 (3740) 18.40 (0.127) 20 (6.1) negligible N/A 2.08 (0.143)
5 (1.5) 3.5 (0.241) 161 (4090) 16.67 (0.115) 22 (6.7) negligible N/A 1.91 (0.132)
6 (1.8) 2.7 (0.186) 175 (4441) 15.63 (0.108) 24 (7.3) negligible N/A 1.74 (0.120)
7 (2.1) 2.1 (0.145) 189 (4791) 12.15 (0.838) 26 (7.9) negligible N/A 1.39 (0.095)
8 (2.4) 1.6 (0.110) 202 (5142) 11.11 (0.766) 28 (8.5) negligible N/A 1.04 (0.072)
10 (3.0) negligible N/A 7.64 (0.527) 30 (9.1) negligible N/A 0.69 (0.048)
12 (3.7) negligible N/A 5.56 (0.383) 35 (10.7) negligible N/A negligible
1) Includes impact.
2) N/R indicates that the cover height is not recommended.
3) N/A indicates that the information is not applicable.
Loads from aircraft vary widely in magnitude and distribution. The FAA
Design Manual should be referenced for more specific information.
Some construction vehicles may pose a temporary, although severe, live
load consideration. On the other hand, other construction vehicles may
weigh substantially less than the design load. For very large loads,
mounding additional cover over the pipe when necessary, then grading
following construction may be warranted in situations where the pipe has
little cover. Construction vehicles with loads lighter than the design load
may be permitted over the pipe, during the construction phase only, with
less than the minimum recommended cover. Construction loads are
covered in additional detail in the Installation section (Section 5).

DEAD LOADS
The soil load is calculated in this design procedure using a soil arch load
(Wsp). Rather than using a soil column load, the actual soil load is less
than the calculated column load because the column is supported, in
part, by adjacent soil columns.
Soil Arch Load (Wsp)
The soil arch load (Wsp) most closely represents the actual soil load
experienced by a flexible pipe. The arch load calculation uses a vertical
arching factor (VAF) to reduce the earth load in order to account for the
support provided by adjacent soil columns.
The arch load is determined using the procedure described below.
First, the geostatic load is calculated by determining the weight of soil
directly above the outside diameter of the pipe plus a small triangular load
extending just beyond the outside diameter. The equation for the
geostatic load, Psp, is shown in Equation 2-2.
 OD 
(γ s ) H + 0.11  Equation 2-2
Psp =  12 
144
Where:
Psp = geostatic load, psi
γs = unit weight of soil, pcf
OD = outside diameter of pipe, in (Table 2-1 - 2-4)
Next, the vertical arching factor (VAF) must be determined. This factor
accounts for the support provided by adjacent soil columns by reducing
the geostatic load. The vertical arching factor is computed as shown in
Equation 2-3.
 S − 1.17 
VAF = 0.76 − 0.71 h  Equation 2-3
 Sh + 2.92 
Where:
VAF= vertical arching factor, unitless
Sh = hoop stiffness factor;
= φs MS R / (E A)
φs = capacity modification factor for soil, 0.9
MS = secant constrained soil modulus, psi (Table 2-7)
R = effective radius of pipe, in
= ID/2+c
ID = inside diameter of pipe, in (Table 2-1 - 2-4)

c = distance from inside diameter to neutral axis, in

(Product Note 2.01 thru 2.05)
E = modulus of elasticity, psi initial and long term (Table 2-5)
A = section area, in2/in (mm2/mm) (Product Note 2.01 - 2.05)
After the geostatic load, Psp, and the VAF have been determined the soil
arch load can be found as shown in Equation 2-4.
Wsp = (Psp )(VAF ) Equation 2-4
Where:
Wsp = soil arch load, psi
Psp = geostatic load, psi
VAF= vertical arching factor, unitless
Hydrostatic Loads
The pressure of groundwater must also be accounted for only if present
at or above the pipe springline. Equations 2-5 provide the method to
calculate hydrostatic pressure. Where hydrostatic pressure is present,
the geostatic load (Psp) should be adjusted to account for the buoyant
weight of the soil in the saturated zone.
γ w ( Hs )
PW = Equation 2-5
144
Where:
PW = hydrostatic pressure at springline of pipe, psi
γw = unit weight of water, 62.4 pcf
Hs = height of groundwater above springline of pipe, ft

Foundation Loads
In some custom pipe installations, pipes are positioned beneath or near
foundations. Where this type of installation is permitted, this load
contribution must be added to the dead load before proceeding with the
design process. Soil mechanics textbooks include procedures to
determine the effect of foundation loads some distance away from the
point of application. ADS does not recommend pipe being installed
parallel to a foundation load, where the pipe is positioned within the
influence line of the foundation.
2-4 THERMOPLASTIC PIPE DESIGN PROCEDURE

This section sets forth the design methodology for corrugated
polyethylene and polypropylene pipe based on AASHTO Load and
Resistance Factor Design (LRFD) Bridge Design Specifications Section
12: Buried Structures and Tunnel Liners (2008 Interim Revision). Design
of corrugated polyethylene and polypropylene pipe in non-pressure
applications involves calculating wall thrust, bending strain, buckling, and
strain limits based on combined tension and compressive conditions.
Criteria for pipe, installation conditions, and loads from Section 2-3 are
required for this procedure; references are made to areas where the
required information can be found. Minimum and Maximum burial depths
depend on the application, product, backfill material, and compaction
level; please refer to the Appendix A-5 in the Installation section for a
listing of appropriate technical literature and standard details related to
ADS products and applications. All technical literature listed in this chart
is available on the ADS website. Contact ADS for any installations with
deep fill heights or custom applications.
In this design procedure, the pipe is evaluated at various limit states to
ensure the objectives of constructability, safety, and serviceability are
obtained. The pipe is first analyzed for the service limit states with
restrictions on stress and deformation. Next the pipe is evaluated at
strength limit states for wall area, buckling, thrust, and combined strain.
Each condition is evaluated to ensure that strength and stability, both
global and locally, are provided to resist the specified load combinations
expected.
LOAD AND RESISTANCE FACTORS

In Load and Resistance Factor Design (LRFD), the loads applied to the
structure and the resistance of a given structure or element to resist the
load are multiplied by modification factors to introduce a factor of safety
to each criterion. While modification factors are generally provided in the
design method, it is left up to the user to choose between a range of
factors for a given application. As stated by AASHTO, “Factors have
been developed from the theory of reliability based on current statistical
knowledge of loads and structural performance.” These factors should
be chosen based on the criterion they are applied to and the severity of
the application.
Tables 2-11 thru 2-13 below provide modification factors which are used
throughout this design method. Within each equation that follows,
references to these tables will be provided with a recommended
modification factor where appropriate.
Table 2-11
Load Factors (g)
Load Combination Vertical Earth Water Load Vehicular Live
Limit State Pressure gEV gWA Load gLL
Strength Limit I 0.9-1.95 1.0-1.3 1.75

Strength Limit II 0.9-1.95 1.0-1.3 1.35
Service Limit I 1.0 1.0 1.0
Table 2-12
Resistance Factors (Φ)
Structure Type Φ
Min Wall Area 1.0
Buckling 1.0
Flexure 1.0
Pipe 1.0
Soil 0.9
Table 2-13
Load Modifiers (h)
Load Combination h Redundancy
Earth Fill 1.05 Non-redundant
Live Load 1.0 Redundant
Construction Load 1.0 Redundant
WALL THRUST
Thrust, or stress, in the pipe wall is determined by the total load on the
pipe including soil loads, vehicular loads, and hydrostatic forces. The
pipe must be able to withstand these forces in both tension and
compression in order for it to remain structurally stable. The critical wall
thrust (Tcrten), determined in Equation 2-9 and the critical wall thrust for
compression (Tcrcomp) determined in Equation 2-10, must be equal to or
greater than the wall thrust (TL) calculated in Equations 2-8.
Since thrust is later used for the purpose of determining strain, it is

recommended in this step of the design procedure to calculate both a
short term and long term thrust component using short term and long
term loading conditions respectfully. For the trust comparison of critical
wall thrust to actual wall thrust, the short term and long term thrust
components can simply be added together for analysis.

Calculated Wall Thrust

Short Term Thrust
 OD 
TL − s = (η LLγ LL PC
l l )  Equation 2-6
 2 
Long Term Thrust
 OD 
TL − L = η EV ( γ EV Wsp + γ WA Pw )    Equation 2-7
 2 
Combined Thrust
TL = TL − L + TL − s Equation 2-8
Where:
TL-S = factored wall thrust due to short term loading, lb/in
TL-L = factored wall thrust due to long term loading, lb/in
TL = factored wall thrust, lb/in
Wsp= soil arch load, psi (Equation 2-3)
hEV = load modifier, earth fill, (Table 2-12)
gEV = load factor, vertical earth pressure, (Table 2-11)
gWA = load factor, water load (Table 2-11)
hLL = load modifier, live load (Table 2-13)
gLL = load factor, live load (Table 2-11)
Pl = live load transferred to pipe, psi (Table 2-10)
Cl = live load distribution coefficient
Lw
= the lesser of or 1.0
OD
Lw = live load distribution width at the crown, in (Table 2-10)
OD = outside diameter, in (Table 2-1 - 2-4)
Pw = hydrostatic pressure at springline of pipe, psi (Equation 2-5)
Actual thrust calculated (TL) is a compressive thrust. An internal load,

such as internal pressure, would have to result in a tensile thrust greater
than the compressive thrust calculated here in order for tensile thrust to
be greater than zero. The actual tensile thrust is 0psi for corrugated pipe
installed under typical installation conditions.
Tensile Resistance to Thrust
Tcrten = (Fy )( A)(φ p ) Equation 2-9
Where:
Tcrten = critical wall thrust resistance in tension, lb/linear inch
of pipe
Fy = tensile strength, psi initial or long term (Table 2-5)

A = wall area, in2/inch of pipe (Product Note 2.01 – 2.05)

φp = capacity modification factor for pipe, 1.0 (Table 2-11)
Compressive Resistance to Thrust
Tcrcomp = (Fy )(Aeff )(φ p ) Equation 2-10
Where:
Tcrcomp = critical wall thrust resistance in compression, lb/linear inch
of pipe
Fy = tensile strength, psi initial or long term (Table 2-5)
Aeff = effective wall area, in2/inch of pipe (Equation 2-11)
φp = capacity modification factor for pipe, 1.0 (Table 2-12)
Effective Area (Aeff)

The effective area of a profile wall flexible pipe is the amount of total area
which is “effective” in withstanding a given compressive force in the pipe
wall. Under this principal, it is assumed only a portion of the pipe wall
resists compressive forces
In order to determine the effective area, AASHTO LRFD design method

reduced the actual pipe profile to an idealized profile, both shown in
Figure 2-2, in order to simplify the design procedure. The idealized
profile is a representation of the actual profile but with straight sides and
sharp corners. The thin straight elements that make up the idealized
profile are analyzed to determine their effective width and resistance to
buckling. Once the effective width of each element is calculated, a
reduced effective area is calculated and used to analyze the structural
integrity of the pipe section.
Figure 2-2
Typical and Idealized Corrugation Profiles
In order to determine the effective width of each element, the idealized

profile geometry must be known. This must be determined through
meticulous profile measurements to determine the thickness and width of
each profile element. The results of such an analysis are provided in
ADS Product Notes 2.01 – 2.05.
Aeff = AS −
∑ (1 − ρ )w t
i i i Equation 2-11
ϖ
Where:
Aeff = effective wall area, in2/inch of pipe
AS = wall area, in2/in (Product Note 2.01 – 2.05)
wi = length of each individual profile element, in (Product Note 2.01 –
2.05)
ti = thickness of each individual profile element, in (Product Note 2.01 –
2.05)
w = profile pitch, in (Product Note 2.01 – 2.05)
0.22
1−
λi Equation 2-12
ρi = ≤1
λi
Where:
ri = effective width factor
wi ε
λi = > 0.673 Equation 2-13
ti k
Where:
li = slenderness factor
wi = length of each individual profile element, in (Product Note 2.01 –
2.05)
ti = thickness of each individual profile element, in (Product Note 2.01 –
2.05)
k = edge support coefficient, 4.0 for elements with both edges
supported
e = material strain limit, in/in (Table 2-5)
BUCKLING
The potential for general pipe wall buckling is determined by the burial
conditions (Ms) and the pipe profile properties (Aeff, I, R). The critical
buckling stress found from Equation 2-14 must be greater than the actual
yield stress (Fy). If the critical buckling stress is less than the yield stress,
then the compressive resistance to thrust, Equation 2-10, must be
recalculated using fcr in place of Fy.

Critical Buckling Stress
R EI
f cr = 9.24 B ' R wφ s M s
Aeff 0.149 R 3 Equation 2-14
Where:
fcr = critical buckling stress, psi
Ms = secant constrained soil modulus, psi (Table 2-7)
= ID/2+c
(Product Note 2.01 – 2.05)
E = modulus of elasticity, psi initial and long term (Table 2-5)
Aeff = effective area, in2/ft (Equation 2-11)
I = moment of inertia, in4/in (Product Note 2.01 – 2.05)
Rw = water buoyancy factor
= 1-0.33hg/H
hg = height of groundwater above crown of pipe, ft
Φs = resistance factor for soil stiffness (Table 2-12)
B’ = nonuniform stress distribution factor
=
1
1 + 4e −0.065 H
COMPRESSIVE STRAIN
An incorrect assumption in calculating actual compressive strain in a pipe
wall is to assume all load is applied long-term. Due to the viscoelastic
behavior of both polyethylene and polypropylene resins, pipe response
under given loading conditions should be analyzed with the material
properties most closely representing the loading condition. In this
analysis, applied compressive strain (euc) is determined from Equation 2-
15 and then compared to limiting material strain (e), Table 2-5, to ensure
material capacity is not exceeded.
Factored Compressive Strain
TL T T
ε uc = = L−L + L−S
Aeff E El Aeff Es Aeff Equation 2-15
Where:
euc = factored compressive strain , in/in
TL-S = factored wall thrust due to short term loading, lb/in
TL-L = factored wall thrust due to long term loading, lb/in
Aeff = effective wall area, in2/inch of pipe (Equation 2-11)
EL = long term modulus of elasticity, psi (Table 2-5)

ES = short term modulus of elasticity, psi (Table 2-5)
BENDING STRAIN
A check on the bending strain will ensure that it is within material
capability. In place of a more detailed analysis of bending strain, the
strain calculated in this method is based on an empirical relationship
between strain and deflection due to loading conditions. In order to
account for construction induced deflections, a predetermined limit is
introduced into the deflection equation. This results in total deflection due
to bending. Once deflection due to bending is determined from Equation
2-16, bending strain can be found with Equation 2-17. The bending
strain limit is material specific as shown in Table 2-5.
Pipe Deflection Due to Bending
TL Dm ε D
∆ = ∆ c ID − = ∆ c ID − uc m
Aeff Eγ p γ EV Equation 2-16
Where:
∆ = deflection of pipe, reduction of vertical diameter due to
bending, in
∆c = deflection of pipe, construction induced deflection
limit 5%
euc = factored compressive strain , in/in (Equation 2-15)
gEV = load factor, vertical earth pressure, (Table 2-11)
Dm = mean pipe diameter, in
= ID + 2c
(Product Note 2.01 – 2.05)
Factored Bending Strain
 cx  ∆ 
ε bu = γ B D f    Equation 2-17
R  Dm 
Where:
εbu= factored bending strain, in/in
Df = shape factor, dimensionless (Table 2-8)
∆ = deflection, in (Equation 2-16)
gB = load factor, combined strain, 1.5
= ID/2+c

cx = distance from neutral axis to extreme fiber, in (Product Note 2.01 –

2.05)
Dm = mean pipe diameter, in
= ID + 2c
COMBINED STRAIN
If it is determined bending strain is within the allowable limit, the
combined strain due to bending and thrust must be checked to make
sure they do not exceed the factored strain limits. These shall be
checked for both compression and tension conditions. The factored
combined compressive strain determined from Equation 2-18 shall not
exceed the limiting combined compressive strain determined from
Equation 2-19. Additionally, the factored combined tension strain
determined from Equation 2-20 shall not exceed the limiting combined
tension strain determined from Equation 2-21.
Factored Combined Compressive Strain

γB
ε cu = ε bu + ε uc
γP Equation 2-18
Where:
εcu = factored compressive strain, in/in
εbu = factored bending strain, in/in (Equation 2-17)
gp = load factor, vertical earth pressure (Table 2-11)
Limiting Combined Compressive Strain
 1 .5 F  Equation 2-19
ε cl =  
y
 E50 
Where:
εcl = limiting combined compressive strain, in/in
Fy = Long term tensile strength, psi (Table 2-5)
E50 = long term modulus of elasticity, psi (Table 2-5)
Factored Combined Tension Strain
γB
ε tu = ε bu − ε uc
γP Equation 2-20
Where:
εtu = factored tension strain, in/in
εbu = factored bending strain, in/in (Equation 2-17)
gp = load factor, vertical earth pressure (Table 2-11)

Limiting Combined Tension Strain
ε tl = γ B ε t Equation 2-21
Where:
εtl = limiting combined tension strain, in/in
εt = allowable tension strain, in/in (Table 2-5)

2-5 RESEARCH AND INSTALLATIONS

Corrugated polyethylene pipe has been heavily researched in the laboratory
and through actual installations. This section summarizes the findings of
some of those projects; additional information about these and other reports
can be obtained from ADS.
“Analysis of the Performance of a Buried High Density Polyethylene

Pipe.” Written by Naila Hashash and Ernest Selig, University of
Massachusetts, and published in Structural Performance of Flexible Pipes,
edited by Sargand, Mitchell, and Hurd, October 1990, pp. 95 - 103.
In 1988, the Pennsylvania Department of Transportation began a study to
evaluate the behavior of polyethylene pipe similar to ADS AASHTO pipe
backfilled with crushed stone under a 100 foot (30.5m) burial depth. This
document, which is a status report of the pipe condition 722 days after
installation, summarizes one of the most heavily instrumented pipe
installations to date. Measured vertical deflection was 4.6% and horizontal
deflection was 0.6%. Much of this was due to a slight (1.6%) circumferential
shortening. This amount of deflection is well within the 7.5% generally
accepted limit. Soil arching reduced the load on the pipe by 77% which
shows that the soil column load is a very conservative method to estimate
this load component.
“Field Performance of Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe.” Written by John
Hurd, Ohio Department of Transportation, and published in Public Works,
October 1987.
This article summarizes the results of a field study conducted in 1985 on
172 culvert installations. These installations represented real-world
applications where backfill procedures may or may not have been
conducted in accordance with standard ODOT recommendations.
Regardless, the primary findings regarding structural integrity were that
shallow cover, even with heavy truck traffic, did not appear to cause
significant amounts of deflection; what deflection that did occur seemed to
be due to installation.
“Laboratory Test of Buried Pipe in Hoop Compression.” Written by
Ernest Selig, Leonard DiFrancesco, and Timothy McGrath, and published in
Buried Plastic Pipe Technology - 2nd Volume, 1994, pp. 119 - 132.
The project involved developing a fixture so as to subject the pipe to purely
compressive forces. A pressure of 55 psi (379 kPa) was reached at which
time equipment problems developed. The authors indicated this pressure
was the equivalent of 100 feet (30.5m) of cover in other tests they had
performed. At this pressure, the pipe also experienced a 3% circumferential
shortening which resulted in a significant beneficial soil arching.
“Pipe Deflections - A Redeemable Asset.” Written by Dr. Lester Gabriel
and published in Structural Performance of Flexible Pipes, edited by
Sargand, Mitchell, and Hurd, October 1990, pp. 1 - 6.
This paper provides an easy-to-read description of the role of deflection in
properly performing flexible pipe. Deflection is not a liability, but a behavior
that forces the backfill material to take on a disproportionate amount of load.

Deflection allows flexible pipe to be installed in applications with surprisingly
deep burials.
“Short-term Versus Long-term Pipe Ring Stiffness in the Design of
Buried Plastic Sewer Pipes.” Written by Lars-Eric Janson and published
in Pipeline Design and Installation, proceedings from the International
Conference sponsored by the Pipeline Planning Committee of the Pipeline
Division of the American Society of Civil Engineers, March 1990, pp. 160 -
167.
This report describes the viscoelastic behavior of polyethylene. The author
suggests use of short-term properties when the pipe is backfilled in friction
soils or firm silty/clayey soils.
“Stress Relaxation Characteristics of the HDPE Pipe-Soil System.”
Written by Larry Petroff and published in Pipeline Design and Installation,
proceedings from the International Conference sponsored by the Pipeline
Planning Committee of the Pipeline Division of the American Society of Civil
Engineers, March 1990, pp. 280-293.
This is an excellent report on the viscoelastic nature of polyethylene and
discusses both creep and stress relaxation behaviors. One of the major
points made is how deflection decreases with time; over 80% of the total
deflection that a pipe will experience throughout its life will occur within the
first 30 days. Petroff also indicated that the highest stresses for
polyethylene pipe buried in a compacted granular material occur soon after
installation but relax soon thereafter.
“Stiffness of HDPE Pipe in Ring Bending.” Written by Timothy McGrath,
Ernest Selig, and Leonard DiFrancesco, and published in Buried Plastic
Pipe Technology- 2nd Volume, 1994, pp. 195 - 205.
This project was conducted to determine how or if the modulus of elasticity
changes over time. The pipe was deflected and held in position to generate
a stress/strain curve. Although the results gave the appearance that the
material was losing strength over time, repeated incremental loads caused
the pipe to respond with its short-term modulus.
“Structural Performance of Three-Foot Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe
Buried Under High Soil Cover.” Written by Reynold Watkins and
published in Structural Performance of Flexible Pipes, edited by Sargand,
Mitchell, and Hurd, October 1990, pp. 105 - 107.
A three-foot (900mm) diameter corrugated polyethylene pipe was tested in a
load cell to determine if it performed as well as the smaller sizes. The
author recognizes the effects of stress relaxation. The report concludes
“There is no reason why corrugated polyethylene pipes of three-foot
diameter cannot perform structurally under high soil cover provided that a
good granular pipe zone backfill is carefully placed and compacted.” This is
consistent with the backfill and material recommendations set forth in
previous sections.

Hydraulics
ADS, Inc. Drainage Handbook Hydraulics ♦ 3-1
3-0 HYDRAULICS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3-1 Overview of Hydraulic Considerations ........................................... 3-2
3-2 Design Manning’s Value ................................................................... 3-2
3-3 Discharge Curves ............................................................................. 3-4
3-3 The Conveyance Method .................................................................. 3-8
3-4 Minimum Velocity Considerations................................................. 3-12
3-5 Maximum Velocity Considerations ................................................ 3-12
3-6 Long Term Pressure Considerations ............................................ 3-13
3-7 Culvert Considerations ................................................................... 3-14
3-8 Example Problems .......................................................................... 3-15
3-9 Footnotes.......................................................................................... 3-17
Figures
3-1 Discharge Rates for ADS Corrugated Pipe with Smooth
Interior Liner ........................................................... ……………………3-5
3-2 Discharge Rates for ADS Single Wall Heavy Duty and
Highway Pipe ....................................................................................... 3-6
3-3 Discharge Rates for ADS Triplewall® and Smoothwall Sewer &
Drain Pipe ............................................................................................ 3-7
Tables
3-1 Conveyance Factors (Standard Units)............................................... 3-10
3-2 Conveyance Factors (Metric Units) .................................................. 3-11
3-3 Entrance Loss Coefficients ........................................................ 3-14

APPLICATION. SELLER IS NOT RESPONSIBLE FOR INJURY OR DAMAGE RESULTING FROM
IMPROPER INSTALLATION, NONCOMPLIANCE WITH THESE GUIDELINES FOR
 ADS, Inc., July 2014

3-1 OVERVIEW OF HYDRAULIC

CONSIDERATIONS
The Manning’s equation is the most widely recognized means of
determining pipe capacity for gravity flow installations. As such, it provides
the basis of the hydraulic design consideration for corrugated high density
polyethylene (HDPE) and polypropylene (PP) pipe.
Discharge curves allow pipe sizing through use of graphs once the design
capacity requirements and slope have been established. Each product
will have its own discharge curve based on its Manning’s “n” value. This
section provides flow capacities based on recommended design "n"
values for ADS products. It should be noted that factors such as bends,
manhole connections, debris and sediment result in hydraulic losses that
will affect actual flow capacity and should be considered in final pipe
selection.
By reducing all of the coefficients and constants in the Manning equation
down to a single factor, called the conveyance factor (K), another method
of pipe sizing can be utilized. By knowing the Manning’s “n” value for
various pipe materials, the use of conveyance factor charts will allow the
designer to develop comparative product options easily. Use of this
method frequently results in more than one satisfactory pipe type and size
for a given drainage need, thereby allowing the designer to compare
product options in order to determine the most cost-effective solution.
Final pipe selection should also include a review of the velocity conditions.
Higher flow velocities help keep sediment contained in stormwater from
settling along the bottom of the pipe. A reduction in sediment can also
reduce the frequency of maintenance and help ensure that the hydraulic
function of the pipe will continue throughout its design life. These
velocities, however, must be kept within the maximum performance limits
of the pipe and the associated facility.
3-2 DESIGN MANNING’S VALUE

Within the pipe industry, there is a wide range of Manning’s “n”
values, or roughness coefficients, for various types of pipe. Several
items should be considered prior to selecting an “n” value for a given
pipe material when designing any gravity flow system.
1. Manning’s “n” values developed for any given pipe material will
depend on depth of flow for partially full pipe and flow velocity for
full flow conditions. Manning’s “n” values are commonly provided
for full flow conditions, but should not be assumed unless
specifically noted. For most calculations, “n” is assumed to be
constant; however, it shall be the discretion of the individual
designer to use a constant or varying “n” value.

2. Storm sewers, culverts and sanitary sewers are typically

subject to collection of debris and sediment, which adversely
effect flow rates. Consideration should be given for the collection
of debris and sedimentation and adjust the design “n” value
accordingly. Pipe inside surface texture, geometry, joint opening
and pipe material can also influence collection of debris and
sedimentation depending on the susceptibility of the debris to
either adhere to the pipe surface or be trapped and caught by
other obstructions.
Tests conducted at Utah State University Water Research Laboratory
show minimum Manning’s “n” values of less than 0.010 for corrugated
HDPE pipe with a smooth interior liner. To accommodate actual field
conditions and to incorporate a safety factor, ADS recommends using
a Manning’s “n” value of 0.012 for corrugated HDPE and PP products
with a smooth interior liner. There is considerable justification for both
HDPE and PP products to be designed with the same Manning’s “n”
value. Both smooth interior products are made using the same mold
blocks and are produced on the same manufacturing equipment.
From a material standpoint, both HDPE and PP are polyolefin
materials, very similar in chemical makeup, that behave similarly
during processing. Also, ADS performs regular internal quality checks
which assure the liner roughness of polypropylene is equal to, if not
better than, the liner roughness of HDPE products with an established
Manning’s “n” value of 0.012. In general, it is common engineering
practice to include a safety factor of 20-30% to the Manning’s values
determined during laboratory testing. However, it should be noted, this
practice is not utilized for most Manning’s “n” values provided for
metal pipes. Recommended design Manning’s “n” values for all ADS
pipe products are listed in Table 3-1.

3-2 DISCHARGE CURVES

The mathematical relationship of the terms included in the Manning’s
formula is often shown graphically through discharge curves. Discharge
curves are one method of selecting an adequate pipe size, once the
required capacity and slope have been determined.
Discharge curves for ADS HDPE and PP pipe products under gravity flow
steady state conditions are shown in Figures 3-1 through 3-3.

Figure 3-1
Discharge Rates for ADS Corrugated Pipe with Smooth Interior Liner1
1000.00
40 f ps (12.2m/s)
500.00
400.00
300.00 35 f ps (10.7m/s)
)
mm
200.00
(1 500 ) 31 f ps (9.4m/s)
60” 50mm
(13 )
54” mm
(1 200 27 fps (8.2m/s)
100.00 48” m)
0m
” (105 25 fps (7.6m/s)
42
) 23 fps (7.0m/s)
mm
50.00
” (900
40.00
36 21 fps (6.4m/s)
m)
0m
30.00
0 ” (75 19 fps (5.8m/s)
3
20.00 m)
0m 17 fps (5.2m/s)
(60
Flow capacity (cfs)
2 4 ”
15 fps (4.6m/s)
10.00
m)
(4 50m
18”
13 fps (4.0m/s)
5.00 m)
(3 75m
4.00 15”
)
3.00 mm
300
1 2” (
10 fps (3.0m/s)
2.00
m m)
250
1 0” ( 9 fps (2.7m/s)
)
1.00 mm 7fp
200
6fp
s(
8” ( 8 fps (2.4m/s)
s(
2.1
5fp
1.8
m/
s(
m/
4fp
s)
1.5
s)
s(
0.50 )
m/
3fp
mm
1.2
150
s)
0.40
s(
6” (
m/
0.9
s)
0.30
m/
2fp
s)
s(0.
6
0.20
m/
1fp
m)
s)
00m
s(
(1
0.3
4”
m/
s)
0.10
0.02%
0.03%
0.04%
0.05%
0.20%
0.30%
0.40%
0.50%
2.00%
3.00%
4.00%
5.00%
0.01%
0.10%
1.00%
10.00%
Slope of pipe in feet per 100ft (%slope)

1cfs = 0.02832 m3/s
1ft/s = 0.30480 m/s
1% = 0.01 ft/ft
® ® ®
1. Applicable products: N-12 , MEGA GREEN , N-12 STIB, N-12 WTIB, HP STORM, SaniTIte , SaniTite HP, N-
12 Low Head
Note: Based on a design Manning’s “n” of 0.012.
Solid lines indicate pipe diameters. Dashed lines indicate approximate flow velocity.
2
Redeveloped from FHWA HDS 3 – Design Charts for Open-Channel Flow
Figure 3-2
Discharge Rates for ADS Single Wall Heavy Duty and Highway Pipe
100.00
50.00
40.00
30.00
20.00
10 f ps (3.0m/s)
10.00
m)
0m
(60 9 f ps (2.7m/s)
”
24
5.00 m)
0m 8 f ps (2.4m/s)
Flow capacity (cfs)
4 5
”(
4.00 18
m)
5m
” (37
3.00 15
m) 7 f ps (2.1m/s)
0m
2.00 (30
”
12 m)
0m
” (25
10
m) 6 f ps (1.8m/s)
1.00 00m
(2
8”
m)
(15
0m 4fps
0.50 6” (1.2
m/s
3fps
5 f ps (1.5m/s)
)
0.40
(0.9
m/s
2fps
0.30
m)
(0.6
0m
(10
m/s
4”
)
0.20
1fps
)
(0.3
mm
(75
m/s
3”
)
0.10
0.01%
0.10%
1.00%
10.00%
0.02%
0.03%
0.04%
0.05%
0.20%
0.30%
0.40%
0.50%
2.00%
3.00%
4.00%
5.00%

3
1cfs = 0.02832 m /s
1ft/s = 0.30480 m/s
1% = 0.01 ft/ft
Note: Based on a design Manning’s “n” described in Table 3-1 for respective diameter.
Pipe may not be available in all diameters shown.
Solid lines indicate pipe diameters. Dashed lines indicate approximate average velocity.

Figure 3-3
Discharge Rates for ADS TripleWall® and Smoothwall Sewer & Drain Pipe
10.00
5.00
4.00
3.00
2.00
Flow capacity (cfs)
8fps
(2.4
7fps
1.00
m/s
(2.1
10 fps (3.0m/s)
6fps
)
m/s
(1.8
5fps
)
m/s
(1.5
)
9 fps (2.7m/s)
4fps
)
m/s
m
0m
(1.2
0.50 5
(1
6”
m/s
3fps
0.40
(0.9
m/s
)
0.30
2fps
)
(0.6
m
m
00
m/s
(1
4”
)
0.20
1fps
)
m
(0.3
m
75
”(
m/s
3
)
0.10
0.01%
0.02%
0.03%
0.04%
0.05%
0.10%
0.20%
0.30%
0.40%
0.50%
1.00%
2.00%
3.00%
4.00%
5.00%
10.00%
1cfs = 0.02832 m3/s

1ft/s = 0.30480 m/s
1% = 0.01 ft/ft
Note: Based on a design Manning’s ”n“ of 0.009.

Solid lines indicate pipe diameters. Dashed lines indicate approximate average velocity.

3-3 THE CONVEYANCE METHOD

Conveyance provides a convenient means of selecting a variety of pipe
options that will satisfy a project’s flow requirements. Conveyance factors
are based on a greatly simplified version of the Manning’s equation
shown in Equation 3-1 and 3-1 (a). In the following discussion, example
problems and subsequent sections, the pipe is assumed to be flowing full.
This assumption typically allows for a simplified, yet accurate analysis of
the given conditions. Each project should be evaluated on a case-by-case
basis to determine the best, most-representative design method.
(1.486 )( A )(R 2 / 3 )(S1/ 2 )

Q= Equation 3-1
n
Where:
Q = pipe capacity, (cfs)
n = Manning’s “n”
A = cross-sectional flow area of the pipe (ft.2)
R = hydraulic radius (ft.):
A
R=
P
P = Wetted perimeter (ft); Pipe inside circumference, or (π)(inside diameter)
for full flowing pipe conditions
S = pipe slope (feet/foot)
Or, in metric units:
( A )(R 2 / 3 )(S1 / 2 )
Q= Equation 3-1(a)
n
Where:
Q = pipe capacity, m3/s
n = Manning’s “n”
A = cross-sectional flow-area of the pipe (m2)
P = Wetted perimeter (ft); Pipe circumference, or (π)(diameter) for full flowing
pipe conditions
R = hydraulic radius (m),
A
R=
P
S = pipe slope (m/m)

For a specific full-flowing pipe installation, the parameters n, A, and R are

easily defined constants. The flow-carrying ability, or conveyance factor,
of the pipe can then be defined as shown in Equation 3-2 or 3-2(a).
(1.486 )( A )(R 2 / 3 )
k= Equation 3-2
n
Or, in metric units:
( A )(R 2 / 3 )
k= Equation 3-2(a)
n
By substitution, the Manning’s formula can then be reduced to the

following equation.
Q = k S1 / 2 Equation 3-3
Equation 3-3 can also be written as shown in Equation 3-4.
Q
k= Equation 3-4
S1 / 2
Direct substitution of design conditions into Equation 3-4 will determine
the minimum conveyance factor allowed. Table 3-2 or 3-2 is then used
as a guide to select a pipe having a conveyance factor of at least that
calculated.
Table 3-1 and 3-2 require knowledge of the Manning’s “n” value. These
tables can also be used for any materials if the specific Manning’s “n” is
known.
The Manning’s “n” is a critical value in the conveyance concept. Among
pipes of the same diameter and slope, Manning’s “n” will be the only
factor that will have an effect on conveyance, and therefore capacity.
When comparing identical field conditions, conveyance has a direct
relationship to capacity. That is, if the slope is held constant, tripling
conveyance will triple the capacity; halving conveyance will halve the
capacity.
Example problems involving conveyance factors are explained in a
subsequent section.

ADS, Inc. Drainage Handbook Hydraulics  3-10
Table 3-1
Conveyance Factors (Standard Units)
Design Manning’s Values for ADS Thermoplastic Pipe *

Product Diameter Design Manning’s “n”
N-12, MEGA GREEN, N-12 STIB, N-12 WTIB, 4” - 60” “n” = 0.012
HP STORM, SaniTite, SaniTite HP, N-12 Low
Head
Single Wall Highway and Heavy Duty * 18” - 24” “n” = 0.020
12” - 15” “n” = 0.018
10” “n” = 0.017
8” “n” = 0.016
3” - 6” “n” = 0.015
TripleWall and Smoothwall Sewer & Drain 3” - 6” “n” = 0.009 **
Conveyance Equations: k = Q/(s^0.5) Q = k s^0.5
Conveyance Factors for Circular Pipe Flowing Full

Manning’s "n" Values
Dia. Area
(in.) (sq. ft.) 0.009 0.010 0.011 0.012 0.013 0.014 0.015 0.016 0.017 0.018 0.019 0.020 0.021 0.022 0.023 0.024 0.025
3 0.05 1.3 1.1 1.0 1.0 0.9 0.8 0.8 0.7 0.7 0.6 0.6 0.6 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5 0.5
4 0.09 2.7 2.5 2.2 2.1 1.9 1.8 1.6 1.5 1.5 1.4 1.3 1.2 1.2 1.1 1.1 1.0 1.0
6 0.20 8.1 7.3 6.6 6.1 5.6 5.2 4.9 4.6 4.3 4.1 3.8 3.6 3.5 3.3 3.2 3.0 2.9
8 0.35 17.5 15.7 14.3 13.1 12.1 11.2 10.5 9.8 9.2 8.7 8.3 7.9 7.5 7.1 6.8 6.5 6.3
10 0.55 31.6 28.5 25.9 23.7 21.9 20.3 19.0 17.8 16.8 15.8 15.0 14.2 13.6 12.9 12.4 11.9 11.4
12 0.79 51.5 46.3 42.1 38.6 35.6 33.1 30.9 28.9 27.2 25.7 24.4 23.2 22.1 21.1 20.1 19.3 18.5
15 1.23 93.3 84.0 76.3 70.0 64.6 60.0 56.0 52.5 49.4 46.7 44.2 42.0 40.0 38.2 36.5 35.0 33.6
18 1.77 151.7 136.6 124.1 113.8 105.0 97.5 91.0 85.3 80.3 75.9 71.9 68.3 65.0 62.1 59.4 56.9 54.6
21 2.41 228.9 206.0 187.3 171.6 158.4 147.1 137.3 128.7 121.2 114.4 108.4 103.0 98.1 93.6 89.6 85.8 82.4
24 3.14 326.8 294.1 267.3 245.1 226.2 210.1 196.1 183.8 173.0 163.4 154.8 147.0 140.0 133.7 127.9 122.5 117.6
27 3.98 447.3 402.6 366.0 335.5 309.7 287.6 268.4 251.6 236.8 223.7 211.9 201.3 191.7 183.0 175.0 167.8 161.0
30 4.91 592.5 533.2 484.7 444.3 410.2 380.9 355.5 333.3 313.7 296.2 280.6 266.6 253.9 242.4 231.8 222.2 213.3
33 5.94 763.9 687.5 625.0 572.9 528.9 491.1 458.3 429.7 404.4 382.0 361.9 343.8 327.4 312.5 298.9 286.5 275.0
36 7.07 963.4 867.1 788.2 722.6 667.0 619.3 578.0 541.9 510.0 481.7 456.4 433.5 412.9 394.1 377.0 361.3 346.8
42 9.62 1453.2 1307.9 1189.0 1089.9 1006.1 934.2 871.9 817.5 769.4 726.6 688.4 654.0 622.8 594.5 568.7 545.0 523.2
45 11.04 1746.8 1572.1 1429.2 1310.1 1209.3 1122.9 1048.1 982.6 924.8 873.4 827.4 786.1 748.6 714.6 683.5 655.0 628.8
48 12.57 2074.8 1867.4 1697.6 1556.1 1436.4 1333.8 1244.9 1167.1 1098.4 1037.4 982.8 933.7 889.2 848.8 811.9 778.1 746.9
54 15.90 2840.5 2556.4 2324.0 2130.4 1966.5 1826.0 1704.3 1597.8 1503.8 1420.2 1345.5 1278.2 1217.4 1162.0 1111.5 1065.2 1022.6
60 19.63 3762.0 3385.8 3078.0 2821.5 2604.4 2418.4 2257.2 2116.1 1991.6 1881.0 1782.0 1692.9 1612.3 1539.0 1472.1 1410.7 1354.3
72 28.27 6117.3 5505.6 5005.1 4588.0 4235.1 3932.6 3670.4 3441.0 3238.6 3058.7 2897.7 2752.8 2621.7 2502.5 2393.7 2294.0 2202.2
* Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (2000) “Hydraulic Considerations for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe”
4
** “Lingedburg, Michael, “Civil Engineer Reference Manual”
© ADS, Inc., July 2010

Table 3-2
Conveyance Factors (Metric Units)
Design Manning’s Values for ADS Thermoplastic Pipe *

Product Diameter Design Manning’s “n”
N-12, MEGA GREEN, N-12 STIB, N-12 WTIB, 100-1500mm “n” = 0.012
HP STORM, SaniTite, SaniTite HP, N-12 Low
Head
Single Wall Highway and Heavy Duty * 450-600mm “n” = 0.020
300-375mm “n” = 0.018
250mm “n” = 0.017
200mm “n” = 0.016
75-150mm “n” = 0.015
TripleWall and Smoothwall Sewer & Drain 75-150mm “n” = 0.009 **
Conveyance Equations: k = Q/(s^0.5) Q = k s^0.5
Conveyance Factors for Circular Pipe Flowing Full

Manning’s "n" Values
Dia. Area
(mm) (sq. m.) 0.009 0.010 0.011 0.012 0.013 0.014 0.015 0.016 0.017 0.018 0.019 0.020 0.021 0.022 0.023 0.024 0.025
75 0.004 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.02 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01 0.01
100 0.008 0.07 0.07 0.06 0.06 0.05 0.05 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.04 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03 0.03
150 0.018 0.22 0.20 0.18 0.16 0.15 0.14 0.13 0.12 0.12 0.11 0.10 0.10 0.09 0.09 0.09 0.08 0.08
200 0.031 0.47 0.43 0.39 0.36 0.33 0.30 0.28 0.27 0.25 0.24 0.22 0.21 0.20 0.19 0.19 0.18 0.17
250 0.049 0.86 0.77 0.70 0.64 0.59 0.55 0.52 0.48 0.45 0.43 0.41 0.39 0.37 0.35 0.34 0.32 0.31
300 0.071 1.40 1.26 1.14 1.05 0.97 0.90 0.84 0.79 0.74 0.70 0.66 0.63 0.60 0.57 0.55 0.52 0.50
375 0.110 2.53 2.28 2.07 1.90 1.75 1.63 1.52 1.42 1.34 1.27 1.20 1.14 1.09 1.04 0.99 0.95 0.91
450 0.159 4.12 3.71 3.37 3.09 2.85 2.65 2.47 2.32 2.18 2.06 1.95 1.85 1.76 1.68 1.61 1.54 1.48
525 0.216 6.21 5.59 5.08 4.66 4.30 3.99 3.73 3.49 3.29 3.11 2.94 2.80 2.66 2.54 2.43 2.33 2.24
600 0.283 8.87 7.98 7.26 6.65 6.14 5.70 5.32 4.99 4.70 4.43 4.20 3.99 3.80 3.63 3.47 3.33 3.19
675 0.358 12.14 10.93 9.93 9.11 8.41 7.80 7.28 6.83 6.43 6.07 5.75 5.46 5.20 4.97 4.75 4.55 4.37
750 0.442 16.08 14.47 13.16 12.06 11.13 10.34 9.65 9.04 8.51 8.04 7.62 7.24 6.89 6.58 6.29 6.03 5.79
825 0.535 20.73 18.66 16.96 15.55 14.35 13.33 12.44 11.66 10.98 10.37 9.82 9.33 8.89 8.48 8.11 7.77 7.46
900 0.636 26.15 23.53 21.39 19.61 18.10 16.81 15.69 14.71 13.84 13.07 12.39 11.77 11.21 10.70 10.23 9.81 9.41
1050 0.866 39.44 35.50 32.27 29.58 27.31 25.36 23.67 22.19 20.88 19.72 18.68 17.75 16.90 16.14 15.43 14.79 14.20
1125 0.994 47.41 42.67 38.79 35.56 32.82 30.48 28.45 26.67 25.10 23.70 22.46 21.33 20.32 19.39 18.55 17.78 17.07
1200 1.131 56.31 50.68 46.07 42.23 38.99 36.20 33.79 31.68 29.81 28.16 26.67 25.34 24.13 23.04 22.04 21.12 20.27
1350 1.431 77.09 69.38 63.08 57.82 53.37 49.56 46.26 43.36 40.81 38.55 36.52 34.69 33.04 31.54 30.17 28.91 27.75
1500 1.767 102.10 91.89 83.54 76.58 70.69 65.64 61.26 57.43 54.05 51.05 48.36 45.95 43.76 41.77 39.95 38.29 36.76
1800 2.545 166.04 149.43 135.85 124.53 114.95 106.74 99.62 93.62 87.90 83.02 78.65 74.72 71.16 67.92 64.97 62.26 59.77
* Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association (2000) “Hydraulic Considerations for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe”
4
** “Lingedburg, Michael, “Civil Engineer Reference Manual”
3-4 MINIMUM VELOCITY CONSIDERATIONS

Sediment can reduce the capacity of a stormwater pipe over time. In
some installations, it may render the pipe useless until the system can be
cleaned. This is an expensive, time-consuming undertaking so
preventative measures should be taken during design. Sedimentation is
of great concern in sewer applications since large, heavy grit may be
present.
To minimize potential problems, flow should be maintained at a
minimum, or self-cleansing, velocity. A commonly accepted self-
cleansing velocity for storm and sanitary sewers is 3 fps (0.9 m/s). In
each design, a final check should be performed to compare the expected
velocity with the self-cleansing velocity. The design velocity for full-
flowing pipes can be approximated with Equation 3-5:
Q
V= Equation 3-5
A
The potential for settling is determined by the specific gravity and diameter of
particle, its cohesive properties, flow velocity, and the roughness of the pipe
interior. For further discussion on the complexities and variables associated
with determining the self-cleansing velocity for a specific pipe diameter and
material, refer to ASCE publication No. 60, “Gravity Sanitary Sewer Design
and Construction.” In some specialized installations where sediment is a
known problem it may be wise to perform a soil analysis prior to final
drainage design.
3-5 MAXIMUM VELOCITY CONSIDERATIONS

High flow velocity can also create problems if not properly taken into
consideration. High velocity is usually considered to be approximately
12 fps (3.7 m/s) but can vary depending on the specific site conditions.
The preferred method of contending with high velocity is to look for
opportunities to minimize it, such as reducing the slope of the pipe. If
that is not feasible, and many times it is not, the velocity must simply be
managed the best way possible.
High velocity, especially if it carries an abrasive effluent, can present
durability problems. Over time, the invert of the pipe can wear
prematurely. Thermoplastics resist the effects of these rigorous
conditions better than many other traditional pipe materials. Additional
information specific to the effects of abrasives on many types of pipe
materials is provided in the Durability section (Section 4) of the Drainage
Handbook.
Special consideration should also be given to the conditions at the pipe
outlet. High flow velocity can erode the channel where the flow is
deposited. Erosion management methods, such as rip-rap, should be
considered in these areas.
Another consideration in high velocity applications is managing the

momentum of the flow. Changes in flow direction will result in large
forces that can cause pipe movement, especially if the pipe size is large,
velocity is very high, and the native soil has a low bearing strength.
Concrete thrust blocks positioned at areas of flow direction change and
sized specifically for the site conditions can be used to control the effects
of momentum.
Anchoring systems may also need to be considered when the velocity is
high or the slope that the pipe is installed is fairly steep. Anchors keep
the pipe from moving down the slope while it is being installed and later
due to the energy of the flow. They are an especially important
consideration if the native soil is subject for movement or instability. ADS
does not produce anchoring systems, but can provide additional
information on companies who are experts in this area. For further
discussion of steep slope applications, refer to “Steep Slope Installations”
in the Installation section (Section 5) of the Drainage Handbook.
3-6 LONG TERM PRESSURE CONSIDERATIONS

Most ADS pipe products are intended for gravity flow applications
only. Storm drainage products are not recommended for long-term
pressure or intermittent pressure flow, including constant head and
pumping applications. N-12 Low Head pipe may be suitable for long-
term and intermittent pressure flow applications where constant
pressure does not exceed 5psi and surge pressure does not exceed
10psi. Contact an ADS sales representative for assistance in
selecting a product suitable for the project application.

3-7 CULVERT CONSIDERATIONS

Culverts are typically short relative to a storm sewer system and are
classified according to which of the ends controls the discharge
capacity. Laboratory tests and field observations indicate two
primary culvert flow control conditions: (1) inlet control and (2) outlet
control. While inlet or outlet control conditions typically do not exist in
storm sewer systems, where a system is controlled by the inlet or
outlet, hydraulic head loss due to the entrance or outlet must be
taken into account. For this reason, the Manning’s formula cannot
be the sole method of pipe sizing and selection.
While the theory of energy conservation will closely affect culvert

design, no single formula or procedure has been developed to
design all culverts, due to the numerous variables involved. True
culvert design is, therefore, often an empirical, trial-and-error
process.
One common variable used in culvert design, is the Entrance Loss

Coefficient (ke). Entrance Loss Coefficients are highly dependant on the
size and shape of the interface between the culvert material and the
fluid. For example, a square cut abrupt culvert edge will result in a
greater loss coefficient than a culvert with a beveled or rounded edge. In
the absence of test data for corrugated polyethylene or polypropylene
pipe, corrugated metal pipe with a similar profile and structure can be
used to estimate the entrance loss coefficients for ADS thermoplastics.
Table 3-3 provides Entrance Loss Coefficients based on available data
for common pipe materials and end treatments. Ultimately, the design
engineer shall determine the most appropriate value for the entrance
loss coefficient to use for the application.
Table 3-3
Entrance Loss Coefficients a,b
(Outlet Control, Full or Partially Full Flow)
Type of Structure and Design of End Treatment ke

a
Pipe, Concrete
Projecting from fill, square cut end 0.5
Square cut with headwall 0.5
Mitered to conform to fill slope 0.7
Beveled edges, 33.7° bevels 0.2
Socket end of pipe 0.2
a b
Pipe, Corrugated Metal , ADS Thermoplastic
Projecting from fill (no headwall) 0.9
Square cut with headwall 0.5
Mitered to conform to fill slope 0.7
End-Section conforming to fill slope 0.5
o 0
Beveled edges (33.7 or 45 bevel) 0.2
a) Data obtained from U.S. Department of Transportation Federal Highway Administration
5
Hydraulic Charts for the Selection of Highway Culverts
b) ADS thermoplastic pipe is estimated to have coefficients in the range of those found for
corrugated metal pipe.

3-8 EXAMPLE PROBLEMS

The following example problems demonstrate use of conveyance factors
in sizing application, basic velocity checks, and optional designs.
Example 1
Given: Field conditions stipulate a pipe capacity of 2 cfs and a slope of
0.5%.
Find: The ADS pipe product providing the optimum hydraulic solution.
Solution: It is necessary to use Equation 3-4 to determine the required
conveyance for the given conditions. Before substituting the values into
the equation, first convert the slope into a value with units of feet/foot as
follows:
0.5% = 0.005 ft/ft
Now substitute values directly into Equation 3-4.

Q
k =
S1/ 2
2
=
(0.005)1 / 2
= 28.3
Refer to Table 3-1 to select the appropriate pipe product having a

minimum conveyance of 28.3, based on the respective Manning’s “n”
value. The most practical solutions are as follows:
12-inch corrugated, smooth interior pipe k = 38.6
15-inch single wall pipe k = 38.2
The optimum solution would be the pipe with conveyance most near that
calculated. Both the 12-inch corrugated, smooth interior and 15-inch
single wall pipes will function in about the same manner because their
conveyances are relatively close to that required. Final selection of pipe
size and material is made in Example 2.
Example 2
Substituting data from tentatively selected solutions from Example 1 into
the velocity formula (Equation 3-5), 12-inch corrugated, smooth interior
pipe and 15-inch single wall pipe will yield velocities of 3.5 fps and 2.2
fps, respectively. Therefore, the 12-inch corrugated, smooth interior pipe
should be selected to attain a self-cleansing velocity.

Example 3
Given: Field conditions stipulate a pipe capacity of 2 cfs and a slope of
0.5%.
Find: The ADS pipe product providing the optimum hydraulic solution.
Solution: It is necessary to use Figure 3-1 and Figure 3-2 to determine the
pipe products
0.5% = 0.005 ft/ft
Refer to Figure 3-1 to select the corrugated, smooth interior pipe diameter.
The intersection of the 0.50% and 2 cfs lines is above the 10” line but below
the 12” therefore 12” corrugated, smooth interior pipe products are practical.
Refer to Figure 3-2 to select the single wall pipe product diameter. The
intersection of the 0.50% and 2 cfs lines is above the 12” line but below the
15”, therefore 15” single wall pipe products are practical.
The optimum solution would be the pipe with the flow capacity at least as
great as the required. Both, the 12-inch corrugated, smooth liner and
15-inch single wall pipes will function in about the same manner because
their flow capacities are greater than that required. Final selection of pipe
size and material is made in Example 4.
Example 4
Substituting data from tentatively selected solutions from Example 4 into Figure
3-1 and Figure 3-2, 12-inch corrugated, smooth interior pipe and 15-inch single
wall pipe will yield velocities of approximately 3.6 fps and 2.8 fps, respectively.
Therefore, the 12-inch corrugated, smooth interior pipe should be selected to
attain a self-cleansing velocity.

3-9 FOOTNOTES
1
Federal Highway Administration, Hydraulic Design of Highway
Culverts (HDS 5), 2nd Edition , 2001, Pg. 33.
2
Federal Highway Administration, Design Charts for Open-
Channel Flow (HDS 3), August 1961, Chapter 5.
3
Clyde, Calvin G., Manning Friction Coefficient Testing of 4-, 10-,
12- and 15-inch Corrugated Plastic Pipe. Utah Water Research
Laboratory, Report No. 36, May 1980.
4
Lingedburg, Michael P.E. Civil Engineer Reference Manual.
Belmont, CA: Professional Publications, Inc.
5
Federal Highway Adminstration, Design Charts of Highway
Culverts (HDS 5), 2nd Edition, 2001, Pg. 223.

Durability
ADS, Inc. Drainage Handbook Durability  4-1
________________________________________________________________________________________________
4-0 DURABILITY
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4-1 Overview of Durability Considerations ..................................... 4-2
4-2 Corrosion ...................................................................................... 4-3
Chemical Corrosion ....................................................................... 4-3
Electrochemical Corrosion ............................................................. 4-4
Stress Crack Resistance ................................................................ 4-4
4-3 Erosion .......................................................................................... 4-5
Combined Erosion and Chemical Corrosion ................................. 4-8
Oxidation........................................................................................ 4-10
4-4 Other Durability Conditions....................................................... 4-11
Sub-Zero Conditions .................................................................... 4-11
High Temperature ........................................................................ 4-11
Ultraviolet Radiation ...................................................................... 4-12
Animal Attack ............................................................................... 4-13
Flammability .................................................................................. 4-13
4-5 Footnotes .................................................................................... 4-14
Tables
4-1 Saskatchewan Research Council Wear Rates.............................. 4-6
4-2 Lane Metal Wear Rates ................................................................. 4-6
4-3 Relative Wear Resistance ............................................................. 4-7
4-4 California State University Abrasion Results ................................ 4-9
Figures
4-1 Abrasion Resistance of Pipe and Bends for HDPE and CMP.. 4-8
4-2 Oxidation Cycle ...................................................................... 4-10

IMPROPER INSTALLATION, NONCOMPLIANCE WITH THESE GUIDELINES FOR
© ADS, Inc. November, 2015
________________________________________________________________________________________________
4-1 OVERVIEW OF DURABILITY CONSIDERATIONS

In a drainage system, adverse conditions challenging the durability of the
materials involved may be found in the soil, air, and effluent. This section
covers the three primary durability concerns in non-pressure drainage
applications:
1) Corrosion,
2) Erosion (abrasion) from effluent, and
3) Weathering effects such as sub-zero temperatures, freeze/thaw
cycles, or exposure to ultraviolet radiation.
In any particular installation, it is quite likely that more than one adverse
condition will be present. When this occurs, the rate of material
deterioration may be greater than the sum of each problem alone.
Thermoplastic is one of the most durable materials available for drainage
applications. Plastics, including polyethylene and polypropylene, are
some of the most inert materials in today’s storm drainage market. They
are also highly resistant to the effects of abrasives and are immune to
galvanic corrosion. Unlike metals, such as steel and aluminum, which are
affected by the pH and galvanic corrosion. In many cases, corrosion
problems are compounded when abrasives are also present.
This section, while discussing corrosion, erosion, and weathering effects
on an individual basis, provides suggestions for appropriate materials
when a multitude of durability factors are present.
The intent of this information is not to determine the life of materials in a
particular installation, but to provide a qualitative means to compare the
durability at various conditions. For specific installations located in an
environment known to be highly aggressive, the manufacturers of
drainage material alternatives should be consulted to ensure the
suitability of their products.
© ADS, Inc., November, 2015

________________________________________________________________________________________________
4-2 CORROSION
CHEMICAL CORROSION
The initial runoff following the onset of a storm, termed the “first flush,”
contains rather high concentrations of road salt, motor oils, fuels, and
other compounds that have accumulated on the ground surface since the
previous storm. Pollutant concentrations are relatively high during the
first flush and then taper off to more diluted levels as the storm
progresses.
Chemical corrosion occurs when aggressive chemicals in the effluent,
individually or in combination, attack the pipe. In some installations, it may
be the soil environment, not the effluent, that causes the corrosion. In
either situation, the end result is a pipe with reduced strength and, in
some cases, negative effects on hydraulic capabilities.
Pipe materials react differently under chemically corrosive environments.
Individual states often make recommendations on environments where
specific products can be used based on their past performance. Soil
environments fluctuate widely making it nearly impossible to offer blanket
statements about product suitability throughout the country.
Polyolefins, such as high density polyethylene (HDPE) and polypropylene
(PP) are stable materials. Polyethylene and polypropylene have been
extensively tested with many potentially corrosive chemicals with few
chemicals having any effect on the material. Of those chemicals that
were not acceptable, fewer still could be expected in a storm sewer in
sufficient concentrations and at a high enough temperature to create
problems even on a rather long-term basis. For further information
regarding chemical resistance of polyethylene and polypropylene, and
additional considerations when evaluating applications, refer to Technical
Notes 4.01: Chemical Resistance of Polyethylene and Elastomers and
4.02: Chemical Resistance of Polypropylene and Elastomers.
Gasket material must also be considered for projects where abnormal
chemicals or abnormal concentrations of chemicals are present. Like
many common stormwater and sanitary sewer pipe materials, ADS storm
and sanitary sewer products utilize gaskets manufactured to meet the
requirements of ASTM F477. In most cases, this gasket material is
resistant to many of the common chemicals found in storm sewer
systems. However, there are chemicals, which may negatively affect the
gasket material, such as high concentrations of hydrocarbons. In
environmental conditions where a standard gasket material is not
suitable, ADS may be able to provide alternative gasket materials to meet
the needs of most project requirements. For further information regarding
chemical resistance of gasket materials, refer to Technical Note 4.01:
Chemical Resistance of Polyethylene and Elastomers or 4.02: Chemical
Resistance of Polypropylene and Elastomers. There is no material
difference between the gaskets provided on polyethylene and
polypropylene products, but elastomer chemical resistance charts are
________________________________________________________________________________________________
provided in both technical notes for ease of reference when researching

polyethylene or polypropylene materials.
ELECTROCHEMICAL CORROSION
Electrochemical, or galvanic, corrosion can occur when metals having
differing electrical qualities are in direct or indirect contact in the presence
of electrical current. Corrosion can occur between entirely different
metals or even between areas on the same pipe having different
electrical properties. It can also occur between the pipe and its
environment.
Stray electrical currents in the soil encourage galvanization. This is
especially true where, in larger metropolitan areas, power generation
stations, subway systems, or buried electrical transmission lines provide a
good source of stray electrical current. Nearby pipe may pick up these
currents and create the environment for galvanic corrosion to occur at an
accelerated rate.
Metals with good conductivity, namely steel and iron, are most prone to
galvanic corrosion. The advanced stages of galvanic corrosion show as
a pitting of the pipe wall and as relatively harmless rust deposits. The end
result of the problem is a gradual weakening of the structural integrity of
the pipe and a lessening of its hydraulic qualities.
Several methods are available to prevent or reduce the rate of galvanic
corrosion although, depending on the environment, they may prove to be
rather costly solutions. One alternative uses blocks of “sacrificing”
metals, such as zinc or magnesium, in contact with the pipes. These
materials corrode at a faster rate than the pipe allowing the pipe to remain
relatively free of corrosion. The sacrificing metal block must be checked
routinely and periodically replaced in order for the system to work
properly.
Another method of preventing corrosion is to coat the metallic pipe with a
material that cannot support electrical activity. Polymers and asphalt
materials are often used for this purpose.
A third alternative is to install a material that is unable to support galvanic
corrosion, such as thermoplastics like polyethylene, polypropylene and
PVC. Thermoplastics are unable to carry electrical current and therefore
do not require precautions such as coatings or sacrificing metal blocks.
Thermoplastics provide a cost-effective drainage alternative immune to
electrochemically corrosive environments.
STRESS CRACK RESISTANCE

The durability of a material directly impacts structural performance. For
HDPE pipe, the stress-crack resistance of critical structural members
must be accurately assessed to determine the long-term implications on
the pipe and installation integrity. Service life, therefore, directly impacts
structural integrity and provides the basis for requiring materials to meet

________________________________________________________________________________________________
or exceed the specified performance life of the facility, which in many

cases approaches 100 years.
To verify the base material has adequate stress capacity for a given
application, the base HDPE material is subjected to a Notched Constant
Ligament Stress (NCLS) test. Both of the industry accepted national
standards for corrugated polyethylene pipe used in storm drainage
applications, ASTM F2306, AASHTO M294, as well as the Canadian
Standards Association CSA B182.8 and Bureau de Nomalisation du
Quebec BNQ 3614-120, specifically require a 24-hour NCLS test to be
conducted on the base polyethylene material used in pipe production.
In addition to the NCLS test on the base resin, the service life of dual wall
corrugated HDPE pipe has historically been assessed based on stress
cracking at the pipe’s inner liner and corrugation wall interface1. Although
this circumferential cracking is easy to observe and assess, it does not
represent a critical structural component of the pipe. The fact that one
could remove the entire inner liner of a dual wall corrugated HDPE pipe
and not influence its structural performance is evidence of the error of
basing a service life on such a non-critical component. The highest
tensile stress locations of buried corrugated HDPE pipe occur in the outer
most fiber of the corrugation, where the bending strains are the greatest.
Compression related strains do not result in any long-term stress
cracking, so one must concentrate on tensile strains. These tensile
bending strains are associated with deflection, which is a key AASHTO
design parameter. The stress-crack resistance of these corrugation
members under bending strains, therefore, reflects the critical structural
components to evaluate for stress-crack resistance2.
For applications encountering continuous pressure, high peak pressures,

or extreme applications resulting in high induced stresses, HDPE
materials with a higher NCLS value or an HDB pressure rated material
may be required. Contact ADS engineering for additional guidance on
these types of applications.
Polypropylene, while similar in many others aspects, is not similar to

polyethlyene with respect to stress cracking. Polypropylene has a
significantly higher stress crack resistance and is therefore not
susceptible to cracking at the same magnitudes at which HDPE may
crack.
4-3 EROSION
The amount of stones, grit, and other debris (abrasives) found in a storm
sewer vary with the drainage installation. The velocity of or frequency
with which the abrasive materials occur is also unpredictable. It is for
these reasons that laboratory data representative of field conditions have
been nearly impossible to generate. Much of what the industry currently
knows about the effects of abrasives on the life of pipe has been

________________________________________________________________________________________________
discovered through visual inspections of existing systems and the

reputation of well-established drainage products.
Laboratory tests are valuable, however, for developing relative wear rates.
The Saskatchewan Research Council conducted a laboratory investigation
on several materials to quantify the degree of wear that could be expected
from abrasives applied in a controlled fashion. The Council compared a
series of 2-inch (50mm) pipes, including polyethylene, steel, and
aluminum. The abrasives included coarse sand (30 mesh) and fine sand
(48 mesh). Each was used in a 40 percent by weight slurry and applied at
a controlled temperature and velocities to a closed-loop system. The test
ran three weeks at 15 fps (4.6 m/s) and six weeks at 7 fps (2.1 m/s).
Material loss was then measured. Wear was assumed to be evenly
distributed over the interior of the surface so that gouging, if it did occur,
was not measured. Results from the study for velocities of 15 fps (4.6 m/s)
were extrapolated to obtain wear rates on an annual basis as shown in
Table 4-1.
Table 4-1
Saskatchewan Research Council Wear Rates3
Wear Rates (mm/yr)
Coarse Sand (30 mesh) Fine Sand (48 mesh)
Material
@ 7 fps @ 15 fps @ 7 fps @ 15 fps
Steel 0.65 1.81 0.04 0. 2
Aluminum 1.81 7.48 0.14 0.86
Polyethylene 0.06 0.46 nil 0.06
Lane Metal performed an abrasion resistance test in 1982 on several

PVC pipes and Class III reinforced concrete pipe. The tests simulated an
extremely harsh environment by filling a length of pipe with a stone/water
slurry and sealing each end with a watertight cap. The pipes were placed
on a rocker arm and rocked 45 degrees from the horizontal. Wear on the
pipes was inspected on a daily basis and additional stone was added to
maintain the abrasiveness. Following the 91 hour test, thickness
measurements were taken along the path of heaviest wear. Results of
the Lane metal test are shown in Table 4-2.
Table 4-2
Lane Metal Wear Rates4
Material Wear, 10-3 in/hr (10-3 mm/hr)
PVC 0.3 (7.6)
RCP 0.9 (22.9)
Some means of correlating Tables 4-1 and 4-2 was needed to be able to
compare the results of both tests. As a similar thermoplastic, PVC and
polyethylene could be expected to behave much the same, and it was
this assumption that was used to further the investigation.
A study was performed in 1975 by a team of Swedish scientists dealing
with the effects of mechanical cleaning methods on polyethylene and
PVC pipe. Both materials were about equal in performance with
polyethylene outperforming PVC at times, and PVC outperforming
________________________________________________________________________________________________
polyethylene in other instances. It was concluded that PVC and

polyethylene are approximately equal in abrasion resistance.
In each of the three laboratory tests reviewed, the pipes under study were
subjected to an environment that was harsher than they would probably
experience in an actual installation. Laboratory testing could also not
account for the increased rate of corrosion and/or abrasion that would
occur on steel and concrete pipes after the first few resilient layers had
been removed.
While test data for polypropylene is less extensive due to its previously
limited use in drainage applications, two types of tests were conducted to
determine polypropylene’s abrasion resistance and provide a means for a
relative comparison to other pipe materials.
One test placed high density polyethylene and polypropylene plaques in a
closed-conduit system with water flow carrying abrasive sand going over
the plaques in order to determine the mass loss over time. Results
indicated that while polypropylene performed slightly better than high
density polyethylene, both materials performed well and have comparable
abrasion resistance.
The second test, performed by Polymer Diagnostics, Inc., used the Taber
abrasion method where rotating abrading wheels were placed in direct
contact with the material to create a rub-wear action. Results provide a
mass loss of the sample. The Taber test included HDPE, PP and PVC
samples. The HDPE and PP samples had minimal percent mass loss.
While the PVC samples had a slightly higher percent mass loss, it can be
concluded that all three materials have comparable abrasion resistance.
Based on the results from both these tests, polypropylene is comparable
to HDPE and PVC as it relates to abrasion resistance of the pipe
materials. A full summary of these test methods and the results are
available in Technical Note 4.03: Abrasion Resistance of Thermoplastic
Material.
The results of all tests discussed so far, while not able to be compared
directly, are highly valuable when comparing wear rates in relative terms.
The wear rates of the materials were compared to those of the toughest
materials, thermoplastics including polyethylene and polypropylene, to
obtain relative wear resistance as shown in Table 4-3.
Table 4-3
Relative Wear Resistance
Polyethylene 10
Polypropylene 10
PVC 10
RCP 3
CSP 3
CAP 1
Tests conducted by Schreiber and Hocheimer to determine the effects of
bends on the relative wear rates indicate a wear resistance for HDPE that
is approximately four times better than the wear resistance of steel.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
These tests were conducted with both 7% and 14% by volume quartz
sand to water mixtures, with an average flow rate velocity of 23 fps.
Figure 4-1 illustrates the results from this study.
Figure 4-1
Abrasion Resistance of Pipe and Bends for HDPE and CMP5
COMBINED EROSION AND CHEMICAL CORROSION

When more than one adverse condition is present in a pipeline, the
effects of both combine to form an environment with the potential to
drastically shorten the design life. Acids or alkalis in combination with
abrasives, acids in combination with freeze/thaw cycles, or abrasives in
combination with freeze/thaw cycles are just a few of the combinations
that can be present in an installation.
Acids and abrasives in combination are often present in storm drainage
networks and were therefore selected as subjects in a study performed at
California State University6. This combination was previously known to
have a great deal of impact on concrete products, so the main focus of
the study was on concrete and how it compared to polyethylene. Again,
knowing polyethylene and polypropylene are both in the polyolefin group
of plastics, their wear resistance is generally considered comparable
where polypropylene will behave similarly to polyethylene under the same
conditions.
A rocker-type mechanism was also used in the California State research.
A “cycle” consisted of one end of the pipe swinging through an 83 degree
arc and was completed in about ten seconds. A total of 100,000 half-
cycles (50,000 complete cycles) were used in the tests.
For the abrasive materials a crushed quartz [1/2-inch to 3/4-inch (13-
19mm)] and river run quartz gravel 2-inch (51mm) minimum were
selected. In order to reasonably simulate an installation, 2/3 of the
abrasives were crushed quartz with the remainder being the river run
gravel. Velocity of the gravel/fluid slurry through the pipe length was

________________________________________________________________________________________________
timed at 3 fps (0.9 m/s). Midway through the test the aggregate was
examined for wear and it was determined that the abrasive should be
recharged.
Tests were run in both a chemically neutral environment (pH 7.0) and
with a moderately strong acid (pH 4.0). The acidity of the circulating fluid
was checked at frequent intervals and adjusted, if necessary, with acetic
acid. Controlling the acidity was especially important for the concrete
pipe because of its tendency to raise the pH as a result of its alkaline
composition.
Twelve-inch (300mm) HDPE smooth interior polyethylene pipe was
tested with the results showing that the abrasive/acid slurry had an almost
negligible effect when compared to the results of the abrasives in a
neutral environment. In the neutral environment the maximum abrasion
was 0.021-inches (0.5mm). The polyethylene allowed just 14 percent
more abrasion along the invert in the acidic environment.
The results for the 12-inch (300mm) non-reinforced concrete pipe were
quite different. In a neutral environment, wear along the invert was
approximately 0.80-inch (20.3mm). The addition of acid to the slurry
increased this wear nearly 90 percent. Had a reinforced pipe been used,
the steel would have been exposed thereby creating a third durability
issue, galvanic corrosion, as well as structural concerns from reduced
wall strength.
Table 4-4
California State University Abrasion Results
Effluent
pH = 7.0 pH = 4.0
w/ abrasives w/ abrasives
0.021” 0.023”
12” Polyethylene
(0.53mm) (0.58mm)
0.80” 1.52”
12” Non-reinforced Concrete
(20.3mm) (38.6mm)
NOTE: None of the aforementioned tests in this section are intended to determine the life of
any drainage pipe. In all cases, the tests simulated extremely harsh environments on a
constant basis. It would be in error to extrapolate any wear rates presented, compare them
with the pipe wall thickness, and then assign a life to the pipe in a typical drainage
application.
These test results are intended to provide guidelines to compare the relative durability of
some of the most popular drainage materials on the market today. Product life is
dependent on many factors including wall thickness and exact material composition; size,
shape, frequency, and velocity of abrasives; soil and effluent pH and composition; and the
ability of the soil, effluent, and pipe to support galvanic corrosion.
The life of some of these materials can be improved by the addition of liners or coatings to
reduce the effects of the abrasion or corrosion on the base material.

________________________________________________________________________________________________
Further complicating the process of calculating the service life of materials is determining
when the pipe is rated as “failed.” Understanding the failure mode and the associated
structural, hydraulic, and durability issues created at the failure point is as important as
understanding the life of the product itself.
OXIDATION
Oxidation is the process by which a polymer, such as polyethylene or
polypropylene, first absorbs energy through heat, UV exposure or
other methods. This first step in the reaction excites polymer
molecules and creates radicals within the material. These radicals
react with oxygen causing more radicals to form. Where oxidation
occurs, the material can become more susceptible to stress cracking
as the material molecular weight decreases causing the material to
become more brittle or soften. As stated by Tisinger and Giroud7,
oxidation will continue until the radicals interact with antioxidants,
recombine, or when the energy source is removed.
Oxidation of polymers has been studied for a number of years through

the gas pipe, geomembrane, and hot water pressure pipe industries.
The result of this work, shown in Figure 4-2, clearly shows the onset
of the mechanical property degradation is well beyond the design life
of the product where an appropriate antioxidant and good stress crack
resistance is present.
Figure 4-2
Oxidation Cycle
A B C
100
A= depletion time
of antioxidants
PROPERTY RETAINED (%)
B= induction time to onset

of polymer degradation
50 C= time to reach 50%

degradation of a
particular property
Service Life
AGING TIME (years - log scale)
Source: Hsuan1 (2003)

________________________________________________________________________________________________
4-4 OTHER DURABILITY CONDITIONS

SUB-ZERO CONDITIONS
Bitter cold conditions can make some plastic drainage products brittle.
This results in difficult installations due to the precautions that must be
taken to avoid damaging the pipe. This is particularly true of PVC which
can become extremely brittle in freezing and sub-zero conditions. Industry
standards typically test HDPE at temperatures of 4oC or lower while PVC
is predominantly tested at ambient temperatures. While polypropylene
can withstand temperatures slightly below freezing, to avoid susceptibility
to cracking, the working temperature should not fall below 0oF (-17 C).
The minimum working temperature of polyethylene is around -40oF (-40
C).
While, polyethylene can endure continuous freezing temperatures without
brittleness or any additional precautions in the installation, caution should
be used when working with PVC or polypropylene at low temperatures.
Metals and concrete are not affected by cold conditions.
HIGH TEMPERATURE
The combination of direct sunlight and high ambient temperatures can
cause black polyethylene to absorb heat, although generally not to the
extent that will affect installation or performance of the pipe. Generally,
the maximum working temperature for both polyethylene and
polypropylene pipe is 140oF (60oC), but is also dependent on the
chemicals in the liquid carried. For any plastic, an increase in temperature
reduces stiffness; a decrease in temperature increases stiffness.
A test was conducted in 1992 to determine the impact of high
temperature on polyethylene pipe. The test, conducted during a clear day
with temperatures in the low 80 degrees F (mid 20 C), involved putting a
salamander space heater into a 36-inch (900mm) diameter smooth
interior polyethylene pipe and raising the temperature of the outside of the
pipe to 140 F (60oC). The pipe was then backfilled and compacted to
approximately 95% standard Proctor density to the top of the pipe. The
heater was then turned off and seven feet (2.1m) of loose clay soil was
added. The measured vertical deflection increased 4% immediately after
the backfill operation and then decreased 1% from that value after the
load was placed. This test represents an extreme condition, but
nonetheless validates that high temperatures do not significantly affect
the handling or installation of polyethylene pipe. As the pipe cools to the
temperature of its soil environment, the original stiffness characteristics
will return.
The coefficient of thermal expansion for polyethylene is 6.5x10-5 inch/inch
length/degree F. Generally, this means the pipe changes 0.078-in per
100-ft length of pipe for each degree F. Polypropylene has a slightly lower
coefficient of thermal expansion of 5.0x10-5 inch/inch length/degree F,
________________________________________________________________________________________________
with an upper limit value closer to that of polyethylene. The means

polypropylene may change 0.06-in per 100-ft length of pipe for each
degree F, or more. While the two materials have comparable expansion
coefficients, the light grey color of ADS HP polypropylene pipe will have
lower light absorption (thus lower heat conversion) when exposed to
sunlight compared to black polyethylene.
Where there is a large temperature differential between the pipe and the
installed condition, such as pipe stored on the ground in full sunlight then
immediately placed in a trench and backfilled, lateral movement from
thermal contraction is restrained by the backfill. This lateral restraint can
result in impacting longitudinal stresses in the pipe wall. Additionally, if
shrinkage were to occur in a longitudinal direction, the result could be
joints opening as the pipe cools. Due to the coefficient of thermal
expansion for polyethylene and polypropylene, precautions against
longitudinal shrinkage should be taken in applications where there is an
extreme temperature differential between the pipe and the surrounding
conditions. This is especially critical in above-ground installations.
ADS Triple Wall small diameter product has a titanium dioxide additive to
make the exterior of the pipe white in color. By reflecting much of the
solar heat, extreme temperature differentials within the pipe wall and
around the circumference are eliminated. Maintaining consistent
temperatures eliminates warping of the pipe during storage at the job site.
Titanium dioxide is especially important to prevent warping in the more
rigid long lengths of Triple Wall, but it also protects these products from
exposure to ultraviolet radiation, discussed further in the following
material.
ULTRAVIOLET RADIATION
A certain segment of the sunlight spectrum, ultraviolet (UV) radiation, can
cause unprotected plastic materials to degrade over time. In an effort to
reduce these effects, ADS incorporates a high quality UV stabilizer and
antioxidant package into all polyethylene and polypropylene products to
protect any portion that is exposed to the sun. In polyethylene, a
minimum content of 2% carbon black is required by ASTM D3350 for
weather resistant grades. Carbon black is an excellent UV stabilizer and
has a proven track record in the telecommunications and automobile
industries. Polypropylene products incorporate an outdoor, weatherable
pigment system plus a Hindered Amine Light Stabilizer, or HALS, to
produce a pipe resistant to UV radiation over the life of the product.
Ongoing testing being conducted in Florida, Arizona, and Ohio, shows no
degradation in physical or rheological properties of the pipe after a year of
direct exposure to sunlight. Titanium dioxide is added to ADS Triple Wall
products to both protect the pipe from UV radiation and reflect sunlight to
maintain a consistent temperature.
With the UV stabilizers incorporated into polyethylene and polypropylene,
the radiation can only penetrate a thin layer into the pipe wall over the
service life of the pipe. The amount of additive protects the pipe from UV
damage for typical on-site storage periods in addition to the inventory
________________________________________________________________________________________________
storage time accounted for at the factory. It is important to understand

that once the outer layer has been faded by the sun, it functions as a
shield to protect the rest of the pipe from further degradation. A high
percentage of the pipe’s original strength properties remain intact
because the majority of the wall remains unharmed. Thus, even the
exposed ends of large diameter culverts remain structurally sound.
All thermoplastics, including PVC, are likewise affected by ultraviolet
radiation. Metals and concrete pipes are not affected.
It is also important to realize that UV is only an issue during the time the
pipe is exposed to sunlight. Following installation, UV radiation is no
longer an issue for any thermoplastic product.
ANIMAL ATTACK
Neither polyethylene nor polypropylene attracts or act as a nutrient for
animals. As with any pipe material, rodents will gnaw through pipe if it
acts as a barrier to food or water, but the occurrence is rare. Currently, no
known microbes attack polyethylene or polypropylene.
FLAMMABILITY
While the risk of fire occurring in storm or sanitary sewer pipe systems is
very limited, there are applications involving culverts or outfall structures
where fire may potentially occur. In these applications where fire does
occur, nearly all pipe materials can be affected under the right conditions.
The National Fire Protection Association (NFPA 704) has given both
polyethylene and polypropylene a rating of 1 (Slow Burning) on a scale of
0 to 4, where higher ratings indicate a greater vulnerability. A report
published by the Florida Department of Transportation entitled High
Density Polyethylene Pipe Fire Risk Evaluations states “HDPE pipe is not
at significant risk of fire when installed to present standards and exposed
to fire such as that may be encountered in roadside grass fires”.
The natural gas industry has utilized polyethylene pipe, in diameters up to
18 in., for more than 30 years without reported problems. Polypropylene
is commonly used for cold and hot water distribution lines, among other
uses, and has seen growing use internationally for years. For areas
where flammability is of extra concern, all pipe materials can be protected
with the use of inflammable end treatments such as the use of Rip-rap,
gravel, or concrete headwalls around exposed ends.

________________________________________________________________________________________________
4-5 FOOTNOTES
1
Hsuan, Grace (2003). “Laboratory Tests to Evaluate Crack Free Service
Life of HDPE Corrugated Pipes.” Florida DOT Materials Report.
2
Kurdziel, John M., P.E. and Palermo, Eugene F., PhD., “Stress Crack
Resistance of Structural Members in Corrugated High Density
Polyethylene Pipe,”( Transporation Research Board, 2007).
3
Haas, D.B. and Smith, L.G., Erosion Studies, Saskatchewan Research
Council, E75-7, Sept. 1975.
4
Lane Metal Products Co., Inc., Plastic Bore Corrugated Steel Pipe Test
Program, 1983.
5
Schreiber, W., and Hocheimer, M., “Vergleichende Verschlei Bversuche
an Stahl-und Hostalen-Rohren Sowie Gummischlauchen mit
Durchstromenden Sand-Wasser-Gemish”, Bericht Nr. 681042, Frankfort:
Hoechst AG, 1968.
6
Corrugated Plastic Tubing Association, Abrasion Resistance of
Polyethylene and Other Pipes (Sacramento, CA, 1989).
7
Tisinger, L.G. & Giroud, J.P. (1993). The Durability of HDPE
Geomembranes. Geotechnical Fabrics Report.

Installation
ADS, Inc. Drainage Handbook Installation ♦ 5-1
________________________________________________________________________________________________
5-0 INSTALLATION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
5-1 Overview of Installation Considerations................................... 5-3
5-2 Pre-Installation Storage and Handling ...................................... 5-4
5-3 Line and Grade ............................................................................ 5-5
5-4 Trench Excavation....................................................................... 5-5
5-5 Backfill Envelope Construction ................................................. 5-7
Backfill Material.............................................................................. 5-8
Backfill Placement ....................................................................... 5-12
Compaction.................................................................................. 5-16
Mechanical Compaction Equipment............................................ 5-16
5-6 Joints .......................................................................................... 5-18
N-12® Plain End (soil-tight couplers) ............................................ 5-18
N-12® ST IB (gasketed soil-tight couplers) .................................. 5-18
N-12® WT IB (gasketed watertight couplers)............................... 5-19
HP Storm (gasketed watertight couplers).................................... 5-19
SaniTite® (gasketed watertight couplers)..................................... 5-19
SaniTite® HP (gasketed watertight couplers) .............................. 5-19
N-12® Low Head (gasketed watertight couplers) ........................ 5-19
5-7 Other Installation Considerations............................................ 5-21

Construction and Paving Equipment ........................................... 5-21
Joining Different Pipe Types or Sizes.......................................... 5-22
Field Connections ........................................................................ 5-22
Curvilinear Installations................................................................ 5-22
Manhole and Catch Basin Connections ...................................... 5-23
Vertical Installations ..................................................................... 5-23
Groundwater ................................................................................ 5-24
Flotation ....................................................................................... 5-24
Parallel Pipe Installations............................................................. 5-26
Steep Slope Installations ............................................................. 5-27
Cambered Installations ................................................................ 5-27
Sliplining....................................................................................... 5-28
Post-Construction Inspection....................................................... 5-28
5-8 Appendix A-5 ............................................................................. 5-30

Other Technical Resources ......................................................... 5-33
Figures
5-1 Typical Subtrench Installation ........................................................ 5-7
5-2 Typical Backfill Structure ............................................................. 5-13
5-3 Rammer Compactors .................................................................. 5-16
5-4 Static Compactors ....................................................................... 5-17
5-5 Vibrating Compactors .................................................................. 5-17
5-6 Minimum Pipe Spacing ............................................................... 5-26
5-7 Cambered Pipe Installations........................................................ 5-28
 ADS, Inc., November 2023

________________________________________________________________________________________________
Tables
5-1 Minimum Trench Widths ................................................................ 5-5
5-2 Classes of Embedment and Backfill Materials ............................ 5-10
5-3 General Recommendations for Installation and
Use of Soils & Aggregates ........................................................... 5-15
5-4 Compaction Equipment Selection Guide..................................... 5-18
5-5 Guidelines for Joint Performance Selection................................. 5-20
5-6 Temporary Cover Requirements for Light Construction Traffic ... 5-21
5-7 Bending Radii for ADS Thermoplastic Pipe ................................. 5-23
5-8 Approximate Weight of ADS Thermoplastic Pipes ...................... 5-25
5-9 Minimum Cover Required to Prevent Flotation............................ 5-26
A-5-1A Available Product-Specific Technical Literature &
Detail Drawings ............................................................................ 5-30
A-5-1B Available (U.S.) Product-Specific Technical Literature & Detail
Drawings…………………………………………………………..5-30
A-5-2A Minimum Installation Requirements for ADS
Thermoplastic Products (U.S.)..................................................... 5-31
A-5-2B Minimum Installation Requirements for ADS
Thermoplastic Products (Canadian)……………………………..5-32

IMPROPER INSTALLATION, NONCOMPLIANCE WITH THESE GUIDELINES FOR INSTALLATION OF
PRODUCT, OR USE OUTSIDE THE GUIDELINES SET FORTH HEREIN.

________________________________________________________________________________________________
5-1 OVERVIEW OF INSTALLATION

CONSIDERATIONS
Installation of ADS pipe is in most respects very much like that of any
quality pipe installation. The strength of a pipe system shall be
considered a combination of the pipe itself and the backfill envelope.
Proper construction maximizes the drainage capabilities designed into the
pipe by maintaining alignment and load-carrying ability.
Recommendations for proper backfill and installation for ADS products
are based primarily on the requirements of ASTM D2321 "Recommended
Practice for Underground Installation of Flexible Thermoplastic Sewer
Pipe", CSA B182.11-11 “Standard Practice for the Installation of
Thermoplastic Drain, and BNQ 1809-3 “Construction Work-General
Technical Specification- Drinking Water and Sewer Lines”. These
handbooks are not intended to replace standard industry or project
specifications, but to provide guidance based on our experience, research
and recommendations for proper product performance.
The elements regarding backfill that are addressed in this section are as
follows:
Proper backfill material selection - A variety of materials can be used
as structural backfill with the final decision, many times, based on what is
most available locally. Native soil may be an appropriate material
providing it meets the basic criteria established in this section.
Proper backfill compaction - Compaction forces out air and moisture to
provide a more stable structure. Minimum compaction levels are based
on the material characteristics and the design load; some situations may
require the use of mechanical compactor while others require simply
tamping the material to eliminate voids.
Proper backfill structure - An adequate quantity of structural backfill is
necessary to ensure adequate support. Undisturbed native soil from a
trench wall often provides additional support. Typical trench dimensions
and the effect of the trench wall are discussed in this section.
In addition, this section discusses job-site handling, trench construction
and pipe installation for ADS products, compaction methods, and several
specialized installation considerations.
Federal regulations covering safety for construction are
published in the Safety and Health Regulations for Construction
under the Department of Labor, Occupational Safety and Health
Administration (OSHA). These regulations define practices,
which must be followed.

________________________________________________________________________________________________
5-2 PRE-INSTALLATION STORAGE AND

HANDLING
Thermoplastic pipes such as polyethylene and polypropylene are
lightweight and easy to use. While no special care is needed in handling
and installation a few precautions should be set forth.
• Follow all applicable safety regulations when handling pipe.
• The pipe shall not be dropped from the delivery truck into an open
trench, or onto uneven surfaces.
• Avoid dragging or striking the pipe against another pipe or object.
• Avoid dragging the pipe across the ground.
• Avoid any impact to the bell or spigot.
• Do not drive over the pipe prior to installation.
• Inspect the pipe and joining systems before installation.
• Care shall be taken to not over home the pipe during assembly.
Many ADS drainage products are available palletized allowing for
convenient transporting and orderly storage. If the products were not
received on a pallet, the pipe should be carefully stacked. One method
commonly used is to secure the bottom lengths of pipe together side-by-
side, or use stop blocks, and then place additional pipe on top. Where
pipe is stock piled, the total pile height shall not exceed 5-feet and the
pipe must be adequately restrained to prevent pile collapse. Do not walk
on stock piled pipe. Additional handling and storage information is
available upon request.
Ambient temperature extremes do not affect the strength or handling
characteristics of ADS pipe products. Cold temperatures can affect the
impact resistance of some thermoplastics, although polyethylene and
polypropylene remain highly impact resistant. In-house quality checks on
polyethylene products demonstrate that the impact resistance at zero
degrees F (-18C) is many times that required by specification.
Additionally, hot weather, especially when coupled with direct sunlight, will
raise the pipe temperature, but will not significantly affect handling or
installation behavior.
Depending on the product, either carbon black or another UV stabilizer is
added to the polyethylene or polypropylene to protect against ultraviolet
light; unprotected plastic can become less impact resistant over time.
Such additives are required by the specification and protect the pipe
during storage periods at the manufacturing facility and at the job site.
Ultraviolet light is no longer an issue after installation.
Long-term exposure to ultraviolet light causes slightly different results.
The UV stabilizer protects the pipe for several years, after which the
impact strength of the exposed layer, generally 0.001-inch (0.03mm), is
significantly reduced. This damaged layer then functions in shielding the
remainder of the pipe wall from any further damage. There are HDPE
________________________________________________________________________________________________
culverts, currently under observation, that were installed in 1974. The

culverts have retained nearly all of their original strength characteristics
and support strong evidence of continued service.
5-3 LINE AND GRADE

Storm drain and sewer pipe systems are designed to provide
hydraulic capacity based on pipe size and slope. The alignment or
line of the pipe is the horizontal location of the pipe while the grade is
the vertical slope of the pipe. In order for a pipe system to function as
designed, it is important to install the pipe to the proper line and
grade.
Generally, no special practices are required to maintain line and

grade; however, certain installation techniques can greatly increase
the system performance and rate of installation.
Alignment is established by a field survey. Once the trench is

excavated on line, the pipe bedding shall be placed to proper
thickness. The top of the bedding shall be adjusted to allow for the
difference between the plan invert (flowline) and pipe profile wall
thickness. To determine the dimension to be subtracted from the pipe
inverts indicated on the plans when checking bedding elevations
measure the distance from the interior side of the liner to the crown of
the corrugation.
5-4 TRENCH EXCAVATION

The width of the trench depends on the pipe diameter, backfill
material, and the method of compaction. Trenches that are too
narrow will not allow for proper pipe installation, whereas trenches
that are overly wide are unnecessarily costly. As a practical matter,
standard bucket sizes may also factor into the decision. The design
engineer may modify the trench widths based on an evaluation of the
competency of the in-situ materials, the quality and compaction level
of the backfill, the design loads and the compaction equipment to be
used. In lieu of the engineer's recommendations or governing agency
specifications, the following trench widths are suggested in table 5-1.
Table 5-1
Minimum Trench Widths
Nominal Pipe Nominal Pipe Minimum Trench in.
Minimum Trench in.
Diameter, Diameter, (m)
(m)
in. (mm) in. (mm)
4 (100) 21 (0.5) 24 (600) 48 (1.2)
6 (150) 23 (0.6) 30 (750) 56 (1.4)
8 (200) 26 (0.7) 36 (900) 64 (1.6)
10 (250) 28 (0.7) 42 (1050) 72 (1.8)
12 (300) 30 (0.8) 48 (1200) 80 (2.0)

________________________________________________________________________________________________
15 (375) 34 (0.9) 54 (1350) 88 (2.2)

18 (450) 39 (1.0) 60 (1500) 96 (2.4)
Trench widths should only be wide enough to permit the adequate

placement and compaction of the embedment materials. This ideal
trench width is normally referred to as the minimum trench width. It is
designated in accordance with national standards and generally assures
the width allows for backfill material to flow on either side of the pipe and
permits the compaction of this material. If the width is not sufficiently wide
for the materials and proposed compaction methods a wider trench
allowing for proper installation shall be constructed.
In very poor native soils (for example; peat, muck, or highly expansive
soils), a wider trench width with possibly filter fabric may be required. This
wider trench width shall be based on an evaluation of the in-situ soil, and
the design and construction loads.
Trench widths for pipe are often determined by the bucket size available
for the excavator. In many cases, the bucket width can significantly
exceed the ideal trench width. Wide trenches are not only costly to
excavate and fill with backfill material they actually reduce the structural
integrity of the pipe/backfill system. This fact is noted in the AASHTO
LRFD Bridge Construction Specification, Section 30, “Trenches shall be
kept to the specified width as any increase in trench width will increase
the load on the pipe.”
Years of consolidation create a very stable soil environment. The desire
is to destroy as little of that stability as necessary when digging the
trench. Stable trench walls actually enhance the structural integrity of the
system when the trench is relatively narrow. Overly wide trenches also
require more backfill material and more compaction which are typically
not as stable as the undisturbed native material. A stable trench wall is
characterized as one that can stand without support; however this does
not refer to the possible need of trench wall supports to comply with
OSHA.
It should be noted that although the pipe will have less load in a narrow
trench condition, a wide trench application is used for the design
methodology for thermoplastic pipe found in AASHTO LRFD Bridge
Design Specifications Section 12. This point is clearly illustrated in
Section 12.12, “narrow trenches yield a desirable level of conservatism,
since the transfer of the load to in-situ trench wall is not considered in
flexible pipe design.”
The depth of the trench is dictated by the geography of the site and the
pipe slope required. However, if an adequate foundation for the pipe is
not available at the desired depth, additional excavation will be needed.
Rock outcroppings, muck, and other unsuitable materials do not provide
proper support. They shall be removed and replaced with suitable
granular material. Refer also to Figure 5-1.
Trenching shall be completed in existing soils with sidewalls reasonably
vertical to the top of the pipe. For positive projection embankment
________________________________________________________________________________________________
installations, the embankment material shall be placed and compacted to

a minimum of one (1') foot above the pipe and the trench excavated into
the embankment. When excavation depths or soil conditions require
shoring or use of a trench box, the bottom of the shoring or trench box
should be placed no lower than the top of the pipe. This prevents
disruption of the backfill envelope when removing the shoring or trench
box. Dragging the trench box shall only be done if it does not damage the
pipe or disrupt the backfill, otherwise, the box shall be lifted vertically into
its new position. If this practice cannot be followed, consideration should
be given to leaving the shoring in place. When the trench box must be
located below the top of the pipe, the most effective way to maintain a
sound system is to provide a ‘sub trench’ within which to place the pipe
and backfill. For safety, the bottom of the trench box should not be greater
than 24” above the bottom of the trench. For more information on the use
of trench boxes, refer to Technical Note 5.01: Recommended Use for
Trench Boxes.
Figure 5-1
Typical Sub Trench Installation
5-5 BACKFILL ENVELOPE CONSTRUCTION

Backfill construction shall be evaluated as part of the structural design of
polyethylene and polypropylene pipe like it is for other pipe materials.
ASTM D2321/ CSA B182.11-11 serve as the basis for installation
recommendations in trafficked installations. Acceptable backfill materials
and construction methods are very similar or, in many cases, identical to
those required for other types of pipe material.
The primary purpose of the backfill envelope is to provide long-term
support to the pipe. In a properly constructed backfill envelope, the loads
are distributed across the crown of the pipe to the material along the sides
and then to the pipe bedding and foundation. This load arching effect
reduces the total load applied to the pipe.
The load that a flexible pipe will carry is related to the backfill envelope
construction. The load-carrying capacity of a pipe/backfill system will be

________________________________________________________________________________________________
determined by a combination of the backfill material, the level of

compaction, and the placement of the backfill material. However, the type
of application may also influence what type of backfill is required. These
and other related issues are discussed in subsequent paragraphs in this
section.
BACKFILL MATERIAL
Material selection is the first and most important step to creating a
structurally sound backfill envelope. In general, backfill material should be
of an aggregate nature, able to be compacted, if necessary, into a
structurally sound structure. A variety of materials, including some native
soils, meet these requirements.
Backfill offers passive resistance, termed the “modulus of soil reaction”.
The modulus of soil reaction is determined by a combination of the
material and the amount of compaction. The type of material (sand,
gravel, clay, etc.) and compaction level (standard Proctor density)
determine overall strength of the backfill. Some research indicates that
other factors, such as the beneficial effects of trench walls, may add to the
conservancy of the backfill strength, although those relationships are
often neglected. (This information assumes the trench walls are at least
as strong as the backfill material.)
The strength of the backfill can be described using different parameters.
One way is by describing it in terms of the modulus of soil reaction (E’),
which is an empirical value developed by the Bureau of Reclamation to
calculate deflection. Another parameter used to describe backfill strength
is the secant constrained soil modulus (MS). Values for MS and E’ are
discussed further in the Structures chapter of this handbook.
Recommendations for soil type and compaction level will vary based on
the application and product; Appendix A-5 provides product-specific
guidelines and literature references. Shallow, non-trafficked installations
may not require the same level of backfill quality, but any modifications
should be discussed with ADS engineers prior to establishing backfill
criteria on a particular project. Installations involving higher loads
sometimes require a higher soil strength; ADS engineers can also provide
additional guidance on backfill requirements in these situations.
As discussed in the Structures section of this handbook, it is the
combination of the type of material and compaction level that will
determine the soil strength. When a variety of options will work in a
particular installation, the final decision can depend on what is most
available locally in order to keep the cost of the installation to a minimum.
Native soil may be specified depending on the ADS product being
installed, the application and when following the requirements of Table 5-
2 and the respective technical literature as listed in Appendix A-5. Using
native soil eliminates the cost of imported backfill material and the effort
spent grading or hauling the excavated material off site. If the native
material is not acceptable, then appropriate material will need to be
brought in.

________________________________________________________________________________________________
Flowable fill, also known as controlled low strength material (CLSM),

controlled density fill (CDF) and slurry fill, is another, more specialized,
type of backfill material that is increasing in use throughout the country.
This material is a mixture of soil, cementitious material, and water. With
acceptable in-situ material, flowable fill trench widths can be reduced.
Although the structural integrity of flowable fill is excellent, it will misalign
or float the pipe unless precautions, such as weighting the pipe or pouring
the flowable fill in lifts, are taken. For more information on the use of
flowable fill refer to Technical Note 5.02: Flowable Fill Backfill for Pipe.

________________________________________________________________________________________________
Table 5-2
Classes of Embedment and Backfill Materials
ASTM D2321(A) AASHT
ASTM D2487 ASTM D2321 (A) (CSA B182.11)
(CSA B182.11) O
Class
Notation Description M43 AASHTO Percentage Passing Sieve Sizes Atterberg Limits Coefficients
Description BNQ
M145
2560 No.
Notation Notation 1 ½ in. 3/8” No. 4
200
LL PI Cu Cc
(40mm (0.075
(9.5mm) (4.75mm) mm)
)
Angular crushed stone
Crushed or rock, crushed 5, 56,
I(B) rock, N/A gravel, crushed slag; 57(D), 6, N/A 100% ≤25% ≤15% <12% Non Plastic N/A
angularC large voids with little or 67(D)
no fines
Well-graded gravel,
GW gravel-sand mixtures; 5, 6 >4 1 to 3
little or no fines <50% of
“Coarse
Poorly-graded gravels, Fraction”
56, 57, <1 or
GP gravel-sand mixtures; <4
Clean, 67 >3
little or no fines
coarse- 100% <5% Non Plastic
grained soils Well-graded sands,
CG-
SW gravelly sands; little or >6 1 to 3
14 , >50% of
II no fines A1, A3
MG- “Coarse
Poorly-graded sands, 20 Fraction”
<1 or
SPF gravelly sands; little or <6
>3
no fines
Coarse-
Grained Sands and gravels
GW- Same as for
Soils, which are borderline 5% to
GC, N/A 100% Varies Non Plastic GW, GP, SW
borderline between clean and 12%
SP-SM and SP
clean to with fines
w/fines
Gravel &
sand
Silty gravels, gravel- <4 or
GM with
sand-silt mixtures <50% of <”A” Line
<10%
fines “Coarse
Fraction”
Coarse- Clayey gravels, gravel- <7 &
GC 12% to
grained soils sand-clay mixtures N/A >”A” Line
50%
with fines A-2-4, A-2-
5, A-2-6,
Silty sands, sand-silt >4 or
SM or A-4 or >50% of
mixtures <”A” Line
A-6 soils “Coarse
III Clayey sands, sand- with more 100% Fraction” >7 & N/A
SC than 30%
clay mixtures >”A” Line
retained
Inorganic silts and on #200
very fine sands, rock sieve > 30%
<4 or
ML flour, silty or clayey (Retain
<”A” Line
Inorganic fine sands, silts with ed)
fine-grained slight plasticity 100% <50
soils Inorganic clays of low
> 30%
to medium plasticity; >7 &
CL (Retain
gravelly, sandy, or silty >”A” Line
ed)
clays; lean clays
Inorganic silts and

very fine sands, rock A-2-7 or A-
4 or A-6 <4 or
ML flour, silty or clayey N/A
soils with <”A” Line
Inorganic fine sands, silts with < 30%
IV( slight plasticity 30% or
E) fine-grained 100% 100% (Retain <50 N/A
less
soils ed)
Inorganic clays of low retained
to medium plasticity; on #200 >7 &
CL N/A
gravelly, sandy, or silty sieve >”A” Line
clays; lean clays
Inorganic silts,
micaceous or
MH diatomaceous fine N/A <”A” Line
Inorganic
sandy or silty soils,
fine-grained 100% 100% >50% >50 N/A
elastic silts
soils
Inorganic clays of high
CH N/A >”A” Line
plasticity, fat clays
V Organic silts and
(G) A5, A7 <4 or
OL organic silty clays of N/A <50
<”A” Line
low plasticity
Organic
Organic clays of
soils or 100% 100% >50% N/A
OH medium to high N/A
Highly
plasticity, organic silts
organic soils >50 <”A” Line
Peat and other high
PT N/A
organic soils

________________________________________________________________________________________________
Notes:
A) Refer to ASTM D2321 / CSA B182.11/ BNQ 2560 for more complete soil descriptions.
B) Class I materials allow for a broader range of fines than previous versions of D2321 / B182.11. When specifying class I
material for infiltration systems, the engineering shall include a requirement for an acceptable level of fines.
C) All particle faces shall be fractured.
D) Assumes less than 25% passes the 3/8” sieve.
E) Class IV materials require a geotechnical evaluation prior to use and should only be used as backfill under the guidance of a
qualified engineer.
F) Uniform fine sands (SP) with more than 50% passing a 100 sieve behave like silts and should be treated as Class III soils if
allowed.
G) Class V materials shall not be permitted as bedding and backfill material.

________________________________________________________________________________________________
Backfill Placement
Storm and sanitary sewers, as well as drainage lines are sometimes
placed on foundations that settle and shift in a non-uniform manner.
Fortunately, flexible pipe can accommodate many of these changes
without detrimental effects. The best construction practices, however,
involve placing the pipe on a firm foundation for maximum performance
and structural integrity throughout the design life.
In some cases it may be necessary to perform subsurface evaluations of
the soil conditions where muck, rock, or other unsuitable conditions are
suspected. Zones of soft material, such as muck, allow the pipe to settle,
potentially affecting the structural integrity and hydraulic characteristics of
the system. Rock and rock protrusions apply point loads where they
contact the pipe that can affect the hydraulics or structural integrity of the
system. It is recommended that unsuitable foundation material be
excavated before installation of the pipe proceeds. Where a rock or
unyielding or soft foundation is present, the design engineer or a
geotechnical engineer shall be consulted to determine the extent to which
the undesirable material is to be excavated.
Bedding
If no undesirable foundation material is found, a minimum of 4- to 6-
inches (0.1 - 0.15m) of bedding shall be placed and compacted on the
foundation to equalize load distributions along the invert of the pipe.
Refer to Figure 5-2 for a pictorial description of backfill terminology.
A stable and uniform bedding shall be provided for the pipe and any
protruding features of its joints and/or fittings. The middle of the
bedding, under the pipe invert, equal to 1/3 of the pipe O.D. should be
loosely placed, with the remainder compacted to minimum standard
proctor density as listed in Appendix A, Table A-5-2. The same class
of material recommended for the initial backfill is suitable for the
bedding; however, the compaction requirements for the bedding may
be higher than compaction requirements for the initial backfill to
ensure the stability of line and grade. Refer to Appendix A-5, Table A-
5-2 for product-specific installation recommendations for each zone.
Note: Where using open-graded material (class I with little fines for
example) in any fill zone, additional precaution must be taken to
reduce or eliminate the risk of migration of fines from adjacent
material. Precautionary steps could include the use of geotextile
between the varying fill materials, gradation selection to prevent the
migration of fines, or other precautionary measures. Refer to ASTM
D2321 / CSA B182.11 for more complete information.

________________________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 5-2
Typical Backfill Structure
Haunch Backfill
The next layer of backfill, the haunching, is the most important since it is
this layer that provides the pipe with support against the soil and traffic
loadings. Haunching shall be placed in lifts of 4- to 6-inches (0.10 -
0.15m) and compacted in accordance with product specific guidelines
listed in Appendix A-5, Table A-5-2 to achieve required depth of fill.
Construction of each lift should be repeated up to the spring line.
Initial Backfill
Initial backfill extends from the spring line to the crown of the pipe. This
area of the backfill anchors the pipe and ensures that loads are distributed
as evenly as possible into the haunching. The same material used in the
haunching shall be used for the initial backfill. Where differing materials
are used, backfill material size should be selected as to prevent migration
of fines or a geosynthetic shall be used to separate the backfill zones.
Additionally, it is crucial to obtain similar backfill strength between fill
zones if differing materials are used. Using the same material throughout
the embedment zone is recommended for all ADS products; however,
using different materials between the haunch and initial backfill zones
may be accomplished under strict guidelines that are outlined in the
appropriate product’s fill height table technical note. See Table A-5-1 for
a list of fill height table technical notes.

________________________________________________________________________________________________
When using a material that requires compaction it is important not to use

mechanical compaction equipment directly on the pipe itself. Initial
backfill shall be placed in lifts of 4- to 6-inches (0.10 - 0.15m) and
compacted in accordance with product-specific guidelines in Appendix A-
5, Table A-5-2 to achieve required depth of fill. Tamp to achieve the
specified compaction, or shovel into the area, eliminating voids, if the
material doesn’t require mechanical compaction. Construction of each lift
should be repeated until the initial backfill zone is completed.
Flowable fill can be used throughout the pipe zone as an alternative to
compacted granular material, however special precautions are necessary
for a successful installation. Flowable fill may cause the pipe to float or
misalign. Therefore the pipe will need to be weighted with sandbags or
held with some type of anchoring system. The flowable fill may also be
poured in layers that are allowed to cure before the next layer is poured to
help reduce the tendency for the pipe to float. As with any backfill
material, proper installation of the flowable fill around the pipe is critical to
the structural performance of the pipe. For additional information on the
use of flowable fill, refer to Technical Note 5.02: Flowable Fill Backfill for
Pipe.
Final Backfill
Final backfill, which extends from the initial backfill layer to the ground
surface, does not directly support the pipe. Excavated materials may be
of adequate quality for final backfill, depending on the intended use at the
surface. Selection, placement and compaction of final backfill shall be as
directed by the design engineer. When placing final backfill, consideration
needs to be given to compaction equipment and construction loads
operating over top of the pipe. Proper compaction of the final backfill area
is not nearly so critical for the pipe as in the other layers; however, if roads
or drives will be crossing the pipe, a relatively high degree of compaction
is needed to prevent pavement settlement.
Minimum Cover
For traffic applications total minimum cover is 12-inches (0.3m) for single
run applications for 4- to 48-inch (100mm-1200mm) diameters pipe. For
54- and 60-inch (1350mm and1500mm) diameter pipe total minimum
cover is 24-inches (0.6m) for single run applications. Total minimum
cover is measured from top of pipe to bottom of flexible pavement or to
top of rigid pavement.
When no pavement will be installed, but vehicle traffic is expected (e.g.
gravel driveway), a total minimum cover of 18-inches (0.5m) for 4- to 48-
inch (100-1200mm) diameters and 30-inches (0.8m) for 54- and 60-inch
(1350mm and 1500mm) diameters is recommended to minimize rutting.
If the ground surface is truly green space or a landscape area, minimum
cover may be 12-inches (0.3m) from top of pipe to ground surface for all
diameters. These recommendations assume the pipe is installed in
accordance with manufactures recommendations and may not address
the cover needed to prevent flotation.

________________________________________________________________________________________________
Table 5-3
General Recommendations for Installation and Use of Soils and Aggregates1
Backfill Zone Class 1 Class 2 Class 32
Acceptable and common where Do not use where water

Where hydraulics gradient exists
General no migration is probable or when condition in trench may cause
check gradation to minimize
Restrictions combined with a geotextile filter instability and/or prevent proper
migration.
media. placement and compaction..
√ √ √
Suitable as foundation and Suitable as foundation and Suitable as foundation and
Foundation
for replacing over-excavated for replacing over-excavated for replacing over-excavated
and unstable trench bottoms and unstable trench bottoms and unstable trench bottoms
as restricted above and as as restricted above and as as restricted above and as
directed by design engineer. directed by design engineer. directed by design engineer.
√ √ √
- 4” for 12”-24” pipe - 4” for 12”-24” pipe - 4” for 12”-24” pipe
Bedding 6” for 30” to 60” pipe 6” for 30” to 60” pipe 6” for 30” to 60” pipe
- Loosely place middle 1/3*OD - Loosely place middle 1/3*OD - Loosely place middle 1/3*OD
with remainder compacted with remainder compacted with remainder compacted
√ √ √
- Work in around pipe by hand to - Work in around pipe by hand to - Work in around pipe by hand to
Haunch provide uniform support provide uniform support provide uniform support
- knife in to remove any voids - knife in to remove any voids - knife in to remove any voids
√ √ √
- knife in to remove any voids
Initial Backfill
For compaction and material recommendations, refer to product-specific guidelines in

Appendix A-5, Table A-5-2
Relative
Compaction Low Moderate High
Effort
For compaction and material recommendations, refer to product-specific guidelines in
Appendix A-5, Table A-5-2
√ √ √
Final Backfill
- Place and compact as required - Place and compact as required - Place and compact as required
by the engineer by the engineer by the engineer
√ = Material may be suitable. Ultimately, the design engineer must determine the acceptable backfill material based
on specific project conditions and structural requirements for the product.
1) Refer to Table 5-2 for more complete soil requirements.
2) Class 3 is not recommended for all products. Refer to Appendix A-5, Table A-5-2A & B for product-specific
recommendations.

________________________________________________________________________________________________
COMPACTION
The level of compaction will vary depending on the material and
installation requirements, see product specific guidelines in Appendix A-5,
Table A-5-2 for minimum compaction requirements based on soil type
and application. Crushed stone or similar materials are usually not
compacted, but do require care during installation to eliminate large voids
in the backfill envelope. Using a shovel to 'slice' or ‘knife’ the material
under and around the pipe is many times sufficient.
For other materials, compaction methods will depend primarily on the
amount of compaction, or modulus of soil reaction, required and the
moisture level of the material. At optimum moisture levels, some Class II
and III soils can be compacted to minimum recommended levels simply
by walking on each backfill lift. While this technique may not be
acceptable for all installations, the point is that compaction need not
always require a great deal of extra effort or mechanical equipment. If,
however, mechanical compaction equipment is needed in the backfill
envelope or elsewhere on the site, the subsequent paragraphs provide
guidance on compaction equipment and the soils for which they are most
appropriate.
MECHANICAL COMPACTION EQUIPMENT

Hand Tampers and Hand-Held Power Tampers: Compaction of the
haunch layer may require a small tamping mechanism to obtain the
specified compaction in a confined area. A hand-held pole or two-by-four
can be used to compact the haunching. Tampers for horizontal layers
shall not weigh more than twenty pounds (89N) and the tamping face
shall be limited to an area no larger than 6-inch by 6-inch (0.15 by 0.15m).
Rammers or rammer plates (Figure 5-3): Impact action is used to force
out air and water from between soil particles to consolidate the fill. This
equipment works well on cohesive or high-clay content soils. Care should
be taken not to use rammer-type compactors directly on the pipe. For
heavy-duty compaction equipment, such as a Ho-pac® or equivalent type
compactors, a minimum of 4-feet (1.2m) of backfill shall separate the pipe
from the equipment at all times.
Figure 5-3
Rammer Compactors

________________________________________________________________________________________________
Static Compactors (Figure 5-4): Consolidation with static compactors

occurs as a result of the rolling weight of the equipment itself.
Sheeps-foot rollers employ projecting feet to concentrate the weight of
the machine. Static compactors are most valuable when used on
non-cohesive backfill away from the pipe. Other methods of
compaction should be used near the pipe.
Figure 5-4
Static Compactors
Vibrating Compactors (Figure 5-5): The motion of vibrating rollers or

plates “shake” the soil particles into a more dense arrangement and
works best with non-cohesive fills. Depending on the size and weight of
the machine, vibrating compactors may be used close to the pipe. As
always, care should be taken not to impact the pipe directly with a great
deal of force.
Figure 5-5
Vibrating Compactors
Selecting the right equipment for the fill material is the key to achieving
the most efficient compaction. For soil mixtures, the component having
the highest percentage will dictate what type of compaction equipment is
needed. Table 5-4 provides guidance in the selection of compaction
equipment.

________________________________________________________________________________________________
Table 5-4
Compaction Equipment Selection Guide
5-6 JOINTS
Joints serve several purposes in a pipe system. Their primary purpose is
to preserve the structural integrity by keeping the embedment material out
of the system. Well-designed joints also preserve the hydraulic
properties of the pipe by maintaining alignment between pipe ends.
Joints can keep effluent inside the pipe, which is necessary when
environmental issues are a concern. Site-specific requirements or local
regulations will usually dictate the performance of joint required. Joint
configuration details are available in the respective product specification
located in Section 1.
N-12 PLAIN END (SOIL-TIGHT COUPLERS)
ADS N-12 plain end pipe joint use external coupling bands, such as a split
band coupler, that meet the soil-tight requirements of AASHTO M252,
AASHTO M294 , ASTM F2306, CSA B182.8, or BNQ 3624-120.
Typically, soil-tight joints are used with perforated systems where soil
migration is not a design concern.
N-12 ST IB (GASKETED SOIL-TIGHT COUPLERS)
The N-12 ST IB joining system is designed to perform in demanding soil
conditions. The gasket meets all the testing requirements of ASTM F477.
The gasket, combined with an interference fit, provides outstanding joint
performance meeting or exceeding the soil-tight joint performance
requirements of AASHTO M252, AASHTO M294, ASTM F2306, CSA
B182.8, or BNQ 3624-120.

________________________________________________________________________________________________
N-12 WT IB (GASKETED WATERTIGHT COUPLERS)

The ADS 4- through 60-inch (100mm - 1500mm) N-12 WT IB joint meets
the watertight joint performance requirements of AASHTO M252,
AASHTO M294, ASTM F2306, CSA B182.8, and BNQ 3624-120. This
joint shows no leakage when pressurized to 10.8 psi (74.5 kPa) under the
laboratory conditions established in ASTM D3212.
This level of watertightness is recommended for systems that require a
very tight joint for normal storm drainage conditions or other site and/or
environmental reasons.
HP STORM (GASKETED WATERTIGHT COUPLERS)
The ADS 12- through 60-inch (300mm - 1500mm) N-12 HP meet the
watertight joint performance requirements of ASTM D3212. This joint
shows no leakage when pressurized to 10.8 psi (74.5 kPa) under the
laboratory conditions.
This level of watertightness is recommended for systems that will be
pressure tested, or that require a very tight joint for other site and/or
environmental reasons.
SANITITE (GASKETED WATERTIGHT COUPLERS)
The ADS 24- through 60-inch SaniTite joint meet the watertight joint
performance requirements of AASHTO M252, AASHTO M294, ASTM
F2306, CSA B182.8,and BNQ 3624-120. This joint shows no leakage
when pressurized to 10.8 psi (74.5 kPa) under the laboratory conditions
established in ASTM D3212.
pressure tested to sanitary sewer standards, or that require a very tight
joint for other site and/or environmental reasons. A longer bell design and
two gaskets are used for SaniTitie pipe.
SANITITE HP (GASKETED WATERTIGHT COUPLERS)
The ADS 12- through 60-inch SaniTite HP joint meet the watertight joint
performance requirements of ASTM D3212. This joint shows no leakage
pressure tested to sanitary sewer standards, or that require a very tight
joint for other site and/or environmental reasons. A longer bell design and
two gaskets are used for SaniTitie HP pipe.
N-12 LOW HEAD (GASKETED WATERTIGHT COUPLERS)
The ADS 24- through 60-inch (600mm - 1500mm) N-12 Low Head IB
joint meet the watertight joint performance requirements of AASHTO
M252, AASHTO M294, and ASTM F2306. This joint shows no leakage

________________________________________________________________________________________________

under continuous pressures less than 5psi and surge pressures of 10psi
or that require a very tight joint for other site and/or environmental
reasons. A longer bell configuration with two gaskets is used for N-12 Low
Head pipe.
Guidelines for deciding what joint performance is appropriate in a
particular application are provided in Table 5-5.
Table 5-5
Guidelines for Joint Performance Selection
Joint Performance Options
Soil Tight Water Tight
HP STORM
Project Conditions N-12 Plain N-12 ST IB N-12 Low
N-12 WT IB SaniTite or
End Gasketed Head
(4”-60") SaniTite HP
(4”-30”) (4”-30”) (24”-60”)
(12”-60”)
SOIL FACTORS
Potential for small or negligible soil
migration (e.g., gravel, medium to
coarse sands, cohesive soil).
√ √ √ √ √
Potential for moderate soil
migration (e.g., fine sands, silts). N/R √ √ √ √
Potential for severe soil migration
(e.g., very fine sands, non-cohesive
fines). N/R N/R √ √ √
EFFLUENT CONDITIONS
Effluent is permitted to infiltrate into
ground; poses little or no
environmental concern. √ √ √ √ √
Effluent has potential to cause
groundwater or other
contamination. N/R N/R √ √ √
PRESSURE CONDITIONS
Installation will operate under non-
pressure conditions. √ √ √ √ √
Installation will operate under non-
pressure conditions; minimized
leakage desired. N/R √ √ √ √
Installations with low temporary
pressures due to operational events
and ASTM D3212 joint quality
required. Installed system to be
hydrostatic pressure tested with an
associated leakage allowance. N/R N/R √ √ √
Installations with continuous
pressure (<5psi) or frequent surge
pressure (<10psi) N/R N/R N/R N/R √
√ The most restrictive of the project conditions will ultimately determine minimum joint quality. Ultimately, the design
engineer must determine the acceptable joint quality for the project.
N/R Not recommended by manufacturer. Final approval contingent on design engineer.
Where more than one product or joint design will be acceptable in a

particular installation, the most cost effective alternative should be
selected. Bell-and-spigot joints shorten installation duration and reduce

________________________________________________________________________________________________
labor because they require little time and effort to assemble; the result can
be significant overall cost savings.
5-7 OTHER INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS

Not all drainage projects can be considered “typical” installations.
Unusual soil conditions cannot always be found until the actual
excavation is made. More complicated pipe configurations may be
needed to arrive at the desired drainage pattern or to increase the
capacity of an existing drainage network. ADS cannot anticipate all
situations encountered on specific installations; however, several
common questions are answered in the following material. Contact the
ADS Applications Engineering Department or visit our website at
www.ads-pipe.com for answers to other unique conditions.
CONSTRUCTION AND PAVING EQUIPMENT

Some construction vehicles, such as many types of paving equipment,
are not as heavy as the design load. For situations with relatively light
construction vehicles, the minimum cover criteria discussed in Section 2:
Structures can be decreased during the construction phase; however,
rutting may still occur at the surface. Table 5-6 presents the surface
applied loads and the corresponding minimum cover that can be
permitted on a temporary basis. These criteria should only be employed
during construction; finished projects should always meet minimum cover
requirements for the anticipated final-use loading conditions. Vehicles
exceeding criteria in Table 5-6 must not be permitted to drive over the
installation.
Table 5-6
Temporary Cover Requirements for Light Construction
Traffic
Temporary Minimum Cover, in (mm) for:
Vehicular Load
Type of Vehicle at Surface, 4”-48” 54”-60”
psi(kPa) (100mm-12mm) (1350mm-1500mm)
Pipe Pipe
Semi-tractor1 75 (517) 9 (230) 12 (300)
Loaded pick-up truck2 50 (345) 6 (150) 9 (230)
Skid steer loader3 25 (172) 3 (80) 6 (150)
1. Based on typical 3-axel day-trip tractor without trailer.
2. Chevy® 3500 Series, fully loaded
3. Bobcat® T180 Model skid steer loader
Very heavy construction traffic poses additional concern for buried flexible
pipe when buried at shallow depths. The extremely high loads created by
construction vehicles can potentially reduce the safety factors below
reasonable levels in minimum cover conditions. It is recommended that
three feet (0.9m) of cover be used over the pipe in installations involving
construction vehicles between 30T and 60T (267-534kN). For heavier
vehicles a greater amount cover is required. The amount of cover is
dependent on the load and loading footprint. This additional cover can

________________________________________________________________________________________________
simply be mounded and compacted over the pipe during the construction
phase and then graded following construction. If, in a particular installation
the pipe already has minimum amounts of cover, no additional
precautions are needed.
JOINING DIFFERENT PIPE TYPES OR SIZES

Drainage systems often involve connecting pipe of different materials or
sizes. Options to make these transitions are often limited by the joint
quality required. One very common method of connecting different types
of pipe of the same size, and in some cases different sizes, is through the
use of a concrete collar. This generally provides a minimum silt-tight joint
quality but ultimately depends on workmanship. A concrete collar is
formed by butting the two pipe ends together, wrapping the junction with a
geotextile to keep out most soil and concrete, and then pouring a
concrete collar that covers both pipe ends.
Another option may be using fittings or adapters specifically designed for
this application. ADS offers a selection of fittings designed to make the
transition from one material directly to another. In other cases an ADS
fitting may need to be used in combination with another manufacturer's
gasket to complete the transition. Transitions made in this manner may
be more watertight than a concrete collar.
FIELD CONNECTIONS
Field connections may be necessary to complete pipe runs for short
pipe lengths or for repairs to pipe damaged during construction. Field
connections and repairs should be performed with couplers
compatible to the overall system. See Technical Note 5.03, 5.12 and
5.13 for Thermoplastic Pipe Repair Options for more details on field
cuts and connections.
CURVILINEAR INSTALLATIONS
ADS pipe can be laid on a curved alignment as a series of tangent
(straight sections) deflected horizontally at each joint. However, the
amount of joint articulation is dependent on the type of joint selected.
See Table 5-7 for minimum bend radii based on joint type.

________________________________________________________________________________________________
Table 5-7
Bend Radii for ADS Thermoplastic Pipe
Maximum Radius, ft (m), per pipe length
Pipe Diameter,
Joint Type Deflection at
In (mm)
Joint (deg) 10 ft (3m) 13 ft (4m) 20 ft (6m)
4 – 36 N-12 (split band or bell- 191 248 382
3
(100 – 900) bell couplers) (58) (76) (116)
42 – 60 N-12 (split band or bell- 382 497 764
1.5
(1050 – 1500) bell couplers) (117) (152) (233)
4 – 24 N-12 ST IB or N-12 WT 497 764
1.5 n/a
(100 – 600) IB (bell & spigot) (152) (233)
30 – 60 N-12 ST IB or N-12 WT 745 1146
1 n/a
(750 – 1500) IB (bell & spigot) (227 ) (349)
HP STORM, SaniTite,
12 – 60 SaniTite HP or Low 248 382
3 n/a
(300 – 1500) Head, (76) (116)
(extended bell & spigot)
Bend radii calculated with joint articulations only. Calculations do not assume any bend in the
pipe wall. Joint deflections based on joint profiles and accounts for possible field variances.
MANHOLE AND CATCH BASIN CONNECTIONS

Manholes and catch basins can be more costly than other alternatives
but also allow grade and directional changes in addition to changes in
pipe material and size. Consideration shall be given to the project
performance specified when selecting manhole connections. For
connection options, refer to Appendix A, Table A-5-1 for list of list of
technical literature associated with the appropriate product.
VERTICAL INSTALLATIONS
ADS thermoplastic pipe is sometimes installed vertically for use as catch
basins or manholes, meter pits, and similar applications. Vertical
installations do not behave the same as pipe that is installed horizontally
because the pipe/soil interaction is different. The soil surrounding a
vertical pipe locks into the corrugations, allowing the pipe to move along
with the soil consolidation that occurs over time. This movement can
cause a rippling of the interior liner that generally does not affect the
performance of the finished installation.
Installation requirements are especially important for vertical installations.
Backfill material and compaction levels will determine the performance of
the finished installation. Backfill shall extend a minimum of one-foot
(0.3m) completely around the vertical structure. Only Class 1 or 2 backfill
material is recommended and should be compacted to minimum 90%
SPD.
Additional general applications limits include the following:

• Height of the vertical structure must not exceed eight feet (2.4m),
unless the design is reviewed by the ADS Application Engineering
Department.
________________________________________________________________________________________________
• If traffic will be driving over a vertical structure, a concrete collar or

similar structure designed to transmit the load into the ground must be
used. Traffic loads must not be transmitted directly into the pipe wall.
• Cast iron frames holding grates or lids must be seated on a concrete
collar or similar structure so that the weight of the frame and grate or
lid is transferred into the ground, not to the vertical pipe.
Vertical installations of any ADS fitting should first be reviewed for
suitability with ADS Application Engineering. This includes, but is not
limited to, tees, elbows, and reducers of any combination. Improper
application or inadequate installation may affect the function of the part or
the drainage system. There may also be other product performance
limits depending on the application. Contact ADS for further information.
GROUNDWATER
Excessive groundwater hinders proper placement and compaction of
bedding and backfill. ADS thermoplastic pipe will float in standing water;
therefore, it is imperative that a dry trench be provided. In order to insure
a stable trench bottom, the water level in the trench shall remain below
the bedding during the installation procedure. It may be necessary to
provide sump pumps, well points, deep wells, geofabrics, underdrains or
a diversion ditch to insure a dry trench. The project engineer shall be
consulted to determine appropriate dewatering methods given specific
project conditions.
FLOTATION
Pipe of any material and size can float under the right conditions. The soil
type and density, amount of cover, height of the water table, pipe weight,
and the amount of effluent in the pipe will all have an effect on the flotation
potential.
The pipe property affecting flotation is its weight where heavier products
are not as likely to float. One of the primary installation benefits of ADS
polyethylene pipe is its light weight. The same quality that provides easy
handling and installation also provides it with a greater opportunity to float.
Table 5-8 gives approximate weights by inside diameter for ADS
thermoplastic pipes.

________________________________________________________________________________________________
Table 5-8
Approximate Weight of ADS Thermoplastic Pipes
Approximate Weight*
Inside Diameter lb/ft (kg/m)
in (mm)
Single Wall Dual Wall Triple Wall
4(100) 0.31 (0.46) 0.44 (0.65) N/A
6(150) 0.58 (0.86) 0.85 (1.3) N/A
8(200) 1.2 (1.8) 1.5 (2.2) N/A
10(250) 1.8 (2.7) 2.3 (3.4) N/A
12(300) 2.9 (4.3) 3.3 (4.9) N/A
15(375) 4.0 (5.9) 4.6 (6.8) N/A
18 (450) 6.0 (8.9) 6.4 (9.5) N/A
24 (600) 11.2 (16.7) 11.0 (16.4) N/A
30 (750) N/A 15.4 (22.9) 20.7 (30.8)
36 (900) N/A 19.8 (29.4) 24.2 (36.0)
42 (1050) N/A 26.4 (39.3) N/A
48 (1200) N/A 31.3 (46.6) 41.8 (62.3)
54 (1350) N/A 34.6 (51.5) N/A
60 (1500) N/A 45.2 (67.3) 55.0 (81.9)
* Weights are for reference purposes only. Actual values will vary.
For product-specific weights, contact an ADS Representative
In order to evaluate for possible flotation problems many factors were

considered and several assumptions had to be made based on typical
installation conditions. A detailed list of the design assumptions and other
design considerations are available in Technical Note 5.05: Pipe Flotation. A
summary of the fill required to prevent flotation is shown in Table 5-9. Note
that in many cases, less than one foot (0.3m) is needed to prevent flotation
but for structural purposes, minimum cover requirements will be greater
based on pipe diameter and loading conditions. Due to many factors
affecting flotation, several assumptions had to be made. For a detail list of
the assumptions made, please refer to Technical Note 5.05: Pipe Flotation.
In spite of their light weight, ADS products will not float when adequate
cover is placed on the pipe. Additionally, if effluent were in the pipe, as
would be likely in the case of a fully saturated soil, its weight would further
hinder flotation.
A second very important variable is the burial depth. During installation
when the pipe has not yet been covered over with soil, flotation potential
increases. If conditions on a specific project differ greatly from these and
flotation is believed to be a valid consideration, ADS Application
Engineers are available to help determine the extent of the problem.

________________________________________________________________________________________________
Table 5-9
Minimum Cover Required to Prevent Flotation
Diameter Cover in. (mm)
in. (mm) Single Wall Dual or Triple Wall
4 (100) 3 (77) 3 (77)
6 (150) 4 (102) 4 (102)
8 (200) 6 (152) 5 (127)
10 (250) 7 (178) 7 (178)
12 (300) 9 (229) 9 (229)
15 (375) 11 (280) 11 (280)
18 (450) 13 (330) 13 (330)
24 (600) 17 (432) 17 (432)
30 (750) N/A 22 (559)
36 (900) N/A 25 (635)
42 (1050) N/A 29 (737)
48 (1200) N/A 33 (838)
60 (1500) N/A 40 (1016)
PARALLEL PIPE INSTALLATIONS

Sewer pipes can be installed parallel when the capacity supplied by one
of the pipes is not sufficient, such as in a relief situation.
A minimum amount of backfill is needed to provide adequate side support
and a minimum spacing is also needed to compact the fill properly to
develop this support. Generally, accepted minimum spacings are shown
in Figure 5-6. These recommendations assume there are no fittings
connecting the two adjacent runs; if fittings are used, spacing
recommendations will differ and are outlined in Section 6:
Retention/Detention.
Figure 5-6
Minimum Pipe Spacing
I.D. I.D.
UP TO 24" (600mm) I.D.: M=12" (0.3mm)

MORE THAN 24" (600mm) I.D.: M=12 I.D.

________________________________________________________________________________________________
STEEP SLOPE INSTALLATIONS

In applications where a steep slope is necessary, generally slopes equal
to or greater than 12%, precaution must be taken to ensure the
application conditions will not adversely affect the pipe structure or flow
characteristics. One design consideration should be proper venting. The
pipe must be properly vented to ensure negative pressure does not form
inside the pipe. Venting can be provided along the pipe slope, at the
head of the slope, or by designing the flow in the slope to not flow more
than 75% full in peak design flow conditions. Next, thrust blocks must be
used at all fittings and grade changes. Change in flow direction can
cause excessive force against the pipe wall; therefore thrust blocks must
be used to dissipate this energy. Thrust blocks should be constructed as
designed and specified by the project engineer for the specific project
conditions. Finally, consideration must be given to pipe slippage along
the slope. Pipe slippage can result in slope failure of the surrounding soil,
structural damage of the pipe wall, or compromising of joint quality for the
overall system. Pipe should be restrained through the use of concrete
blocks or pipe anchors.
Note: Twelve percent grade is listed for reference purposes only,
additional design consideration may be necessary for slopes less than
12% where slope stabilization, negative pressure, or water hammer, may
be of concern.
CAMBERED INSTALLATIONS
Some pipe installations may need to design for uneven settlement
regardless of the backfill envelope quality and construction. High
embankments are especially prone to uneven settlement because the
load on the pipe near the center of the embankment will be greater than
at the top of the slope. In order to eliminate low pockets under the
embankment, the pipe should be cambered.
Cambering is the process of installing the pipe so that the expected
settlement will create the design slope. It can be achieved by installing
the upstream half of the pipe on a flat grade and downstream half on a
grade that is larger than design, as shown in Figure 5-7. Corrugated pipe,
because of its flexibility, can be cambered quite easily. A qualified soils
engineer should be consulted for this specialized situation.

________________________________________________________________________________________________
Figure 5-7
Cambered Pipe Installations
C
L
CAMBERED PIPE
FILL
CAMBER
FINAL GRADE AFTER

SETTLEMENT
SLIPLINING
Due to abrasive or corrosive environments, premature deterioration of
some types of pipe may occur. In lieu of a total replacement, sliplining
the existing pipe with ADS thermoplastic pipe is often an economical
and efficient way to significantly extend a culverts’ service life.
Typically, ADS thermoplastic pipe can only be used for open-ended
applications where the pipe does not need to be bent for installation.
Other considerations during design and pre-construction should
include the inside and outside diameter of the carrier pipe and new
slipline pipe, length of installation and grout installation. For more
information, refer to Technical Notes 5.06, and 5.14, Sliplining
Considerations for more details.
POST-CONTRUCTION INSPECTION
Generally, no post construction is necessary for ADS pipe installations;
however it is good practice to perform a visual inspection to insure proper
line and grade have been achieved. It is important to understand that
under normal conditions, any deflection will be realized within the first
thirty (30) days after installation. This affords the inspector the opportunity
to inspect the pipe shortly after installation with the ability to note
deficiencies before the project is complete. The inspection should be
performed after the pipe has been laid and backfilled, but may be before
final paving has been placed.
The following outlines various inspection methods commonly specified for

flexible pipes (plastic or metal). Additional post-installation inspection and
testing information is available in Technical Note 5.07: Post Installation
Testing for HDPE Pipe, Technical Note 5.08: Laser Profiling of Flexible
Pipe, 5.17: Post Installation Testing SaniTite HP Pipe and 5.20: Post
Installation Testing of HP Storm

________________________________________________________________________________________________
Visual Inspection
A visual inspection will usually reveal improper line and grade as well
as excessive deflection. For most projects, which specify a soil-tight
or silt-tight joint performance, a visual inspection is sufficient to insure
a successful installation. Caution is advised when inspecting pipe or
entering manhole or inlet structures to insure compliance with all
OSHA regulations.
Infiltration/Exfiltration Testing
For systems designed for watertight applications without specifying

any ASTM specification for testing, an infiltration/exfiltration test is a
simple and easy method of insuring proper joint performance. For an
exfiltration test, a run of piping is tested by filling the system with
water from structure to structure (manhole or inlets), with appropriate
bulk heads or pipe bladders to seal off the pipe from the structure.
Allow the system to stabilize for 24 hours, measuring the water level
at the beginning of the test and then measuring the water level again
after a specified period of time. The drop in water level can then be
converted to gallons leakage/ inch pipe diameter/ mile length of pipe
/day and compared to the permissible level established for the project.
In the absence of a specified level, 200-gal/ in. dia. of pipe/ mi of
sewer/ day is commonly considered watertight for storm and sanitary
sewer applications. An acceptable ASTM specification for testing
infiltration/exfiltration is ASTM F2487.
Air Testing
After the pipe has been laid and backfilled, each section of the
pipeline between manholes may be tested using standard procedures
for a low pressure air test. Individual joints may also be tested with
appropriate equipment. This test is usually for systems where
performance standards require watertight joints. ASTM F1417 may
be used for air testing these systems and shall be completed from
structure to structure or for individual joints. Fabricated structures and
fittings shall not be tested to avoid damaging these components.
ASTM F1417 specifies a 3.5 psi air pressure be held for a specified
length of time based on the pipe diameter with a maximum 0.5 psi
pressure drop. Although the diameters listed in ASTM F1417 only
include up to 36-inch (900mm), linear interpolation for larger
diameters is generally acceptable. Pipe diameters greater than 36-
Inch shall be tested in accordance to ASTM F3058 Preliminary field
Testing of Thermoplastic Pipe Joints for Gravity Flow (Non-Pressure)
Sewer Lines.

________________________________________________________________________________________________
5-8 APPENDIX A-5

Table A-5-1A
Available U.S. Product-Specific Technical Literature & Detail Drawings
Storm Sewer Sanitary Sewer Irrigation
N-12 Pipe per N-12 Pipe & Mega

N-12 Low Head
Product ASTM F2306 Green per ASTM HP STORM Sanitite® Sanitite® HP
Pipe
/AASHTO F2648
Minimum & Technical Note Technical Note Technical Note Technical Note Technical Note Technical Note
Maximum Cover 2.01 2.02 2.04 2.01 2.05 2.01
Trench Installation STD-101D,

STD-101 STD-101A STD-101 STD-101F STD-101
Details 101E
Connections to
Manholes & 200 Series 200 Series 200 Series 200 Series 200 Series 200 Series
Structures
Table A-5-1B
Available Canadian Product Specific Technical Literature & Detail Drawings
Storm Sewer Sanitary Sewer
N-12 Pipe
Sanitite®
Product per CSA Sanitite® HP
HP
B182.8
Minimum & Technical Technical

Technical Note
Maximum Note Note
2.05C
Cover 2.01C 2.05C
Trench
Installation STD-101 STD-101F STD-101F
Details
Connections
to Manholes 200 series 200 series 200 series
& Structures

________________________________________________________________________________________________
Table A-5-2A
Minimum Installation Requirements for ADS Thermoplastic Products (U.S.)
SaniTite &
AASHTO or ASTM F2648 or HP STORM for SaniTite HP N-12 Low
ASTM F2306 Mega Green Storm Drainage for Sanitary Head
Sewer
Class 1, 2 or 3 Class 1 or 2 Class 1, 2 or 3 Class 1 or 2 Class 1 or 2
Minimum Cover (<2-ft) Backfill
loosely placed in loosely placed in loosely placed loosely placed

Bedding
loosely placed in
middle 1/3, middle 1/3, middle 1/3, in middle 1/3, in middle 1/3,
Recommendations
90% SPD in 90% SPD in 90% SPD in 90% SPD in 90% SPD in
remainder remainder remainder remainder remainder
Initial Backfill
Class 1 Class 1
Haunch &
Class 1 Class 1 Class 1

Class 2 @ 90% Class 2 @ 90%
Class 2 @ 90% Class 2 @ 90% Class 2 @
Class 3 @ 90% Class 3 @ 90%
SPD SPD 90% SPD
SPD SPD
Class 1, 2, 3 or 4
Class 1, 2 or 3
Class 1, 2 or 3 loosely placed in Class 1 or 2 Class 1, 2 or 3
loosely placed in
middle 1/3, loosely placed loosely placed
Bedding
loosely placed in middle 1/3,

Maximum Cover Backfill
middle 1/3, Class 1, Class 2 or in middle 1/3, in middle 1/3,

Recommendations
Class 1, 2 @ 90%
90% SPD in Class 3 @ 90% or 90% SPD in 90% SPD in
or Class 3 @ 95%
remainder Class 4 @ 95% remainder remainder
SPD in remainder
SPD in remainder
Haunch & Initial
Class 1 Class 1
Class 2 @ 85% Class 2 @
Backfill
Class 2 @ 85% Class 2 @ 90% compact

Class 3 @ 90% 85%
Class 3 @ 90% Class 3 @ 95% Class 2 @ 90%
Class 4 @ 95% Class 3 @
SPD SPD SPD
SPD 90% SPD
1) Table provides minimum compaction levels for the respective soil class; higher compaction levels than
stated are acceptable and may be necessary depending on fill height.
2) For additional information, refer to the product specific Technical Note on minimum & maximum cover
recommendations.

________________________________________________________________________________________________
Table A-5-2B Minimum Installation Requirements for ADS Thermoplastic Products

(Canadian)
CSA B182.8 BNQ 1809
Minimum Cover (<2-ft) Backfill
Bedding
MG-20 or CG-
Recommendations Class 1, 2 or 3
14 @ 90%
90% SPD
SPD
Haunch & Initial
Class 1
Backfill
MG-20 or CG-
Class 2 @
14 @ 90%
90% Class 3
SPD
@ 95%
Bedding
Maximum Cover Backfill
MG-20 or CG-
Class 1, 2 or 3
Recommendations
14 @ 90%
90% SPD
SPD
Haunch & Initial
Class 1
Backfill
MG-20 or CG-
Class 2 @
14 @ 90%
90% Class 3
SPD
@ 90%
1) Table provides minimum compaction levels for the respective soil class; higher compaction levels than
stated are acceptable and may be necessary depending on fill height.
2) For additional information, refer to the product specific Technical Note on minimum & maximum cover
recommendations.
OTHER TECHNICAL RESOURCES

________________________________________________________________________________________________
(APPLICABLE TO ALL ADS PRODUCTS)

ADS Technical Notes
Technical Note 5.01: Recommended Use of Trench Boxes
Technical Note 5.02: Flowable Fill Backfill for Thermoplastic Pipe
Technical Note 5.03: HDPE Pipe Repair Options
Technical Note 5.04: HDPE and HP Connections to Manholes and Structures
Technical Note 5.05: Pipe Flotation
Technical Note 5.06: Culvert Sliplining with HDPE Pipe
Technical Note 5.07: Post-Installation Testing for HDPE
Technical Note 5.08: Laser Profiling of Flexible Pipe
Technical Note 5.09: Utility Crossings
Technical Note 5.10: Integral Bell Transition for HDPE
Technical Note 5.11: Sliplining Extended Lengths with HDPE Pipe
Technical Note 5.12: HP Storm Drainage Pipe Repair OPtions
Technical Note 5.13: SaniTite HP Sanitary Sewer Pipe Repair Options
Technical Note 5.14: Culvert Sliplining with HP Pipe
Technical Note 5.15: Integral Bell Transitions for HP Storm Pipe
Technical Note 5.16: Methods for Sealing Vent Tubes
Technical Note 5.17: Post Installation Testing of SaniTite HP
Technical Note 5.18: Lining of Casings with SaniTite HP Pipe
Technical Note 5.20: Post Installation Testing of HP Storm

Retention/Detention
ADS, Inc. Drainage Handbook Retention/Detention ♦ 6-1
6-0 RETENTION/DETENTION SYSTEMS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
6-1 Stormwater Management Today................................................. 6-2
6-2 Subsurface Retention/Detention Products ............................... 6-3
Retention/Detention Systems ......................................................... 6-3
6-3 Choosing the Correct Retention/Detention System ................ 6-5
6-4 Designing a Retention/Detention System ................................ 6-6
Check Regulations.......................................................................... 6-6
Calculate Storage Capacity ............................................................ 6-6
Determine System Layout .............................................................. 6-8
Select Products ............................................................................... 6-8
Evaluate Maintenance Requirements ..........................................6-10
Select Fittings and Accessories....................................................6-11
6-5 Design Aids..................................................................................6-15
6-6 Best Management Practices (BMP)..........................................6-16
6-7 Technical Assistance .................................................................6-16
6-8 Other Technical Resources.......................................................6-17
Figures
6-1 Retention/Detention System Selection Guidelines ........................ 6-5
6-2 Typical Retention/Detention Cross Section ................................... 6-7
6-3 Triple Component Retention/Detention Manifold with
Size on Size Connections............................................................... 6-9
6-4 Retention/Detention Clean-Out Ports...........................................6-11
6-5 Typical Catch Basin (Non-Traffic Areas Only) .............................6-12
6-6 Water Quality Unit ........................................................................6-13
6-7 Typical End Cap Section ..............................................................6-13
6-8a Roof Drain with Wye Cleanout .....................................................6-14
6-8b Roof Drain with Tee Cleanout ......................................................6-14
6-9 ADS Retention/Detention System Design Tool ...........................6-15
Tables
6-1 ADS Retention/Detention Systems Features and Benefits ........... 6-4
6-2 Storage Capacities of N-12 Pipes .................................................. 6-7
6-3 Perforation Patterns ......................................................................6-10
© ADS, Inc., June 2009

6-1 STORMWATER MANAGEMENT TODAY

Stringent environmental regulations and increasing land values have
made finding an effective way to manage stormwater runoff – one that
both protects groundwater quality and complies with agency regulations –
a high priority for land developers and engineers. Typically, the
stormwater management method selected involves some type of
stormwater retention or detention system, and possibly other products
that improve the effectiveness of the management method.
The purpose of a stormwater retention system is to capture stormwater
runoff in a designated area where it can be allowed to percolate into the
ground. The net effect is fairly rapid exfiltration of stormwater into the
adjacent native soil. A stormwater detention system, on the other hand,
slows and temporarily holds stormwater runoff so that it can be released
into the environment at a controlled rate. An effective means of
stormwater management can be retention, detention, or a combination of
both.
Stormwater retention/detention systems vary widely in design, from open
ponds to subsurface piping systems and underground vaults to gravel
pits. The most frequently used designs are open ponds and subsurface
piping and/or vault systems. Open ponds occupy a great deal of space,
reducing the land available for facilities, such as parking lots,
playgrounds, and landscape areas. In addition, they create safety risks
and serve as a breeding ground for insects.
Subsurface systems, however, offer several advantages in addition to
effective stormwater runoff management. Because they are below grade,
subsurface systems increase the amount of usable land since some
facilities, like recreational green areas or parking lots, can be built over
them. Subsurface systems also decrease safety risks because they are
inaccessible to the public, are more easily maintained, and are options in
situations where high groundwater tables or small lot sizes make a pond
impractical.
Subsurface retention/detention systems can be designed in almost any
shape and size using a variety of materials. Plastics, especially high
density polyethylene (HPDE) and polypropylene (PP) are an attractive,
economical option for retention/detention stormwater management. They
are often faster and more cost-effective to install than other systems, and
are highly resistant to the damaging effects of salts, oils, fuels, and other
chemicals, and freeze/thaw conditions. In aggressive conditions plastics
can provide a long service life.

6-2 ADS® SUBSURFACE RETENTION/DETENTION

PRODUCTS
A long-time leader in both water management and plastics technology,
ADS offers different options for subsurface retention/detention systems to
meet the management needs of practically any stormwater runoff
situation. Retention/Detention systems are offered with a choice of N-
12®, N-12® ST IB, either solid or with perforations, or N-12® WT IB pipe.
RETENTION/DETENTION SYSTEMS
ADS corrugated polyethylene pipes are the building blocks of the
retention/detention product line. N-12 pipes (see Specifications section)
use a state-of-the-art design that incorporates a smooth inner wall and a
corrugated outer wall. The smooth inner wall combines superior
hydraulics and the ability to resist abrasion and corrosion. The
corrugated outer wall provides the strength necessary to withstand heavy
traffic loads with varying cover heights. See Figure 6-2 in this section for
minimum recommended cover heights for standard installations.
N-12 ST pipe features a bell-and-spigot joint that promotes faster, easier
installation. This joining method ensures joint alignment, improves joint
reliability, and eliminates the need for glue, split couplers, or wire ties. N-
12 ST joints meet or exceed a soil-tight level of performance. N-12 pipe
requires coupling bands for soil-tight performance. The pipe itself is
available with or without perforations.
N-12 WT pipe features joints which provide a watertight level of
performance meeting the laboratory requirements set in ASTM D3212. In
field applications, N-12 WT pipe is subject to allowable leakage rates and
may be considered watertight per gasketed storm drain and even some
sanitary sewer standards. ADS N-12 WT detention systems, which
include N-12 WT pipe and compatible fabricated fittings, are intended for
non-pressure, gravity flow storm water detention and will be subject to
greater leakage rates and may not be appropriate for applications
requiring long-term fluid containment. For these types of applications
please refer to ADS Technical Note 7.01 Rain Harvesting with HDPE
Pipe or contact ADS for additional details or assistance with your specific
application.
The ADS retention/detention system utilizes corrugated polyethylene pipe
and specially designed manifolds and other fittings to provide a complete
retention/detention system. ADS can assist the customer in laying out the
actual system with all necessary components for each application. From
the contractor’s point of view, retention/detention components coupled
with ADS technical assistance allows the products to fit together much
like building blocks.
Table 1 summarizes the primary features and benefits of
retention/detention systems, and how the ADS system meets the needs
of the application.

Table 6-1
Retention/Detention Systems Features and Benefits
• Increases the usable land available
Subsurface
• Reduces hazards and safety risks
retention/detention
• Reduces system maintenance costs
design
• Recharges groundwater table more efficiently
• Increased structural integrity
• Increased versatility of manifold design options
Unique Manifold
• Easier assembly and installation
Designs
• Helps to reduce debris in laterals and allows for easy
cleaning
• Resists harmful effects of salts, oils, fuels, chemicals
• Withstands repeated freeze/thaw cycles
• Strong, yet light in weight – easier, safer, more cost-
Quality Plastic
effective to install
Composition
• Highly abrasion resistant for longer service life than metal
or RCP
• Unaffected by extremes in pH; won’t rust or deteriorate
• High strength – withstands H-25 and HS-25 traffic loads

System options: under minimum cover
Retention/Detention • Meets specific application requirements: 4- to 60-inch
with N-12, N-12 ST (100 to 1500mm) diameters, lengths to 20 feet (6m),
or N-12 WT pipe perforated or non-perforated, soil-tight or watertight
joints, variety of manifold pipe designs
• Promotes faster, more versatile system installations

• Enables systems to meet specific application
Variety of Fittings
requirements
• Reduces labor for system installation and/or modification
Custom product • Meets unique/specialized application needs

fabrication • Reduces labor for system installation and/or modification

6-3 CHOOSING THE CORRECT

RETENTION/DETENTION SYSTEM
All retention/detention products are specifically designed for
subsurface stormwater management systems. Figure 6-1 assists the
specifier in selecting the correct product to use for a particular
subsurface stormwater application.
Figure 6-1
Retention/Detention System Selection Guidelines
Which ADS System Should You Use?
What is the
application?
Detention Retention
Will
Consider a
geotextile be used to
system with
enclose system?
perforated N-12
Yes ST or N-12
No
Consider a Conduct evaluation of
system with both options to determine
perforated or non- which meet the structural,
perforated hydraulic, and foot print
N-12 ST requirements for the
project
Conduct cost
Conduct evaluation of evaluation using
both options to determine findings of design
which meet the structural, evaluation
hydraulic, and foot print
requirements for the Is a gasketed
project soil-tight joint
Specify system
acceptable?
that meets design
No requirements and
Conduct cost provides the most
evaluation using Yes value
findings of design
evaluation Consider a
system with
N-12 WT *
Specify system Consider a
that meets design system with
requirements and N-12 ST
provides the most
value
* ADS retention/detention systems are intended for storm sewer applications. For use of
ADS products in applications requiring little to no leakage, please see ADS Technical Note
7.01: Rain Harvesting with HDPE Pipe.

6-4 DESIGNING A RETENTION/DETENTION SYSTEM

The following general guidelines provide a systematic approach to
designing a retention/detention subsurface stormwater management
system.
CHECK REGULATIONS
1 – Check with federal, state, and local agencies for regulations on
subsurface stormwater retention/detention systems.
Key issues to resolve include: Should the system be a retention
system, detention system, or a combination of both? Are water quality
structures required? If so, which structures are approved? Is a soil-
tight or watertight joint required?
CALCULATE STORAGE VOLUME REQUIRED

2 – Calculate the storage volume required for the specific site based
on site conditions and local stormwater regulations.
The storage volume required for a given site is often regulated as the
excess of stormwater runoff resulting from post-construction
conditions. In essence, all new runoff and peak flows generated from
a project site must be accounted for through adequate sizing of the
stormwater system and/or onsite storage and dissipation of excess
water. There are numerous ways and methods determining required
storage volume and peak flows such as: Rational method, Unit
Hydrographs, TR55 etc. The designer should choose a specific
method based on their experience and those requirements as
established by the local regulatory agency.
CALCULATE STORAGE CAPACITY

3 – Calculate the size, in feet or meters, of the system that will
provide stormwater capacity requirements.
Retention/detention systems can achieve needed storage capacity by
using either larger diameter corrugated polyethylene pipe and a
shorter overall system length, or by using smaller diameter pipe and a
longer system length. The final decision depends on the size of the
site, its groundwater level, and cover requirements. Figure 6-2 shows
a typical cross-section of a retention/detention system. Table 6-2
summarizes retention and detention volumes, pipe lengths, and
surface area requirements based on this section; other system
designs will result in different values.

Figure 6-2
Typical Retention/Detention Cross Section
Note: This is a typical cross section only. See Structures, Section 2, or Installation, Section 5, of the Drainage Handbook for specific
H H H
RASS AREA) (FLEX PVMT.) (RIGID PVMT.)
FILTER FABRIC UNDISTURBED

(WHERE REQUIRED EARTH
BY ENGINEER) X
* CLASS I OR II MATERIAL
* BEDDING (CLASS I OR II MATERIAL)
PLACED AND COMPACTED IN C SUITABLE = 4" MIN. FOR 12" - 24" PIPE
ACCORDANCE WITH FOUNDATION = 6" MIN. FOR 30" - 60" PIPE
MINIMUM H (FLEX PVMT), H (RIGID PVMT) = 12" FOR UP TO AND INCLUDING 36" HDPE PIPE * CLASS I BACKFILL REQUIRED AROUND 60" DIAMETER FITTINGS.
= 24" FOR 42" THROUGH 60" HDPE PIPE
MAXIMUM FILL HEIGHT LIMITED TO 8-FT OVER FITTINGS FOR STANDARD INSTALLATIONS. CONTACT
REPRESENTATIVE WHEN MAXIMUM FILL HEIGHTS EXCEED 8-FT FOR INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS.
Table 6-2
Storage Capacities of N-12®, N-12® ST, and N-12® WT Pipes
Retention Detention
Nominal Average Stone Total
“X” “S” “C” Pipe Surface Surface
Inside Outside 1 1 2 Void Retention
Spacing Spacing Spacing Volume 3,4,5 Area Area
Diameter Diameter Volume Storage
Required Required
in. in. in. in. in. ft3/ft ft3/ft ft3/ft ft2/ft3 ft2/ft3
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (m3/m) (m3/m) (m3/m) (m2/m3) (m2/m3)
12 14.5 8 10.9 25.4 0.81 0.84 1.65 1.3 2.7
(300) (368) (210) (280) (650) (0.07) (0.08) (0.15) (4.2) (8.6)
15 18 8 10.9 28.9 1.2 1.1 2.3 1.1 1.97
(375) (457) (210) (280) (750) (0.11) (0.10) (0.21) (3.5) (6.4)
18 21 9 14.3 35.3 1.8 1.4 3.2 0.93 1.6
(450) (533) (230) (360) (900) (0.16) (0.13) (0.29) (3.0) (5.4)
24 28 10 13.4 41.4 3.1 2.0 5.1 0.68 1.1
(600) (711) (260) (340) (1050) (0.29) (0.18) (0.47) (2.2) (3.6)
30 36 18 17.1 53.1 4.9 3.1 8.0 0.55 0.90
(750) (914) (460) (430) (1350) (0.46) (0.28) (0.74) (1.8) (3.0)
36 42 18 21 63.0 7.1 4.2 11.3 0.47 0.74
(900) (1067) (460) (530) (1600) (0.66) (0.39) (1.05) (1.5) (2.4)
42 48 18 24 72 9.2 5.8 15.0 0.40 0.65
(1050) (1219) (460) (610) (1830) (0.87) (0.53) (1.40) (1.3) (2.1)
48 54 18 24.5 78.5 12.4 6.7 19.1 0.34 0.53
(1200) (1372) (460) (620) (2000) (1.15) (0.62) (1.77) (1.1) (1.7)
60 67 18 23 90 19.3 8.5 27.8 0.27 0.39
(1500) (1702) (460) (580) (2290) (1.79) (0.78) (2.57) (0.89) (1.3)
Notes:
See Figure 6-2 for typical cross section used in volume calculations. Bedding depth assumed 4” for 12”-24” pipe and 6” for 30”-60” pipe.
1. Based on A-profile pipe.
2. Actual ID values used in calculation.
3. Stone Porosity assumed 40%.
4. Stone height above crown of pipe is not included in void volume calculations.
5. Calculation is based on the average OD of the pipe.
See “Design Aids” for a system design tool to calculate total HDPE pipe system storage with
an example calculation.

DETERMINE SYSTEM LAYOUT

4 – Determine the most cost-effective system layout.
Fitting configuration can have a significant impact on overall system
cost. A system with longer lateral runs and fewer manifold fittings is
generally more cost effective than a wide system with short lateral
runs. Additionally, placing a distribution manifold at one end of the
system and simply placing end caps at the opposite end of each
lateral can prove to be more cost effective than distribution manifolds
at either end of the system.
SELECT PRODUCTS
5 – Select the Retention/Detention components specifically suited
for the system design (refer to Figure 6-1).
Manifold design alternatives are:
• Standard manifold with attached reducing connections to the
laterals or standard manifold with size-on-size connections to the
laterals. Manifold systems typically incorporate any combination
of single component manifolds (i.e. one lateral), double
component manifolds (i.e. two laterals), and triple component
manifolds. Figures 6-3 shows a triple component manifold layout
for size-on-size manifold systems; specific information regarding
the sizes and manifold lengths are included in the Fittings section
of this handbook or in the ADS Fittings Manual.
• Series of standard fittings including tees and elbows. The size of
this layout will be affected by the fitting dimensions. The and
Fittings section of this handbook and the ADS Fittings Manual
contains more information.
• Custom manifolds with attached concentric or eccentric reducing
connections to laterals. Custom manifolds are available for
special site conditions. Custom fittings may require special
installation considerations; contact your local ADS sales
representative when using a custom fitting. It should be noted that
minimum lateral spacing must be maintained for all manifold
design alternatives. For custom manifolds, see the Technical
Assistance section of this chapter.
• Maximum fill heights over manifold fittings are generally limited to
less than 8-ft (2.4-m). Contact your local ADS sales
representative for installation considerations for manifold fittings in
excess of 8-ft.

Figure 6-3
Watertight Triple Component Retention/Detention Manifold with Size on
Size Connections
CLEANOUT PORT
PRE-DRILLED
(AS NECESSARY)
MANIFOLD / HEADER
SIZE ON SIZE
CROSS SECTION
LATERAL LINES
NOTE: For Retention/Detention System size-on-size manifold dimensions refer to the Fittings section
In retention systems, perforation pattern options are:
• ASTM F2306 perforations. This is considered the ADS standard

perforation pattern and is stocked at most manufacturing facilities.
Table 3 provides more detail.
• Other perforation patterns may be available; please refer to
Technical Note 1.01: Dual Wall HDPE Perforation Patterns for or
consult with an ADS sales representative.

Table 6-3
Perforation Patterns
Maximum Minimum
Nominal I.D. Perforation
Diameter Inlet Area
Type
2 2
in mm in mm in /ft cm /m
12 300 Circular 0.375 10 1.5 30
15 375 Circular 0.375 10 1.5 30
18 450 Circular 0. 375 10 1.5 30
24 600 Circular 0. 375 10 2.0 40
30 750 Circular 0. 375 10 2.0 40
36 900 Circular 0. 375 10 2.0 40
42 1050 Circular 0. 375 10 2.0 40
48 1200 Circular 0. 375 10 2.0 40
54 1350 Circular 0. 375 10 2.0 40
60 1500 Circular 0. 375 10 2.0 40
EVALUATE MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS

6 – Evaluate system maintenance requirements.
Should stormwater debris be encouraged to settle in the system’s
manifold pipe or be allowed to flow into the laterals? Does the system
need such items as clean-out ports, catch basins with sump areas,
settling basins, and water quality units? If so, how many are needed
and where should they be located? Refer to Figures 6-5 through 6-9
as examples of products used for maintenance purposes.
• Concentric reducing manifold components (components where
the reducing stub is positioned in the center of the main fitting ie:
flow lines do not match) can promote trapping of debris and
sediment in designated sections of the system.
• Clean-out stubs and jetting ports should be strategically placed to
allow ease of maintenance (commonly located to push debris and
sediment toward the downstream end of the system with clean-
out positioned near or at the downstream outlet)
• Vent ports should be strategically positioned to prevent any
airlocks in the manifold or lateral stubs.
• Water Quality Units may be used at the inlet end of the system to
reduce debris or sediment entering the system. Units may also
be used at the outlet end of the system as a final clarifying stage
for the stormwater prior to discharge into the natural waterway or
sewer system.
For additional information regarding inspection and maintenance of
retention/detention systems, refer to Technical Note 6.01:
Retention/Detention System Maintenance.

SELECT FITTINGS AND ACCESSORIES

7 – Select the related ADS fittings needed to assemble and connect
the Retention/Detention system.
These include such products as tees, elbows, stubs, adapters,
reducers, flared end sections, end caps, and prefabricated end
plates. For a listing of commonly specified system accessories, refer
to Technical Note 7.01: Retention/Detention System Maintenance. All
available standard fittings and accessories are provided in the ADS
Fittings Manual.
Figure 6-4
Retention/Detention Cleanout and Riser Ports
For additional detail see ADS Standard Detail #703

Figure 6-5
Typical Catch Basin (Non-Traffic Areas Only)
For additional detail see ADS Standard Detail #401
NOTE: For more information on this application, refer to the Vertical Installations topic in the
Installation section (Section 5) of the Drainage Handbook.

Figure 6-6
Water Quality Unit
For additional detail see ADS Standard Details #501 & #502
HDPE ACCESS RISER HDPE ACCESS RISER

(SEDIMENT RISER) (OIL RISER)
INLET STUB
OUTLET STUB
CHAMBER
STIFFINER PLATES
SEDIMENT CHAMBER OIL CHAMBER

(SAW TOOTH) (INVERTED)
STAND PIPE WEIR PLATE WEIR PLATE
(BAFFLE, DISPERSION TUBE)
STIFFINER PLATE OUTLET

ORIFICE
STIFFINER PLATE
ENDPLATE
ENDPLATE
Figure 6-7
Typical End Cap Sections
For additional details see ADS Fittings Manual

Figure 6-8a
Roof Drain with Wye Cleanout
Figure 6-8b
Roof Drain with Tee Cleanout

6-5 DESIGN AIDS

To aid in the design and layout of an HDPE pipe retention or detention
system, a Retention/Detention sizing tool is available at www.ads-pipe.com or
by contacting an ADS representative.
Figure 6-9 is a screen shot of the Retention/Detention sizing worksheet with
example user inputs and the resulting information on the designed system.
Some information provided for the designed system include: system storage
(including stone storage, if applicable), system and excavation footprints, and
estimated excavation. Also, a generic layout of the systems can be generated
along with installation details for the system, risers, and cleanouts.
Figure 6-9
ADS Retention/Detention System Sizing Tool
Allows for user inputs with calculated results.

6-6 BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICES (BMP)
At ADS, managing our water resources is something close to our heart.

For over a century, we have been an industry leader in environmental
stewardship and protecting the quality of our water resources.
ADS is continually developing new, innovative ways to help
municipalities, developers and contractors implement storm water
management systems and meet EPA requirements. We offer a full line of
Best Management Practices (BMP) products to manage the quality and
quantity of storm water and meet increasing government regulations.
Among our latest developments is the ADS Water Quality Unit offering
outstanding performance in a lightweight unit. For more information
related to BMPs or other drainage needs visit our website at www.ads-
pipe.com.
6-7 TECHNICAL ASSISTANCE

Throughout system design, ADS, Inc. can assist you on a variety of
technical issues, including:
• Product performance information and suggested product usage.
• Manifold pipe configuration and design.
• Number and spacing of system laterals (based on provided design
storage).
• Existing product modifications; custom product fabrication.
• Suggestions to maximize cost effectiveness.
Please contact an ADS representative for further information.

6-8 OTHER TECHNICAL RESOURCES

ADS Technical Notes
Technical Note 1.01: Perforation Patterns for Dual Wall HDPE
Technical Note 6.01: Retention/Detention System Maintenance
Technical Note 7.01: Rainwater Harvesting with HDPE Pipe
ADS Standard Details
Standard Detail 7.01: Typical Retention/Detention System Layout
Standard Detail 7.02: Typical Retention/Detention Cross Section
Standard Detail 7.03: Typical Riser and Cleanout

General Tech Notes
General Tech Notes

ADS, Inc. Drainage Handbook Technical Notes ♦ 7-1
7-0 GENERAL TECHNICAL NOTES

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section 1 – General Specifications
1.01 Dual Wall HDPE Perforation Patterns

1.02 Single Wall HDPE Perforation Patterns
1.03 Storm Water Quality Units
1.04 Testing of Storm Water Quality Units
1.05 Pipe Joints and Gaskets
1.07 Manhole Adapter Guide – SaniTite HP, HP Storm, N-12 HDPE Pipe
1.08 Water Quality Device Oil Storage Volumes
Section 2 – Structures
2.01 Minimum and Maximum Burial Depth for Corrugated HDPE Pipe (per AASHTO)
2.02 Minimum and Maximum Burial Depth for Corrugated HDPE Pipe (per ASTM F2648)
2.03 Minimum and Maximum Cover Heights for Single Wall Corrugated HDPE Pipe
2.04 Minimum and Maximum Cover Heights for HP Storm Pipe for Storm Drainage
2.04A Minimumu and Maximum Covert Heights for Alternate HP Storm Pipe Trench
Section 3 – Hydraulics
3.02 AdvanEdge Hydraulic Performance
4.01 Chemical Resistance of Polyethylene and Elastomers

4.02 Chemical Resistance of Polypropylene and Elastomers
4.03 Abrasion Resistance of Polypropylene
Section 5 – Installation
5.01 Recommended Use for Trench Boxes

5.02 Flowable Fill Backfill for Thermoplastic Pipe
5.03 HDPE Pipe Repair Options
5.04 HDPE and HP Storm Connections to Manholes and Structures for Storm Sewer Applications
5.05 Pipe Flotation
5.06 Culvert Sliplining with HDPE Pipe
5.07 Post Installation Testing for HDPE Pipe
5.08 Laser Profiling of Flexible Pipe
5.09 Thermoplastic Pipe and Utility Crossings
5.10 Integral Bell Transition for HDPE Pipe
5.11 Sliplining Extended Lengths with HDPE Pipe
5.12 HP Storm Drainage Pipe Repair Options
5.14 Culvert Sliplining with HP Pipe
5.15 Integral Bell Transition for HP Pipe Products
5.16 Methods for Sealing Vent Tubes
5.20 Post Installation Testing of HP Storm
Section 6 – Retention/Detention
6.01 Retention/Detention System Maintenance
Section 7 – Miscellaneous
7.01 Rainwater Harvesting with HDPE Pipe Cisterns
 ADS, Inc., August 2023

Technical Note
TN 1.01 Dual Wall HDPE Perforation Patterns
Overview
Perforated pipe plays an integral role in many applications of HDPE pipe. Generally, perforated pipe is used to
accelerate the removal of subsurface water in soils or to allow storm water to percolate into the soil. Currently, two
classifications of perforations are specified in the AASHTO material specifications for HDPE pipe: Class I, and Class II.
The Class II perforation pattern comes standard when perforated pipe is ordered. Class One perforated pipe has
limited availability. Please check with a local representative to determine availability. Both classes are explained in
more detail in the AASHTO materials specifications (M294 and M252). AASHTO M252 covers pipe diameters 3-
through 10-inch (75 - 250 mm) while M294 covers 12-inch through 60-inch (300 - 1500 mm).
Standard Perforation Patterns

AASHTO Class II Perforation
The following terminology for perforations is derived from the applicable AASHTO specification. Differences between
the specifications are covered in the table below. Class II perforations shall be located in the outside valleys of the
corrugations, be circular and/or slotted and evenly spaced around the circumference and length of the pipe. The
perforations shall be located in the outside valleys of the corrugations. The water inlet area shall be no less than 0.945
in2/ft (20 cm2/m) for pipe diameters 4- through 10-inch (100 - 250mm), 1.42 in2/ft (30 cm2/m) for pipe diameters 12-
through 18-inch (300 - 450 mm) and 1.89 in2/ft (40 cm2/m) for pipe diameters larger than and equal to 24 inches (600
mm). Table 1 below represents ADS standard perforation patterns for AASHTO Class II.
Maximum Slot
Perforation Maximum Slot
Nominal I.D. Length or Minimum Inlet Area
Type Width
Diameter
4” (100 mm) Slot 0.875” (22 mm) 0.125” (3 mm) 1.0 in2/ft (21 cm2/m)
12” (300 mm) Circular 0.313” (8 mm) - 1.5 in2/ft (32 cm2/m)
30” (750 mm) Circular 0.375” (9.5 mm) - 2.0 in2/ft (42 cm2/m)
Figure 1
AASHTO Class II Perforation Patterns
Note: Actual pattern may vary by region, however all patterns meet the AASHTO and ASTM minimum
requirements for the open inlet area.
24"
PIPE DIAMETERS
45°
30"
PIPE DIAMETERS
45°
45°
2 AT EVERY 45°
** NUMBER OF HOLES AROUND CIRCUMFERENCE
VARIES BASED ON DIAMETER AND REGION**
AASHTO Class I Perforation
Please contact your local ADS representative before specifying or ordering pipe with a Class I perforation
pattern to verify its availability. The following terminology is derived from the applicable AASHTO specification. The
perforations shall be approximately circular and arranged in rows parallel to the axis of the pipe. The locations of the
perforations shall be in the valley of the outside of every corrugation. The perforations shall be arranged in two equal
groups placed symmetrically on either side of the lower half of the pipe. Diameters 4”-10” are not available in Class I
patterns, however your local ADS representative may be contacted to verify whether your custom pattern can be
provided.
Min. No. of Maximum Maximum

Nominal I.D. Rows of Perforation Perforation “H” Maximum “L” Minimum Inlet Area*
Perforations Hole Diameter Hole Diameter
12” (300 mm) 6 0.40” (10 mm) 0.20” (5 mm) 5.5” (138 mm) 7.6” (192 mm) 1.2 in2/ft (24.3 cm2/m)
*No minimum Inlet Area requirements from AASHTO M294. Value based on required minimum perforation hole diameter and the minimum
number of perforation rows per AASHTO M294.
Figure 2
AASHTO Class I Perforation Patterns
NOTE: Diagram illustrates

measurements for values of
“H” and “L” – minimum number
of rows of perforations is listed
in table above.
FOR 12”-60” (300-1500mm)

PIPE PER AASHTO M294
The ADS logo and the Green Stripe are registered trademarks of Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc.
© 2022 Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc. TN 1.01 February 2022
Technical Note
TN 1.02 Single Wall HDPE Perforation Patterns
Maximum Slot
Perforation Maximum Slot Pattern
Nominal I.D. Length or Minimum Inlet Area
Type Width Type
Diameter
3” (75 mm) Slot 0.875” (22 mm) 0.120” (3 mm) 1.0 in2/ft (21 cm2/m) A
3” (75 mm) Fine Slot 0.875” (22 mm) 0.015” (0.4 mm) 0.3 in2/ft (6 cm2/m) A
4” (100 mm) Slot 0.875” (22 mm) 0.120” (3 mm) 1.0 in2/ft (21 cm2/m) B
4” (100 mm) Fine Slot 0.875” (22 mm) 0.015” (0.4 mm) 0.3 in2/ft (6 cm2/m) B
5” (125 mm) Fine Slot 0.875” (22 mm) 0.015” (0.4 mm) 0.3 in2/ft (6 cm2/m) B
6” (150 mm) Fine Slot 0.875” (22 mm) 0.015” (0.4mm) 0.3 in2/ft (6 cm2/m) B
12” (300 mm) Circular 0.313” (8 mm) - 1.5 in2/ft (32 cm2/m) C
24” (600 mm) Circular 0.313” (8 mm) - 2.0 in2/ft (42 cm2/m) D
The data provided above is representative of the most common pattern supplied by ADS. Actual perforation count
and dimensions may vary based on regional-specific requirements; product will still comply with respective
product ASTM and AASHTO product standards.
© 2022 Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc. TN 1.02 March 2022
Technical Note
TN 1.03 Storm Water Quality Units
Introduction
The ADS Storm Water Quality Unit (SWQU) is designed to remove pollutants from storm water during a storm event.
ADS has modified its standard N-12® pipe to include weir plates at certain locations and heights to help facilitate
sediment and oil removal from storm water. A bypass pipe is included in the storm water quality unit, so the system can
focus on treating the “first flush”. After the “first flush” has entered the system, the bypass pipe directs high volumes of
storm water around the system.
Storm Water Treatment

The ADS SWQU is designed to treat the “first flush” of a storm event or lower volume storms. First flush refers to the
initial runoff generated by a storm event. Relatively high concentrations of pollutants may be flushed into storm drains
during a first flush. First flush pollutant concentrations are relatively high at the beginning of storms and drop off over
time. Although it may vary based on site conditions, the first flush can contain over 80% of the pollutants that will be
transported off a site.
It is a widely accepted practice to provide treatment for the first flush as opposed to treating the entire design storm
event. Treating the first flush provides a high level of storm water quality at a much lower cost to the developer. The
storm water runoff, which follows the first flush, is generally assumed to be relatively clean in comparison. Providing
treatment for this “clean water” can often double, if not triple, the cost of treatment at a minimum. By treating the first
flush one can provide a great benefit to the environment at a reasonable cost.
The treatment of the contaminated storm water is achieved through the use of weir plates installed at various locations
within the unit. The storm water will enter the first chamber, or Sediment Chamber, which consists of an upright weir for
trapping sediment. A second chamber, or Oil Chamber, uses an inverted weir to trap oils, grease, and debris. Figure 1
illustrates the typical layout of a SWQU. Field and lab testing of the unit indicate the following removal efficiencies:
• 80% Total Suspended Solids removal

• Greater than 43% Total Phosphorous removal
• 72% Heavy Metals removal
• Removal of floatable debris such as oils and greases
Testing reports and summaries are available by contacting your ADS Representative or Application
Engineering. The flow through the unit is controlled at the outlet of the unit by using an orifice, thus
categorizing the Storm Water Quality Unit as an outlet-controlled system. The design methodology behind
outlet control is described in the entitled section Sizing a Storm Water Quality Unit.
When greater storm volumes are encountered, the addition of an external bypass allows the excess water
to bypass the unit so as not to cause turbulent flow and possible resuspension of contaminants in the unit.
This allows the lower volume storms and first flush events, where most contaminants are flushed off the
pavement, to be trapped by the unit and remain there until the unit is cleaned.
Figure 1
Storm Water Quality Unit
N-12 ACCESS RISER N-12 ACCESS RISER

(SEDIMENT RISER) (OIL RISER)
INLET STUB
OUTLET STUB
CHAMBER
STIFFINER PLATES

(SAW TOOTH) (INVERTED)
STAND PIPE WEIR PLATE WEIR PLATE
(BAFFLE, DISPERSION TUBE)
OUTLET ORIFICE
ENDPLATE
ENDPLATE
Sizing a Storm Water Quality Unit

The ADS Storm Water Quality Unit is designed using the fundamental principles of Stoke’s Law and a standard orifice
equation. Stoke’s Law is used to determine the settling velocity of a known particle size. The settling velocity can then
be used to calculate the settling time, which is the time it takes a particle to fall a distance equal to the inlet pipe diameter
plus 2 inches (50mm). The velocity through the chamber is found by dividing the treated flow rate by the cross-sectional
area of the storm water quality unit. The length of the sediment chamber can now be determined by taking the velocity
through the chamber and multiplying by the settling time. After the length of the sediment chamber is established, the
size of the orifice must be calculated. The orifice controls the amount of water entering the water quality unit. Once the
treated flow rate is reached, excess water is diverted to the bypass. A standard orifice equation is used to find the
diameter of the orifice. Example 1 provides an example calculation for sizing a Storm Water Quality Unit.
Example 1
Particle size: 140 sieve
Treated flow rate, Qtreat = 2.26 CFS
Assume 48 in. Water Quality Unit with 12 in inlet pipe
Stoke’s Law to determine settling velocity:
( 1 −  2 )
Vsettling = 2 gr 2
(9 )
Vsettling : Velocity of fall for a particle (ft/sec)
g : Acceleration of gravity = 32.2ft/ sec2

r : Equivalent radius of particle
140 sieve: r = 0.000175 ft
200 sieve: r = 0.000125 ft
1 : Density of particle (soil) = 3.69 slug/ ft3
2 : Density of medium (water) = 1.94 slug/ ft3
 : Viscosity of medium (water at 20o C) = 2.09 x 10-5 lbf-sec/ ft2
  
  3.69 slug − 1.94 slug  
 ft    ft 3 ft 3  
Vsettling = 2 32 .2 (.000175 ft ) 
2
 = 0.018 ft/sec
 sec 2     −5 lbf − sec  

  
  9 2.09 x10 2
  ft  
Vsettling= 0.018 ft/sec
Settling Time:
SD
Tsettling =
Vsettling
Tsettling : Settling time for a particle of known size: (sec)

SD : Settling distance, inlet pipe diameter + 2 in. = (12.15 in. + 2 in.) = 1.18 ft
Vsettling : Settling velocity = 0.018 ft/sec

1.18 ft.
Tsettling = = 66 sec Tsettling= 66 sec
ft
0.018
sec
Velocity through Sediment Chamber:

Qtreat
VSC =
AW QU
VSC : Velocity through the sediment chamber (ft/sec)
Qtreat : Flow at which one wants to treat for water quality = 2.26 CFS
AW QU : Cross sectional area of the water quality unit =  D 2 =  (4 ft.) 2 = 12.57 ft 2

4 4
2.26CFS ft
VS C = = 0.180
12 .57 ft 2
sec VSC = 0.180 ft/sec
Length of Sediment Chamber:
Lsediment = (VSC )(Tsettling)
Lsediment : Length of the sediment chamber (ft.)

VSC : Velocity through the sediment chamber = 0.180 ft/sec
Tsettling : Settling time for a particle of known size = 65.56 sec
 ft 
Lsediment =  0.180 (66 sec) = 12 ft Lsediment = 12 ft
 sec 
Orifice Equation:
Qtreat = (Cd )( A0 ) 2gh0
Qtreat : Treated flow rate = 2.26 CFS

Cd : Coefficient = 0.56
 2
A0 : Area of the orifice = d 0 (ft2)
4
g : Acceleration of gravity = 32.2 ft/sec2
h0 : Head pressure ft = SD = 1.18 ft
Solving the equation for the diameter of the orifice:

1
 2
1  
 4Qtreat  2
 4(2.26CFS ) 
d0 =   = 1 
= 0.77 ft.
 0.56 (2 gh0 ) 2 
1
   ft   2 
 0.56  2 32 .2 2 1.18 ft  
   sec   
d 0 = 0.77ft., Use 9.24” orifice
NOTE: Although the Water Quality Unit is installed level, there is a drop across the unit to provide for
proper head pressure and system performance.
Conclusion
The ADS SWQU provides a cost-efficient treatment option for a variety of applications while achieving
removal efficiencies that meet or exceed most local minimum requirements for storm water treatment.
The treatment of both settling and floating pollutants provides a good first level management technique
that offers the user the opportunity to use the device in either a stand- alone configuration or as a step
in a treatment train.
© 2022 Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc. TN 1.03 March 2022
Technical Note
TN 1.04 Testing of Storm Water Quality Units
Introduction
For the last 20 years storm water management has become an increasingly important issue in the United States. This
has affected not only the larger metropolitan communities but has begun to become important in smaller rural
communities around the country. The areas of interest for these projects are not only storm water quantity but also
storm water quality. The ADS Storm Water Quality Unit (SWQU) provides the first step in the treatment train: removal of
floating debris, suspended solids, and contaminants.
Development
The ADS SWQU was developed to provide a simple, effective method for the control of storm water quality. The basic
design of the unit is an oil grit separator. The unit consists of an upright weir for trapping sediment and an additional
inverted weir for trapping the floatable particles such as oils, grease, and debris. This technology has been around for
several years and is very effective until higher event storms. During intense storm events, oil grit separators are subject
to resuspension of solids and washout of floating particles. Although the efficiency of the early units was fairly high, they
had difficulty retaining the particles that were trapped during high volume storm events.
The ADS SWQU utilizes the same technology but improves upon it to provide a more efficient yet still simple method of
controlling water quality. The addition of an external bypass allows higher storm volumes to be bypassed around the
unit without passing through the unit and causing turbulent flow. This allows the lower volume storms — where most
contaminants are flushed off the pavement — to be trapped by the unit and remain there until the unit is cleaned out. In
addition, the ADS SWQU is constructed of High Density Polyethylene (HDPE) which is inert and much more chemical
resistant than the standard concrete Oil Grit Separators previously used for these applications.
Design
A full discussion of the SWQU design methodology is available in Technical Note 1.01: Water Quality Units - EPA
Phase II, Best Management Practices. In summary, the SWQU utilizes Stoke’s law in order to predict removal
efficiencies based on particle size. The units are designed with a sediment chamber, a floatable chamber, and an
outlet chamber to provide the stormwater treatment ability of the unit. All flows above the velocity required are
routed through the bypass line to prevent the resuspension and removal of trapped materials from the unit. See
Figure 1 for a layout of a typical SWQU.
Figure 1
Laboratory Testing and Research

As with any device designed to treat water quality, testing should be performed to determine the removal rates and
efficiencies of the device. The ADS SWQU has been subjected to of several different testing protocols to determine the
removal rates for both total suspended solids (TSS) and oil and hydrocarbons. Testing has been conducted in both the
laboratory and the field. The following summarizes the testing which has been initiated or completed on the ADS
SWQU:
Ohio University Scale Model Lab Testing

Testing consists of a scale model test loop including the Water Quality Unit and the bypass line. The model tested
was a 12" diameter Water Quality Unit with appropriate scaled appurtenances. This testing was completed in
September of 2003. The model was tested for both sediment and oil removal during the evaluation. A layout of the
test loop is shown below in Figure 2.
Figure 2
Outlet
Bypass
Treatment
Pipe
Module 2
Inlet
Two different soils were used for the evaluation in the Ohio University Lab study. The soils are shown as Type 1
and Type 2. The Type 1 soil contains particles which are generally smaller than the 200 sieve or 75 micron size.
The Type 2 soil contains particles which are generally larger than the 200 sieve or 75 micron size. Sieve analyses
for both soil types are shown below in Figure 3 and 4. The vertical lines represent the 140 sieve and 200 sieve
particle sizes.
Figure 3
Soil Type 1 showed removal rates of 50 – 60% in the higher flow regimes. This would be expected for this soil type,
given the smaller particle sizes and the flow rates used in the experiment. In tests with lower flow rates, the removal
rates increased as the residence time increased. This again would be expected with any soil distribution which
might be used in the system. Soil Type 1, for the most part, consisted of very fine particles such as silts and clays.
The performance of the SWQU using these particle sizes was excellent considering they were outside the design of
the unit. A graph of the removal rates for both soil types can be seen in Figure 4.
Figure 4
Soil Type 2 consisted of particles which generally were larger than the 200 sieve and larger than the soils in Type 1.
These soils, because of their larger size, allowed for less residence time in the unit and still maintained high removal
rates. The removal rates for these particle sizes were over 90% for the flow regimes tested. The soils which were
present in this classification range were particles which are targeted for removal in the ADS Water Quality Unit.
Scaling of Lab Data

Laboratory testing is a convenient method for testing practical theories and design principles. It provides a method to
use a controlled environment and change the appropriate variables to try and achieve the desired results. This is
especially true when scale models can be used to reduce the cost and logistics of testing large devices. Once the
testing is complete it must be scaled to the appropriate standard to produce results which can be predicted in the real
world. In the case of the ADS SWQU it requires that the unit be scaled up in order for flow rates and SWQU sizes to be
appropriate for application.
Two methods for scaling the laboratory data are discussed here. They are the “surface load method” and the “horizontal
flow velocity” method.
The surface flow method is defined by the following equation:
Surface load = overflow rate = flow rate / surface area

(Tchobanoglous and Franklin, 1991)
The horizontal flow velocity simply takes the runoff rate and converts it to a flow based on pipe diameter to get a flow
velocity. If both methods are used, a chart comparing field rainfall intensity to laboratory flow date can be developed, as
shown below in Figure 5.
Figure 5
Corresponding Field Rainfall Intensity
0.25 Linear (Based on surface Load)

Linear (Based on horizontal flow velocity) y = 0.00359x
0.20
0.15
(in/hr)
y = 0.00327x
0.10
0.05
0.00
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
Lab Test Model 1 Flow Rates (L/min)
Alden Labs Maine DEP Laboratory Testing Protocol:
In addition to the scale model testing, which was performed at Ohio University, full scale laboratory testing was
performed at Alden Laboratories in Holden, Mass. Alden Labs tested the SWQU for conformance with the Maine
Department of Environmental Protection Protocol for total suspended solids (TSS) removal. The Maine DEP protocol
was put in place to provide a fair and unbiased mechanism for the evaluation of competitive manufactured water quality
treatment devices. The protocol calls for the injection of a test media into the treatment flow at a predetermined
concentration. The concentration is held at these levels and required residence time is computed. Samples are taken for
background levels, influent levels, and effluent levels. The material collected in each sample is then filtered out and
appropriately dried. Once the material is dried, it is weighed, and the concentration of the total suspended solids is
determined.
For the ADS SWQU, a 60-inch diameter, full scale unit was used. The unit was placed in a test loop at Alden Labs
which consisted of the SWQU and the necessary support structure to run the tests. The testing was conducted on a
standard 60" unit with a few small modifications to provide for accessibility and conformance to the requirements of the
system loop. The modifications included an increase in the size of the risers to 36", the introduction of flanges on the
inlet and outlet sides of the unit, and the insertion of small diameter pipe at the invert on the inlet and outlet side. The
36" risers were added primarily as inspection risers and for access into the system in case modifications or changes in
the monitoring and testing procedure were required. In addition, the large risers provided easier access for the system
to be cleaned out between tests. The flanges were provided on the inlet and outlet side of the unit to allow the SWQU to
be inserted into the test loop, and to provide a watertight connection for the testing procedure. The small diameter pipe
at the invert was put in place to allow the unit to be easily drained and cleaned out for subsequent tests at differing flow
rates. In all other regards the unit tested was a standard ADS SWQU with appropriate weir spacing and weir heights. A
drawing of the unit is shown in Figures 6A & B.
Figure 6A
Figure 6B
The testing of the unit was run at various flow rates in order to determine the variance in the levels of efficiency for the
SWQU based on flow rate and residence time. The concentration of sediment was approximately 250 mg/L. Each test
run consisted of 5 inlet and outlet sample pairs to provide an adequate data set for the testing on the unit. The timing
of the samples was such that the residence time in the unit was taken into account to provide samples which were
coordinated with each other. A picture of the test unit in the testing loop is shown in Figure 7.
Figure 7
The test media used consisted of two different sands manufactured by U.S. Silica. The F-95 sand has a larger particle
size and the OK-110 sand has a smaller particle size. The sieve analysis for each product is shown Table 1.
Table 1
U.S Silica Test Media
% Retained
US Std. Sieve F-95 OK-110
30 0
40 <1 0
50 1 0
70 9 0
100 60 1
120 15
140 42 48
170 24.2
200 15 9.7
270 3 1.9
Pan <1 0.2
Multiple tests were conducted on the unit to provide a comprehensive analysis of the performance of the unit at various
flow rates. The targeted flow rate based on Stoke’s Law for the 60-inch Water Quality Unit is 1.47 cfs. Tests were
conducted on the unit above and below the unit’s anticipated flow rate to determine the performance limitations. For the
1.5 cfs. test, the average removal rate for the OK-110 sand was 88.3%. As a result of this testing, a scaling factor can
be used to correlate the results with different size SWQU’s and indicates that the design for the units is accurate.
Scaling to other size units is accomplished by the following equation:
Qtreatment = (0.016949 cfs / ft 2 )(area)

As a result, the treatment rates from testing at Alden Labs compare favorably to our recommendations for flow rates
through the unit based on the theoretical design. Table 2 shows the tested flow rates compared to the recommended
rate.
Table 2
Product No. Minimum Treatment Maximum Design

Chamber Area (sf) treated flow (cfs) Treated Flow (cfs)
(tested) (recommended)
3620WQB 55.50 0.94 0.7
3640WQB 111.00 1.88 1.6
4220WQB 64.43 1.09 0.86
4240WQB 128.86 2.18 1.83
4820WQB 71.40 1.21 1.13
4840WQB 142.80 2.42 2.39
6020WQB 88.50 1.50 1.47
6040WQB 177.00 3.00 3.12
For design purposes the Design Treated Flow rate should be used. As a follow up to the total suspended solids testing,
further study of the Water Quality Unit was conducted to determine the oil removal efficiency of the unit.
Alden Labs Oil Removal Testing

The same 60-inch diameter SWQU that was used in the total suspended solids removal testing at Alden Labs was also
used for the oil removal study. The unit was again slightly modified to provide for an accurate determination of the oil
removal efficiency of the unit. A skimmer wall, retraction assembly, and sidewall blockage areas were added to confine
the oil collected so that it could be easily identified
Soybean based vegetable oil was used as the test medium. The density of the oil was approximately 0.92 g/ml. Oil was
introduced into the system by use of a pump, which was calibrated prior to testing to determine the relationship between
pump speed and the oil feed rate. Once again, the background levels were recorded to determine any influence from
the water used in the system. The SWQU was tested with flow rates ranging from 0.5 cfs. to 2 cfs. The oil injection
concentration ranged from 50 to 100mg/L. The tests were run for a period of 1 to 2 hours, depending on the influent
flow, until approximately 10 liters of oil were injected into the unit. After the flow oil was discontinued, the unit was
allowed to operate for a period of time to make sure that all of the oil had been injected into the unit and that the water
volume carrying the oil had passed through. Flow rates and removal efficiencies are shown in Table 3.
Table 3
Oil Removal Efficiencies
Flow Rate Removal Efficiency

(cfs) (%)
0.5 95
1 87
1.5 80
2 57
Once again, the flow rate targeted for design purposes is 1.5 cfs for the 60" unit. This would show an 80% removal rate.
The scaling of this information remains the same as shown in the previous section.
Field Testing and Research
Due to the complexities of field research and the dependence on the weather for cooperation, field testing requires more
time and resources. Also, because of the lack of control on all of the variables, the results can be somewhat
inconsistent and often require more analysis when completed. However, the field data and testing when approached
correctly, can provide valuable information for further enhancements and improvements. The SWQU is being tested in
several field installations. Because of the time required to complete these studies none of the current field studies have
been completed, but some of them are yielding preliminary information. The studies currently underway are as follows:
University of New Hampshire Center for Stormwater Technology

Nashville Study of Eight Water Quality Units
Mississippi Testing of Water Quality Units
The status of each study is summarized below.
University of New Hampshire Center for Stormwater Technology

This study consists of a Water Quality Unit and a perforated retention system in series on the site. The site is a
study area for several different manufactured and natural stormwater treatment and control devices. The entire 8
acres that the property is located on is the drainage area from a parking lot for the University. The runoff collected
from the site is urban and generates sediment, oil and grease. The storm water is metered to all the different
devices on the site so that each treatment device receives 1 cfs. The stormwater is sampled on the influent and
effluent sides to provide TSS and Floatable Removal Rate. Several other parameters are also tested at this site,
including heavy metals, organics, and nutrients. The samplers used are automatic and the information is collected
centrally for ease of access.
In addition, the site has been studied from a hydrologic standpoint to provide detailed data on rainfall and runoff
rates. From this data, storms which provide adequate parameters are selected to provide the sample data set. A
full set of data and the parameters for testing are available upon request. Preliminary results are not publicly
available at this time.
Nashville Study of Eight Water Quality Units

This study consists of eight Water Quality Units located at various sites around the metro Nashville area. The
testing was conducted by Qore Property Sciences and the final report was issued on June 23, 2005. The eight
units were each tested for one storm event within each unit’s treatment capacity. The samples were collected in
accordance with the Technology Acceptance Reciprocity Partnership (TARP) Protocol for Stormwater BMP
demonstrations. The testing was done in accordance with ASTM 3977-97, Standard Test Method for Determining
Sediment Concentration in Water Samples, for the range of particles specified by Nashville using the No.10 to the
No.140 sieve. Results from the testing are shown in the Table 4.
Table 4
In addition to the results summarized in Table 4, an analysis of particle sizes ranging from the No.10 to the No.200
sieve was also conducted. The samples taken were in accordance with TARP protocol and ASTM 3977-97 was used to
determine the resulting efficiencies. A summary of the results is shown in Table 5.
Table 5
Conclusions
The ADS SWQU can provide significant treatment for stormwater quality on a variety of stormwater
projects. The treatment of both settling and floating pollutants provides a good first level management
technique. This provides the opportunity to use the device in both a stand-alone configuration or as the
first step in a treatment train.
© 2022 Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc. TN 1.04 April 2022
Technical Note
TN 1.05 Pipe Joints & Gaskets
Introduction
ADS offers a full line of corrugated pipe products to fit the requirements of nearly any storm drain or gravity flow project
and some sanitary sewer and low head pressure project specifications. With several products available to meet many
project needs, the following outlines the product characteristics and typical uses of pipe used for storm drainage, sanitary
sewer and irrigation to aid in the most efficient selection of an ADS product; specifications with additional information for
each pipe product are also available. In some applications when corrosive effluent may be present in the pipe, the gasket
material should also be evaluated and will be discussed in the following.
Pipe Products
Two base materials are currently used for ADS products: high density polyethylene (HDPE) and polypropylene (PP). The
HDPE products will be black in color, while the PP products will be grey in color. Products used for mainline storm
drainage and sanitary sewer will have a dual wall or triple wall profile. Figure 1 illustrates a cross section of the dual and
triple wall profiles. Individual product specifications for all ADS pipe products are available in the Drainage Handbook
Specifications section, which can be downloaded from www.ads-pipe.com or obtained from an ADS representative.
Figure 1
Dual Wall and Triple Wall Pipe Profiles
HEIGHT HEIGHT
For all IB (integral bell) products, a gasketed integral bell and spigot joint, which maintains a constant outside
diameter (OD) to avoid additional excavation for the bells, is utilized on 12” – 60” pipe; 4” through 10” pipe comes
with a coupler installed by the manufacturer to eliminate the need for additional couplers, but is not manufactured
on the pipe as with the IB connection. Products using the IB joint configuration include N-12® ST IB, N-12 WT IB,
MEGA-GREEN®, Sanitite®, N-12 HP, SaniTite HP and Low Head pipe.
Gaskets
All ADS gaskets meet the requirements of ASTM F477, “Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals
(Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe.” There are two categories of gasket connections required to join ADS
products: integral connections and field/fitting connections. Integral connections utilize the manufactured
integral bell and spigot (IB) that was described in the preceding pipe product sections. Field couplers or
fitting connections use a welded bell that is identifiably larger than the IB joint on unmodified pipe. To
allow for easy field modification, a larger valley or saddle gasket must be used when inserting the pipe or
fitting into a welded bell. Gaskets are available for soil-tight or watertight performance and should be
selected with the aid of an ADS representative to ensure the correct gasket is ordered.
Chemical Resistance of Gaskets
Gasket material must be considered for projects where abnormal chemicals or abnormal concentrations of chemicals are
present. Like other common storm water drainage pipe materials, ADS pipe products utilize polyisoprene rubber gaskets
manufactured meeting the requirements of ASTM F477. In most cases, this gasket material is resistant to many of the
common chemicals found in storm drainage applications. However, there are chemicals that may negatively affect the
gasket material. For information on chemical resistance of elastomers commonly used as plastic pipe seals or gaskets,
refer to ADS Technical Note 4.01 Chemical Resistance of Polyethylene and Elastomers or Technical Note 4.02 Chemical
Resistance of Polypropylene and Elastomers.
Alternative Pipe Gasket Materials

Oil Resistant Gaskets
For applications where resistance to hydrocarbons (oil/gasoline) is important, nitrile rubber may be a suitable
gasket material. Nitrile has good resistance to oil, solvent, and hydraulic fluid and has been used for many years
in o-ring and hose products. It also demonstrates suitable material properties that make it a desirable material
for pipe joints over other oil resistant materials. For projects where a lower level of hydrocarbon resistance may
be required, neoprene gaskets may also be a suitable alternative.
EPDM (Ethylene-Propylene) Gaskets
EPDM may be used as a suitable pipe gasket material in environments where acids are present or when the
gasket may be exposed to the sun for extended periods of time.
For applications where custom gaskets may be needed, please contact your local ADS representative for pricing and
availability.
© 2022 Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc. TN 1.05 September 2022
Technical Note
TN 1.07 Manhole Adapter Guide - SaniTite® HP, HP Storm, N-12® HDPE Pipe
Manhole Connection Basics

Compression Connections
• Gasket is cast into the wall of the manhole at the
precaster’s facility. Gasket cannot be field installed.
• A-LOK® Premium™ is recommended for all

connections. The Premium gasket has higher
compression than the A-LOK STM standard gasket,
which aids in sealing against the outer wall of SaniTite
HP triple wall pipe and the SaniTite HP manhole
adapter sleeve for dual wall pipe.
• A-LOK gaskets always need to connect to a smooth

surface of pipe – Nyloplast® adapter or ADS
adapter sleeves are required when using dual wall
pipe. Triple wall pipe requires no adapter.
Boot Connections:
• Gasket can be installed by the precaster or field-installed by the contractor. The precaster will form the required
hole in the structure and either the precaster or contractor will install the boot.
• Preferred manufacturers are Press Seal® (PSX Direct Drive) and Trelleborg (Kor-n-Seal®).
• Boots always need to connect to a smooth surface. You can connect to a dual wall pipe with an installed
corrugated pipe adapter (valley fill gasket) or a Manhole adapter sleeve.
Sleeve
Manhole Adapter
Boot or Compression Connection
For HP & HDPE
12” - 24” (XX22AAPP)
Sanitary or Storm Joint
Not Available for 21”
Nyloplast® PVC
Manhole Adapter
Same OD as SDR35
12” – 24” (XX57AGHPU2) Sanitary Joint
HP
12” – 30” (XX57AGHPU) Storm Joint
HDPE 12” – 30” (XX77AGU) Storm Joint

Corrugated
Pipe Adapter
Gasket
Boot Connection Only
(XX50PS)
12” – 30” Sanitary or Storm Joint
36” – 60” Storm Joint
SaniTite HP TW to
HP Storm DW
30” – 60” Dual Wall
Storm Joint
Coordinate with plant to ensure correct gasket
for compatibility is installed prior to shipment.
CONSULT ADS SERIES 200 STANDARD DETAILS
The ADS logo, SaniTite HP, N-12 and the Green Stripe are registered trademarks of Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc.
Nyloplast® is a registered trademark of Nyloplast, Inc.
Technical Note
TN 1.08 Water Quality Device Oil Storage Volumes
Introduction
The information in this document is designed to provide values to general storage capacities (gallons) for oil and grease or free
phase oil/petroleum product spills into ADS water quality devices. The information provided is not intended to be used for
project design (i.e., maximum flow rates, etc.). Spill incidents that involve high velocities into these devices will yield different
results/capacities. It is assumed that the spill flow rates will be less than 10% of the maximum treatment rate (MTR) into an
individual ADS Water Quality device.
Oil and Grease (O&G) is a common term for measuring total petroleum hydrocarbons (TPH), lubricating oils, oil and oil
byproducts found in stormwater runoff. It is assumed that the densities for these types of O&G pollutants are less than that of
water (i.e., less than 1g/cm3).
Spill Capacities
For applications located at sensitive maintenance, transportation, fueling operations, spill containment is a concern. Most of
these sites have safety measures and alarms to alert the owner that a spill has occurred. ADS’s BaySeparator, Barracuda®,
and Water Quality Unit (WQU), all have the capability to store spills that occur in non-storm events. Table 1 lists the spill
containment volumes for each of our units.
Diagrams provided (Figures 1, 2, and 3) show how and where the spilled material is stored within a given ADS unit. It is the
responsibility of the owner to remediate and extract the free phase oil shortly after the spill event has occurred and prior to
subsequent storm event.
Table 1: Spill Capacities
Baracuda Unit Spill Capacity, gallons (L)

BaySeparator Unit Spill Capacity, gallons (L)1
S3 26 (98)
1/2K 226 (855)
S4 51 (193)
1K 320 (1211)
S5 86 (325)
3K 456 (1726)
S6 115 (435)
5K 621 (2350)
S8 212 (802)
10K 1567 (5931)
S10 305 (1154)
ADS WQU Unit Spill Capacity, gallons (L)

3615 221 (836)
3620 225 (851)
3640 470 (1779)
4220 285 (1078)
4240 605 (2290)
4820 410 (1552)
4840 860 (3255)
6020 650 (2460)
6040 1380 (5223)
1 BaySeparator with larger secondary manholes can store more gallons of oil. Contact ADS Engineering for
information on larger storage systems for the BaySeparator.
Spill Capacity Details
For each ADS product, the spill oil will be stored in an accessible area of the device. For the Barracuda it will be contained in
the inletting “bowl” area below the invert out of the system (See Figure 1). For the BaySeparator, the spill will be stored in the
secondary manhole and stored between the invert into the secondary manhole and the top elevation invert out to the
BaySeparator™ unit (See Figure 2). For the ADS Water Quality Unit the area will be storage between the elevations of
sedimentation internal weir and the effluent exit “plate” opening to the final section of the WQU (See Figure 3).
Figure 1: Barracuda Oil Capacity Zone
Figure 2: BaySeparator Oil Capacity Zone

Figure 3: ADS WQU Oil Capacity Zone
The ADS logo, Barracuda and the Green Stripe are registered trademarks of Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc.
Technical Note
TN 2.01 Minimum and Maximum Burial Depth for Corrugated HDPE Pipe (per
AASHTO)
Introduction
The information in this document is designed to provide answers to general cover height questions; the data provided is
not intended to be used for project design. The design procedure described in the Structures section (Section 2) of the
Drainage Handbook provides detailed information for analyzing most common installation conditions. This procedure
should be utilized for project specific designs.
The two common cover height concerns are minimum cover in areas exposed to vehicular traffic and maximum cover
heights. Either may be considered "worst case" scenario from a loading perspective, depending on the project conditions.
The minimum and maximum cover heights in this technical note are not applicable to retention/detention
systems, where unique configurations of fittings may require different minimum and maximum cover height
limits. Please reference ADS Standard Detail 702 “Retention-Detention System (Cross-Section)” for cover height
recommendations.
Minimum Cover in Traffic Applications

Pipe diameters from 4- through 48-inch (100-1200 mm) installed in traffic areas (AASHTO H-20, H-25, or HL-93 loads)
must have at least one foot (0.3m) of cover over the pipe crown, while 54- and 60-inch (1350 and 1500 mm) pipes must
have at least 24 inches (0.6m) of cover. The backfill envelope must be constructed in accordance with the Installation
section (Section 5) of the Drainage Handbook and the requirements of ASTM D2321. The backfill envelope must be of
the type and compaction listed in Appendix A-5, Table A-5-2 of the Drainage Handbook. In Table 1 below, this condition
is represented by a Class III material compacted to 95% standard Proctor density or a Class II material compacted to 90%
standard proctor density, although other material can provide similar strength at slightly lower levels of compaction.
Structural backfill material should extend to the crown of the pipe; the remaining cover should be appropriate for the
installation and as specified by the design engineer. If settlement or rutting is a concern, it may be appropriate to extend
the structural backfill to grade. Where pavement is involved, sub-base material can be considered in the minimum burial
depth. While rigid pavements can be included in the minimum cover, the thickness of flexible pavements should not be
included in the minimum cover.
Additional information that may affect the cover requirements is included in the Installation section (Section 5) of the
Drainage Handbook. Some examples of what may need to be considered are temporary heavy equipment,
construction loading, paving equipment and similar loads that are less than the design load, the potential of pipe
flotation, and the type of surface treatment which will be installed over the pipe zone.
Table 1
Minimum Cover Requirements for ADS N-12, N-12 ST, and N-12 WT (per AASHTO) with AASHTO H-20, H-25,
or HL-93 Load
Inside Minimum Inside Minimum

Diameter, Cover Diameter, Cover
ID, in.(mm) ft. (m) ID, in.(mm) ft. (m)
4 (100) 1 (0.3) 24 (600) 1 (0.3)
6 (150) 1 (0.3) 30 (750) 1 (0.3)
8 (200) 1 (0.3) 36 (900) 1 (0.3)
10 (250) 1 (0.3) 42 (1050) 1 (0.3)
12 (300) 1 (0.3) 48 (1200) 1 (0.3)
15 (375) 1 (0.3) 54 (1350) 2 (0.6)
18 (450) 1 (0.3) 60 (1500) 2 (0.6)
Notes for Table 1:

1. Minimum covers presented here were calculated assuming Class III backfill material to 95% standard Proctor
density or Class II backfill material to 90% standard Proctor density around the pipe and structural backfill to the
crown of the pipe, as recommended in Section 5 of the Drainage Handbook, with an additional layer of
compacted traffic lane sub-base for a total cover as required. In shallow traffic installations, especially where
pavement is involved, a good quality compacted material to grade is required to prevent surface rutting.
2. The minimum covers specified do not include pavement thickness. A pavement section of 0.4’ is typical.
3. Backfill materials and compaction levels not shown in the table may also be acceptable. Contact ADS for further
detail.
4. Calculations assume no hydrostatic pressure and native soils that are as strong as the specified minimum
backfill recommendations.
Maximum Cover
Wall thrust generally governs the maximum cover a pipe can withstand and conservative maximum cover heights will
result when using the information presented in the Structures section (Section 2) of the Drainage Handbook.
The maximum burial depth is highly influenced by the type of backfill and level of compaction around the pipe. General
maximum cover limits for ADS N-12, N-12 ST, N-12 WT pipe, (ASTM F2306 and AASTHO M252/M294 Type S pipes)
are shown in Table 3 for a variety of backfill conditions.
Table 3 was developed assuming pipe is installed in accordance with ASTM D2321 and the Installation section
(Section 5) of the Drainage Handbook. Additionally, the calculations assume zero hydrostatic load, incorporate the
maximum safety factors represented in Structures section of the Drainage Handbook, use material properties
consistent with the expected performance characteristics for N-12 (per ASTM F2306) materials as shown in Table 2
below, and assume the native soil is of adequate strength and is suitable for installation. For applications requiring fill
heights greater than those shown in Table 3 or where hydrostatic pressure due to groundwater is present, contact an
ADS engineering representative.
Figure 1
ADS N-12→, N-12 ST, and N-12 WT (per AASHTO) Trench Detail Under Pavement
Table 2
ADS N-12 (per AASHTO) Mechanical Properties
Factored Initial 75-Year
Tension
Cell Class Compressive Fu E Fu E
Strain (%)
Strain (%) (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi)
ASTM D3350
4.1 5.0 3,000 110,000 900 21,000
435400C
Table 3
Maximum Cover for ADS N-12, N-12 ST, and N-12 WT Pipe (per AASHTO), ft (m)
Diameter Class 1 Class 2 Class 3

in. (mm) Compacted Dumped 95% 90% 85% 3 95% 90% 3
4 (100) 37 (11.3) 18 (5.5) 25 (7.6) 18 (5.5) 12 (3.7) 18 (5.5) 13 (4.0)
6 (150) 44 (13.4) 20 (6.1) 29 (8.8) 20 (6.1) 14 (4.3) 21 (6.4) 15 (4.6)
8 (200) 32 (9.8) 15 (4.6) 22 (6.7) 15 (4.6) 10 (3.0) 16 (4.9) 11 (3.4)
10 (250) 38 (11.6) 18 (5.5) 26 (7.9) 18 (5.5) 12 (3.7) 18 (5.5) 13 (4.0)
12 (300) 35 (10.7) 17 (5.2) 24 (7.3) 17 (5.2) 8 (2.4) 17 (5.2) 11 (3.4)
15 (375) 38 (11.6) 17 (5.2) 25 (7.6) 17 (5.2) 8 (2.4) 18 (5.5) 11 (3.4)
18 (450) 36 (11.0) 17 (5.2) 24 (7.3) 17 (5.2) 8 (2.4) 17 (5.2) 11 (3.4)
24 (600) 28 (8.5) 13 (4.0) 20 (6.1) 13 (4.0) 7 (2.1) 14 (4.3) 10 (3.0)
30 (750) 28 (8.5) 13 (4.0) 20 (6.1) 13 (4.0) 7 (2.1) 14 (4.3) 9 (2.7)
36 (900) 26 (7.9) 12 (3.7) 18 (5.5) 12 (3.7) 7 (2.1) 13 (4.0) 9 (2.7)
42 (1050) 23 (7.0) 11 (3.4) 16 (4.9) 11 (3.4) 7 (2.1) 11 (3.4) 7 (2.1)
48 (1200) 25 (7.6) 11 (3.4) 17 (5.2) 11 (3.4) 7 (2.1) 12 (3.7) 7 (2.1)
54 (1350) 22 (6.7) 10 (3.0) 16 (4.9) 10 (3.0) 6 (1.8) 11 (3.4) 7 (2.1)
60 (1500) 25 (7.6) 11 (3.4) 17 (5.2) 11 (3.4) 6 (1.8) 12 (3.7) 7 (2.1)
Notes:
1. Results based on calculations shown in the Structures section of the ADS Drainage Handbook (v20.7).
Calculations assume no hydrostatic pressure and a density of 120 pcf (1926 kg/m3) for overburden material.
2. Installation assumed to be in accordance with ASTM D2321 and the Installation section of the Drainage
Handbook.
3. For installations using lower quality backfill materials or lower compaction efforts, pipe deflection may exceed
the 5% design limit; however controlled deflection may not be a structurally limiting factor for the pipe. For
installations where deflection is critical, pipe placement techniques or periodic deflection measurements may
be required to ensure satisfactory pipe installation.
4. Backfill materials and compaction levels not shown in the table may also be acceptable. Contact ADS for
further detail.
5. Material must be adequately “knifed” into haunch and in between corrugations. Compaction and backfill
material is assumed uniform throughout entire backfill zone.
6. Compaction levels shown are for standard Proctor density.
7. For projects where cover exceeds the maximum values listed above, contact ADS for specific design
considerations.
8. Calculations assume no hydrostatic pressure. Hydrostatic pressure will result in a reduction in allowable fill
height. Reduction in allowable fill height must be assessed by the design engineer for the specific field
conditions.
9. Fill height for dumped Class I material incorporate an additional degree of conservatism that is difficult to
assess due to the large degree of variation in the consolidation of this material as it is dumped. There is
limited analytical data on its performance. For this reason, values as shown are estimated to be conservatively
equivalent to Class 2, 90% SPD.
The ADS logo, N-12 and the Green Stripe are registered trademarks of Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc.
© 2022 Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc. TN 2.01 May 2022
Technical Note
TN 2.02 Minimum and Maximum Cover Heights for Corrugated HDPE Pipe (per ASTM
F2648)
Introduction
heights. Either may be considered “worst case” scenario from a loading perspective, depending on the project conditions.

Pipe diameters from 4- through 48-inch (100-1200 mm) installed in traffic areas (AASHTO H-25 or HS-25 loads) must
have at least one foot (0.3m) of cover over the pipe crown, while 60-inch (1500 mm) pipe must have at least 24 inches
(0.6m) of cover. The backfill envelope must be constructed in accordance with the Installation section (Section 5) of the
Drainage Handbook and the requirements of ASTM D2321. The backfill envelope must be of the type and compaction
listed in Appendix A-5, Table A-5-2A of the Drainage Handbook. In Table 1 below, this condition is represented by a
Class II material compacted to 90% standard Proctor density, although other material can provide similar strength at
slightly lower levels of compaction. Structural backfill material should extend to the crown of the pipe; the remaining cover
should be appropriate for the installation and as specified by the design engineer. If settlement or rutting is a concern, it
may be appropriate to extend the structural backfill to grade. Where pavement is involved, sub-base material can be
considered in the minimum burial depth. While rigid pavements can be included in the minimum cover, the thickness of
flexible pavements should not be included in the minimum cover.
Drainage Handbook. Some examples of what may need to be considered are temporary heavy equipment, construction
loading, paving equipment and similar loads that are less than the design load, the potential of pipe flotation, and the type
of surface treatment which will be installed over the pipe zone. Please note that Table 1 and 3 are based on the
installation of N-12 and MEGA GREEN (per ASTM F2648) pipe under pavement using a uniform backfill type and
compaction level, as depicted in Figure 1.
Table 1
Minimum Cover Requirements for N-12® and MEGAGREENTM Pipes (per ASTM F2648)
with AASHTO H-25 or HS-25 Load
Inside Minimum
Diameter, ID, Cover
inches (mm) feet (m)
4 (100) – 48
1 (0.3)
(1200)
60 (1500) 2 (0.6)
Note: Minimum covers presented here were calculated assuming Class II backfill material compacted to 90%
standard Proctor density around the pipe and structural backfill to the crown of the pipe, as recommended in
Section 5 of the Drainage Handbook, with an additional layer of compacted traffic lane sub-base for a total cover
as required. In shallow traffic installations, especially where pavement is involved, a good quality compacted
material to grade is required to prevent surface settlement and rutting.
Maximum Cover
maximum cover limits for N-12 and MEGA GREEN (per ASTM F2648) pipe are shown in Table 3 for a variety of backfill
conditions.
Table 3 was developed assuming pipe is installed in accordance with ASTM D2321 and the Installation section (Section
5) of the Drainage Handbook. Additionally, the calculations assume no hydrostatic load around the pipe, incorporate the
maximum safety factors represented in Structures section of the Drainage Handbook, use material properties consistent
with the expected performance characteristics for N-12 and MEGA GREEN (per ASTM F2648) materials as shown in
Table 2 below, and assume the native soil (in-situ) is of adequate strength and is suitable for installation. For applications
requiring fill heights greater than those shown in Table 3 or where hydrostatic pressure due to groundwater is present,
contact an ADS engineering representative.
Figure 1
ADS N-12 and MEGAGREEN (per ASTM F2648) Trench Detail Under Pavement
Table 2
ADS N-12 and MEGAGREEN (per ASTM F2648) Mechanical Properties
Initial 50-Year
Design Compressive Design Tensile
Cell Class Fu E Fu E
Strain (%) Strain (%)
(psi) (psi) (psi) (psi)
ASTM D3350
424420C – 4-10” 3.7 4.0 3,000 110,000 800 21,000
435420C – 12-60”
Table 3
Maximum Cover for ADS N-12 and MEGAGREEN Pipes (per ASTM F2648), ft (m)

in. (mm) Compacted Dumped 95% 90% 95%
4 (100) 34 (10.4) 16 (4.9) 23 (7.0) 16 (4.9) 17 (5.2)
6 (150) 40 (12.2) 19 (5.8) 27 (8.2) 19 (5.8) 20 (6.1)
8 (200) 30 (9.1) 14 (4.3) 21 (6.4) 14 (4.3) 15 (4.6)
10 (250) 34 (10.4) 16 (4.9) 23 (7.0) 16 (4.9) 17 (5.2)
12 (300) 35 (10.7) 17 (5.2) 24 (7.3) 17 (5.2) 18 (5.5)
15 (375) 37 (11.3) 18 (5.5) 25 (7.6) 18 (5.5) 19 (5.8)
18 (450) 32 (9.8) 15 (4.6) 22 (6.7) 15 (4.6) 16 (4.9)
24 (600) 27 (8.2) 13 (4.0) 19 (5.8) 13 (4.0) 14 (4.3)
30 (750) 22 (6.7) 11 (3.4) 16 (4.9) 11 (3.4) 11 (3.4)
36 (900) 26 (7.9) 12 (3.7) 18 (5.5) 12 (3.7) 13 (4.0)
42 (1050) 24 (7.3) 11 (3.4) 17 (5.2) 11 (3.4) 12 (3.7)
48 (1200) 23 (7.0) 11 (3.4) 16 (4.9) 11 (3.4) 12 (3.7)
60 (1500) 26 (7.9) 12 (3.7) 18 (5.5) 12 (3.7) 13 (4.0)
Notes:
1. Results based on calculations shown in the Structures section of the ADS Drainage Handbook(v20.6). Calculations
assume no hydrostatic pressure and a density of 120 pcf (1926 kg/m3) for overburden material.
2. Installation assumed to be in accordance with ASTM D2321 and the Installation section of the Drainage Handbook.
3. Material must be adequately “knifed” into haunch and in between corrugations. Compaction and backfill material is
assumed uniform throughout entire backfill zone.
5. Installations of pipe manufactured per ASTM F2648 are only applicable to the fill heights, type of embedment
materials and compaction levels listed above.
6. For projects where cover exceeds the maximum values listed above, contact ADS for specific design considerations.
7. Calculations assume no hydrostatic pressure. Hydrostatic pressure will result in a reduction in allowable fill height.
Reduction in allowable fill height must be assessed by the design engineer for the specific field conditions.
Technical Note
TN 2.03 Minimum and Maximum Cover Heights for Single Wall Corrugated HDPE
Pipe
Introduction
The two common cover height concerns are minimum cover in areas exposed to vehicular traffic and maximum
cover heights. Either may be considered "worst case" scenario from a loading perspective, depending on the
project conditions.

Pipe diameters from 3- through 24-inch (75-600 mm) installed in traffic areas (AASHTO H-25 or HS-25 loads) must have
at least one foot (0.3m) of cover over the pipe crown. The backfill envelope must be constructed in accordance with the
Installation section (Section 5) of the Drainage Handbook and the requirements of ASTM D2321. The backfill envelope
must be of the type and compaction listed in Table 2-3 of the Drainage Handbook. In Table 1 below, this condition is
represented by a Class III material compacted to 90% standard Proctor density, although other material can provide
similar strength at slightly lower levels of compaction. Structural backfill material should extend to the crown of the pipe;
the remaining cover should be appropriate for the installation and as specified by the design engineer. If settlement or
rutting is a concern, it may be appropriate to extend the structural backfill to grade. Where pavement is involved, sub-
base material can be considered in the minimum burial depth. While rigid pavements can be included in the minimum
cover, the thickness of flexible pavements should not be included in the minimum cover.
loading , paving equipment and similar loads that are less than the design load, the potential of pipe flotation, and the type
of surface treatment which will be installed over the pipe zone.
Table 1
Minimum Cover Requirements for ADS Single Wall Highway and Heavy Duty Pipe with AASHTO H-25
or HS-25 Load
3 (75) 1 (0.3) 24 (600) 1 (0.3)
4 (100) 1 (0.3) 12 (300) 1 (0.3)
6 (150) 1 (0.3) 15 (375) 1 (0.3)
8 (200) 1 (0.3) 18 (450) 1 (0.3)
10 (250) 1 (0.3)
Note: Minimum covers presented here were calculated assuming Class III backfill material compacted to 90%
standard Proctor density around the pipe and structural backfill to the crown of the pipe, as recommended in
Section 5 of the Drainage Handbook, with an additional layer of compacted traffic lane sub-base for a total cover
as required. In shallow traffic installations, especially where pavement is involved, a good quality compacted
Maximum Cover
maximum cover limits for ADS Single Wall Highway and Heavy Duty pipes are shown in Table 2 for a variety of backfill
conditions.
5) of the Drainage Handbook. Additionally, the calculations; assume zero hydrostatic load, incorporate the maximum
safety factors represented in structures section of the Drainage Handbook, and assume the native soil is of adequate
strength and is suitable for installation. For applications requiring fill heights greater than those shown in Table 2, contact
the ADS Regional Engineering or Application Engineering departments.
Table 2
Maximum Cover for ADS Single Wall Heavy Duty and Highway Pipe, ft (m)
in (mm) Compacted Dumped 95% 90% 85% 95% 90% 85%
4 (100) 41 13 27 18 13 19 13 11
6 (150) (12.5) (4.0) (8.2) (5.5) (4.0) (5.8) (4.0) (3.9)
8 (200)
10 (250)
38 12 25 17 12 18 12 10
12 (300)
(11.6) (3.7) (7.6) (5.2) (3.7) (5.5) (3.7) (3.0)
15 (375)
18 (450)
32 11 21 15 11 16 11 9
24 (600)
(9.8) (3.4) (6.4) (4.6) (3.4) (4.9) (3.4) (2.7)
Notes:
1. Results based on calculations shown in the Structures section of the ADS Drainage Handbook. Calculations
Handbook.
further detail.
considerations.
7. Calculations assume no hydrostatic pressure. Hydrostatic pressure will result in a reduction in
allowable fill height. Reduction in allowable fill height must be assessed by the design engineer for
the specific field conditions.
8. Fill height for dumped Class I material incorporate an additional degree of conservatism that is
difficult to assess due to the large degree of variation in the consolidation of this material as it is
dumped. There is limited analytical data on its performance. For this reason, values as shown are
estimated to be conservatively equivalent to Class 2, 85% SPD.
Technical Note
TN 2.04 Minimum and Maximum Cover Heights for HP Storm Pipe for Storm Drainage
Introduction
heights. Either may be considered "worst case" scenario from a loading perspective, depending on the project
conditions.

must have at least one foot (0.3m) of cover over the pipe crown, while 60-inch (1500 mm) pipes must have at least 24
inches (0.6m) of cover. The backfill envelope must be constructed in accordance with the Installation section (Section 5)
of the Drainage Handbook and the requirements of ASTM D2321. The backfill envelope must be of the type and
compaction listed in Appendix A-5, Table A-5-2 of the Drainage Handbook. In Table 1 below, this condition is
represented by a Class III material compacted to 95% standard Proctor density or a Class II material compacted to 90%
standard proctor density, although other material can provide similar strength at slightly lower levels of compaction.
Structural backfill material should extend to the crown of the pipe; the remaining cover should be appropriate for the
installation and as specified by the design engineer. If settlement or rutting is a concern, it may be appropriate to extend
the structural backfill to grade. Where pavement is involved, sub-base material can be considered in the minimum burial
depth. While rigid pavements can be included in the minimum cover, the thickness of flexible pavements should not be
included in the minimum cover.
of surface treatment which will be installed over the pipe zone.
Table 1
Minimum Cover Requirements for ADS HP Storm with AASHTO H-25, H-20, or HL-93 Load

12 (300) 1 (0.3) 36 (900) 1 (0.3)
15 (375) 1 (0.3) 42 (1050) 1 (0.3)
18 (450) 1 (0.3) 48 (1200) 1 (0.3)
24 (600) 1 (0.3) 60 (1500) 2 (0.6)
Notes:
1. Minimum covers presented here were calculated assuming Class III backfill material compacted to 95%
standard Proctor density or Class II backfill material compacted to 90% standard Proctor density around the
pipe, as recommended in Section 5 of the Drainage Handbook, with an additional layer of compacted traffic
lane sub-base for a total cover as required. In shallow traffic installations, especially where pavement is
involved, a good quality compacted material to grade is required to prevent surface settlement and rutting.
further detail.
Maximum Cover
result when using the information presented in the Structures section (Section 2) of the Drainage Handbook. Table 2
below shows the material properties consistent with the expected performance characteristics for HP Storm materials for
a 100-year design life.
maximum cover limits for ADS HP Storm use in storm drainage applications are shown in Tables 3 for a variety of backfill
conditions.
5) of the Drainage handbook. Additionally, the calculations assume no hydrostatic load around the pipe, incorporate the
maximum conservative AASHTO LRFD design factors represented in Structures section of the Drainage Handbook, use
material properties consistent with the expected performance characteristics for HP Storm materials, as shown in Table
2, and assume the native (in-situ) soil is of adequate strength and suitable for installation. For applications requiring fill
heights greater than those shown in Table 3 or where hydrostatic pressure due to groundwater is expected, contact an
ADS Engineer.
Table 2
ADS HP Storm Mechanical Properties
Allowable Initial 75-Year

ASTM
Resin Long Term Fu E Fu E
Specification
Strain % (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi)
Polypropylene,
Impact-modified ASTM F2881 3.7 3,500 175,000 1,000 28,000
copolymer
Figure 1
ADS HP Storm Pipe Trench Detail with Uniform Backfill
(Traffic and Non-Traffic Applications)
COVER TO COVER TO
RIGID PAVEMENT, H FLEXIBLE PAVEMENT, H
FINAL
BACKFILL
INITIAL
SPRINGLINE
BACKFILL
HAUNCH
BEDDING
4" FOR 12"-24" PIPE
6" FOR 30"-60" PIPE SUITABLE
MIN TRENCH WIDTH FOUNDATION
Table 3
Maximum Cover for ADS HP Storm Pipe with Uniform Backfill, ft (m)
Class
4
in (mm) Compacted Dumped 95% 90% 85% 3 95% 90% 3 95% 3
41 21 28 21 16 20 16 16
12 (300)
(12.5) (6.4) (8.5) (6.4) (4.9) (6.1) (4.9) (4.9)
42 21 29 21 16 21 16 16
15 (375)
(12.8) (6.4) (8.8) (6.4) (4.9) (6.4) (4.9) (4.9)
44 21 30 21 16 22 17 16
18 (450)
(13.4) (6.4) (9.1) (6.4) (4.9) (6.7) (5.2) (4.9)
30 15 21 15 11 16 11 11
24 (600)
(9.1) (4.6) (6.4) (4.6) (3.4) (4.9) (3.4) (3.4)
39 19 27 19 14 19 15 14
30 (750)
(11.9) (5.8) (8.2) (5.8) (4.3) (5.8) (4.6) (4.3)
28 14 20 14 10 14 11 10
36 (900)
(8.5) (4.3) (6.1) (4.3) (3.0) (4.3) (3.4) (3.0)
42 30 14 21 14 10 15 11 10
(1050) (9.1) (4.3) (6.4) (4.3) (3.0) (4.6) (3.4) (3.0)
48 29 14 20 14 9 14 10 10
(1200) (8.8) (4.3) (6.1) (4.3) (2.7) (4.3) (3.0) (3.0)
60 29 14 20 14 9 14 10 9
(1500) (8.8) (4.3) (6.1) (4.3) (2.7) (4.3) (3.0) (2.7)
Notes:
1. Results based on calculations shown in the Structures section of the ADS Drainage Handbook (v20.7).
Calculations assume no hydrostatic pressure and a density of 120 pcf (1926 kg/m3) for overburden material.
Handbook.
3. For installations using lower quality backfill materials or lower compaction efforts, pipe deflection may exceed
the 5% design limit; however controlled deflection may not be a structurally limiting factor for the pipe. For
installation where deflection is critical, pipe placement techniques or periodic deflection measurements may be
required to ensure satisfactory pipe installation.
further detail.
considerations.
8. See ADS Standard Detail STD-101D for additional details.
Technical Note
TN 2.04A Minimum and Maximum Cover Heights for Alternate HP Storm Pipe Trench
Introduction
The information in this document is designed to provide answers regarding general cover heights questions regarding the
alternative trench installation of ADS HP Storm pipe; the data provided is based on Culvert Analysis and Design (CANDE)
with information presented in the Structures section (Section 2) of the Drainage Handbook and is not intended to be used
for project design. Project specific properties should be included in analysis for specific project design.
Minimum Cover
Minimum cover for non-traffic rated applications (grass or landscape areas) is 12” (300mm) from top of pipe to ground
surface, for all pipe diameters. Additional cover may be required to prevent flotation.
Maximum Cover
maximum cover limits for ADS HP Storm utilized in non-traffic rated storm drainage applications; using different backfill
materials (split backfill) in the backfill zone, as depicted in Figure 1, are shown in Table 2.
Table 2 was developed using CANDE modeling software. CANDE is a finite element analysis tool developed by Dr. Mike
Katona under the sponsorship of the FHWA and AASHTO and is available for download. The AASHTO LRFD design
method is not able to evaluate complex scenarios, such as changing backfill material. AASHTO LRFD load and
resistance factors, shown in the Structures section of the Drainage Handbook, are utilized in the CANDE analysis.
Additionally, the CANDE analysis assumes no hydrostatic load around the pipe, uses material properties consistent with
the expected performance characteristics for HP Storm materials, as shown in Table 1 below, and assumes the native (in-
situ) soil is of adequate strength and suitable for installation. For applications requiring fill heights greater than those
shown in Table 2, contact an ADS Engineer.
It should be noted that while an installation condition as depicted in Figure 1 can be modeled in CANDE and other
structural evaluation software, there are constructability and practical installation considerations that should be
taken into account when a designer is determining the best backfill plan for a project.
1. Changing material types at the springline of the pipe requires accounting for the different soil confining
strengths of the two materials. This variation in soil strengths can result in a reduced cover height when
compared to an installation where a single material type is used for the entire pipe embedment. Where
materials of differing strengths are used in the pipe embedment, susceptibility to pipe deflection can increase
if the materials are not properly placed and compacted.
2. The fill heights shown in Table 2 are based upon a minimum compaction density of 85% being achieved for
the native material above the pipe springline. When considering moisture content and compaction effort,
adequate compaction of Class 3 and 4 materials can be more difficult to achieve compared to the effort of a
Class 1 material used in the haunch zone of the pipe.
3. When materials of different gradation are placed adjacent to each other, filter fabric separation or
properly graded material, under the guidance of a geotechnical engineer, is recommended in order to
prevent the migration of fines into the open-graded material.
These considerations are not intended to explicitly allow or discourage the use of native materials above
the pipe springline, but simply to state that such embedment can be successful when implemented
correctly. While ADS supports that the product can perform well within these installation parameters,
overall successful execution is dependent not only on the product, but on coordination, input and
agreement between the owner, engineer and contractor, based on each party’s needs.
Table 1
ADS HP Storm Mechanical Properties
Allowable Initial 100-Year

ASTM
Resin Long Term Fu E Fu E
Specification
Strain % (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi)
Polypropylene,
Impact-modified ASTM F2881 3.7 3,500 175,000 1,000 27,000
copolymer
Figure 1
ADS HP Storm Pipe Split Backfill Trench Detail
(Non-Traffic Applications)
FINAL BACKFILL
MAXIMUM COVER
SELECT NATIVE CLEAN

6" ABOVE TOP OF PIPE
SEE TABLE 2
GEOTEXTILE
AS REQUIRED SPRINGLINE
BY ENGINEER
CLASS I MATERIAL TO
SPRINGLINE OF PIPE
BEDDING
4" FOR 12"-24" PIPE
6" FOR 30"-60" PIPE SUITABLE
MIN. TRENCH WIDTH FOUNDATION
Table 2
Maximum Cover for ADS HP Storm Pipe with Split Backfill, ft (m)
Diameter
in (mm)
12 (300) 17 (5.2) 14 (4.3) 11 (3.4)
15 (375) 17 (5.2) 14 (4.3) 10 (3.0)
18 (450) 16 (4.9) 13 (4.0) 10 (3.0)
24 (600) 14 (4.3) 12 (3.7) 9 (2.7)
30 (750) 13 (4.0) 12 (3.7) 8 (2.4)
36 (900) 11 (3.4) 11 (3.4) 7 (2.1)
42 (1050) 11 (3.4) 11 (3.4) 7 (2.1)
48 (1200) 11 (3.4) 10 (3.0) 6 (1.8)
60 (1500) 11 (3.4) 10 (3.0) 6 (1.8)
Notes:
1. Results based CANDE analysis. Calculations assume no hydrostatic pressure and a soil density of 120 pcf (1926
kg/m3) for overburden material.
detail.
3. Class 1 material used below springline must be adequately “knifed” into haunch and in between corrugations. Unless
otherwise noted by the engineer class I material must be compacted in 6-inch (200mm) lifts.
4. Select native clean backfill shall be well placed, moderately compacted (85% SPD) Class IV or better per ASTM
D2321 with no foreign debris including rocks, large clumps of organic or frozen material.
© 2022 Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc. TN 2.04A May 2022
Technical Note
TN 3.02 AdvanEDGE® Hydraulic Performance
This technical note provides the inlet flow and core flow capacities of AdvanEDGE to be used in determining sizing and
spacing of a subsurface drainage system.
Inlet Flow Capacity

The inlet flow of an AdvanEDGE panel is dependent upon perforation sizing and whether or not a geotextile is wrapped
around the panel. Typically, the inlet flow of the panel is greater than the subbase material and is not a limiting factor in
the design. However, inlet flow capacity for AdvanEDGE, with and without a geotextile, is provide in Table 1 for reference.
Table 1
AdvanEDGE Inlet Flow Capacity
Product Inlet Flow Capacity, GPM/Sq. Ft
AdvanEDGE1 57
AdvanEDGE wrapped in geotextile2 56
1 Inlet capacity from Ohio DOT report on Hydraulic Design and Performance of edge drains.
2 Geotextile flow value (Flux) based on geotextile with permittivity of 0.7 sec-1.
Core Flow Capacity

ASTM D4716, Standard Test Method for Determining the (In-Plane) Flow Rate per Unit Width and Hydraulic
Transmissivity for a Geosynthetic Using a Constant Head, was the original procedure for determining the flow capacity of
AdvanEDGE. However, this procedure only addresses the panel installed in a horizontal plane, while the majority of
applications install AdvanEDGE vertically. The Kentucky Transportation Center devised a flow test that determines flow
rates in the vertical plane. The procedure has been accepted as an appropriate measurement of flow capacity and is
included in ASTM D7001 Geocomposite for Pavement Edge Drains and Other Flow Applications.
Figure 1
AdvanEDGE Core Flow Capacity Horizontal Plane Installation
50
40
Flow Capacity, GPM
30
20
12" AdvanEDGE
10
18" AdvanEDGE
0
0% 1% 2% 3% 4% 5% 6%
Slope
Note: Testing performed in accordance with ASTM D4716, with panel in horizontal plane and loaded at 10psi. Values
reported in the Ohio DOT report on Hydraulic Design and Performance of edge drains.
Table 2
AdvanEDGE Core Flow Capacity, Vertical Plane Installation
Loading, psi Flowrate, GPM
0 40
22 40
Note: Testing performed per the University of Kentucky In-Plane Flow Test. Values reported in Kentucky
Transportation Center Research Report KTC-97-5
The ADS logo, AdvanEDGE and the Green Stripe are registered trademarks of Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc.
© 2023 Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc. TN 3.02 July 2023
Technical Note
TN 4.01 Chemical Resistance of Polyethylene and Elastomers
The results reported herein are of testing performed on HDPE material, compiled from multiple sources. A listing of
sources is available at the conclusion of this document. Actual results may vary on the environmental conditions for
each particular application. In evaluating the capability of polyethylene pipe, fittings, and manholes to withstand chemical
attack, consideration should be given to the following:
1. The effect of an active substance on polyethylene is not as severe when contact is intermittent.
2. Increasing temperature increases chemical activity.
3. Internal pressure may affect the rate of penetration of a substance.
4. Excessive bending and other stresses resulting from improper installation may affect the life of polyethylene products.
An example would be circumferential deflection beyond 50% or placing pipe directly on a large, sharp rock.
This listing contains accurate and reliable information to the best of our knowledge. The data contained herein is a
compilation of studies conducted by various sources which Advanced Drainage Systems believes to be reliable.
However, the information cannot be guaranteed because the conditions of use are beyond our control. The user of this
information assumes all risk associated with its use.
Polyethylene
Test Procedure
Polyethylene specimens were placed in the relevant substance for a period of time without the application of mechanical
stress. They were then tested for swelling or weight loss and subjected to tensile testing. In critical applications, it is
suggested that greater reliance be placed on actual field experience or testing should be performed under similar conditions
of stress, exposure, temperature and duration which can be related to the anticipated application. Data regarding resistance
to chemicals not listed may be available by contacting an ADS representative.
Symbols used in the following table:

Symbol Description
specimen is resistant swelling < 3% or alternatively weight loss <.
+
0.5%, elongation of break not significantly changed
specimen has limited swelling 3 - 8% or alternatively weight resistance
/
only loss 0.5 - 5%, and/or elongation at break decreased by < 50%
specimen is not resistant swelling > 8% or alternatively weight loss >
–
5%, and/or elongation a break decreased by> 50%
D discoloration
* or at the boil
POLYETHYLENE POLYETHYLENE
Substance Substance
Concentration 68°F 140°F Concentration 68°F 140°F
Acetaldehyde + acetic acid 90:10:00 + Benzoic acid, aqueous all + +
Acetaldehyde, aqueous all + / Benzoyl chloride / /
Acetamide + + Benzyl alcohol + +
Acetic acid 100% + / | D Benzyl chloride / –
Acetic acid, aqueous 70% + + Bichromate-sulphuric acid – –
Acetic acid ethyl ester + + Bismuth salts + +
Acetic anhydride + Bisuiphate solution + +
/ | D
Bitumen + /
Acetoacetic acid +
Bleaching liquor containing / –
Acetone + +* 12.5% active chlorine
Acetophenone + Bleaching powder (chloride of lime) + +
Acetylene + Bone oil + +
Acids, aromatic + + Borax, aqueous all + +
Acronal dispersions + / Boric acid, aqueous all + +
Acrylic acid emulsions + + Boric acid methyl ester + / to –
Acrylonitrile + + Boron trifluoride + + to /
Adipic acid, aqueous saturated + + Brake fluid + +
Adipic acid ester + / Brandy-wine +
Aktivin (chioramine, aqueous, 1%) + + Brine (saturated) saturated + +
Alcohol + Bromic acid –
Alcoholic beverages + Bromine fumes –
Allyl acetate + + to / Bromine, liquid 100% –
Allyl alcohol 96% + + Bromine water cold saturated +
Allyl chloride / – Bromochloromethane –
Alum, aqueous all + + Butanediol, aqueous all + +
Aluminum chloride, aqueous all + + Butane, gaseous +
Aluminum chloride, solid + + Butanetriol, aqueous all + +
Aluminum fluoride + + Butanol, aqueous all + +
Aluminum hydroxide + + Butanone + / to –
Aluminum metaphosphate + + Butoxyl (methoxybutyl acetate) + /
Aluminum sulphate, aqueous saturated + + Butter +
Aluminum sulphate, solid + + Butyl acetate technically pure + /
Amino acids + + n-Butyl acetate + /
Ammonia, gaseous 100% + + Butyl alcohol + +
Ammonia, liquid + Butyl acrylate + /
Ammonia solution + + Butylbenzyl phthalate + +
Ammonium acetate, aqueous All + + Butylene glycol technically pure + +
Ammonium carbonate All + + Butyric acid, aqueous All + /
Ammonium chloride, aqueous All + + Butylphenol technically pure + +
Ammonium hydrosulphide, aqueous All + + Calcium carbide + +
Ammonium metaphosphate + + Calcium carbonate + +
Ammonium nitrate, aqueous All + + Calcium chloride, aqueous All + +
Ammonium phosphate, aqueous All + + Calcium hydroxide + +
Ammonium sulphate, aqueous All + + Calcium hypochlorite, aqueous All + +
Ammonium sulphide, aqueous All + + (susp.)
Ammonium thiocyanate + + Calcium nitrate, aqueous 50% + +
Amyl acetate + + Calcium oxide (powder) + +
Amyl alcohol + + Calcium phosphate + +
Amyl chloride 100% / – Calcium sulphate + +
Amyl phthalate + / Camphor + /
Aniline, aqueous All + + Camphor oil –
Aniline hydrochloride, aqueous All + + Cane sugar + +
Animal oils + / Carbazole + +
Aniseed oil / – Carbolic acid + +D
Anisole / / to – Carbolineum for fruit trees, aqueous +D /
Anone (cyclohexanone) + / Carbon dioxide 100% + +
Antifreeze agents (vehicles) + + Carbon disulphide /
Aqua regia – Carbonic acid, aqueous All + +
Anthraquinone sulphonic acid, + + Carbonic acid, dry 100% + +
aqueous (susp.) Carbon tetrachloride technically pure / to – –
Antimony chloride, anhydrous + + Castor oil + +
Antimony pentachloride + + Caustic potash + +
Antimony trichloride + + Caustic potash solution 50% + +
Arsenic acid anhydride + + Caustic soda + +
Arsenic acid, aqueous all + + Caustic soda solution All + +
Ascorbic acid + + Cetyl alcohol (hexadecanol) + +
Asphalt + / Chloral hydrate, aqueous all + +D
Aspirin + Chlorine bleach liquor containing + to / –
Barium hydroxide, aqueous all + + 12.5% active chlorine
Barium salts, aqueous all + + Chlorine, gaseous, dry / –
Battery acid + + Chlorine, gaseous, moist / –
Beater glue + + Chlorine, liquid –
Beef fat + + to / Chlorine water + /
Beer + + Chloroacetic acid (mono), aqueous all + +
Beer coloring agent + + Chlorobenzene / –
Beeswax + / to – Chlorocarbonic acid + /
Benzaldehyde, aqueous all + + to / Chloroethanol technically pure + +D
Benzaldehyde in isopropyl alcohol 1% + + Chloroform technically pure / to – –
Benzene technically pure / / Chloropicrin + to / –
Benzenesulphonic acid + + Chlorosulphonic acid –
Substance Substance
Chrome anode mud + + Drinking water (also chlorinated) + +
Chrome salts, aqueous all + + Dyes +D +D
Chromic acid, aqueous up to 50% + –D Eau de Javelle + to / –
Chrome alum, aqueous all + + Electrolyte baths for the plating + to / /
Chromium trioxide, aqueous up to 50% + –D industry
Chromosulphuric acid + – Emulsifiers + +
Cider + + Emulsions (photographic) + +
Citric acid, aqueous saturated + + Ephetin, aqueous 10% + +
Citrus juices + + Epichlorohydrin + +
Clophen A 50 and A 60 + / to – Epsom salts all + +
Coal-tar oil +D / Essential oils – –
Coconut oil + / Esters, aliphatic technically pure + + to /
Coconut oil fatty alcohol technically pure + / Ethane + +
Codliver oil + / Ethanol 96% + +
Coffee extract + + Ether + to / /*
Cognac + Ethyl acetate technically pure + /
Cola concentrates + + Ethyl alcohol 96% + +
Common salt, aqueous all + + Ethyl alcohol + acetic acid + +
Copper chloride, aqueous + + (fermentation mixture)
Copper fluoride, aqueous + + Ethylbenzene technically pure /
Copper nitrate, aqueous 30% + + Ethyl chloride technically pure /*
Copper salts, aqueous cold saturated + + Ethyl ether technically pure + to / /*
Copper sulphate, aqueous all + + Ethylene + /
Corn oil + / Ethylenediamine technically pure + +
Corn syrup + + Ethylenediamine tetraacetic acid + +
Coumarone resins + + Ethyl dibromide / –
Creosote + +D Ethylene dichloride (dichloroethane) / –
Cresol 100% + / Ethylene glycol + +
Cresol, aqueous diluted + +D Ethylene oxide, gaseous technically pure + +
Crop protection agents, aqueous + + 2-Ethylhexanol + /
Crotonaldehyde technically pure + / Euron B / /
Cyclanone (fatty alcohol + + Euron G + +
sulphonate) Fatty acid amides + /
Cyclohexane + + Fatty acids (>C6) + + to /
Cyclohexanol + + Fatty alcohols + /
Cyclohexanone + / Ferric chloride, aqueous all + +
Decahydronaphthalene (Decalin) technically pure + / Ferrous sulphate, aqueous all + +
Defoamers + + to / Fertilizer salts, aqueous all + +
Detergents + + Fir wood oil + /
Detergents, synthetic + + Fluoboric acid, aqueous + / 25%
Developer solutions (photographic) +D +D Fluorine, gaseous –
Dextrin, aqueous 18% + + Fluosilicic acid all + +
Dextrose + + Formic acid, aqueous 10% + +
Dextrose, aqueous all + + Formic acid, aqueous 85% + +
1 2-Dibromoethane / – Formaldehyde, aqueous up to 40% + +
Dibutyl ether + to / – Formamide + +
Dibutyl phthalate technically pure + / Frigen 12 (Freon 12) 100% / –
Dibutyl sebacate + / Fruit juices, fermented all + +
Dichloroacetic acid technically pure + / Fruit juices, unfermented + +
Dichloroacetic acid 50% + + Fruit pulp + +
Dichloroacetic acid methyl ester + + Fuel oil + /
Dichlorobenzene / – Furfural + /
Dichloroethane / / Furfuryl alcohol + +D
Dichlorodiphenyltrichloroethane + + Gases from roasting, dry all + +
(DDT, powder) Gases liquor (ammoniacal) + +
Dichloroethylene – – Gelatin + +
Dichloropropane / – Genantin + +
Dichloropropene / – Gin +
Diesel fuel + / Glacial acetic acid technically pure + /D
Diethylene glycol + + Glauber's salt, aqueous all + +
Diethyl ether + to / /* Glucose, aqueous all + +
Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate (DOP) + / Glue + +
Diethyl ether + to / /* Glycerine, aqueous up to 100% + +
Diethyl ketone + / Glycerol chlorohydrin + +
Diglycolic acid, aqueous 30% + + Glycine + +
Diisobutyl ketone technically pure + / to – Glycol, aqueous + +
Diisopropyl ether + to / – Glycolic acid, aqueous up to 70% + +
Dimethylamine + / Glycolic acid butyl ester + +
Dimethyl formamide technically pure + + to / Glysantin + +
Dimethyl sulphoxide + + Grisiron 8302 / /
Dioctyl phthalate + / Grisiron 8702 + +
Dioxane + + Halothane / / to –
Diphenylamine + / Heptane + /
Diphenyl oxide + / Hexane + /
Dishwashing liquids + + Hexanetriol + +
Disodium phosphate + + Honey + +
Disodium sulphate + + Hydraulic fluid + /
Dispersions, aqueous + Hydrazine hydrate + +
Dodecylbenzenesulphonic acid + / Hydrobromic acid, aqueous 50% + +
Drilling aid / / Hydrochloric acid, aqueous all + +
Substance Substance
Hydrogen chloride gas, dry and + + 4-Methyl pentanol-2 + + to / D
moist Methyl propyl ketone + /
Hydrocyanic acid + + n-Methyl pyrrolidone + +
Hydrofluoric acid, aqueous 40%...85% + / Methyl salicylate + /
Hydrofluosilicic acid, aqueous all + + (salicyclic acid methyl ester)
Hydrogen 100% + + Methyl sulphuric acid 50% + +
Hydrogen peroxide, aqueous 10% / / Milk + +
Hydrogen peroxide, aqueous 30% / / Mineral oil without + + to /
Hydrogen peroxide, aqueous 90% / – additives
Hydrogen sulphide, aqueous saturated + + Mineral spirits, see White spirit
Hydrogen sulphide, dry 100% + + Mineral water + +
Hydroquinone +D +D Molasses + +
Hydrosulphite, aqueous up to 10% + + Molasses wort + +
Hydroxylamine sulphate, aqueous 12% + + Monochloroacetic acid + /
Hypochlorous acid + to / / Monochloroacetic acid ethyl ester + +
Ink + + Monochloroacetic acid methyl ester + +
Iodine - potassium iodide 3% iodine + + Monochlorobenzene / –
Iron (Ill) chloride, aqueous all + + Morpholine + +
Isobutyl alcohol + + Motor oil (HD oil) + + to /
Isooctane + / Mould-release agents + +
Isopropanol (isopropyl alcohol) technically pure + + Mowilith polymer emulsions + +
Isopropyl acetate 100% + / Mustard + +
Isopropyl ether technically pure + to / – Nail polish remover + /
Jam + + Naphtha + /
Kerosene + / Naphthalene + -
Ketones + to / / to – Nickel chloride + +
Labarraque's solution + to / Nickel nitrate + +
Lactic acid, aqueous 10%...96% + + Nickel salts, aqueous + +
Lactose + + Nickel sulphate, aqueous all + +
Lanolin (wool fat) + + Nicotine + +
Latex + + Nitric acid 25% + +
Lead acetate, aqueous all + + Nitric acid 50% / –
Lead tetraethyl + (100%)
Lime + + Nitrobenzene + /
Limewater + + Nitrocellulose +
Linseed oil technically pure + + o-Nitrotolunene + /
Liquer + to / – Nonyl alcohol (nonanol) + +
Liquid manure + + Octyl cresol technically pure / –
Liquid paraffin + + Oils, animal and vegetable + + to /
Liquid soaps + + Oils, essential / –
Lithium bromide + + Oleic acid + /
Lubricating oils technically pure + + to / Oleum all – –
Lysol + / Olive oil + +
Machine oil + / Optical brighteners + +
Magnesium carbonate + + Orange juice + +
Magnesium chloride, aqueous all + + Oxalic acid, aqueous all + +
Magnesium fluosilicate + + Oxygen all + +
Magnesium hydroxide + + Ozone 50 ppm / –
Magnesium iodide + + Palmitic acid 70% + +
Magnesium salts, aqueous all + + Palmityl alcohol + +
Magnesium sulphate, aqueous all + + PaIm-kernal oil + +
Maleic acid, aqueous up to 100% + + Paraformaldehyde + +
Malic acid, aqueous 50% + + Pentanol +
Manganese sulphate + + Peppermint oil +
Margarine + + Perchloric acid, aqueous 20% + +
Mash + + Perchloric acid, aqueous 50% + /
Mayonnaise + Perchloric acid, aqueous 70% + –
Menthol + / Perchloroethylene / –
Mercuric chloride + + Perfume oils / / to –
(corrosive sublimate) Petrol technically pure + + to /
Mercury + + Petrol/benzene mixture 80/20 + /
Mercury salts + + Petroleum + /
Metallic mordants + + Petroleum ether + /
Metal soaps + + Phenol + +D
Methacrylate + + Phenolic resin moulding materials + +
Methacrylic acid + + Phenylethyl alcohol + +
Methanol technically pure + + Phenylhydrazine technically pure / / to –
Methoxy butanol + / Phenylhydrazine hydrochloride + –
Methoxybutyl acetate (Butoxyl) + / Phenylsulphonate (sodium + +
Methyl alcohol + + dodecylbenzenesulphonate)
Methylbenzene / – Phosgene, gaseous 100% –
Methyl bromide, gaseous technically pure - Phosgene, liquid 100% –
Methyl chloride / Phosphorus oxichloride + /
Methyl chloride, gaseous technically pure / Phosphates, aqueous all + +
Methylcyclohexane / / to – Phosphoric acid, aqueous 50% + +
Methylene chloride / /* Phosphoric acid, aqueous 80%.. .95% + /D
Methyl ethyl ketone technically pure + / to – Phosphorus pentoxide 100% + +
Methyl glycol + + Phosphorus trichloride – –
Methyl isobutyl ketone + / to – Photographic developers +D +D
Methyl methacrylate + + Phthalic acid, aqueous 50% + +
Substance Substance
Phthalic acid ester + + to / Sodium ferrocyanide + +
Picric acid, aqueous 1% + Sodium fluoride + +
Pineapple juice + + Sodium hexacyanoferrate + +
Pine-needle oil + Sodium hydroxide, aqueous all + +
Plasticizers + / Sodium hydroxide, solid + +
Polyester plasticizers + + to / Sodium hypochlorite, aqueous with / –
Polyester resins / – 12.5% active chlorine
Polyglycols + + Sodium hypochlorite, dry +
Polysolvan 0 + + Sodium nitrate, aqueous all + +
(glycolic acid n-butyl ester) Sodium nitrite, aqueous all + +
Potash alum, aqueous all + + Sodium perborate, aqueous all + /
Potassium bicarbonate, aqueous all + + Sodium perchlorate, aqueous + +
Potassium bisulphate, aqueous all + + Sodium peroxide, aqueous 10% + +
Potassium borate, aqueous 1% + + Sodium peroxide, aqueous saturated /
Potassium bromate, aqueous up to 10% + + Sodium phosphate, aqueous saturated + +
Potassium bromide, aqueous all + + Sodium silicate + +
Potassium carbonate, aqueous all + + Sodium silicate, aqueous all + +
Potassium chlorate, aqueous all + + Sodium sulphate, aqueous cold saturated + +
Potassium chloride, aqueous all + + Sodium sulphide, aqueous saturated + +
Potassium chromate, aqueous 40% + + Sodium thiosulphate, aqueous all + +
Potassium cyanide, aqueous all + + (fixing salt)
Potassium dichromate, aqueous all + + Sodium thiosulphate, aqueous saturated + +
Potassium ferricyanide and all + + Sodium thiosulphate, solid + +
ferrocyanide, aqueous (fixing salt)
Potassium fluoride, aqueous all + + Soft soap + +
Potassium hydroxide, aqueous 30% + + Soyabean oil + +
Potassium iodide, aqueous all + + Spermaceti +
Potassium nitrate, aqueous all + + Spindle oil + to / /
Potassium perborate + + Spirits +
Potassium perchlorate, aqueous 1% + Stain removers + to / /
Potassium perchlorate, aqueous up to 10% + / Standard mineral spirit (DIN 51635) + /
Potassium permanganate 20% + +D Starch, aqueous up to 100% + +
Potassium permanganate, aqueous up to 6% + +D Stearic acid + /
Potassium persulphate, aqueous all + + Styrene / –
Potassium sulphate, aqueous all + + Succinic acid, aqueous 50% + +
Potassium sulphide + + Sulphates, aqueous solutions all + +
Potassium sulphite + + Sulphur + +
Potassium tetracyanocuprate + + Sulphuric acid, aqueous up to 50% + +
Potassium thiosulphate + + 0...70%
Propanol + + Sulphuric acid, aqueous 70% + /
i-Propanol (i-propyl alcohol) technically pure + + 70..90%
n-Propanol (n-propyl alcohol) + + Sulphuric acid, aqueous 80% + /
Propargyl alcohol, aqueous 7% + + 90..100%
Propionic acid, aqueous all + + Sulphuric acid, aqueous 98% / –
Propylene dichloride 100% – Sulphuric ether + to / /*
Propylene glycol + + Sulphur dioxide, aqueous all + +
Propylene oxide + + Sulphur dioxide, dry and moist all + +
Pseudocumene / / Sulphurous acid + +
Pyridine + / Sulphur trioxide – wet, gas,
Quinine + + dry
Rubber dispersions (Latex) + + Sulphuryl chloride –
Sagrotan + / Syrup + +
Salicyclic acid + + Tallow technically pure + +
Saturated steam condensate + + Tannic acid 10% + +
Sauerkraut + + Tartaric acid, aqueous all + +
Seawater + + Tetrabromoethane / to – –
Silicic acid, aqueous all + + Tetrachloroethane / to – –
Silicone oil technically pure + + Tetrachloroethylene / to – –
Silver nitrate + + Tetrahydrofuran technically pure + to – –
Silver nitrate, aqueous all + + Tetrahydronaphthalene (Tetralin) technically pure + –
Silver salts, aqueous cold saturated + + Thioglycollic acid + +
Soap solution, aqueous all + + Thionyl chloride –
Soda, aqueous all + + Thiophene / –
Sodium acetate, aqueous all + + Tin (II) chloride, aqueous all + +
Sodium aluminum sulphate + + Tincture of iodine, DAB 6 + /
Sodium benzoate + + (German pharmacopoeia)
Sodium benzoate, aqueous any + + Toluene technically pure / –
Sodium bicarbonate + + Tomato juice + +
Sodium bisulphate + + Transformer oil technically pure + /
Sodium bisulphite, aqueous all + + Tributyl phosphate + +
Sodium borate + + Trichloroacetic acid technically pure + / to –
Sodium bromide + + Trichloroacetic acid, aqueous 50% + +
Sodium carbonate, aqueous all + + Trichloroethylene technically pure + to / –
Sodium chlorate, aqueous saturated + + Trichlorobenzene – –
Sodium chloride, aqueous all + + Tricresyl phosphate + +
Sodium chlorite, aqueous 50% + Triethanolamine + +D
Sodium chromate + + Triethylene glycol + +
Sodium cyanide + + Trilon + +
Sodium dichromate + + Trimethyl borate + / to –
Sodium dodecylbenzenesulphonate + + Trimethylopropane, aqueous + +
Substance Substance
Tri-B-chloroethyl phosphate + + Waste gases, traces + +
Trioctyl phosphate + / containing nitrosyl sulphuric acid
Trisodium phosphate + + Waste gases, containing SO2 low + +
Turpentine oil technically pure + to / – Waste gases, containing sulphuric all + +
Tutogen U + + acid (moist)
Tween 20 and 80 + – Water, distilled + +
Two-stroke engine oil + / Wax alcohols technically pure / /
Urea, aqueous up to 33% + + Waxes + + to /
Uric acid + + Whey + +
Urine + + Whiskey +
Vaseline technically pure + to / / White spirit technically pure + to / /
Vaseline oil technically pure + to / / Wine +
Vinegar (white vinegar) + + Wine vinegar + +
Vinyl acetate + + Wood stains + + to /
Viscose spinning solutions + + Xylene / –
Vitamin C + Yeast + +
Vitamin preparations, dry (powders) + Zinc carbonate + +
Walnut oil + / Zinc chloride, aqueous all + +
Waste gases, all + + Zinc oxide + +
containing carbonic acid Zinc salts, aqueous all + +
Waste gases, + + Zinc sludge + +
containing carbon monoxide Zinc stearate + +
Waste gases, all + + Zinc sulphate, aqueous all + +
containing hydrochloric acid
Waste gases, traces + +
containing hydrogen fluoride
Elastomers
Test Procedure
The criteria for the ratings of various elastomers presented here (Natural Rubber, SBR, and EPDM) were primarily volume
swell resistance, compression set resistance, and aging resistance. The ratings were developed from specific data or
general agreement of the sources identified in the corresponding table enclosed. Several important factors must be
considered in the use of rubber parts in service, including:
1. The Temperature of Service: Greater temperatures increase the effect of all chemicals on polymers. The
affect of the temperature varies with the polymer and the chemical.
2. Conditions of Service: A compound that swells badly might still function well as a static seal yet fail in
dynamic applications.
Numbers used in the following table:

Number Description
1 Minor effect
2 Moderate effect
3 Static only
4 Not recommended
– Insufficient data
Natural Styrene Ethylene Natural Styrene Ethylene
Rubber Butadiene Propylene Rubber Butadiene Propylene
Substance Substance
(NR, IR) (SBR, BR) (EPM, (NR, IR) (SBR, BR) (EPM,
EPDM) EPDM)
Acetaldehyde 2 3 1 Butadiene 4 4 3
Acetamide 4 4 1 Butane 4 4 4
Acetic acid, glacial 2 2 1 Butter (animal fat) 4 4 1
Acetic acid 30% 2 2 1 Butyl acetate 4 4 3
Acetic anhydride 2 2 2 Butyl acetyl ricinoleate 4 4 1
Acetone 3 3 1 Butyl acrylate 4 4 4
Acetophenone 4 4 1 Butyl alcohol 1 1 2
Acetyl chloride 4 4 4 Butyl amine 4 4 2
Acetylene 2 2 1 Butyl benzoate 3 2 2
Acrylonitrile 4 4 4 Butyl carbitol 4 4 1
Adipic acid 1 1 1 Butyl cellusolve 4 4 1
Alkazene (Dibromoethylbenzene) 4 4 4 Butyl oleate 4 4 2
Alum-NH3-Cr-K (aq) 1 1 1 Butyl stearate 4 4 3
Aluminum acetate (aq) 1 2 1 Butylene 4 4 4
Aluminum chloride (aq) 1 1 1 Butyraldehyde 4 4 2
Aluminum fluoride (aq) 2 1 1 Calcium acetate (aq) 1 4 1
Aluminum nitrate (aq) 1 1 1 Calcium bisulfite (aq) 4 4 4
Aluminum phosphate (aq) 1 1 1 Calcium chloride (aq) 1 1 1
Aluminum sulfate (aq) 1 1 1 Calcium hydroxide (aq) 1 1 1
Ammonia anhydrous 4 4 1 Calcium hypochlorite (aq) 3 3 1
Ammonia gas (cold) 1 1 1 Calcium nitrate (aq) 1 1 1
Ammonia gas (hot) 4 4 2 Calcium sulfide (aq) 2 2 1
Ammonium carbonate (aq) 1 1 – Cane sugar liquors 1 1 1
Ammonium chloride (aq) 1 1 1 Carbamate 4 4 2
Ammonium hydroxide (conc.) 4 4 1 Carbitol 2 2 2
Ammonium nitrate aq) 3 2 1 Carbolic acid (phenol) 4 4 2
Ammonium nitrite (aq) 1 1 1 Carbon bisulfide 4 4 4
Ammonium persulfate (aq) 1 4 1 Carbon dioxide 2 2 2
Ammonium phosphate (aq) 1 1 1 Carbonic acid 1 2 1
Ammonium sulfate (aq) 1 1 1 Carbon monoxide 2 2 1
Amyl acetate (banana oil) 4 4 3 Carbon tetrachloride 4 4 4
Amyl alcohol 2 2 1 Castor oil 1 1 2
Amyl borate 4 4 4 Cellosolve 4 4 2
Amyl chloronaphthalene 4 4 4 Cellosolve acetate 4 4 2
Amyl naphthalene 4 4 4 Cellulube (Fryquel) 4 4 1
Aniline 4 4 1 China wood oil (Tung oil) 4 4 3
Aniline dyes 2 2 1 Chlorine (dry) 4 4 4
Aniline hydrochloride 2 4 2 Chlorine (wet) 4 4 3
Animal fats 4 4 2 Chlorine dioxide 4 4 3
Ansul ether (anesthetics) 4 4 3 Chlorine trifluoride 4 4 4
Aqua regia 4 4 3 Chloroacetic acid 4 4 1
Aroclor, 1248 4 4 3 Chloroacetone 4 4 1
Aroclor, 1254 4 4 3 Chlorobenzene 4 4 4
Aroclor, 1260 1 1 1 Chlorobromomethane 4 4 2
Arsenic acid 2 1 1 Chlorobutadiene 4 4 4
Arsenic trichloride (aq) 4 4 3 Chlorododecane 4 4 4
Askarel 4 4 4 Chloroform 4 4 4
Asphalt 4 4 4 O-Chloronaphthalene 4 4 4
Banana oil (amyl acetate) 4 4 3 1-Chloro-1-Nitro ethane 4 4 4
Barium chloride (aq) 1 1 1 Chlorosulfonic acid 4 4 4
Barium hydroxide (aq) 1 1 1 Chlorotoluene 4 4 4
Barium sulfate (aq) 1 1 1 Chlorox (sodium hypoochlorite 4 4 2
Barium sulfide (aq) 1 2 1 NaOCI)
Beer 1 1 1 Chrome plating solutions 4 4 2
Beet sugar liquors 1 1 1 Chromic acid 4 4 3
Benzaldehyde 4 4 1 Citric acid 1 1 1
Benzene 4 4 4 Coal tar (creosote) 4 4 4
Bezene sulfonic acid 4 4 3 Cobalt chloride (aq) 1 1 1
Benzine (Ligroin) (Nitrobenzine) 4 4 4 Coconut oil 4 4 3
(pet ether) Cod liver oil 4 4 1
Benzoic acid 4 4 3 Coke oven gas 4 4 4
Benzoyl chloride 4 4 4 Copper acetate (aq) 1 4 1
Benzyl alcohol 4 4 1 Copper chloride (aq) 1 1 1
Benzyl benzoate 4 4 2 Copper cyanide (aq) 1 1 1
Benzyl chloride 4 4 4 Copper sulfate (aq) 2 2 1
Biphenyl (Diphenyl) 4 4 4 Cornoil 4 4 3
(Phenylbenzene) Cottonseed oil 4 4 2
Blast furnace gas 4 4 4 Creosote (Coal tar) 4 4 4
Bleach solutions 4 4 1 Cresol 4 4 4
Borax 2 2 1 Cresylic acid 4 4 4
Bordeaux mixture 2 2 1 Cumene 4 4 4
Boric acid 1 1 1 Cyclohexane 4 4 4
Brine 1 1 1 Cyclohexanol 4 4 3
Bromine-anhydrous 4 4 4 Cyclyohexanone 4 4 2
Bromine trifluoride 4 4 4 P-Cymene 4 4 4
Bromine water 4 4 2 Decalin 4 4 4
Bromobenzene 4 4 4 Decane 4 4 4
Binker oil 4 4 4 Denatured alcohol 1 1 1
Substance Substance
EPDM) EPDM)
Detergent solutions 2 2 1 Fluorocarbon oils 2 2 1
Developing fluids 1 2 2 Fluorolube 2 3 1
Diacetone 4 4 1 Fluorosilicic acid (hydrofluosilicic 2 3 2
Diacetone alcohol 4 4 1 acid)
Dibenzyl ether 4 4 2 Formaldehyde (RT) 2 2 1
Dibenzyl sebacate 4 4 2 Formic acid 2 1 1
Dibromoethylbenzene (Alkazene) 4 4 4 Freon 11 4 4 4
Dibutyl amine 4 4 3 Freon 12 2 1 2
Dibutyl ether 4 4 3 Freon 13 1 1 1
Dibutyl phthalate 4 4 2 Freon 21 4 4 4
Dibutyl sebecate 4 4 2 Freon 22 2 1 1
O-Dichlorobenzene 4 4 4 Freon 31 2 2 1
Dichloro-isopropyl ether 4 4 3 Freon 32 1 1 1
Dicyclohexylamine 4 4 4 Freon 112 4 3 4
Diesel oil 4 4 4 Freon 113 3 2 3
Diethylamine 2 2 2 Freon 114 1 1 1
Diethyl benzene 4 4 4 Freon 115 1 1 1
Diethyl ether 4 4 4 Freon 142b 2 2 2
Diethylene glycol 1 1 1 Freon 152a 1 1 1
Diethyl sebacate 4 4 2 Freon 218 1 1 1
Diisobutylene 4 4 4 Freon C316 1 1 1
Diisopropyl benzene 4 4 4 Freon C318 1 1 1
Diisopropyl ketone 4 4 1 Freon 13B1 1 1 1
Diisopropylidene acetone 4 4 3 Freon 114B2 4 3 4
(Phorone) Freon 502 1 1 1
Dimethyl aniline (Xylidene) 3 3 2 Freon TF 4 3 4
Dimethyl ether (methyl ether) 4 4 4 Freon T-WD602 4 3 2
(monomethyl ether) Freon TMC 4 4 3
Dimethyl formamide 4 4 2 Freon T-P35 1 1 1
Dimethyl phthalate 4 4 2 Freon TA 3 3 2
Dinitrotoluene 4 4 4 Freon TC 4 3 2
Dioctyl Phthalate 4 4 2 Freon MF 4 4 4
Dioctyl Sebecate 4 4 2 Freon BF 4 4 4
Dioxane 4 4 2 Fueloil 4 4 4
Dioxolane 4 4 2 Fumaric acid 3 3 2
Dipentene 4 4 4 Furan, furfuran 4 4 3
Diphenyl (Biphenyl) 4 4 4 Furfural 4 4 2
(Phenylbenzene) Fyrquel (cellulube) 4 4 1
Diphenyl oxides 4 4 4 Gallic acid 1 2 2
Dowtherm oil 4 4 4 Gasoline 4 4 4
Dry cleaning fluids 4 4 4 Gelatin 1 1 1
Epichlorohydrin 4 4 2 Glouber's salt (aq) 2 4 2
Ethane 4 4 4 Glucose 1 1 1
Ethanolamine 2 2 2 Glue 2 2 1
Ethyl acetate 4 4 2 Glycerin 1 1 1
Ethyl acetoacetate 3 3 2 Glycols 1 1 1
Ethyl acrylate 4 4 2 Green sulfate liquor 2 2 1
Ethyl alcohol 1 1 1 Holowax oil 4 4 4
Ethyl benzene 4 4 4 N-Hexaldehyde 4 4 1
Ethyl benzoate 1 1 1 Hexane 4 4 4
Ethyl cellosolve 4 4 4 N-Hexene-1 4 4 4
Ethyl cellulose 2 2 2 Hexyl alcohol 2 2 3
Ethyl chloride 4 4 3 Hydrazine 1 1 1
Ethyl chlorocarbonate 4 4 2 Hydraulic oil (petroleum) 4 4 4
Ethyl chloroformate 4 4 2 Hydrobromic acid 1 4 1
Ethyl ether 4 4 3 Hydrobromic acid 40% 1 4 1
Ethyl formate 4 4 2 Hydrochloric acid (cold) 37% 2 2 1
Ethyl mercaptan 4 4 3 Hydrochloric acid (hot) 37% 4 4 3
Ethyl oxalate 1 1 1 Hydrocyanic acid 2 2 1
Ethyl pentachlorobenzene 4 4 4 Hydrofluroic acid (conc.) cold 4 4 3
Ethyl silicate 2 2 1 Hydrofluoric acid (conc.) hot 4 4 4
Ethylene 3 3 2 Hydrofluoric acid - anhydrous 4 4 3
Ethylene chloride 4 4 3 Hydrofluosilicic acid 2 3 2
Ethylene chlorohydrin 2 2 2 (fluosilicic acid)
Ethylene diamine 1 2 1 Hydrogen gas 2 1 1
Ethylene dichloride 4 4 3 Hydrogen peroxide (90%) 4 4 2
Ethylene glycol 1 1 1 Hydrogen sulfide (wet) cold 4 4 1
Ethylene oxide 4 4 3 Hydrogen sulfide (wet) hot 4 4 1
Ethylene trichloride 4 4 3 Hydroquinone 2 4 2
Fatty acids 4 4 3 Hypochlorous acid 2 4 2
Ferric chloride (aq) 1 1 1 Iodine pentafluoride 4 4 4
Ferric nitrate (aq) 1 1 1 lodoform 4 4 4
Ferric sulfate (aq) 1 1 1 Isobutyl alcohol 1 2 1
Fishoil 4 4 4 Isooctane 4 4 4
Fluorinated cyclic ethers 4 4 1 Isophorone 4 4 3
Fluorine (liquid) 4 4 4 Isopropyl acetate 4 4 2
Fluorobenzene 4 4 4 Isopropyl alcohol 1 2 1
Fluoroboric acid 1 1 1 Isopropyl chloride 4 4 4
Substance Substance
EPDM) EPDM)
Isopropyl ether 4 4 4 Octachlorotoluene 4 4 4
Kerosene 4 4 4 Octadecane 4 4 4
Lacquers 4 4 4 N-Octane 4 4 4
Lacquer solvents 4 4 4 Octyl alcohol 2 2 3
Lactic acid (cold) 1 1 1 Oleic acid 4 4 4
Lactic acid (hot) 4 4 4 Oleum spirits 4 4 4
Lard 4 4 2 Olive oil 4 4 2
Lavender oil 4 4 4 O-Dichlorobenzene 4 4 4
Lead acetate (aq) 1 4 1 Oxalic acid 2 2 1
Lead nitrate (aq) 1 1 1 Oxygen - cold 2 2 1
Lead sulfamate (aq) 2 2 1 Oxygen - (200°-400°F) 4 4 3
Ligroin (Benzine) (Nitrobenzine) 4 4 4 Ozone 4 4 1
(pet ether) Paint thinner, duco 4 4 4
Lime bleach 1 2 1 Palmitic acid 2 2 2
Lime sulfur 4 4 1 Peanut oil 4 4 3
Lindol (hydraulic fluid) 4 4 1 Perchloric acid 4 4 2
Linoleic acid 4 4 4 Perchloroethylene 4 4 4
Linseed oil 4 4 3 Petroleum - below 250°F 4 4 4
Liquefied petroleum gas 4 4 4 Petroleum - above 250°F 4 4 4
Lubricatting oils (petroleum) 4 4 4 Phenol (carbolic acid) 4 – 2
Lye2 2 1 – Phenylbenzene (biphenyl) 4 4 4
Magnesium chloride (aq) 1 1 1 (diphenyl)
Magnesium hydroxide (aq) 2 2 1 Phenyl ethyl ether 4 4 4
Magnesium sulfate (aq) 2 2 1 Phenyl hydrazine 1 2 2
Maleic acid 3 3 2 Phorane (diisopropylidene 4 4 3
Maleic anhydride 3 3 2 acetone)
Malic acid 3 3 2 Phosphoric acid - 20% 2 2 1
Mercury chloride (aq) 1 1 1 Phosphoric acid - 45% 3 3 1
Mercury 1 1 1 Phoshorus trichloride 4 4 1
Mesityl oxide 4 4 2 Pickling solution 4 4 3
Methane 4 4 4 Picric acid 2 2 2
Methyl acetate 3 3 1 Pinene 4 4 4
Methyl acrylate 4 4 2 Pineoil 4 4 4
Methylacrylic acid 4 4 2 Piperidine 4 4 4
Methyl alcohol 1 1 1 Plating solution - chrome 4 4 1
Methyl bromide 4 4 4 Polyvinyl acetate emulsion 2 4 1
Methyl butyl ketone 4 4 1 Potassium acetate (aq) 1 4 1
(propyl acetone) Potassium chloride (aq) 1 1 1
Methyl cellosolve 4 4 2 Potassium cupro cyanide (aq) 1 1 1
Methyl chloride 4 4 3 Potassium cyanide (aq) 1 1 1
Methyl cyclopentane 4 4 4 Potassium dichromate (aq) 2 2 1
Methylene chloride 4 4 3 Potassium hydroxide (aq) 2 2 1
Methyl ether (dimethyl ether) 4 4 4 Potassium nitrate (aq) 1 1 1
(monomethyl ether) Potassium sulfate (aq) 2 1 1
Methyl ethyl ketone 4 4 1 Producer gas 4 4 4
Methyl formate 4 4 2 Propane 4 4 4
Methyl isobutyl ketone 4 4 2 i-Propyl acetate 4 4 2
Methyl methacrylate 4 4 3 n-Propyl acetate 4 4 2
Methyl oleate 4 4 2 Propyl acetone (methyl
Methyl salicylate 3 3 2 butyl ketone) 4 4 1
Milk 1 1 1 Propyl alcohol 1 1 1
Mineral oil 4 4 3 Propyl nitrate 4 4 2
Monochlorobenzene 4 4 4 Propylene 4 4 4
Monomethyl aniline 4 4 2 Propylene oxide 4 4 2
Monoethanol amine 2 2 1 Pydraul, 10E, 29 ELT 4 4 1
Monomethyl ether (methyl ether) 4 4 4 Pydraul, 30E, 50E, 65E, 90E 4 4 1
(dimethyl ether) Pydraul, 115E 4 4 1
Monovinyl acetylene 2 2 2 Pydraul, 230E, 312C, 540C 4 4 4
Mustard gas 1 2 1 Pyranol, transformer oil 4 4 4
Naphtha 4 4 4 Pyridine 4 4 2
Naphthalene 4 4 4 Pyroligneous acid 4 4 2
Naphthalenic acid 4 4 4 Pyrrole 3 3 3
Natural gas 2 2 4 Radiation 3 3 2
Neats foot oil 4 4 2 Rapeseed oil 4 4 1
Neville acid 4 4 2 Red oil (MIL-H-5606) 4 4 4
Nickel acetate (aq) 1 4 1 RJ-1 (MIL-F-25558 B) 4 4 4
Nickel chloride (aq) 1 1 1 RP-1 (MIL-F-25576 C) 4 4 4
Nickel sulfate (aq) 2 2 1 Sal ammoniac 1 1 1
Niter cake 1 1 1 Salicylic acid 1 2 1
Nitric acid (conc.) 4 4 4 Salt water 1 1 1
Nitric acid (dilute) 4 4 2 Sewage 2 2 2
Nitric acid - red fuming 4 4 4 Silicate esters 4 4 4
Nitrobenzene 4 4 1 Silicone greases 1 1 1
Nitrobenzene (petroleum ether) 4 4 4 Silicone oils 1 1 1
Nitroethane 2 2 2 Silver nitrate 1 1 1
Nitrogen 1 1 1 Skydrol 55 4 4 1
Nitrogen tetroxide 4 4 3 Skydrol 7000 4 4 1
Nitromethane 2 2 2 Soap solutions 2 1 1
Substance Substance
EPDM) EPDM)
Soda ash 1 1 1 Unsymmetrical dimethyl hydrazine 1 1 1
Sodium acetate (aq) 1 4 1 (UDMH)
Sodium bicarbonate (aq) Varnish 4 4 4
(baking soda) 1 1 1 Vegetable oils 4 4 3
Sodium bisulfite (aq) 1 2 1 Versilube F-5O 1 1 1
Sodium borate (aq) 1 1 1 Vinegar 2 2 1
Sodium chloride (aq) 1 1 1 Vinyl chloride 4 4 4
Sodium cyanide (aq) 1 1 1 Wagner 21B brake fluid 2 1 1
Sodium hydroxide (aq) 1 1 1 Water 1 1 1
Sodium hypochlorite (aq) (Clorox) 4 4 2 Whiskey, wines 1 1 1
Sodium metaphosphate (aq) 1 1 1 White pine oil 4 4 4
Sodium nitrate (aq) 2 1 1 White oil 4 4 4
Sodium perborate (aq) 2 2 1 Woodoil 4 4 4
Sodium peroxide (aq) 2 2 1 Xylene 4 4 4
Sodium phosphate (aq) 1 1 1 Xylidine (Di-methyl aniline) 3 3 2
Sodium silicate (aq) 1 1 1 Zeolites 1 1 1
Sodium sulfate (aq) 2 2 1 Zinc acetate (aq) 1 4 1
Sodium thiosulfate (aq) 2 2 1 Zinc chloride (aq) 1 1 1
Soybean oil 4 4 3 Zinc sulfate (aq) 2 2 1
Stannic chloride (aq) 1 1 1 TT-T-656b 4 4 1
Stannous chloride (aq) 1 1 1 VV-B-680 2 1 1
Steam under 300°F 4 4 1 VV-G-632 4 4 4
Steam over 300°F 4 4 3 VV-G-671c 4 4 4
Stearic acid 2 2 2 VV-H-910 2 1 1
Stoddard solvent 4 4 4 VV-l-530a 4 4 4
Styrene 4 4 4 VV-K-211d 4 4 4
Sucrose solution 1 1 1 VV-K-220a 4 4 4
Sulfite liquors 2 2 2 VV-L-751b 4 4 4
Sulfur 4 4 1 VV-L-800 4 4 4
Sulfur chloride (aq) 4 4 4 VV-L-820b 4 4 4
Sulfur dioxide (dry) 2 2 1 VV-L-825a type I 4 4 4
Sulfur dioxide (wet) 4 4 1 VV-L-825a type II 4 4 4
Sulfur dioxide (liquified under 4 4 1 VV-L-825a type III 4 4 4
pressure) VV-O-526 4 4 4
Sulfur hexafluoride 4 4 1 VV-P-216a 4 4 4
Sulfur trioxide 2 2 2 VV-P-236 4 4 4
Sulfuric acid (dilute) 3 3 2 51-F-23 4 4 4
Sulfuric acid (conc.) 4 4 3 ASTM Method D-471
Sulfuric acid (20% oleum) 4 4 4 1 4 4 4
Sulfurous acid 2 2 2 2 4 4 4
Tannic acid 1 2 1 3 4 4 4
Tar, bituminous 4 4 3 MIL-L-644 B 3 3 3
Tartaric acid 3 4 2 MIL-L-2104 B 4 4 4
Terpineol 4 4 3 MIL-L-2105 B 4 4 4
Tertiary butyl alcohol 2 2 2 MIL-G-2108 4 4 4
Tertiary butyl catechol 4 2 2 MIL-S-3136 B type I 4 4 4
Tertiary butyl mercaptan 4 4 4 MIL-S-3136 B type II 4 4 4
Tetrabromoethane 4 4 4 MIL-S-3136 B type III 4 4 4
Tetrabromomethane 4 4 4 MIL-S-3136 B type IV 4 4 4
Tetrabutyl titanate 2 2 1 MIL-S-3136 B type V 4 4 4
Tetrachloroethylene 4 4 4 MIL-S-3136 B type VI 4 4 4
Tetraethyl lead 4 4 4 MIL-S-3136 B type VII 4 4 4
Tetrahydrofuran 4 4 3 MIL-L-3150 A 4 4 4
Tetralin 4 4 4 MIL-L-3503 4 4 4
Thionyl chloride 4 4 3 MIL-L-3545 B 4 4 4
Titanium tetrachloride 4 4 4 MIL-C-4339 C 4 4 4
Toluene 4 4 4 MIL-G-4343 B 4 4 3
Toluene diisocyanate 4 4 2 MIL-L-5020 A 4 4 4
Transformer oil 4 4 4 MIL-J-5161 F 4 4 4
Transmission fluid type A 4 4 4 MIL-C-5545 A 4 4 4
Triacetin 2 2 1 MIL-H-5559 A 2 1 1
Triaryl phosphate 4 4 1 MIL-F-5566 1 1 1
Tributoxy ethyl phosphate 2 2 1 MIL-F-5602 4 4 4
Tributyl mercaptan 4 4 4 MIL-H-5606 B (red oil) 4 4 4
Tributyl phosphate 2 4 2 MIL-J-5624 G JP-3, JP-4, JP-5 4 4 4
Trichloroacetic acid 3 2 2 MIL-O-6081 C 4 4 4
Trichloroethane 4 4 4 MIL-L-6082 C 4 4 4
Trichlorethylene 4 4 4 MIL-H-6083 C 4 4 4
Tricresyl phosphate 4 1 4 MIL-L-6085 A 4 4 4
Triethanol amine 2 2 1 MIL-L-6086 B 4 4 4
Triethyl aluminum 4 4 3 MIL-L-6387 A 4 4 4
Triethyl borane 4 4 3 MIL-C-6529 C 4 4 4
Trinitrotoluene 4 4 4 MIL-F-7024 A 4 4 4
Trioctyl phosphate 4 4 1 MIL-H-7083 A 2 1 1
Tung oil (China wood oil) 4 4 3 MIL-G-7118 A 4 4 4
Turbine oil 4 4 4 MIL-G-7187 4 4 4
Turpentine 4 4 4 MIL-G-7421 A 4 4 4
MIL-H-7644 2 1 1
Substance Substance
EPDM) EPDM)
MIL-L-7645 4 4 4 MIL-L-23699 A 4 4 4
MIL-G-7711 A 4 4 4 MIL-G-23827 A 4 4 4
MIL-L-7808 F 4 4 4 MIL-G-25013 D 2 1 1
MIL-L-7870 A 4 4 4 MIL-F-25172 4 4 4
MIL-C-8188 C 4 4 4 MIL-L-25336 B 4 4 4
MIL-A-8243 B 2 1 1 MIL-F-25524 A 4 4 4
MIL-L-8383 B 4 4 4 MIL-G-25537 A 4 4 4
MIL-H-8446 B (MLO-8515) 4 4 4 MIL-F-25558 B (RJ-1) 4 4 4
MIL-L-8660 B 1 1 1 MIL-F-25576 C (RP-1) 4 4 4
MIL-L-9000 F 4 4 4 MIL-H-25598 4 4 4
MIL-T-9188 B 4 4 1 MIL-F-25656 B 4 4 4
MIL-L-9236 B 3 3 3 MIL-L-25681 C 2 1 1
MIL-L-10295 A 4 4 4 MIL-G-25760 A 3 3 4
MIL-L-10324 A 4 4 4 MIL-L-25968 4 4 4
MIL-G-10294 B 4 4 4 MIL-L-26087 A 4 4 4
MIL-L-11734 B 4 4 4 MIL-G-27343 1 1 1
MIL-O-11773 4 4 4 MIL-H-27601 A 4 4 4
MIL-P-12098 2 1 1 MIL-G-27617 - 2 1
MIL-H-13862 4 4 4 MIL-I-27686 D 2 1 1
MIL-H-13866 A 4 4 4 MIL-L-27694 A 1 1 1
MIL-H-13910 B 2 1 1 MIL-L-46000 A 4 4 4
MIL-H-13919 A 4 4 4 MIL-H-46001 A 4 4 4
MIL-L-14107 B 4 4 4 MIL-L-46002 4 4 4
MIL-L-15017 4 4 4 MIL-H-46004 4 4 4
MIL-L-15015 B 4 4 4 MIL-P-46046 A 2 1 1
MIL-L-15019 C 4 4 4 MIL-H-81019 B 4 4 4
MIL-L-15719 A 3 2 2 MIL-S-81087 1 1 1
MIL-G-15793 4 4 4 O-A-548 a 2 1 1
MIL-F-16929 A 4 4 4 O-T-634 b 4 4 4
MIL-L-16958 A 4 4 4 P-S-661 b 4 4 4
MIL-F-17111 4 4 4 P-D-680 4 4 4
MIL-L-17331 D 4 4 4 TT-N-95 a 4 4 4
MIL-L-17353 A 4 4 4 TT-N-97 b 4 4 4
MIL-L-17672 B 4 4 4 TT-I-735 b 1 1 1
MIL-L-18486 A 4 4 4 TT-S-735 type I 4 4 4
MIL-G-18709 A 4 4 4 TT-S-735 type II 4 4 4
MIL-H-19457 B 4 4 1 TT-S-735 type III 4 4 4
MIL-F-19605 4 4 4 TT-S-735 type IV 4 4 4
MIL-L-19701 4 4 4 TT-S-735 type V 4 4 4
MIL-21260 4 4 4 TT-S-735 type VI 4 4 4
MIL-S-21568 A 2 1 1 TT-S-735 type VI 4 4 4
MIL-H-22072 2 1 1
MIL-L-22396 4 4 4
Technical Resources
1. LyondellBasell. (August 2003). Resistance to Chemicals and Other Media. Product Brochure.
2. Simport (13 February 2007). Chemical Resistance Charts [On-line]. Available WWW:
http://www.simport.com/en/charts.php
3. Borealis (13 February 2007). Chemical Resistance Table: Low Density and High Density Polyethylene [On-line].
Available WWW: http://www.borealisgroup.com/public/pdf/customer_centre/Chemical-resistance-hdpe-ldpe.pdf
4. TexLoc (13 February 2007). Chemical Resistance [On-line]. Available WWW:
http://www.texloc.com/cl_chemicalsummary.html
5. Baxter Rubber Company (19 August 2009). Chemical Resistance Guide [On-line]. Available:
http://www.baxterrubber.com/resistance.html
Technical Note
TN 4.02 Chemical Resistance of Polypropylene and Elastomers
The results reported herein are of testing performed on polypropylene (PP) material, compiled from multiple
sources. A listing of sources is available at the conclusion of this document. Actual results may vary on the
environmental conditions for each particular application. In evaluating the capability of polypropylene pipe, fittings,
and manholes to withstand chemical attack, consideration should be given to the following:
1. The effect of an active substance on polypropylene is not as severe when contact is intermittent.
2. Increasing temperature increases chemical activity.
3. Internal pressure may affect the rate of penetration of a substance.
4. Excessive bending and other stresses resulting from improper installation may affect the life of polypropylene
products. An example would be circumferential deflection beyond 50% or placing pipe directly on a large,
sharp rock.
This listing contains accurate and reliable information to the best of our knowledge. The data contained herein is a
compilation of studies conducted by various sources which Advanced Drainage Systems believes to be reliable. However,
the information cannot be guaranteed because the conditions of use are beyond our control. The user of this information
assumes all risk associated with its use.
Polypropylene
Test Procedure
Polypropylene specimens were placed in the relevant substance for a period of time without the application of mechanical
stress. They were then tested for swelling or weight loss and subjected to tensile testing. In critical applications, it is
suggested that greater reliance be placed on actual field experience or testing should be performed under similar
conditions of stress, exposure, temperature and duration which can be related to the anticipated application. Data
regarding resistance to chemicals not listed may be available by contacting an ADS representative.
Symbols used in the following table:

Symbol Description
specimen is resistant swelling < 3% or alternatively weight loss <. 0.5%,
+
elongation of break not significantly changed
specimen has limited swelling 3 - 8% or alternatively weight resistance
/
only loss 0.5 - 5%, and/or elongation at break decreased by < 50%
specimen is not resistant swelling > 8% or alternatively weight loss > 5%,
–
and/or elongation a break decreased by> 50%
D discoloration
* or at the boil
POLYPROPYLENE POLYPROPYLENE
Substance Substance
Acetaldehyde / – Citrus juices + +
Acetic acid (glacial) 97% + / (176o) Copper chloride saturated + +
Acetic acid 50% + + (176o) Copper cyanide saturated + +
Acetic acid 40% + Copper fluoride saturated + +
Acetic acid 10% + + Copper nitrate saturated + +
Acetone 100% + + Copper sulphate all + +
Acetophenone 100% / / Cotton seed oil + +
Acrylic emulsions + + Cuprous chloride saturated + +
Aluminum chloride + + Cyclohexanol + +
Aluminum fluoride + + Cyclohexanone / –
Aluminum sulfate + +
Alums (all types) + + Decahydronaphthalene (Decalin) 100% – –
Ammonia gas (dry) + + Detergents 2% + +
Ammonia, aqueous 30% + Developer solutions (photographic) + +
Ammonium carbonate All + + Dibutyl phthalate 100% + /
Ammonium chloride All + + (– 212o)
Ammonium fluoride 20% + + Dichloroethylene 100% +
Ammonium hydroxide 28% + + Diethanolamine 100% + +
Ammonium metaphosphate + + Diisooctyl phthalate 100% + +
Ammonium nitrate All + + Dioxane + /
Ammonium persulfate All + +
Ammonium sulphate All + + Emulsifiers + +
Ammonium sulphide All + + Ethanolamine 100% + +
Ammonium thiocyanate + + Ethyl acetate 100% / /
Amyl acetate 100% / – Ethyl alcohol 96% + +
Amyl alcohol 100% + / Ethyl chloride 100% – –
Amyl chloride 100% – – Ethyl dichloride 100% /
Aniline 100% + + Ethylene glycol + +
Anisole / / to – Ethylene oxide 100% /
Antimony chloride + + (50o)
Aviation fuel (115/145 octane) 100% / – Ethyl ether 100% /
Aviation turbine fuel 100% / –
Fatty acids (>C6) 100% + +
Barium carbonate + + Ferric chloride all + +
Barium chloride + + Ferric nitrate saturated + +
Barium hydroxide + + Ferric sulfate saturated + +
Barium sulfate + + Ferrous chloride saturated + +
Barium sulfide + + Ferrous sulfate all + +
Beer + + Fluosilicic acid + +
Benzene 100% / – Formaldehyde 40% + +
Benzoic acid all + + Formic acid 10% + +
Benzyl alcohol + + (176o) Formic acid 100% +
Benzyl chloride / – Fructose + +
Bismuth carbonate + + Fruit juices + +
Borax + + Fual oil + +
Boric acid all + + Furfural – –
Brine saturated + +
Bromine, liquid 100% – Gases liquor –
Bromine water saturated – – Gasoline 100% / –
Butyl acetate 100% – – Gearbox oil 100% + /
Butyl alcohol + + Gelatin + +
Glucose 20% + +
Calcium carbonate + + Glycerine 100% + +
Calcium chlorate + + Glycol + +
Calcium chloride 50% + +
Calcium hydroxide + + Hexane 100% + /
Calcium hypochlorite bleach 20% (a) + / Hydrobromic acid 50% (a) + +
Calcium nitrate 50% + + Hydrochloric acid 30% (a) + /
Calcium phosphate 50% + Hydrochloric acid Up to 20% + +
Calcium sulphate + + Hydrofluoric acid 40% + +
Carbon dioxide (dry) 100% + + Hydrofluoric acid 60% (a) + +
Carbon dioxide (wet) 100% + + Hydrogen peroxide, aqueous 30% +
Carbon disulphide / – Hydrogen peroxide, aqueous 10% + /
Carbon monoxide + + Hydrogen peroxide, aqueous 3% +
Carbon tetrachloride 100% – – Hydrogen sulfide + +
Carbonic acid All + + Hydroquinone + +
Castor oil +
Cetyl alcohol (hexadecanol) 100% + Ink + +
Chlorine, gaseous – – Iodine tincture +
Chlorine water + / Isooctane 100% – –
Chlorobenzene – – Isopropanol (isopropyl alcohol) 100% + +
Chloroform 100% – –
Chlorosulphonic acid – – Ketones +
Chrome alum + +
Chromic acid 80% (a) + Lactic acid 20% + +
Chromic acid 50% (a) + + Lanolin (wool fat) + +
Chromic acid 10% (a) + + Lead acetate saturated + +
Chromic/sulfuric acid 10% – – Linseed oil 100% + +
Cider + + Lubricating oils 100% + /
Citric acid 10% + +
POLYPROPYLENE POLYPROPYLENE
Substance Substance
Magenta dye, aqueous 2% + +D Sodium chlorite, aqueous 5% + +
o
Magnesium carbonate saturated + + (176 )
Magnesium chloride saturated + + Sodium chlorite, aqueous 10% + +
Magnesium hydroxide saturated + + (176o)
Magnesium sulfate saturated + + Sodium chlorite, aqueous 20% + +
Magnesium sulfite saturated + + (176o)
Meat juices + + Sodium cyanide + +
Mercuric chloride 40% + + Sodium dichromate + +
(corrosive sublimate) Sodium ferricyanide + +
Mercuric cyanide saturated + + Sodium ferrocyanide + +
Mercurous nitrate saturated + + Sodium fluoride + +
Mercury 100% + + Sodium hydroxide, aqueous 50% + +
Methyl alcohol 100% + + Sodium hydroxide, aqueous 10% + +
Methylbenzene / – Sodium hypochlorite 20% + /
Methylene chloride 100% + Sodium hypochlorite +
Methyl ethyl ketone 100% + / Sodium nitrate, aqueous + +
Milk + + Sodium nitrite, aqueous + +
(+ 212o) Sodium silicate + +
Mineral oil 100% + / Sodium sulfate, aqueous saturated + +
Molasses + + Sodium sulfide, aqueous 25% + +
Motor oil (HD oil) 100% + / Sodium sulfite, aqueous saturated + +
Stannic chloride saturated + +
Naphthalene 100% + + Stannous chloride saturated + +
Nickel chloride saturated + + Starch + +
Nickel nitrate saturated + + Sugars and syrups + +
Nickel sulphate, aqueous saturated + + Sulfates of [calcium and saturated + +
Nitric acid 70% (a) – – magnesium]
Nitric acid 60% + – Sulfates of [potassium and sodium] saturated + +
Nitric acid 10% + + Sulfur + +
Nitrobenzene + / Sulfuric acid 98% (a) –
Sulfuric acid 60% + / (176o)
Oleic acid + / Sulfuric acid 50% + /
Oleum – (212o) Sulfuric acid 10% + /
Olive oil saturated + + Sulfuric ether + to / /*
Oxalic acid, aqueous 50% + / Sulfur dioxide, aqueous all + +
Sulfur dioxide, dry and moist all + +
Paraffin 100% + / Sulfurous acid + +
Paraffin wax 100% + + Sulfur trioxide – wet, gas,
Perchloric acid 20% + – dry
Petrol 100% / – Sulfuryl chloride –
Petroleum ether 100% – – Syrup + +
Phenol 100% + +D
Phosphoric acid, aqueous 95% + + Tallow + +
Photographic developer + + Tannic acid 10% + +
Potassium bicarbonate, aqueous saturated + + Tetrahydrofuran 100% – –
Potassium borate, aqueous 1% + + Tetralin 100% – –
Potassium bromate, aqueous up to 10% + + Toluene 100% – –
Potassium bromide, aqueous saturated + + Transformer oil 100% + /
Potassium carbonate, aqueous saturated + + Trichloroacetic acid 10% + +
Potassium chlorate, aqueous saturated + + Trichloroethylene 100% + +
Potassium chloride, aqueous saturated + + Turpentine 100% – –
Potassium chromate, aqueous 40% + +
Potassium cyanide, aqueous saturated + + Urea, aqueous + +
Potassium dichromate, aqueous 40% + + Urine + +
Potassium ferricyanide and saturated + +
ferrocyanide, aqueous Vegetable oil + +
Potassium fluoride, aqueous + +
Potassium hydroxide, aqueous 50% + + Water, distilled + +
Potassium nitrate, aqueous saturated + + Wet chlorine gas –
Potassium perborate saturated + +
Potassium perchlorate, aqueous up to 10% + + Whiskey + +
Potassium permanganate 20% + + White paraffin 100% + /
Potassium sulfate, aqueous + + White spirit 100% / –
Potassium sulfide + + Wine + +
Potassium sulfite + +
Propanol (propyl alcohol) 100% + + Xylene 100% – –
Pyridine +
Yeast + +
Silicone oil 100% + +
Silver nitrate + + Zinc chloride saturated + +
Soap solution, aqueous + + Zinc oxide + +
Sodium acetate, aqueous all + + Zinc sulphate, aqueous saturated + +
Sodium bicarbonate saturated + +
Sodium bisulphate saturated + +
Sodium bisulphite, aqueous saturated + +
Sodium borate + +
Sodium bromide oil solution + +
Sodium carbonate, aqueous saturated + +
Sodium chlorate, aqueous saturated + +
Sodium chloride, aqueous saturated + +
Sodium chlorite, aqueous 2% + + (176o)
Elastomers
Test Procedure
The criteria for the ratings of various elastomers presented here (Natural Rubber, SBR, and EPDM) were primarily volume
swell resistance, compression set resistance, and aging resistance. The ratings were developed from specific data or
general agreement of the sources identified in the corresponding table enclosed. Several important factors must be
considered in the use of rubber parts in service, including:
1. The Temperature of Service: Greater temperatures increase the effect of all chemicals on polymers. The affect of the
temperature varies with the polymer and the chemical.
2. Conditions of Service: A compound that swells badly might still function well as a static seal yet fail in dynamic
applications.
Numbers used in the following table:

Number Description
1 Minor effect
2 Moderate effect
3 Static only
4 Not recommended
– Insufficient data
Substance Rubber Butadiene Propylene Substance Rubber Butadiene Propylene
(NR, IR) (SBR, BR) (EPM, EPDM) (NR, IR) (SBR, BR) (EPM, EPDM)
Acetaldehyde 2 3 1 Butadiene 4 4 3
Acetamide 4 4 1 Butane 4 4 4
Acetic acid, glacial 2 2 1 Butter (animal fat) 4 4 1
Acetic acid 30% 2 2 1 Butyl acetate 4 4 3
Acetic anhydride 2 2 2 Butyl acetyl ricinoleate 4 4 1
Acetone 3 3 1 Butyl acrylate 4 4 4
Acetophenone 4 4 1 Butyl alcohol 1 1 2
Acetyl chloride 4 4 4 Butyl amine 4 4 2
Acetylene 2 2 1 Butyl benzoate 3 2 2
Acrylonitrile 4 4 4 Butyl carbitol 4 4 1
Adipic acid 1 1 1 Butyl cellusolve 4 4 1
Alkazene 4 4 4 Butyl oleate 4 4 2
(Dibromoethylbenzene) Butyl stearate 4 4 3
Alum-NH3-Cr-K (aq) 1 1 1 Butylene 4 4 4
Aluminum acetate (aq) 1 2 1 Butyraldehyde 4 4 2
Aluminum chloride (aq) 1 1 1 Calcium acetate (aq) 1 4 1
Aluminum fluoride (aq) 2 1 1 Calcium bisulfite (aq) 4 4 4
Aluminum nitrate (aq) 1 1 1 Calcium chloride (aq) 1 1 1
Aluminum phosphate (aq) 1 1 1 Calcium hydroxide (aq) 1 1 1
Aluminum sulfate (aq) 1 1 1 Calcium hypochlorite (aq) 3 3 1
Ammonia anhydrous 4 4 1 Calcium nitrate (aq) 1 1 1
Ammonia gas (cold) 1 1 1 Calcium sulfide (aq) 2 2 1
Ammonia gas (hot) 4 4 2 Cane sugar liquors 1 1 1
Ammonium carbonate (aq) 1 1 – Carbamate 4 4 2
Ammonium chloride (aq) 1 1 1 Carbitol 2 2 2
Ammonium hydroxide (conc.) 4 4 1 Carbolic acid (phenol) 4 4 2
Ammonium nitrate aq) 3 2 1 Carbon bisulfide 4 4 4
Ammonium nitrite (aq) 1 1 1 Carbon dioxide 2 2 2
Ammonium persulfate (aq) 1 4 1 Carbonic acid 1 2 1
Ammonium phosphate (aq) 1 1 1 Carbon monoxide 2 2 1
Ammonium sulfate (aq) 1 1 1 Carbon tetrachloride 4 4 4
Amyl acetate (banana oil) 4 4 3 Castor oil 1 1 2
Amyl alcohol 2 2 1 Cellosolve 4 4 2
Amyl borate 4 4 4 Cellosolve acetate 4 4 2
Amyl chloronaphthalene 4 4 4 Cellulube (Fryquel) 4 4 1
Amyl naphthalene 4 4 4 China wood oil (Tung oil) 4 4 3
Aniline 4 4 1 Chlorine (dry) 4 4 4
Aniline dyes 2 2 1 Chlorine (wet) 4 4 3
Aniline hydrochloride 2 4 2 Chlorine dioxide 4 4 3
Animal fats 4 4 2 Chlorine trifluoride 4 4 4
Ansul ether (anesthetics) 4 4 3 Chloroacetic acid 4 4 1
Aqua regia 4 4 3 Chloroacetone 4 4 1
Aroclor, 1248 4 4 3 Chlorobenzene 4 4 4
Aroclor, 1254 4 4 3 Chlorobromomethane 4 4 2
Aroclor, 1260 1 1 1 Chlorobutadiene 4 4 4
Arsenic acid 2 1 1 Chlorododecane 4 4 4
Arsenic trichloride (aq) 4 4 3 Chloroform 4 4 4
Askarel 4 4 4 O-Chloronaphthalene 4 4 4
Asphalt 4 4 4 1-Chloro-1-Nitro ethane 4 4 4
Banana oil (amyl acetate) 4 4 3 Chlorosulfonic acid 4 4 4
Barium chloride (aq) 1 1 1 Chlorotoluene 4 4 4
Barium hydroxide (aq) 1 1 1 Chlorox (sodium hypoochlorite 4 4 2
Barium sulfate (aq) 1 1 1 NaOCI)
Barium sulfide (aq) 1 2 1 Chrome plating solutions 4 4 2
Beer 1 1 1 Chromic acid 4 4 3
Beet sugar liquors 1 1 1 Citric acid 1 1 1
Benzaldehyde 4 4 1 Coal tar (creosote) 4 4 4
Benzene 4 4 4 Cobalt chloride (aq) 1 1 1
Bezene sulfonic acid 4 4 3 Coconut oil 4 4 3
Benzine (Ligroin) (Nitrobenzine) 4 4 4 Cod liver oil 4 4 1
(pet ether) Coke oven gas 4 4 4
Benzoic acid 4 4 3 Copper acetate (aq) 1 4 1
Benzoyl chloride 4 4 4 Copper chloride (aq) 1 1 1
Benzyl alcohol 4 4 1 Copper cyanide (aq) 1 1 1
Benzyl benzoate 4 4 2 Copper sulfate (aq) 2 2 1
Benzyl chloride 4 4 4 Cornoil 4 4 3
Biphenyl (Diphenyl) 4 4 4 Cottonseed oil 4 4 2
(Phenylbenzene) Creosote (Coal tar) 4 4 4
Blast furnace gas 4 4 4 Cresol 4 4 4
Bleach solutions 4 4 1 Cresylic acid 4 4 4
Borax 2 2 1 Cumene 4 4 4
Bordeaux mixture 2 2 1 Cyclohexane 4 4 4
Boric acid 1 1 1 Cyclohexanol 4 4 3
Brine 1 1 1 Cyclyohexanone 4 4 2
Bromine-anhydrous 4 4 4 P-Cymene 4 4 4
Bromine trifluoride 4 4 4 Decalin 4 4 4
Bromine water 4 4 2 Decane 4 4 4
Bromobenzene 4 4 4 Denatured alcohol 1 1 1
Binker oil 4 4 4
Detergent solutions 2 2 1 Fluorocarbon oils 2 2 1
Developing fluids 1 2 2 Fluorolube 2 3 1
Diacetone 4 4 1 Fluorosilicic acid 2 3 2
Diacetone alcohol 4 4 1 (hydrofluosilicic acid)
Dibenzyl ether 4 4 2 Formaldehyde (RT) 2 2 1
Dibenzyl sebacate 4 4 2 Formic acid 2 1 1
Dibromoethylbenzene 4 4 4 Freon 11 4 4 4
(Alkazene) Freon 12 2 1 2
Dibutyl amine 4 4 3 Freon 13 1 1 1
Dibutyl ether 4 4 3 Freon 21 4 4 4
Dibutyl phthalate 4 4 2 Freon 22 2 1 1
Dibutyl sebecate 4 4 2 Freon 31 2 2 1
O-Dichlorobenzene 4 4 4 Freon 32 1 1 1
Dichloro-isopropyl ether 4 4 3 Freon 112 4 3 4
Dicyclohexylamine 4 4 4 Freon 113 3 2 3
Diesel oil 4 4 4 Freon 114 1 1 1
Diethylamine 2 2 2 Freon 115 1 1 1
Diethyl benzene 4 4 4 Freon 142b 2 2 2
Diethyl ether 4 4 4 Freon 152a 1 1 1
Diethylene glycol 1 1 1 Freon 218 1 1 1
Diethyl sebacate 4 4 2 Freon C316 1 1 1
Diisobutylene 4 4 4 Freon C318 1 1 1
Diisopropyl benzene 4 4 4 Freon 13B1 1 1 1
Diisopropyl ketone 4 4 1 Freon 114B2 4 3 4
Diisopropylidene acetone 4 4 3 Freon 502 1 1 1
(Phorone) Freon TF 4 3 4
Dimethyl aniline (Xylidene) 3 3 2 Freon T-WD602 4 3 2
Dimethyl ether (methyl ether) 4 4 4 Freon TMC 4 4 3
(monomethyl ether) Freon T-P35 1 1 1
Dimethyl formamide 4 4 2 Freon TA 3 3 2
Dimethyl phthalate 4 4 2 Freon TC 4 3 2
Dinitrotoluene 4 4 4 Freon MF 4 4 4
Dioctyl Phthalate 4 4 2 Freon BF 4 4 4
Dioctyl Sebecate 4 4 2 Fueloil 4 4 4
Dioxane 4 4 2 Fumaric acid 3 3 2
Dioxolane 4 4 2 Furan, furfuran 4 4 3
Dipentene 4 4 4 Furfural 4 4 2
Diphenyl (Biphenyl) 4 4 4 Fyrquel (cellulube) 4 4 1
(Phenylbenzene) Gallic acid 1 2 2
Diphenyl oxides 4 4 4 Gasoline 4 4 4
Dowtherm oil 4 4 4 Gelatin 1 1 1
Dry cleaning fluids 4 4 4 Glouber's salt (aq) 2 4 2
Epichlorohydrin 4 4 2 Glucose 1 1 1
Ethane 4 4 4 Glue 2 2 1
Ethanolamine 2 2 2 Glycerin 1 1 1
Ethyl acetate 4 4 2 Glycols 1 1 1
Ethyl acetoacetate 3 3 2 Green sulfate liquor 2 2 1
Ethyl acrylate 4 4 2 Holowax oil 4 4 4
Ethyl alcohol 1 1 1 N-Hexaldehyde 4 4 1
Ethyl benzene 4 4 4 Hexane 4 4 4
Ethyl benzoate 1 1 1 N-Hexene-1 4 4 4
Ethyl cellosolve 4 4 4 Hexyl alcohol 2 2 3
Ethyl cellulose 2 2 2 Hydrazine 1 1 1
Ethyl chloride 4 4 3 Hydraulic oil (petroleum) 4 4 4
Ethyl chlorocarbonate 4 4 2 Hydrobromic acid 1 4 1
Ethyl chloroformate 4 4 2 Hydrobromic acid 40% 1 4 1
Ethyl ether 4 4 3 Hydrochloric acid (cold) 37% 2 2 1
Ethyl formate 4 4 2 Hydrochloric acid (hot) 37% 4 4 3
Ethyl mercaptan 4 4 3 Hydrocyanic acid 2 2 1
Ethyl oxalate 1 1 1 Hydrofluroic acid (conc.) cold 4 4 3
Ethyl pentachlorobenzene 4 4 4 Hydrofluoric acid (conc.) hot 4 4 4
Ethyl silicate 2 2 1 Hydrofluoric acid - anhydrous 4 4 3
Ethylene 3 3 2 Hydrofluosilicic acid 2 3 2
Ethylene chloride 4 4 3 (fluosilicic acid)
Ethylene chlorohydrin 2 2 2 Hydrogen gas 2 1 1
Ethylene diamine 1 2 1 Hydrogen peroxide (90%) 4 4 2
Ethylene dichloride 4 4 3 Hydrogen sulfide (wet) cold 4 4 1
Ethylene glycol 1 1 1 Hydrogen sulfide (wet) hot 4 4 1
Ethylene oxide 4 4 3 Hydroquinone 2 4 2
Ethylene trichloride 4 4 3 Hypochlorous acid 2 4 2
Fatty acids 4 4 3 Iodine pentafluoride 4 4 4
Ferric chloride (aq) 1 1 1 lodoform 4 4 4
Ferric nitrate (aq) 1 1 1 Isobutyl alcohol 1 2 1
Ferric sulfate (aq) 1 1 1 Isooctane 4 4 4
Fishoil 4 4 4 Isophorone 4 4 3
Fluorinated cyclic ethers 4 4 1 Isopropyl acetate 4 4 2
Fluorine (liquid) 4 4 4 Isopropyl alcohol 1 2 1
Fluorobenzene 4 4 4 Isopropyl chloride 4 4 4
Fluoroboric acid 1 1 1
Isopropyl ether 4 4 4 Octadecane 4 4 4
Kerosene 4 4 4 N-Octane 4 4 4
Lacquers 4 4 4 Octyl alcohol 2 2 3
Lacquer solvents 4 4 4 Oleic acid 4 4 4
Lactic acid (cold) 1 1 1 Oleum spirits 4 4 4
Lactic acid (hot) 4 4 4 Olive oil 4 4 2
Lard 4 4 2 O-Dichlorobenzene 4 4 4
Lavender oil 4 4 4 Oxalic acid 2 2 1
Lead acetate (aq) 1 4 1 Oxygen - cold 2 2 1
Lead nitrate (aq) 1 1 1 Oxygen - (200°-400°F) 4 4 3
Lead sulfamate (aq) 2 2 1 Ozone 4 4 1
Ligroin (Benzine) (Nitrobenzine) 4 4 4 Paint thinner, duco 4 4 4
(pet ether) Palmitic acid 2 2 2
Lime bleach 1 2 1 Peanut oil 4 4 3
Lime sulfur 4 4 1 Perchloric acid 4 4 2
Lindol (hydraulic fluid) 4 4 1 Perchloroethylene 4 4 4
Linoleic acid 4 4 4 Petroleum - below 250°F 4 4 4
Linseed oil 4 4 3 Petroleum - above 250°F 4 4 4
Liquefied petroleum gas 4 4 4 Phenol (carbolic acid) 4 – 2
Lubricatting oils (petroleum) 4 4 4 Phenylbenzene (biphenyl) 4 4 4
Lye2 2 1 – (diphenyl)
Magnesium chloride (aq) 1 1 1 Phenyl ethyl ether 4 4 4
Magnesium hydroxide (aq) 2 2 1 Phenyl hydrazine 1 2 2
Magnesium sulfate (aq) 2 2 1 Phorane (diisopropylidene 4 4 3
Maleic acid 3 3 2 acetone)
Maleic anhydride 3 3 2 Phosphoric acid - 20% 2 2 1
Malic acid 3 3 2 Phosphoric acid - 45% 3 3 1
Mercury chloride (aq) 1 1 1 Phoshorus trichloride 4 4 1
Mercury 1 1 1 Pickling solution 4 4 3
Mesityl oxide 4 4 2 Picric acid 2 2 2
Methane 4 4 4 Pinene 4 4 4
Methyl acetate 3 3 1 Pineoil 4 4 4
Methyl acrylate 4 4 2 Piperidine 4 4 4
Methylacrylic acid 4 4 2 Plating solution - chrome 4 4 1
Methyl alcohol 1 1 1 Polyvinyl acetate emulsion 2 4 1
Methyl bromide 4 4 4 Potassium acetate (aq) 1 4 1
Methyl butyl ketone 4 4 1 Potassium chloride (aq) 1 1 1
(propyl acetone) Potassium cupro cyanide (aq) 1 1 1
Methyl cellosolve 4 4 2 Potassium cyanide (aq) 1 1 1
Methyl chloride 4 4 3 Potassium dichromate (aq) 2 2 1
Methyl cyclopentane 4 4 4 Potassium hydroxide (aq) 2 2 1
Methylene chloride 4 4 3 Potassium nitrate (aq) 1 1 1
Methyl ether (dimethyl ether) 4 4 4 Potassium sulfate (aq) 2 1 1
(monomethyl ether) Producer gas 4 4 4
Methyl ethyl ketone 4 4 1 Propane 4 4 4
Methyl formate 4 4 2 i-Propyl acetate 4 4 2
Methyl isobutyl ketone 4 4 2 n-Propyl acetate 4 4 2
Methyl methacrylate 4 4 3 Propyl acetone (methyl
Methyl oleate 4 4 2 butyl ketone) 4 4 1
Methyl salicylate 3 3 2 Propyl alcohol 1 1 1
Milk 1 1 1 Propyl nitrate 4 4 2
Mineral oil 4 4 3 Propylene 4 4 4
Monochlorobenzene 4 4 4 Propylene oxide 4 4 2
Monomethyl aniline 4 4 2 Pydraul, 10E, 29 ELT 4 4 1
Monoethanol amine 2 2 1 Pydraul, 30E, 50E, 65E, 90E 4 4 1
Monomethyl ether (methyl 4 4 4 Pydraul, 115E 4 4 1
ether) (dimethyl ether) Pydraul, 230E, 312C, 540C 4 4 4
Monovinyl acetylene 2 2 2 Pyranol, transformer oil 4 4 4
Mustard gas 1 2 1 Pyridine 4 4 2
Naphtha 4 4 4 Pyroligneous acid 4 4 2
Naphthalene 4 4 4 Pyrrole 3 3 3
Naphthalenic acid 4 4 4 Radiation 3 3 2
Natural gas 2 2 4 Rapeseed oil 4 4 1
Neats foot oil 4 4 2 Red oil (MIL-H-5606) 4 4 4
Neville acid 4 4 2 RJ-1 (MIL-F-25558 B) 4 4 4
Nickel acetate (aq) 1 4 1 RP-1 (MIL-F-25576 C) 4 4 4
Nickel chloride (aq) 1 1 1 Sal ammoniac 1 1 1
Nickel sulfate (aq) 2 2 1 Salicylic acid 1 2 1
Niter cake 1 1 1 Salt water 1 1 1
Nitric acid (conc.) 4 4 4 Sewage 2 2 2
Nitric acid (dilute) 4 4 2 Silicate esters 4 4 4
Nitric acid - red fuming 4 4 4 Silicone greases 1 1 1
Nitrobenzene 4 4 1 Silicone oils 1 1 1
Nitrobenzene (petroleum ether) 4 4 4 Silver nitrate 1 1 1
Nitroethane 2 2 2 Skydrol 55 4 4 1
Nitrogen 1 1 1 Skydrol 7000 4 4 1
Nitrogen tetroxide 4 4 3 Soap solutions 2 1 1
Nitromethane 2 2 2 Soda ash 1 1 1
Octachlorotoluene 4 4 4 Sodium acetate (aq) 1 4 1
Sodium bicarbonate (aq) Vegetable oils 4 4 3
(baking soda) 1 1 1 Versilube F-5O 1 1 1
Sodium bisulfite (aq) 1 2 1 Vinegar 2 2 1
Sodium borate (aq) 1 1 1 Vinyl chloride 4 4 4
Sodium chloride (aq) 1 1 1 Wagner 21B brake fluid 2 1 1
Sodium cyanide (aq) 1 1 1 Water 1 1 1
Sodium hydroxide (aq) 1 1 1 Whiskey, wines 1 1 1
Sodium hypochlorite (aq) 4 4 2 White pine oil 4 4 4
(Clorox) White oil 4 4 4
Sodium metaphosphate (aq) 1 1 1 Woodoil 4 4 4
Sodium nitrate (aq) 2 1 1 Xylene 4 4 4
Sodium perborate (aq) 2 2 1 Xylidine (Di-methyl aniline) 3 3 2
Sodium peroxide (aq) 2 2 1 Zeolites 1 1 1
Sodium phosphate (aq) 1 1 1 Zinc acetate (aq) 1 4 1
Sodium silicate (aq) 1 1 1 Zinc chloride (aq) 1 1 1
Sodium sulfate (aq) 2 2 1 Zinc sulfate (aq) 2 2 1
Sodium thiosulfate (aq) 2 2 1 TT-T-656b 4 4 1
Soybean oil 4 4 3 VV-B-680 2 1 1
Stannic chloride (aq) 1 1 1 VV-G-632 4 4 4
Stannous chloride (aq) 1 1 1 VV-G-671c 4 4 4
Steam under 300°F 4 4 1 VV-H-910 2 1 1
Steam over 300°F 4 4 3 VV-l-530a 4 4 4
Stearic acid 2 2 2 VV-K-211d 4 4 4
Stoddard solvent 4 4 4 VV-K-220a 4 4 4
Styrene 4 4 4 VV-L-751b 4 4 4
Sucrose solution 1 1 1 VV-L-800 4 4 4
Sulfite liquors 2 2 2 VV-L-820b 4 4 4
Sulfur 4 4 1 VV-L-825a type I 4 4 4
Sulfur chloride (aq) 4 4 4 VV-L-825a type II 4 4 4
Sulfur dioxide (dry) 2 2 1 VV-L-825a type III 4 4 4
Sulfur dioxide (wet) 4 4 1 VV-O-526 4 4 4
Sulfur dioxide (liquified under 4 4 1 VV-P-216a 4 4 4
pressure) VV-P-236 4 4 4
Sulfur hexafluoride 4 4 1 51-F-23 4 4 4
Sulfur trioxide 2 2 2 ASTM Method D-471
Sulfuric acid (dilute) 3 3 2 1 4 4 4
Sulfuric acid (conc.) 4 4 3 2 4 4 4
Sulfuric acid (20% oleum) 4 4 4 3 4 4 4
Sulfurous acid 2 2 2 MIL-L-644 B 3 3 3
Tannic acid 1 2 1 MIL-L-2104 B 4 4 4
Tar, bituminous 4 4 3 MIL-L-2105 B 4 4 4
Tartaric acid 3 4 2 MIL-G-2108 4 4 4
Terpineol 4 4 3 MIL-S-3136 B type I 4 4 4
Tertiary butyl alcohol 2 2 2 MIL-S-3136 B type II 4 4 4
Tertiary butyl catechol 4 2 2 MIL-S-3136 B type III 4 4 4
Tertiary butyl mercaptan 4 4 4 MIL-S-3136 B type IV 4 4 4
Tetrabromoethane 4 4 4 MIL-S-3136 B type V 4 4 4
Tetrabromomethane 4 4 4 MIL-S-3136 B type VI 4 4 4
Tetrabutyl titanate 2 2 1 MIL-S-3136 B type VII 4 4 4
Tetrachloroethylene 4 4 4 MIL-L-3150 A 4 4 4
Tetraethyl lead 4 4 4 MIL-L-3503 4 4 4
Tetrahydrofuran 4 4 3 MIL-L-3545 B 4 4 4
Tetralin 4 4 4 MIL-C-4339 C 4 4 4
Thionyl chloride 4 4 3 MIL-G-4343 B 4 4 3
Titanium tetrachloride 4 4 4 MIL-L-5020 A 4 4 4
Toluene 4 4 4 MIL-J-5161 F 4 4 4
Toluene diisocyanate 4 4 2 MIL-C-5545 A 4 4 4
Transformer oil 4 4 4 MIL-H-5559 A 2 1 1
Transmission fluid type A 4 4 4 MIL-F-5566 1 1 1
Triacetin 2 2 1 MIL-F-5602 4 4 4
Triaryl phosphate 4 4 1 MIL-H-5606 B (red oil) 4 4 4
Tributoxy ethyl phosphate 2 2 1 MIL-J-5624 G JP-3, JP-4, JP-5 4 4 4
Tributyl mercaptan 4 4 4 MIL-O-6081 C 4 4 4
Tributyl phosphate 2 4 2 MIL-L-6082 C 4 4 4
Trichloroacetic acid 3 2 2 MIL-H-6083 C 4 4 4
Trichloroethane 4 4 4 MIL-L-6085 A 4 4 4
Trichlorethylene 4 4 4 MIL-L-6086 B 4 4 4
Tricresyl phosphate 4 1 4 MIL-L-6387 A 4 4 4
Triethanol amine 2 2 1 MIL-C-6529 C 4 4 4
Triethyl aluminum 4 4 3 MIL-F-7024 A 4 4 4
Triethyl borane 4 4 3 MIL-H-7083 A 2 1 1
Trinitrotoluene 4 4 4 MIL-G-7118 A 4 4 4
Trioctyl phosphate 4 4 1 MIL-G-7187 4 4 4
Tung oil (China wood oil) 4 4 3 MIL-G-7421 A 4 4 4
Turbine oil 4 4 4 MIL-H-7644 2 1 1
Turpentine 4 4 4 MIL-L-7645 4 4 4
Unsymmetrical dimethyl 1 1 1 MIL-G-7711 A 4 4 4
hydrazine (UDMH) MIL-L-7808 F 4 4 4
Varnish 4 4 4 MIL-L-7870 A 4 4 4
MIL-C-8188 C 4 4 4 MIL-G-25013 D 2 1 1
MIL-A-8243 B 2 1 1 MIL-F-25172 4 4 4
MIL-L-8383 B 4 4 4 MIL-L-25336 B 4 4 4
MIL-H-8446 B (MLO-8515) 4 4 4 MIL-F-25524 A 4 4 4
MIL-L-8660 B 1 1 1 MIL-G-25537 A 4 4 4
MIL-L-9000 F 4 4 4 MIL-F-25558 B (RJ-1) 4 4 4
MIL-T-9188 B 4 4 1 MIL-F-25576 C (RP-1) 4 4 4
MIL-L-9236 B 3 3 3 MIL-H-25598 4 4 4
MIL-L-10295 A 4 4 4 MIL-F-25656 B 4 4 4
MIL-L-10324 A 4 4 4 MIL-L-25681 C 2 1 1
MIL-G-10294 B 4 4 4 MIL-G-25760 A 3 3 4
MIL-L-11734 B 4 4 4 MIL-L-25968 4 4 4
MIL-O-11773 4 4 4 MIL-L-26087 A 4 4 4
MIL-P-12098 2 1 1 MIL-G-27343 1 1 1
MIL-H-13862 4 4 4 MIL-H-27601 A 4 4 4
MIL-H-13866 A 4 4 4 MIL-G-27617 - 2 1
MIL-H-13910 B 2 1 1 MIL-I-27686 D 2 1 1
MIL-H-13919 A 4 4 4 MIL-L-27694 A 1 1 1
MIL-L-14107 B 4 4 4 MIL-L-46000 A 4 4 4
MIL-L-15017 4 4 4 MIL-H-46001 A 4 4 4
MIL-L-15015 B 4 4 4 MIL-L-46002 4 4 4
MIL-L-15019 C 4 4 4 MIL-H-46004 4 4 4
MIL-L-15719 A 3 2 2 MIL-P-46046 A 2 1 1
MIL-G-15793 4 4 4 MIL-H-81019 B 4 4 4
MIL-F-16929 A 4 4 4 MIL-S-81087 1 1 1
MIL-L-16958 A 4 4 4 O-A-548 a 2 1 1
MIL-F-17111 4 4 4 O-T-634 b 4 4 4
MIL-L-17331 D 4 4 4 P-S-661 b 4 4 4
MIL-L-17353 A 4 4 4 P-D-680 4 4 4
MIL-L-17672 B 4 4 4 TT-N-95 a 4 4 4
MIL-L-18486 A 4 4 4 TT-N-97 b 4 4 4
MIL-G-18709 A 4 4 4 TT-I-735 b 1 1 1
MIL-H-19457 B 4 4 1 TT-S-735 type I 4 4 4
MIL-F-19605 4 4 4 TT-S-735 type II 4 4 4
MIL-L-19701 4 4 4 TT-S-735 type III 4 4 4
MIL-21260 4 4 4 TT-S-735 type IV 4 4 4
MIL-S-21568 A 2 1 1 TT-S-735 type V 4 4 4
MIL-H-22072 2 1 1 TT-S-735 type VI 4 4 4
MIL-L-22396 4 4 4 TT-S-735 type VI 4 4 4
MIL-L-23699 A 4 4 4
MIL-G-23827 A 4 4 4
Technical Resources
1. LyondellBasell. (August 2002). Pro-fax and Moplen Polypropylene Chemical Resistance. Product Brochure.
2. Dynalab Corp. (19 August 2009). Plastic Properties Technical Information [On-line]. Available:
http://www.dynalabcorp.com/technical_info_plastic_properties.asp
3. Baxter Rubber Company (19 August 2009). Chemical Resistance Guide [On-line]. Available:
http://www.baxterrubber.com/resistance.html
Technical Note
TN 4.03 Abrasion Resistance of Polypropylene
Introduction
With the introduction of ADS High Performance (HP) polypropylene (PP) pipe for the storm drainage and sanitary sewer
markets, it is necessary for designers to have confidence in polypropylene’s expected performance in conditions where
the effluent may carry debris or abrasive materials. To address designer’s concerns, a comparative evaluation of whether
polypropylene had similar abrasion resistance to high density polyethylene (HDPE) was undertaken. While it was initially
hypothesized that polypropylene would have comparable, if not better, abrasion resistance, testing verification is essential.
If it could be established that polypropylene and HDPE have similar resistance to abrasion, the more extensive history and
test data for HDPE could be applied to polypropylene insofar that polypropylene would behave similarly to HDPE in
abrasive environments. To test this hypothesis, two types of tests were conducted. The first test used Taber® abrading
wheels directly on a sample of thermoplastic material. The second test, in order to more closely mimic drainage and sewer
conditions, involved placing thermoplastic samples in water flow carrying abrasive sand. Both tests measured the mass
loss over time and provide a direct comparison between the two materials.
Taber Abrasion Test

In April 2009, Polymer Diagnostics, Inc. conducted Taber abrasion testing on polypropylene, HDPE and PVC material
samples in accordance with ASTM D3389 in order to determine the material’s mass loss under direct abrasion. Although
this test does not simulate pipe carrying effluent, the test still provides a standardized method for comparing the abrasion
resistance, or hardness, of different materials.
Test Setup
Each material sample was mounted on a Taber Abrader Model 5130 where the sample is subjected to rub-wear action of
an abrading wheel. An abrasion pattern of crossed arcs simulates abrasion of the material from all angles. Directly
abrading material in this manner allows for quick results through accelerated testing in order to simulate long-term use,
which may otherwise take years to compile.
The initial mass of each sample was recorded to determine the total mass loss of the respective material over the
duration of the test. All samples were tested using a CS-10 abrasion wheel with 250 grams of force. The total test
time was 40 hrs, allowing for 500 revolutions of the abrading wheel.
Results
Results in Table 1 indicate a greater mass loss of the PVC samples compared to both the polypropylene and
HDPE samples. The mass loss of the HDPE sample was slightly higher than the polypropylene sample, but
the proximity of values allows for the conclusion that both samples performed similarly. These results
indicate a similarity between polypropylene and HDPE materials as it relates to material hardness. The final
mass loss of PVC was 5 to 8 times that of polypropylene.
Table 1
Taber Abrasion Test Results for Material Mass Loss
Start Mass End Mass Total Mass
Material
(g) (g) Loss (mg)
PP #1 30.6036 30.6034 0.2
PP #2 30.6868 30.6866 0.2

HDPE, 5%
31.6658 31.6655 0.3
Carbon Black
PVC – white 50.8776 50.8759 1.7
PVC – gray 50.4187 50.4176 1.1
Abrasion Resistance in Water Flow

While a direct correlation between polypropylene and HDPE materials’ abrasion resistance is supported by the Taber
abrasion test results, a second test was conducted to confirm those results and simulate the abrasion resistance of a
pipe’s invert when carrying effluent with suspended abrasives.
ADS Facility Testing

First, material plaques of both polypropylene and HDPE were cut and weighed to determine the initial mass of the
sample. The samples were then scanned into AutoCAD in order to precisely measure the surface area that will be
abraded. Additionally, each sample was inspected for any signs of abnormality including splitting, cracking, material
thinning, etc. No abnormalities were noted and product was considered to be in good condition.
Next, a closed-loop test system was constructed in order to achieve a controlled flow rate over the samples. A
constant hydraulic loading was established in the system, which consisted of a 2” grinder pump, 18” trough and a
collection basin as shown in Figure 1. OK-110 sand was added to the water flow so a relatively heavy sand loading
was obtained. The grinder pump, in conjunction with a mixing tee, was used to ensure the sand stayed in a suspended
state in the mixture. The flow rate of sand/water mixture over the plaques was 3 ft/sec.
In the trough, four sample plaques, two of polypropylene and two of HDPE, were placed at the bottom of the trough in
the flow path, shown in Figure 2. With the exception of removing the samples for weighing, the test unit allowed for
continuous subjection of the samples to the slurry mixture.
Figure 1 Figure 2
Close-Loop Test System Plaques in the Test System
Trough
Collection Basin Material Plaques
Results
It was noted during visual inspections of the samples throughout the test that minor scouring of the samples was
occurring. These observations affirmed that the test was successful in creating the desired abrasive conditions for sample
analysis. Comparing results in Table 2 of the mass and thickness loss, polypropylene performed slightly better than
HDPE. The second sample of HDPE was removed from testing as it was damaged during detachment operations for
periodic examinations; subsequently resulting in a large loss of material not related to the abrasion testing. Even so,
results for both HDPE samples indicate a higher material loss value compared to the polypropylene sample results.
Ultimately, these results favor polypropylene over HDPE for constant flow applications where the effluent carries a high
bed load.
Table 2
Material Loss Results
Initial Weight Final Weight Time Loss Surface Area Loss
(g) (g) (hrs) (g/hr) (in^2) (mils/yr)
PP large sample 221.5 221.5 4029 0.00000 110.34 0.00

PP small sample 27.101 27.099 3483 0.00001 15.43 0.02
HDPE large sample 141 140.75 4029 0.00006 89.47 0.39
HDPE small sample Damaged during examination
Conclusions
Both tests indicate high abrasion resistance of polypropylene material. The Taber test indicated that polypropylene and
HDPE behaved almost identical to direct rub-wear abrasion, and significantly better compared to PVC material. The test
simulating abrasive water flow reaffirmed the Taber test results and indicated that polypropylene performs similarly or
slightly better than HDPE. From these results it is reasonable to conclude that other abrasion resistance tests using HDPE
samples are also representative of polypropylene material. With this relationship in mind, the tests outlined in the Drainage
Handbook Durability section that are specific to HDPE and establish the material’s superior resistance to abrasion
compared to other pipe materials also support the argument for polypropylene’s superior abrasion resistance
Technical Note
TN 5.01 Recommended Use for Trench Boxes
Introduction
Trench boxes provide a safer work area to install pipe in deep trenches, restricted right-of-ways, or in soils that have
insufficient stability. This technical bulletin provides guidelines on how to maximize the structural stability and alignment
of the ADS pipe system while using a trench box. While these guidelines will work for most cohesive and noncohesive
native soils, highly unusual soil conditions may require further investigation or different techniques.
General Considerations
OSHA regulations should be carefully followed for all aspects of pipe installation, including those that involve trench
boxes. If information contained in this document conflicts in any way with OSHA or other safety regulations, those
requirements must take precedence.
Some installations may not require trench boxes if the trench sidewall can be sloped adequately. The design engineer
should provide specific guidance on acceptable slopes, but in no case should the trench wall slope be greater than the
angle of repose of the native soil.
The length of the trench box should be suitable for the pipe length. Standard length for ADS N-12® IB is19.7 ft (6m)
although it may be possible to supply shorter lengths for use in shorter trench boxes.
Subtrench Installations
The most effective way to maintain a sound system is to provide a ‘subtrench’ within which to place the pipe and
backfill. The bottom of the trench box should be placed no more than 24” from the bottom of the work surface, in
accordance with OSHA regulation 1926.652(g)(2). This may require the trench box be raised during pipe installation to
conform with both OSHA requirements and to properly backfill and compact the soil around the pipe. Backfill and
compact according to the design specifications within the subtrench. When possible, without disturbing the pipe or
backfill, the trench box can be pulled along the top edge of the subtrench. In some cases, it may be necessary to move
the trench box multiple times to obtain the required compaction of the material in the soil envelope. In either case, it is
paramount to achieve the necessary backfill placement and compaction for a quality installation. Refer to Figure 1 for
a typical sub trench installation.
Figure 1
Subtrench Installation
Subtrench installations also make it easier to use a geotextile around the backfill if it is required by the project
specifications. Line the subtrench with the geotextile, place the pipe and backfill over the geotextile, and wrap the
geotextile over the top of the pipe/backfill system.
Regular Trench Installations

In installations not involving a subtrench situation, dragging a trench box should only be done if it does not damage the
pipe or disrupt the backfill; otherwise, the box should be lifted vertically into its new position. If it is necessary for a trench
box to be dragged through a trench, do not raise the box more than 24” above the work surface.
Another alternative for when the box will be dragged is to use a well-graded granular backfill material at least two
diameters on either side of the pipe and compact it to a minimum of 90% standard Proctor density before moving the box.
After the trench box is moved, immediately fill the area between the pipe/backfill structure and the trench wall with a
granular material.
If the project requires a geotextile around the backfill, use a well-graded granular backfill material and compact it to at
least 90% standard Proctor density. Do not drag the box; instead, lift it vertically. After the trench box is removed,
immediately fill the area between the pipe/backfill structure and the trench wall with a granular material and compact
according to project requirements. The geotextile manufacturer may be able to provide additional information
regarding the suitability of specific geotextiles for use with trench boxes.
Summary
While trench boxes increase worker safety in difficult site conditions, their use requires some precautions be
taken to ensure a structurally sound finished installation.
Construction of a subtrench is the most effective means of maintaining a sound system; the trench box can
simply be pulled along the top edge of the subtrench. When a regular trench is used, techniques such as
lifting the box, keeping the box about three-fourths the nominal pipe diameter up from the trench bottom,
and providing a wide granular backfill envelope will help provide a quality installation.
Technical Note
TN 5.02 Flowable Fill Backfill for Thermoplastic Pipe
Introduction
The use of flowable fill, also known as controlled low strength material (CLSM), controlled density fill (CDF), and slurry fill,
as pipe bedding and backfill material has steadily been increasing. The term “flowable fill” encompasses a variety of fill
materials that are used as alternates to compacted granular fill. The materials are comprised of mixtures of sand,
Portland cement, Class C or Class F fly ash, and water. In addition, the mix is typically flowable and self-leveling at the
time of placement.
Flowable fill is an alternative to conventional soil or stone backfill and has been used for unique applications and
installations of pipe for some time. It has the advantage of providing adequate strength quickly, while providing an easy
and efficient placement system. Flowable fill has proven to be a viable alternative when stone, sand, or other backfills
have limited availability or cost prohibits their use. Even with these advantages it is necessary that the fill be controlled
and care taken to provide for the proper installation.
Use of Flowable Fill

The following provides some advantages and disadvantages
when deciding whether flowable fill should be specified or
recommended on a project.
Advantages
• Allows for narrower trench and less disturbance to the native
material.
• Eliminates the need for backfill compaction.
• Ensured proper distribution of support around the pipe.
• Reduces the amount of material excavated on a project.
• Time, personnel and equipment required to install flowable fill
are typically less than that required for proper placement and
compaction of conventional backfill materials, particularly fine-
grained soils.
• Flowable fill may be made on-site using native soil as part of the mix where sands or silty sands exist.
• Time and equipment required for compressive strength testing is often less than that required to test soil
compaction.
Disadvantages
• More costly than granular backfill due to the many components required and specialized delivery.
• Improper mix components can cause difficult future excavation if taps or extensions are required.
• Cannot be stockpiled on site like granular backfill. Time saved during the placement of the flowable fill
can be wasted waiting on ready-mix delivery.
• Unless precaution is taken, the potential for pipe flotation is high during the installation process.
Mix Design
The mix design of flowable fill can vary widely. The flowable fill mix should be designed to meet all strength and
flowability requirements. A suggested strength ranges between 50 psi and 100 psi for the 28 day strength; mixes that
have 28-day compressive strengths greater than 100 psi should be avoided due to increased difficulty in future
excavation, if needed. The flowable fill should be able to flow into all voids between the pipe and the trench walls. The
mix design should be laboratory tested prior to installation ensure that the proper results are obtained during field
batching. The field mix may also require monitoring and adjustments to maintain the proper mix and properties. These
variations in the field mix can be due to many factors including water content, temperature and humidity during placement.
Installation Considerations
Environment
Flowable fill cannot be used in all temperature and weather conditions. It is recommended that the temperature be at
least 40˚F and that the soil exposed to the flowable fill be unfrozen. There should be no appreciable precipitation during
placement to initial set. Flowable fill should be protected from freezing temperatures.
Joints
For flowable fill applications, the use of a watertight joint is recommended. For soiltight joints, precautionary measures
should be taken to prevent infiltration of flowable fill mix material. This will depend nearly entirely on the consistency of the
mix design.
Placement of Flowable Fill

Trench excavation should follow normal procedures and meet all OSHA safety regulations. Trench width will be dictated
by the native material strength. When acceptable in-situ material exists in the trench, like rock or other high-bearing soils,
the trench widths may be reduced to within 6-in along each side of the pipe, provided there is enough space to properly
place the flowable fill in the pipe haunch areas. Table 1 depicts typical trench widths for a flowable fill installation. Once
the trench is excavated to the proper line and grade, placement of pipe may begin. The pipe should be laid in the trench
and joined in accordance with publish recommended installation guidelines.
Table 1
Recommended Trench Widths for Flowable Fill Backfill
Nominal Pipe Nominal Pipe
Minimum Trench Minimum Trench
Diam, Diam,
in. (m) in. (m)
in. (mm) in. (mm)
12 (300) 22 (0.6) 36 (900) 59 (1.5)
15 (375) 27 (0.7) 42 (1050) 66 (1.7)
18 (450) 33 (0.8) 48 (1200) 74 (1.9)
24 (600) 42 (1.0) 54 (1350) 82 (2.0)
30 (750) 51 (1.3) 60 (1500) 90 (2.3)
*AASHTO LRFD Section C12.6.6.1, 2006
It is recommended that both an anchoring system and incremental lifts be utilized during installation. Refer to Figure 1
below for lift recommendations and corresponding recommended anchoring forces. Keep in mind that the fill should be
brought up evenly on both sides to prevent unbalanced forces from acting on the pipe. Each lift should be allowed to
reach initial set, prior to placing the next lift. Time to initial set is dependent on the mix design as well as ambient
temperature and moisture. The mix supplier should be contacted to determine the site-specific waiting period
recommended between lifts. NOTE: The use of plasticizers or other admixtures can greatly affect cure time and final
compressive strength. While it is recommended to place the flowable fill in incremental lifts, it should be noted, one
continuous lift may be used provided flotation restraints have been properly designed and installed, see Table 2 for
recommendations.
If additional backfill is to be placed over the flowable fill to reach final grade, it should not be placed until the flowable fill
has reached a minimum compressive strength, as determined by the design engineer. If minimum strength is not
specified or time constraints do not allow for testing of cylinders, ASTM C403 and ASTM D6024 can be referenced to
determine if flowable fill has gained adequate strength.
Since moisture is beneficial to curing it may be desirable to place a thin layer of soil (6 inches) on top of the flowable fill
section for enhanced curing.
Figure 1
Hold Down Force for Incremental Lifts
35
30
25
Lift Height (in.)
20
12" to 18"
15 24" to 36"
42" to 60"
10
0
0 200 400 600 800 1000 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000
Required Hold Down Force (lb/ft)
*Assumes a unit weight of flowable fill of 150 pcf and no water in the pipe at time of placement
Anchoring Systems
Probably the greatest concern associated with flowable fill during installation is its tendency to float the pipe. Flotation
and misalignment issues are extremely critical and should not be ignored. When backfilling with flowable fill, the absence
of soil overburden will cause the pipe to float since the pipe weight does not offset the flowable fill uplift. Therefore, the
pipe must be anchored to keep the intended alignment and grade. There are a number of acceptable methods for
anchoring the pipe in the trench. It may be assumed that flowable fill acts as a fluid with a density of 140 - 150 lb/cu ft.
prior to stiffening. When properly designed, pipe restraints should account for buoyant forces exerted by the fluid.
Common methods include placing bags of soil or cement or heaping native material at intervals along the pipe, rebar
placed in an “X” pattern above the pipe and anchored into the trench sidewall, or use of on-site construction equipment
that can be left in place while curing (e.g. boom/bucket of excavator). Additional methods may include a pre-cast concrete
swamp weight, or a commercially available screw anchor assembly. Anchor design and spacing shall be determined by
the project design engineer. For other restraint options and additional technical information related to floatation, refer to
Technical Note 5.05: Pipe Flotation.
Table 2
Hold Down Force, One Continuous Lift
Full Depth Placement of Flowable Fill Backfill

Nominal Lift Height Required Hold
Pipe Diam, (Pipe OD), Down Force,
in. (mm) in. (mm) lb/ft (kg/m)
12 (300) 14.5 (368) 186 (276)
15 (375) 18 (457) 287 (426)
18 (450) 22 (559) 429 (638)
24 (600) 28 (711) 693 (1032)
30 (750) 36 (914) 1149 (1710)
36 (900) 42 (1067) 1566 (2330)
42 (1050) 48 (1219) 2044 (3042)
48 (1200) 54 (1372) 2590 (3854)
54 (1350) 61 (1549) 3311 (4927)
60 (1500) 67 (1702) 3990 (5938)
Technical Note
TN 5.03 HDPE Pipe Repair Options
Introduction
High-density polyethylene (HDPE) pipe is lightweight and very easy to handle. The attributes that make the pipe easy to
use can also make it easy to abuse, resulting in damaged pipe or joints. This technical bulletin discusses some of the
products available that can be used to repair damaged HDPE pipe or joints in the field.
Repair Options
One of the primary considerations in selecting a repair method is the degree of joint performance required. Watertight
repairs are generally used on pipe with watertight joints, and soil-tight repairs on pipe with soil-tight joints. This helps
keep costs in line and prevents the repair from being the weak area of the pipe system.
The way in which a pipe can be accessed is another primary consideration which influences what type of repair alternative
is selected. Pipe that is not yet buried, or can be easily excavated, can be repaired from the exterior. If the pipe is buried
and cannot be conveniently excavated, an internal repair may be the best alternative. If the pipe is too small to enter,
there are companies with remote controlled equipment that can install the product. Each situation must be considered
individually.
The repair options addressed below are divided into external repairs and internal repairs. During any pipe repair, backfill
should be placed and compacted per project specifications to provide proper support for the pipe and coupler.
External Mechanical Repairs

Mar Mac Polyseal Pipe Coupler, 4- through 60-inch (100 - 1500 mm), consists of a mastic adhesive base layer, a cross-
laminated polyethylene middle layer with a spun-bonded geotextile polypropylene cloth outer layer. The coupler
incorporates a self-adhering rubberized bonding mastic and securing bands to insure a positive seal around the pipe. If
the pipe itself is damaged, the damaged area will need to be removed and a new pipe section spliced in before installing a
coupler around both ends. Polyseal Pipe Couplers are reasonably priced, especially when considering the quality of the
finished repair, and are typically used with soil-tight smooth interior corrugated HDPE pipe products. Note: Mar-Mac
bands shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
Snap couplers, 4- through 8-inch (100 – 200 mm), and split band
couplers, 10- through 30-inch (250 – 750 mm), will provide a soil-tight
repair with or without gaskets. This repair method should only be used if
the damaged area is in a non-trafficked green area, is cosmetic in nature,
confined to a single corrugation, and is not defined as structural
damage.The coupler shall be centered around the damaged area of pipe
and tightened down with the nylon straps. If the damaged area is large or
significant, the damaged area is to be cut out, and replaced with a new
section of pipe. The replacement section is to be ‘spliced’ in place using
snap or split band couplers. They are a convenient, low-cost repair
alternative, and are typically used to repair soil-tight smooth interior
corrugated HDPE pipe products.
Concrete collars also provide a soil-tight repair, dependent
on the integrity of the installation. Installing a concrete collar
involves building a form around the area to be repaired and
encasing it in concrete. A geotextile is usually wrapped
around the repair area prior to pouring the collar to keep the
concrete from seeping into the pipe. Typically,
approximately 6” (0.15m) is excavated beneath the pipe to
allow for proper application of the geotextile and concrete
encasement. If the pipe itself is damaged, the damaged
area shall be removed and a replacement pipe section
spliced in prior to pouring the collar. In order to provide a
greater level of joint performance, a gasket can be installed
on the pipe in the concrete encasement. Concrete collars
are typically more costly and time consuming than snap
couplers or split band couplers but are reasonable repair
options for soil-tight smooth interior corrugated HDPE pipe
products.
Slip Couplings 4- through 24-inch (100 – 600 mm),

provides a watertight repair that will meet most pressure
testing requirements, when installed correctly. The slip
coupling uses PVC bells with gaskets. The gaskets are
placed in the valleys on either side of the section to be
repaired and slip couplings are then slid over the
gaskets. PVC slip couplings are most commonly used
with watertight smooth interior corrugated HDPE pipe
products. .
External or Internal Repairs

Field welding may be an option for repairing either damaged sections of pipe or when cracks or gaps are present.
Extrusion welding equipment is required for field welding, requiring man access to the section of pipe to be repaired. This
requires a large enough pipe diameter for internal repair or removing backfill around the pipe for external repairs.
Depending on the extent of the repair, a single bead of weld or HDPE sheet reinforcement will be used. The company
performing the field welding will assist in determining access requirements and the extent of the necessary repairs.
Internal Repairs
Internal mechanical repair products generally consist of a flexible cylindrical gasket sleeve, which is expanded to conform
to the inner wall of the pipe. The feasibility of this repair method depends on the size of the damaged section or joint and
available access into the pipe. Internal mechanical seals slightly restrict the inside diameter of the pipe. This should be
considered when assessing the risk of debris obstruction.
NPC Internal Joint Seal, 18- through 60-inch (450 – 1500 mm), consists of an EPDM rubber seal and stainless steel
bands. The rubber seal is inserted into the pipe and positioned over the joint. A torque wrench is used to expand the
bands against the inner wall of the pipe. The Internal Joint Seal is designed to seal joints – not repair damaged pipe
sections. The damaged area of the pipe must be removed and a replacement section spliced in if necessary in order to
use the Internal Joint Seal. This system may provide a watertight joint when installed as recommended. The
manufacture should be contacted to verify the product meets the specific application requirements including test
requirements, if specified. If pressure tests are required, NPC should be contacted to ensure that the product is suitable
for the specific test criteria.
Internal mechanical seals will slightly restrict the inside diameter of the pipe. This should be considered when assessing
the risk of debris obstruction.
Link Pipe Grouting SleeveTM, 4 through 60 inch (100 – 1500 mm), is a stainless steel grouting sleeve that is installed with
an inflatable plug. The sleeve may be used to seal a joint or repair short sections of damaged pipe. The manufacture
should be contacted to verify the product meets the specific application requirements including test requirements, if
specified.
Internal chemical sealing is another method of internal joint repair using chemically activated gel or grout to minimize joint
leakage. The grout is typically applied with specialized remote-controlled equipment. Test/seal packer is used to remotely
seal a joint. The grouting chemicals are forced through the joint out into the surrounding soil where they gel with the soil.
The gelled mass forms a waterproof collar around the pipe. The result is significantly reduced leakage. There are several
types of chemical grouts available, and the manufacturer should be contacted to review the specific situation and any joint
tightness or pressure test criteria. Companies such as Avanti International, Strata Tech Inc., and Carylon Corporation
manufacture and/or install chemical grout. Stephen’s Technologies New Life Coatings and NewLife Liner Systems as well
as Avast Hydro-Lining International, are examples of companies that offer cured in place epoxy lining systems that have
been effectively used with HDPE pipe. Most pipe diameters can be chemically grouted provided the grouting contractor
has the appropriate equipment.
Manufacturer Contact Information

Contact the Regional Engineer or Application Engineering Department for assistance with other unique conditions or for
contact information regarding any companies listed in this technical note.
Note: The HDPE pipe products are solely intended for the conveyance of fluids. Access into this product for
maintenance, inspection, repair, or other reason should be done in strict accordance with OSHA recommendations for
confined space entry.
Mar Mac is a registered trademark of MarMac Manufacturing Company, Inc. Grouting Sleeve is a registered trademark of Link Pipe.
Technical Note
TN 5.04 HDPE and HP Storm Connections to Manholes and Structures for Storm
Sewer Applications
Introduction
A full line of pipe jointing options is available to fit the requirements of nearly any storm drain or gravity flow project
specifications. The joints available range from soil tight split couplers to gasketed soil-tight (ST) and watertight (WT) pipe.
When connecting pipe to drainage structures it is important to make those connections with a joint performance at least
equal to that of the piping system.
Connection Options
Soil-Tight Performance
When using soil-tight pipe in non-watertight applications, it may be acceptable to grout the void space between the pipe
and drainage structure.
Watertight Performance
When using watertight pipe for testable systems, requiring some degree of watertight performance, it is necessary to
provide additional measures to insure a watertight connection between the pipe and structure. ASTM F2510/F 2510M,
“Standard Specification for Resilient Connectors Between Reinforced Concrete Manhole Structures and Corrugated High
Density Polyethylene Drainage Pipes,” is the governing standard for corrugated HDPE pipe-manhole connections, but
specific performance/installation requirements should be verified for each specific project. Along with a full line of adapter
fittings available, including the Waterstop® Gasket, are flexible boot fittings provided by other manufactures. Fitting
dimensions should be supplied to the manufacturer to insure the proper fitting size and manhole boot connector are
supplied.
Installation Recommendations
When installing a manhole adapter
on the upstream end, the fitting may
be over inserted into the structure
temporarily while the adjoining pipe
is laid. The spigot piece is then
pushed back through the structure
and connected to the bell end when
pushing the joint together, as shown
to the right.
Alternately, when using the adapter fitting in the
downstream end of the structure, before pushing
the bell and spigot together from inside the
structure, it is necessary to provide blocking at
the structure to prevent the fitting from moving in
the structure, as shown to the left.
Summary
The selection of which manhole connection is best suited for a project is based on the joint and connection
requirements along with preferred manhole connection method for the region. It is imperative that prevailing
regulations be consulted before selecting a manhole connection. Other options may be available for watertight
manhole connections. Refer to 200 Series Standard Details for installation and connection-specific details. Contact
your Regional Engineer or Application Engineering for further assistance.
Technical Note
TN 5.05 Pipe Flotation
Introduction
The light weight of high density polyethylene (HDPE) and polypropylene (PP) pipe make it desirable because of the ease
of handling and installation but this same benefit also makes these thermoplastic pipes prone to flotation. All pipe
products, such as concrete and corrugated metal, are prone to flotation under the right circumstances. In fact, all pipe
materials and other buried structures are subject to flotation. When the uplift on the pipe or structure exceeds the
downward force of the weight and load it carries, the pipe (or structure) will rise or heave. Where flotation is a possibility,
proper installation and/or anchoring of the pipe is critical. This document provides an analysis on minimum cover heights
required to prevent pipe flotation for thermoplastic pipe sizes 12”-60”. Buoyant force due to flowable fill is also discussed.
Hydrostatic Uplift Due to a High Water Table

Buoyancy becomes an issue in buried pipe when the groundwater encroaches into the pipe zone. For projects where a
high groundwater table or water surrounding the pipe is expected, precautions should be taken to prevent the floatation of
thermoplastic pipe. The vertical hydrostatic uplift force, due to the water table, must be balanced by the soil overburden
and the weight of the pipe in order to prevent flotation of the pipe. The vertical hydrostatic uplift force, U, can be calculated
from Equation 1 below:
π
U= D δw
2
(1)
4
where U = lb/linear ft of pipe

D = O.D. of the pipe in question, ft.
δw = unit weight of water = 62.4 lb/ft3
Soil loads experienced by a pipe at varying water table depths (Wsoil) can be calculated from Equation 2. Figure 1
illustrates each of the three cases seen in field installations where buoyancy becomes a concern, and also clarifies
all of the parameters contained within Equation 2.
Wsoil = δdryHdryD + (δsat- δw)(Hsub+ 0.1073D)D (2)
where Wsoil = weight of soil overburden, lb/linear ft of pipe

δdry = dry unit weight of the soil, lb/ft3
Hdry = depth of dry soil, ft.
Hsub = depth of submerged soil over top of pipe, ft.
δsat = saturated unit weight of the soil, lb/ft3
δsat - δw = submerged unit weight of the soil, lb/ft3
Figure 1
Installation Conditions for Possible Flotation of Thermoplastic Pipe
(a) Water table at pipe crown (b) Water table exceeds (c) Water table is at
pipe crown elevation ground surface
The typical weights (Wpipe) and average outside diameters are shown in Table 1.
Table 1
Approximate Weights of ADS Thermoplastic Pipe
Nominal Dual Wall Pipe Triple Wall
Nominal OD
Diameter Weight Pipe Weight
in. (mm)
in. (mm) lb/ft (kg/m) lb/ft (kg/m)
4 (100) 4.6 (117) 0.44 (0.6) N/A
6 (150) 7.0 (178) 0.85 (1.3) N/A
8 (200) 9.5 (241) 1.5 (2.2) N/A
10 (250) 12 (305) 2.1 (3.1) N/A
12 (300) 14.5 (368) 3.2 (4.7) N/A
15 (375) 18 (457) 4.6 (6.8) N/A
18 (450) 22 (559) 6.4 (9.5) N/A
24 (600) 28 (711) 11.0 (16.4) N/A
30 (750) 36 (914) 15.4 (22.9) 20.7 (30.8)
36 (900) 42 (1067) 19.8 (29.4) 24.2 (36.0)
42 (1050) 48 (1219) 26.4 (39.3) 31.9 (47.5)
48 (1200) 54 (1372) 31.3 (46.6) 41.8 (62.3)
60 (1500) 67 (1702) 45.2 (67.3) 55.0 (81.9)
N/A indicates the pipe is not available in the respective diameter
The minimum depth of cover (H) required to resist uplift can be calculated by equating the sum of the downward forces to
the sum of the upward or buoyant forces. While there are varying methods to account for soil load distribution on the pipe,
for conservative minimum cover requirements, the soil load is assumed to be the soil column directly above the outside
diameter of the pipe as illustrated in Figure 2(a). Therefore, minimum cover is calculated using Equations 3 and 4 below:
U O WSoil + WPipe (3)

where Wpipe = weight of the pipe, lb/linear ft of pipe
H = Hdry + Hsub (4)
Figure 2
Forces Affecting Flotation
(a) Soil Column Loading Conditions (b) Prism Loading Conditions
Table 2
Minimum Recommended Cover to Prevent Flotation of ADS Thermoplastic Pipe
Nominal Minimum Calculation Notes:

Diameter Cover 1. The pipe is assumed to be empty. This not only simplifies
in. (mm) in. (mm) the calculations but creates a condition that would
4 (100) 3 (77) encourage flotation. Unless the system is constructed to
be watertight, this condition would not likely be found in
6 (150) 4 (102)
an actual installation.
8 (200) 5 (127) 2. The outside diameter of the corrugated pipe was used to
10 (250) 7 (178) determine soil and water displacement.
3. Saturated soil density used was 130 pcf which is typical
12 (300) 9 (228)
for many saturated soil mixtures. Soils of greater
15 (375) 11 (280) densities will reduce the chance of flotation.
18 (450) 13 (330) 4. The water table was assumed to be at the ground
24 (600) 17 (432) surface, as illustrated in Figure 1(c), simulating a fully
saturated soil. This assumption creates a “worst case”
30 (750) 22 (559) condition to yield more conservative results.
36 (900) 25 (635) 5. The soil load prism shown in Figure 2(a) was used to
42 (1050) 29 (737) determine soil weight.
6. For structural purposes, a minimum cover of 12” (0.3m)
48 (1200) 33 (838)
shall apply for 4”-48” (100-1200mm) pipe, and 24” (0.6m)
60 (1500) 40 (1016) for 60” (1500mm) pipe.
Example 1: Calculate the minimum depth of cover required to prevent 48” N-12 HDPE from floating when the water table
is at the top of grade. The dry and saturated unit weights of the soil are 110 lb/ft3 and 130 lb/ft3, respectively.
Solution: U O WSoil + WPipe
Wpipe = 32.0 lb/ft (from Table 1)
π
U= (4.5)2 (62.4 ) = 992.4 lb/ft
4
The water table is at top of grade, so Figure 1(c) applies. Since Hdry=0, the first term in
Equation 2 is eliminated:
Therefore, Wsoil = (130 -62.4)[Hsub + (0.1073)(4.5)](4.5) + 32 = 304.2 Hsub + 146.9 + 32
Equation 3 then yields: 992.4 = 304.2 Hsub + 178.9

∴ Hsub = 2.67’ = 32.1” (use 33”)
Finally, calculate minimum cover from Equation 4: H = Hsub = 33”
The above calculations are conservative. The angle of internal friction of the soil, φ, and the coefficient of lateral earth
stress, Ko, are not accounted for in the above equations. These parameters are best left to the geotechnical engineer. If
these parameters are added to the above calculations, the depth of cover required would be reduced.
Anchoring Systems
In many instances pipe flotation may simply be addressed with adequate cover. In those situations where adequate
cover cannot be achieved, there are a number of acceptable alternate methods for restraining the pipe. Several
examples are shown in Figure 3.
Due to the variations in in-situ soil densities, water table heights, and the restraining force of the anchors, the Engineer
should evaluate the project-specific conditions to determine the required anchor type and spacing to prevent flotation.
The maximum spacing between anchor supports should not exceed 10 feet. In this manner, pipe is supported at each
joint and at the midpoint of each length of pipe to ensure adequate stabilization.
Figure 3
Pipe Stabilizing Alternatives
PRECAST CONCRETE COMMERCIALLY

GEOTEXTILE AVAILABLE SCREW
WRAP SWAMP WEIGHT
ANCHOR ASSEMBLY
BEDDING BEDDING BEDDING
(a) Geotextile wrap (b) Concrete collar (c) Screw anchor

Uplift Due to Flowable Fill Backfill
Flowable fill, also known as controlled low strength material (CLSM), controlled density fill (CDF), and slurry fill, is utilized
as an alternate to compacted granular fill. Flowable fill typically consists of Portland Cement, sand, water, and fly ash.
Uplift due to CLSM backfill can be calculated from Equation 5.
A δ
disp FF
U= (5)
144
Where, Adisp = Area of pipe displaced by flowable fill, in2

δFF = Unit weight of flowable fill, lb/ft3
U = Uplift due to flowable fill backfill, lb/ft
Due to the vast differences in the unit weights between water and flowable fill, uplift caused by flowable fill can be greater
than two times that of hydrostatic uplift. When backfilling with flowable fill, the pipe will float in the absence of soil
overburden, since the weight of the pipe will not offset the vertical uplift. Precautions must be taken to ensure the pipe
remains on its intended alignment and grade. This is commonly done by anchoring the pipe in place or placing the
flowable fill in incremental lifts. Refer to Technical Note 5.02: Flowable Fill Backfill for Thermoplastic Pipe for common
anchoring methods and additional technical information related to placing flowable fill as backfill.
Technical Note
TN 5.06 Culvert Sliplining with HDPE Pipe
Introduction
An abrasive or corrosive environment can cause premature deterioration of some types of pipe. In lieu of a total
replacement, sliplining the existing pipe with a durable material may be an economical method to significantly extend the
service life. Polyethylene pipe, because of its resistance to aggressive environments, is often the product of choice to
slipline deteriorated pipes. This technical bulletin describes the site and installation considerations that must be evaluated
before using HDPE pipe in these applications.
Access to the Host Pipe

The “host” pipe may be open on both ends, as in a culvert application, or it may be
accessible only through a manhole opening, as in a storm sewer application. Open-
ended applications are more appropriate for HDPE pipe products, provided they do
not require the pipe to be bent in order to enter the host pipe. If access can only be
made through a manhole, HDPE pipe products may not be acceptable because they
cannot be bent sufficiently.
Diameter of the Host Pipe

The greater of either the outside diameter of the HDPE pipe or coupler should be
compared to the inside diameter of the host pipe. This may be accomplished by
attempting to pull a short section (~2 feet in length) through the host pipe as a trial
run. The host pipe should be clean; free from sediment and debris so as to not
interfere with the installation of the liner pipe. Sliplining installations may be subject to
thermal length changes of 0.07-inches per 100 feet of pipe per change in degree F.
One should design to allow for these changes during installation. To allow for proper
grout placement and clearance, the reline pipe should have a maximum outside
diameter no greater than 90% of the inside diameter of the host pipe. The maximum
outside diameters of ADS products are shown in Table 1.
Table 1
HDPE Pipe Dimensions
Nominal Max Outside Nominal Max Outside
Inside Diam. Diam. Inside Diam. Diam.
in (mm) in (mm) in (mm) in (mm)
4 (100) 4.8 (122) 24 (600) 28.4 (721)
6 (150) 7.0 (178) 30 (750) 35.6 (904)
8 (200) 9.5 (241) 36 (900) 41.4 (1052)
10 (250) 12.0 (305) 42 (1050) 48.0 (1219)
12 (300) 14.5 (367) 48 (1200) 55.0 (1397)
15 (375) 17.8 (452) 54 (1350) 61.0 (1549)
18 (450) 21.5 (546) 60 (1500) 67.3 (1709)
Length of Installation
HDPE pipe joints are not designed to withstand large pulling forces. Furthermore, pushing the liner pipe in through the
host pipe may damage the corrugations at the pipe ends as they butt up against each other. The method of installation
will affect, in large part, the maximum length that can be slip lined without damaging the pipe. Using skids, especially in a
corrugated host pipe, will help minimize resistance between the two surfaces. Skids could be as simple as a pair of 2X4’s
placed near the invert. A push-and-pull technique keeps stress on the joints to a minimum. Projects in excess of 100 ft
(30 m) between access points are addressed in Technical Note 5.11: Sliplining Extended Lengths with HDPE Pipe.
Hydraulic Considerations
Original design calculations may be referenced, however careful attention should be given to changes in land use which
would change the calculated runoff tributary to the culvert. Once a discharge has been determined, the required size of
the HDPE pipe may be established. If original design calculations are not available, the project engineer should complete
a thorough drainage study. A culvert size can be selected based on watershed attributes, design storm, allowable
headwater, culvert entrance conditions and any other related design factors.
In many cases, where culverts are too deep to make replacement practical, slightly reduced hydraulics may be an
acceptable tradeoff to an expensive replacement. Typically, gravity flow systems are designed using Manning’s Equation
with a conservative ‘n’ value of 0.012 for HDPE. It should be noted that culverts in need of relining do not have Manning’s
‘n’ values typical of original design values. Relining with smooth interior HDPE pipe may actually increase the capacity of
the deteriorated culvert.
Structural Requirements
Failing culverts in need of relining may eventually deteriorate into a conduit with no structural integrity at all. For this
reason, it is important to reline with a culvert capable of handling the loads based on its installation assuming no load
reduction from the host pipe. Loading for Highway and pavement tunnels shall be based upon a continuous load carrying
structure for the height of cover under HS-25 loading. Voids between the surrounding soil and the host pipe shall be
pressure grouted to ensure structural integrity and resistance to thermal effects. For more information for determining the
structural capacity of HDPE, refer to the Structures section of the Drainage Handbook.
Installation of HDPE in Host Pipe

Before the HDPE pipe is inserted into an existing culvert for relining, it is critical to inspect the existing culvert for any objects
or obstructions, which may be extending into the barrel of the existing culvert to be relined. Failure to do this may result in
a damaged reline.
Insertion Forces
Once the culvert is clear, the new material may be pushed
through. It is important to determine the maximum insertion force
that can be applied to the culvert. This will prevent the pipe wall
profile from buckling in the axial direction under excessive
insertion loading.
In cases where the new culvert will be two or more sizes smaller
than the existing culvert, it is possible to construct mechanisms to
transport the new material along the existing culvert without sliding
across the invert. Although ideal for construction, many times
there is insufficient room to allow this technique.
Grouting Procedures
When relining a culvert with HDPE pipe, it is recommended to fill the void space between the existing culvert and the new
material with a grout material. The grout material is often a controlled low strength material – controlled density fill
(CLSM-CDF). A CLSM or flowable fill material will help provide uniform support on the sides of the pipe, maintain a
consistent soil density, provide lateral support for the pipe, and eliminate point loads. For more information on flowable fill
mix, refer to Technical Note: Flowable Fill Backfill for Thermoplastic Pipe.
It is common for aging metal culverts to have deteriorated or completely destroyed inverts. This allows the fluid carried
through the culvert to create void space under the pipe, creating an undesired design consideration. The grout material
will help plug and fill any fractures or holes in the existing culvert along with structurally stabilizing the system from
thermal, hydrostatic pressure, point loads, and function as a water barrier.
To ensure proper alignment and prevent joint separation, the
pipe should be anchored against flotation when placing the
grout material. Grouting in layers thin enough such that they
don’t float the pipe helps tremendously. Each layer should
be allowed to set up between pours. Contractors may have
other techniques that will also prevent flotation such as the
use of deadweight inside the pipe. Regardless of the
method used, it is also important to avoid applying point
loads to the pipe. For more information on flotation and
anchoring methods, refer to Technical Note: Pipe Flotation.
When HDPE pipe, or any flexible pipe, is used as a liner, it is
very important not to use excessive grout pressure. In most
circumstances, the joint, not the wall strength, will be the
limiting factor for maximum allowable grouting pressure.
Including a factor of safety, the recommended maximum
grouting pressure for water tight pipe products is 5 psi; this
value may vary based on specific site conditions and specific products used. Due to the application method of grout,
water tight pipe is recommended for sliplining applications. During the grouting operation, gauges should be used to
monitor the grout pressure exerted on the pipe system. For some applications, hydrostatic head pressure may increase
the expected pressure on the pipe from the grouting. Additional pressure may be a result of the slope and/or diameter of
the pipe, elevation changes between the pipe and the gauge, and other conditions that should be considered during the
design. The sum of all pressures that will be exerted on the pipe should not exceed the recommended maximum pressure
for the application.
Technical Note
TN 5.07 Post Installation Testing for HDPE Pipe
Introduction
HDPE pipe is often tested after or during installation to ensure a sound installation was accomplished. Types of post
installation field testing include deflection testing and joint testing. Specific testing required for the project will be found in the
project specifications. This technical note is not meant to supersede any project specification, but should be used in
conjunction with the project specification and national testing standards as it relates specifically to HDPE pipe.
Deflection Testing
An important feature of any flexible pipe is its ability to deflect, or oval, under load without structural distress. Flexible pipe
must deflect in order to mobilize the strength of the surrounding backfill. Deflection allows the load to be transferred from
the pipe to the surrounding backfill. As a result, flexible pipe can withstand very high loads as a relatively light structure.
According to current thermoplastic design procedures, deflection is defined as a service limit. The designer, considering all
site conditions, will set this service limit in order to perform a proper design evaluation. Deflection in excess of this service
limit does not necessarily result in strength limits being exceeded, i.e. system failure. For more information on service and
strength limit states, see the Structures section of the Drainage Handbook. HDPE can be expected to perform satisfactorily
in most applications with 5% or 7.5% deflection and so it is typical of designers to choose a service limit in this range.
When testing for allowable deflection limits, the minimum inside diameter should be used when establishing mandrel sizing.
The minimum inside diameter accounts for the allowable manufacturing tolerances. Table 1 lists the inside diameters that
result from 5% and 7.5% deflection from the minimum inside diameter. Values listed in Table 1 should be used for sizing
mandrels for deflection testing. Mandrels may be obtained from a variety of commercial suppliers.
Table 1
Base Inside Diameters for HDPE Pipe
Base Inside Base Inside
Base Inside
Nominal Pipe Diameter with Diameter with
Diameter
Diameter (in.) 5% Deflection 7.5%
(in.)
(in.) Deflection (in).
4 3.88 3.68 3.59
6 5.82 5.53 5.38
8 7.76 7.37 7.17
10 9.69 9.21 8.97
12 11.63 11.05 10.76
15 14.54 13.82 13.45
18 17.45 16.58 16.14
24 23.27 22.10 21.52
30 29.08 27.63 26.90
36 34.90 33.16 32.28
42 40.72 38.68 37.66
48 46.54 44.21 43.05
54 52.35 49.73 48.43
60 58.17 55.26 53.81
*Value is per AASHTO M2521 (4”-10” dia.) and AASHTO M2942 (12” – 60” dia.).
If designing to a specific standard, please review allowable minimum diameter.
It is important to understand that mandrel testing is a go/no-go test. If any line were to not pass a mandrel, it is important to
determine the cause. Obstructions in the line, not associated with deflection, may influence the test. Visual inspection is
recommended in the event of a no-go result.
Joint Testing
Joint testing is an important part of any gravity sewer system, both in testing for infiltration and exfiltration. Infiltration aids to
estimate the amount of sewer water that will be conveyed to, and ultimately treated by, the waste water treatment plant.
Exfiltration aids to estimate the loss of sewage water into the surrounding soil. The two primary ways of testing sewer pipe
joints for infiltration and/or exfiltration is using air or water to create a constant pressure within the system.
Exfiltration Testing with Air
Air is a compressible gas and so it is extremely important one adheres to the appropriate safety regulations outlined in
OSHA and project specifications. There are two primary national testing standards that may be applied to joint testing
HDPE: ASTM F1417 Standard Test Method for Installation Acceptance of Plastic Gravity Sewer Lines Using Low-Pressure
Air, and ASTM F3058 Preliminary Field Testing of Thermoplastic Pipe Joints for Gravity Flow (Non-Pressure) Sewer Lines.
When either standard is specified by the project plans, one should review the standards carefully and follow the testing
procedure and safety precautions outlined. The below commentary on the ASTM testing procedures should be considered a
summary and does not replace the testing procedures outlined in their respective specifications.
ASTM F1417 entails testing a run of pipe from one manhole to the next adjacent manhole. Inflatable plugs are positioned
into the manholes and secured. Air is introduced into the pipe line and gradually builds pressure. Once the line has been
pressurized and is stable at 4.0-psi, the pressure is decreased to 3.5-psi at which time the line must not lose more than 0.5-
or 1.0-psi (whichever is specified by the design engineer) in the specified amount of time. Table 2 below summarizes the
minimum time that must be reached for less than 0.5- or 1.0-psi of pressure drop, depending on the diameter and length of
pipe being tested.
Table 2
Time to Pressure Drop for HDPE (per ASTM F1417)
Time for Time for Length Shown, (min:sec)
Pressure Minimum Length for
Pipe Longer
Drop Test Time Minimum
Diameter Lengths,
(psi) (min:sec) Time, (ft) 100 ft 150 ft 200 ft 250 ft 300 ft 350 ft 400 ft 450 ft
(sec)
0.5 5:40 1.709 L 5:40 5:40 5:42 7:08 8:33 9:58 11:24 12:50
12 199
1.0 11:20 3.418 L 11:20 11:20 11:24 14:15 17:05 19:56 22:47 25:38
0.5 7:05 2.671 L 7:05 7:05 8:54 11:08 13:21 15:35 17:48 20:02
15 159
1.0 14:10 5.342 L 14:10 14:10 17:48 22:15 26:42 31:09 35:36 40:04
0.5 8:30 3.846 L 8:30 9:37 12:49 16:01 19:14 22:26 25:38 28:51
18 133
1.0 17:00 7.692 L 17:00 19:13 25:38 32:03 38:27 44:52 51:16 57:41
0.5 11:20 6.837 L 11:24 17:57 22:48 28:30 34:11 39:53 45:35 51:17
24 99
1.0 22:40 13.764 L 22:47 34:11 43:34 56:58 68:22 79:46 91:10 102:33
0.5 14:10 10.683 L 17:48 26:43 35:37 44:31 53:25 62:19 71:13 80:07
30 80
1.0 28:20 21.366 L 35:37 53:25 71:13 89:02 106:50 124:38 142:26 160:15
Data taken from ASTM F 1417 and Uni-Bell, Uni-B-6-985.
3
It may not be necessary to hold the test for the entire time period listed above when it is evident that the rate of air loss is zero or less than the
allowable pressure drop and authorized by the approving authority1.
When the pipe is large enough to be physically accessed, it may be desirable to test individual joints for safety reasons. In
these cases, one may consider joint testing in accordance with ASTM F3058, also known as a joint isolation test. ADS
recommends a joint isolation test, in lieu of a full line test, for testing pipe diameters 36” and larger for safety reasons. This
test is typically done with air, though water may also be used, and involves the use of special testing equipment. The
equipment consists of two inflatable bladders, placed on each side of the joint, creating an open center cavity between them.
The bladders are inflated and then the center cavity is pressurized to 3.5 psi. The joint passes the test if the pressure is held
for 5 seconds without dropping more than 1.0-psi. For all practical purposes, this is a go/no-go test. Final acceptance of the
pipeline per this testing method shall be at the discretion of the Design Engineer. One advantage of this type of test is the
ability for the installer to quickly test the joint immediately after installation, allowing for any corrective measures to be taken
early on in the project.
Infiltration/Exfiltration with Water
Testing gravity sewer joints via water infiltration or exfiltration is a common practice. For HDPE, this testing should be
conducted in accordance with ASTM F2487 Standard Practice for Infiltration and Exfiltration Acceptance Testing of Installed
Corrugated High Density Polyethylene Pipelines. These standards entail first observing the ground water conditions and, if
applicable, measuring the infiltration rate of the ground water through the joints. If ground water is not applicable, then the
line is filled with water and the leakage is observed through exfiltration.
Manholes shall be tested separately and independently of the pipe line to the requirements established in the project
specifications. When water level is measured in the manhole for the exfiltration test, the leakage associated with the
manhole shall be subtracted from the overall leakage of the test section to establish a pass or fail grade for the pipe.
Allowable Leakage
The allowable leakage rate for HDPE is 200 gallons/in-dia/mi-pipe/day for both infiltration and exfiltration when tested in
accordance with ASTM F2487
Conclusion
HDPE pipe is intended for gravity flow drainage applications and may be tested for deflection and joint tightness as
discussed in this technical document. It is important to note that the testing procedures are no different than for other gravity
flow drainage products currently being used in the market. This document does not purport to address the safety concerns
associated with testing HDPE pipe. Any questions associated with testing HDPE pipe can be directed to your local
representative.
References
1. AASHTO M252, Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Drainage Pipe, AASHTO,
2012
2. AASHTO M294, Standard Specification for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe, 300 to 1500 mm (12 to 60
in.) Diameter, AASHTO, 2015
3. ASTM F1417, Standard Test Method for Installation Acceptance of Plastic Gravity Sewer Lines
Using Low-Pressure Air, ASTM, 2005
4. F3058, Preliminary Field Testing of Thermoplastic Pipe Joints for Gravity Flow (non-Pressure) Sewer
Lines, ASTM, 2016.
5. Uni-B-6-98, Recommended Practice for Low-Pressure Air Testing of Installed Sewer Pipe, Uni-Bell
PVC Pipe Association, 1998
6. ASTM F2487, Standard Practice for Infiltration and Exfiltration Acceptance Testing of Installed
Corrugated High Density Polyethylene Pipelines, ASTM, 2006
Technical Note
TN 5.08 Laser Profiling of Flexible Pipe
Introduction
Historically, the use of closed-circuit television (CCTV) inspection technologies has been a common method to provide
post installation inspection of various pipe types. This technology can provide a qualitative analysis of the interior of a
pipeline, but it can be limited due to the subjective nature of the visual assessment process. Laser profiling, which was
originally developed for the thermoplastic Cured in Place Pipe industry, is a new technology that can provide precise
measurements of pipe parameters. However, there are some current limitations with the technology that can lead to
sporadic and erroneous results. Additionally, the limitations can lead to precise but inaccurate results. The purpose of this
Technical Note is to provide a discussion of the current state of the technology.
Laser Profiling Description

Laser profiling is a non-contact inspection method used to determine a pipe-wall profile. The method uses a machine
vision technique known as optical triangulation as shown in Figure 1. This involves projecting a laser onto the interior
surface of the pipe, and an image of this light spot is then formed on a sensor, usually a digital camera. By knowing the
position of the laser with respect to the camera and establishing which part of the sensor the light spot is viewed through,
one can find the exact location of the pipe wall with respect to the laser and camera. The radial distance data for several
positions along the pipe is compiled and plotted yielding a three dimensional wireframe image of the pipe.1
Figure 1
Optical Triangulation Geometry
Position and Orientation Tracking

The primary difficulty with the use of laser profile equipment is tracking the position and orientation of the
equipment that is used. Absolute positioning systems could be employed that correlate the position of
the equipment to an external landmark but these are difficult to implement. The more common method
to account for position and orientation tracking is with the use of a relative positioning device such as
gyroscopes or inclinometer. However, this type of positioning tracking system can be susceptible to
many errors.
Gyroscopes use the earth as reference point. In doing so, the gyroscope can not distinguish whether the equipment that
the laser is situated on or the pipe has changed position. This can lead to errors in ovality readings unless the laser
profiling software can distinguish that the equipment has shifted and not the pipe. This problem can materialize in one of
two ways. First, the profiling equipment has meandered off of the pipe axis by a certain horizontal angle. This can lead to
a false positive result exhibited by excessive horizontal ovality deflection readings in a round pipe. Secondly, the
equipment encounters a bump or offset which results in the equipment meandering off of the pipe axis by a certain vertical
angle. In this case, this can lead to an erroneous pipe profile exhibited by excessive vertical deflection readings in a
round pipe.
Currently, the software programs for laser profiling can not account for meandering of equipment. To help control
equipment wander, one system spaces wheels at 120 degrees in the pipe regardless of diameter. This can lead to
positive results for pipe diameters that are 24-inch and less. However, this method can have limited success in the
inspection of large diameters as the potential for meander greatly increases. This can lead to a false negative result
exhibited by excessive horizontal ovality deflection readings in a round pipe. Software programs currently in place are
more effective in dealing with bumps and offsets in the pipe. The systems use an inclinometer to take readings which
account for vertical inconsistencies in the pipeline and are more successful in limiting false positive results in vertical
ovality deflection readings.
Non Ideal Pipe Conditions

In addition to bumps or offsets, the presence of sediment, water and/or other debris can create vertical inconsistencies
resulting in a pipe profile illusion inconsistent with the actual pipe profile condition. One known laser profiling system can
operate in pipelines that are partially filled with water. The acceptable depth will vary based on the pipe diameter and
equipment utilized. The software package that is utilized can recognize the presence of water and correct the profiling
data accordingly. However, this is not consistent in the industry. Other systems require operator input to account for
water in the pipeline. This operator input can lead to errors with regards to data interpretation and effect repeatability of
the results.
The presence of debris is somewhat more complicated. When debris is encountered, the equipment can meander off of
the pipe axis by a certain vertical angle. In this case, this can lead to an erroneous pipe profile exhibited by excessive
vertical deflection readings in a round pipe. As with water, one laser profiling system can operate in a pipeline that has
accumulation that is 10 percent of the pipe diameter. The software package can recognize the presence of the debris and
correct the profiling data accordingly. As with water interpretation, this is not consistent in the industry. Other systems
require operator input to account for debris in the pipeline. This operator input can lead to errors with regards to data
interpretation and effect repeatability of the results.
For the best results, the pipe should be clear of all sediment, debris and water. Otherwise, considerable post-inspection
data analysis will be necessary to distinguish whether deflection readings were actual or a false positive created non ideal
pipe conditions.
Environmental Factors
The laser profile may be disturbed, impeded or dispersed due to atmospheric density differences relating to fog or dew
formation in the pipeline. This can affect the light intensity in the pipeline which in turn will negatively impact the laser
profiling process. As mentioned previously, the technology involves projecting a laser onto the interior surface of the pipe,
and an image of this light spot is then formed on a sensor, usually a digital camera. If the fog or dew formation is of
sufficient intensity, the laser may be reflected and never reach the interior surface of the pipe. This may result in laser
scatter which in turn may lead to erroneous readings. For best results, the pipeline to be tested needs to be free of any
these environmental conditions.
Calibration
The laser profiling equipment requires calibration for possible distortion prior to use as well as during the inspection
process. The calibration process varies dependent upon the system that is selected. One system is calibrated under
controlled conditions in a laboratory prior use on a project. The calibration involves the use of proving rings of a known
dimension. Furthermore, the calibration is specific to the camera equipment that will be utilized with the laser profiler.
Another system conducts calibration in the field which is typically done outdoors at the project site. This field calibration
involves the videoing of a rod of known length which is at the same position that the laser head would be. The field
calibration is susceptible to environmental factors that may result from the calibration being conducted in a non-controlled
environment. This can lead to issues with data interpretation and error and ultimately accurate repeatability of data.
Equipment Limitations
The laser profiling equipment varies between manufacturers. Some of the differences can contribute to inaccurate
measurements of the pipe and negatively impact the data. For one technology, the laser is coupled to the laser camera
via a metal rod. The placement of the metal rod creates a blind spot at the invert where the laser intersects the bar such
that proximately seven percent of the pipe interior is not addressed by the profiling. For the second technology, the pipe
is inspected with a low distortion video camera first. A laser projector on a sled is attached to the camera via a chain.
The video equipment is pulled backwards towing the laser profile sled and the video camera records the image of the
laser. Since the camera and the laser profiler sled are on separate pieces of equipment attached with a chain, they are
free to move independently of each other. This process is not only time consuming since two independent reviews of the
pipe are done but can also lead to variability in the results. Since the equipment is on two separate frames, the profiling
will be based on the relative positions of the equipment which can vary based on speed and the interior of the pipe.
Additionally, if there are any obstructions in the line, this will cause one of the two components to react differently than the
other, further impacting the ability to achieve reliable results. Operator interpretation of the data can lead to further
variability in the results. One method to address this is to have the laser and camera on the same frame which fixes the
location of the two and helps to eliminate relational errors.
Data Analysis
Final results from the laser profiling inspection are based on analysis of the data. This is especially applicable for some
laser profiling systems where there is debris or water in the line that needs to be accounted for. Analysis can take up to
two weeks to complete which may create delays in the overall project schedule. Some systems are attempting to
implement a wireless component for data transmission to expedite delivery of information and expedite the overall
schedule. However, this will still be project specific. Regardless of the system that is selected, the data analysis and
report delivery timeframe needs to be evaluated and compared against the overall project schedule to ensure that
excessive delays are avoided.
Summary
The use of laser profiling is a relatively new technology. The technology is extremely interesting and allows for the
collection of a large amount of data. However, accurate, repeatable results are limited at this time due to pipe condition,
environmental factors, operator interpretation and equipment limitations as discussed above. Although the technology is
promising, it is still developing. As a result, the technology is still under evaluation and has not been approved for wide
use by any major national approval body.
1
Refining Laser Profiling Methods Used for Pipeline Assessment, Trenchless Technology Center, Louisiana Tech
University, Ruston, Louisiana, April, 2005.
Technical Note
TN 5.09 Thermoplastic Pipe and Utility Crossings
Introduction
Underground utilities include storm sewer, electric, sanitary sewer, gas, water, telephone and cable. Utility conflicts are
typically avoided during the design process. However, in some cases, existing utilities are not properly identified or
located during the design process. In other instances, the location of the utility is known, but adequate construction
controls are not in place. Both can result in a negative impact to an existing utility when installing a new utility. The
purpose of this Technical Note is to provide additional information on the impact of utility crossings. While the discussion
centers on the use of thermoplastic (high density polyethylene, HDPE and polypropylene, PP, specifically) pipe, there are
documented cases of all types of pipes being affected, and in some cases damaged, by subsequent utility activity nearby.
Design Considerations
Many issues associated with utility disturbances can be avoided during the design process. The design will depend
on the type of utility that is installed which may also dictate the depth. Typically, sanitary sewers are buried the
deepest and located outside the roadway section. Water lines are generally the next deepest utility and usually are
placed a minimum of 5 feet horizontally from sanitary sewers to prevent contamination. Some municipalities locate
sanitary and water utilities on opposite sides of the roadway to minimize the potential for disturbance and
contamination. Gas, electric and telephone utilities are generally located outside the pavement section on one side
of the street in a utility corridor and are usually shallower than water and sanitary utilities. Storm sewer depth can
be shallow depending on the terrain and outlet locations. Storm sewers can be located in the roadway or parallel to
the roadway. The associated outfalls and area drains can be located outside the right of way in an easement. Since
storm sewers are gravity flow drainage, their depth can vary more than other utilities. Most municipalities have
ordinances or standards on utility locations and separate distances to minimize and prevent conflicts.
Excavation Considerations
For most municipalities, a statewide one-call utility location system is in place to locate the presence of existing
utilities. It is extremely important in the case of electrical, gas and high-pressure water lines that contractors exercise
care to avoid cutting these utilities, as the results can be catastrophic, even fatal. Although not catastrophic, the
cutting of sanitary and storm sewers can cause maintenance and flooding concerns.
Construction organizations typically recommend that a utility survey be conducted prior to construction
activities. The utility survey is conducted to accurately locate all existing (active and abandoned) utilities within
the area of interest that could conflict with the planned construction. The Engineer, using records and drawings
from various utility owners as a starting point, may conduct the survey. It is advisable to use specialty
underground survey firms to confirm the locations and characteristics of the utilities shown on the drawings. It
is especially important to search for abandoned utilities and note their locations and characteristics.(1)
Once construction begins, the type of equipment that is utilized can have an impact on the potential for
utility damage. The use of traditional excavation equipment, such as backhoes or excavators, is very
common for the installation of utilities. The use of traditional equipment can provide the best opportunity
to locate an existing utility that has not been previously identified. This type of equipment can damage
all pipe types if contacted. However, it also offers the operator the opportunity to periodically inspect
the excavation for signs of existing utilities. The location of an existing utility location can often be
identified before it is impacted by excavation equipment.
Trenching equipment is common for a small diameter pipe or cable installation and can be designed specifically for rock
installations. This equipment is operated continuously with little opportunity for inspection of the excavation for other
utilities. Lastly, the equipment operates at a very high decibel level further impeding the operator’s ability to determine if
an existing utility has been encountered. As a result, the use of trenching equipment can impact all pipe types with little to
no awareness by the operator.
Directional boring or drilling is being used more frequently for the installation of utilities. It is a steerable trenchless method
of installing utilities along a prescribed subsurface bore path by using a surface launched drilling rig, with minimal impact
on the surrounding area. Directional boring is used when excavating or trenching is not practical. The technique has been
used extensively in urban areas as it eliminates the need for open cut trenches. To be successful, the operator must have
thorough knowledge of existing utilities so that he can plan ole alignment and avoid damaging those utilities. In the case of
small diameter utility installation, it is difficult to identify the nature and type of underground obstructions. Furthermore,
certain directional equipment is designed to bore through rock and can operate at pressures of up to 30,000 psi. In this
instance, an underground utility, regardless of material of construction, would be negatively impacted. Since uncontrolled
drillings can lead to such damages, various agencies/government authorities owning the urban 'right-of-way' or the utilities
that have authority over underground installations have formed their own rules for safe work execution when using this
technology.
The other installation procedure that can have an impact to an existing utility are those that entail “driving” an object from
the surface. This typically applies to fencepost or guard rail. In this application, the operator needs to be fully aware of
subsurface utilities. The equipment involved with this installation can operate with enough force to damage an
underground utility regardless of pipe type. As a result, equipment manufacturers of this type recommend that all
underground utilities be properly located so as to avoid potential damage to those utilities.
Installation Considerations
The preferable method of thermoplastic pipe storm sewer installation is to prepare a suitable trench or embankment
installation in accordance with recommended depths, widths, soil types and compaction levels. When working adjacent to
existing utilities, appropriate pipe spacing needs to be maintained to ensure the stability of the trench and the overall long
term performance of the thermoplastic pipe storm sewer. The required pipe spacing will depend on pipe diameter, pipe
depth and backfill type.
In some cases, the proximity of an existing utility prevents the use of traditional backfill materials due to lack of adequate
clearance for compaction to occur. In this case, controlled low strength material (CLSM) or flowable fill is an appropriate
alternative. This is a low strength (120 psi) material that when installed, does not require any compactive effort. Due to its
consistency, the material is self forming and self compacting. However, when it dries, it forms an encasement type backfill
material that can be excavated if necessary. The use of flowable fill still requires a certain minimum distance between
utilities to provide the necessary structural support. As with traditional backfill, this will depend on pipe diameter and pipe
depth.
In situations in which a utility crosses too closely or comes in contact with a HDPE or PP storm sewer, CLSM may not be
sufficient to provide the necessary structural support. For this condition, concrete encasement is recommended.
Slope/Soil Considerations
Effects of adjacent excavation and response of pipe materials are issues of soil stability until the excavation encroaches
on the pipe embedment zone. The long term performance characteristics of any pipe material can be compromised in
cases where slope failure occurs. If the pipe is within the failure plane, it will most likely be impacted as a result of the
slope failure. The potential for this situation increases as the depth of the installation increases. If an installation was deep
enough to cause concerns regarding slope stability and possible failure, it is likely that OSHA regulations would require
shoring, trench box or another protective system. For trench installation, Federal regulations mandate an adequate
protective system be required at depths greater than five feet (2) and some state safety codes reduce this limit to four feet.
The use of a protective system would limit the impact of an adjacent installation on an existing utility regardless of pipe
material.
For installations that occur beneath existing HDPE or PP pipe, exposure of pipe or loss of material must be avoided.
Typically, if a minimum of 12 inches of stable, compacted material is maintained between the existing thermoplastic pipe
and the proposed utility, the thermoplastic pipe will have adequate structural support. There are several options available
for installations of this type. In order to address the specific site conditions, please contact and ADS representative for
additional information on this type of installation.
When dealing with slope/soil stability while excavating next to an existing utility, the most extreme circumstance that can
occur is slope failure resulting in exposure of the existing pipe. The complete exposure of the sidewall of a buried HDPE
or PP pipe should and can be avoided with proper installation procedures, utility corridors, shoring etc. Long term
exposure of this type should be avoided for any material and is not specific to thermoplastics. The exposed condition
should be corrected and the pipe returned to a backfilled condition as soon as possible. To avoid long term performance
issues, the exposed pipe should be backfilled to conditions equal to or better than the original installation. To avoid
uncertainty, an agency may prescribe CLSM material be used when existing pipe is exposed.
Methods of Identifying Utilities

Certain construction practices can be helpful in preventing damage by subsequent utility installation. These include but
are not limited to:
Backfill Materials
Using a select backfill can alert the operator of the possibility of a utility before it is impacted. A stone or sand backfill in
areas where native soils are clayey or silty could be used in this case. It should be noted that the use of such material is
strictly for utility location and not for structural purposes and can apply to all pipe material types.
Locator Tape
Locator tape is an inexpensive way to notify an operator of a utility. Placing locator tape above the pipe trench would
notify the operator of a utility conflict prior to damaging the pipe. Figure 1 provides two examples of the application of
locator tape for a utility installation.
Figure 1
Use of Locator Tape with Underground Utilities
Ordinances
The most effective way of preventing utility cuts is to enforce ordinances for the phasing and spacing of utility locations as
discussed previously. Furthermore, the ordinances need to be worded such that individual utility contractors are
responsible for damages they create. Some agencies have enforced their ordinances by requiring utility contractors to
repair utility cuts within a specified time frame after the damage is identified or the agency will do the repair and charge
the utility contractor. It may also be necessary to prescribe standards for re-establishing backfill conditions if the pipe
envelope of an existing utility is compromised.
Repair of Utility Cuts for HDPE & PP Pipe
One of the many benefits of HDPE and PP pipe is the ability to easily repair damage. The type of repair will depend on the
nature and extent of the damage. Repair will typically fall into one of three categories which are discussed further below.
More specific information on repair methods can be found in Technical Note 5.03 HDPE Pipe Repair Options, Technical
Note 5.12 HP STORM Drainage Pipe Repair Options, Technical Note 5.13 SaniTite HP Repair Options.
Split Couplers
For relatively small utility cuts (3-4” long cuts perpendicular to the centerline of the pipe), repairs can be made by
uncovering the damaged section and placing a split coupler over it. The split coupler can then be backfilled in place
covering the damaged portion of pipe. This can be enhanced by wrapping the repair with fabric. Another option in lieu of a
split coupler is a Mar-Mac® Polyseal coupler. A Mar-Mac coupler should be used when repairing triple wall pipe and a soil-
tight joint is allowed by project specifications.
Pipe Sections
For larger utility cuts (greater than 4” along the pipe axis) the damaged section can be uncovered and removed to a point
where there is no longer any damage. The cuts should be made in the valleys of the corrugations (Figure 2) and a new
section of pipe cut to length and joined to the existing pipe with split couplers (Figure 3). The split coupler can be
enhanced by wrapping the repair with fabric. Another option in lieu of a split coupler with fabric is the use of a Mar-Mac
Polyseal coupler. A Mar-Mac coupler should be used when repairing triple wall pipe and a soil-tight joint is allowed by
project specifications.
Figure 2 Figure 3
Pipe Cut Location Split Band Installation
Internal Seals
For small utility cuts (3-4” long holes), it is often economical to seal the pipe internally. Several commercially available
internal seals are available. Internal seals use polyisoprene rubber membranes that are secured to the inside of the pipe
with expanding stainless steel bands. Generally, internal seals are only appropriate for larger diameter (24” or greater)
pipes since internal access is necessary. Additional information can be found in the repair method technical notes for the
respective ADS pipe product.
Conclusions
All pipe types are susceptible to damage from the installation of adjacent utilities. Damage can be prevented
during the design phase with proper utility location and phasing or during the construction phase with proper
utility location. If utility location is not exact, further damage can be minimized through the selection of
installation equipment and the use of trench boxes or shoring. Furthermore, in the event that HDPE or PP pipe
is physically damaged during the construction process, repair is relatively simple and inexpensive.
Footnotes
1
Chapter 4 – Planning, Horizontal Directional Drilling, Good Practices and Guidelines, Horizontal Directional Drilling
Consortium, 2004
2
29 CFR 1926.652(a).
Technical Note
TN 5.10 Integral Bell Transition for HDPE Pipe
ADS offers a variety of joints to the market place. Corrugated HDPE pipe can be cut at any corrugation allowing a great
degree of flexibility in making field cuts. Plain end pipe can be connected using split couplers, cleated bell-bell couplers,
or bell end couplers and gaskets. The standard pipe joint ADS offers is the Integral Bell (IB) joint which requires field cuts
when transitioning to plain end pipe, fittings or other materials.
ADS N-12® IB pipe has an integral bell which maintains a constant pipe outside diameter (OD). This constant OD
eliminates the need for bell holes and makes it easier to maintain line and grade during installation. The gasketed bell and
spigot design, with an elastomeric rubber gasket meeting ASTM F477, is intended for soil-tight (ST) or watertight (WT),
gravity-flow storm sewer applications, as defined in ASTM F 2306 and ASTM D 3212..
Connections for Integral Bell Pipe

With the variety of couplers available, connecting to existing pipe runs or to fabricated fittings may necessitate a transition
to other ADS joints. ADS fittings come as either plain end or bell end; which makes it necessary to transition from an IB
joint to either a plain end connection or a bell end connection. This technical note will give guidance in selecting the
proper method of making these connections.
Integral Bell Pipe to Plain End Pipe (12” – 60”) (Plain End Pipe/Fitting Connections)
Remove the bell or spigot end of the pipe. The spigot end on 12”-60” pipe will have mini or reduced-size corrugations; for
smaller diameter pipe, 4”-10”, there will be no mini corrugations to remove. Utilize a split coupler or cleated bell-bell
coupler (snap coupler) to make the connection. Refer to Figure 1 for common configurations. This connection is
considered soil-tight in most embedment soil conditions.
Figure 1
Integral Bell Pipe to Plain End Pipe Connection
REMOVE
REMOVE SPIGOT INLINE BELL
12"-60" IB PIPE
12"-60" PLAIN 12"-60" IB PIPE 12"-60" PLAIN

END PIPE END PIPE
SNAP OR CLEATED
BELL-BELL COUPLER
12"-60" PLAIN 12"-60" PLAIN 12"-60" PLAIN 12"-60" PLAIN

END PIPE SPLIT END PIPE
END PIPE END PIPE
COUPLER
Integral Bell Pipe to a Welded Bell (Welded Bell End Pipe/Fitting Connections)
To connect pipe or fittings, which already have a welded bell, remove the mini corrugations from the spigot end of pipe or
the IB bell from the bell end. The welded bell can be identified easily compared to the integral bell, because a weld seam
will be present where the bell and corrugations meet. In addition to the weld seam, the OD of the welded bell is slightly
larger than the OD of the adjacent corrugations. Refer to the pictures in Figure 2. Once the mini corrugations or IB bell
have been removed, install a valley gasket (12”-36”) or saddle gasket (42”-60”) provided by ADS. Valley gaskets are to
be placed in the valley behind the first corrugation crown. Saddle gaskets are placed on the crown of the first corrugation.
Lettering printed on the gasket will face the joining bell. Lube gasket and the inside of the welded bell, be sure to lube the
bells leading edge, and insert the spigot into the welded bell. This connection is considered soil-tight or watertight based
on the type of gasket used. Consult an ADS representative to ensure the correct gasket is ordered to meet connection
performance requirements.
Figure 2
Welded Bell Connection
Full Size Corrugations
Welded Bell Valley Gasket
Full Size Corrugation Saddle Gasket
INSTALL VALLEY/SADDLE
REMOVE SPIGOT W/ WELDED BELL GASKET ON CUT END
WELDED BELL
MINI CORRUGATIONS
VALLEY GASKET SADDLE GASKET

Integral Bell Pipe to Bell-Bell Coupler Connection
Some field modification will require the use of a bell-bell coupler in conjunction with a valley or saddle gasket. This field
joint configuration follows very similarly to that described above for welded bell pipe/fitting connections. Remove the inline
bell, spigot and/or the appropriate number of corrugations needed to make the connection and install a valley gasket (12”-
36”) or saddle gasket (42”-60”) provided by ADS. Valley gaskets are to be placed in the valley behind the first corrugation
crown. Saddle gaskets are placed on the crown of the first corrugation. Lettering printed on the gasket will face the joining
bell. The joint will now consist of two pipes/fittings which each have a valley or saddle gasket installed as shown in Figure
3. Lubricate the interior and leading edge of a bell-bell coupler and the valley/saddle gaskets. Connect the pipes by
inserting the valley/saddle gasket end of the pipes into the bell-bell coupler. This connection is considered soil-tight or
watertight based on the type of gasket used. Consult an ADS representative to ensure the correct bell-bell coupler with
accompanying gasket is ordered to meet connection performance requirements. If a non-gasketed connection is allowed,
a split coupler or cleated bell-bell coupler (snap coupler) can be used in place of the bell-bell coupler for a soil-tight joint.
Figure 3
Bell-Bell Coupler Connection
REMOVE BELL-BELL
INLINE BELL COUPLER
12"-36" VALLEY GASKET 12"-60" 12"-36" VALLEY GASKET 12"-36" VALLEY GASKET
42"-60" SADDLE GASKET IB PIPE 42"-60" SADDLE GASKET 42"-60" SADDLE GASKET
Vent Tube Sealing

The manufacturing process of corrugated plastic pipe requires the release of hot air from inside the corrugations in
order to properly form the corrugations. This hot air is allowed to escape from the corrugations during the extrusion
process via vent tubes that run the length of the pipe. Vent tubes become exposed when the pipe is cut in the field
to install a fitting, connect to a manhole, or otherwise adjust the length of a pipe run. Exposed vent tubes may result
in a leak path, and therefore is recommended that they be sealed. It is important that these vent tubes be sealed
whenever the pipe is cut in the field. Please see Technical Note 5.16: Methods for Sealing Vent Tubes for
instructions on sealing the vent tubes.
Technical Note
TN 5.11 Sliplining Extended Lengths with HDPE Pipe
ADS offers a variety of joints to the marketplace. HP pipe products are manufactured using polypropylene resin and is
available in 12” through 60” with exterior corrugations (dual wall), while 30” through 60” may also be available with an
exterior shell (triple wall). The HP products are also available for storm and sanitary sewer markets. Additional
information regarding each of the products available from ADS can be found in Technical Note 1.05: Pipe Joints and
Gaskets. While HP pipe can be cut in the field, the connection method must be based on the allowable joint performance
for the project.
ADS HP pipe products have an integral bell which maintains a constant pipe outside diameter (OD). This constant OD
eliminates the need for bell holes and makes it easier to maintain line and grade during installation. The bell and spigot
design for HP products, with an elastomeric rubber gasket meeting ASTM F477, meets or exceeds the watertight testing
requirements outlined in ASTM D 3212.
Connections for HP Pipe

With the variety of couplers available, connecting to an existing pipe run or a fabricated fitting may necessitate a transition
to other ADS joints. ADS fittings come standard with a plain end, welded bell end or IB bell or spigot end; the end
treatment will be based on fitting diameter and available configurations are available in the ADS Fittings Manual. Standard
large diameter or custom fittings utilizing IB joints require no additional field work for the connection.
Storm Drainage Only as specifications permit
Remove the bell or spigot end of the pipe. The spigot end on 12”-60” pipe will have mini or reduced-size corrugations. To
achieve a soil-tight joint, a split band coupler may be utilized to connect 12” - 60” dual wall pipe and a Mar-Mac® coupler
may be utilized to connect 12” - 60” dual or triple wall (where applicable) pipe. Refer to Figure 1 for common
configurations.
Figure 1
HP Integral Bell Pipe to Plain End Pipe Connection
REMOVE REMOVE
REMOVE SPIGOT INLINE BELL REMOVE SPIGOT INLINE BELL
12"-60" 30"-60"
HP PIPE HP PIPE
30"-60" HP PIPE
12"-60" HP PIPE

END PIPE SPLIT COUPLER OR END PIPE MAR-MAC
END PIPE END PIPE
MAR-MAC WRAP WRAP
Integral Bell Pipe to a Welded Bell (12” – 24”) (Welded Bell End Pipe/Fitting Connections)
To connect dual wall pipe or dual wall fittings that already have a welded bell, remove the mini corrugations from the
spigot end or the integral bell from the pipe. The welded bell can be identified easily compared to the integral bell,
because a weld seam will be present where the bell and corrugations meet. In addition to the weld seam, the OD of the
welded bell is slightly larger than the OD of the adjacent corrugations. Refer to the pictures in Figure 2. Once the mini
corrugations or integral bell has been removed, install a valley gasket (12”-24”) provided by ADS. Valley gaskets are to
be placed in the valley behind the first corrugation crown. Lettering printed on the gasket will face the joining bell. Lube
gasket and the inside of the welded bell, being sure to lube the bell’s leading edge, and insert the spigot into the welded
bell. This connection is considered watertight in accordance with ASTM D3212 when using an ADS watertight valley
gasket. Consult an ADS representative to ensure the correct gasket is ordered to meet connection performance
requirements. For watertight connections for 30” – 60” triple wall pipe, please contact an ADS representative for currently
available options.
Figure 2
INSTALL VALLEY
WELDED BELL
MINI CORRUGATIONS
VALLEY GASKET
Integral Bell Pipe to Bell-Bell Coupler Connection (12” – 24”)
Some field modifications for 12” through 24” pipe will require the use of a bell-bell coupler in conjunction with a valley
gasket. This field joint configuration follows very similarly to that described above for welded bell pipe/fitting connections.
Remove the inline bell, spigot and/or the appropriate number of corrugations needed to make the connection and install a
valley gasket (12”-24”) provided by ADS. Valley gaskets are to be placed in the valley behind the first corrugation crown.
Lettering printed on the gasket will face the joining bell. The joint will now consist of two pipes/fittings which each have a
valley gasket installed, as shown in Figure 3. Lubricate the interior leading edge of a bell-bell coupler and the valley
gaskets. Connect the pipes by inserting the valley gasket end of the pipes into the bell-bell coupler. This connection is
considered watertight in accordance with ASTM D3212, provided an ADS watertight valley gasket used. Consult an ADS
representative to ensure the correct bell-bell coupler with accompanying gasket is ordered to meet connection
performance requirements. For watertight connections for 30” – 60” triple wall pipe, please contact an ADS representative
for currently available options.
Figure 3
REMOVE BELL-BELL
INLINE BELL COUPLER
Vent Tube Sealing

The manufacturing process of corrugated plastic pipe requires the release of hot air from inside the
corrugations in order to properly form the corrugations. This hot air is allowed to escape from the
corrugations during the extrusion process via vent tubes that run the length of the pipe. Vent tubes become
exposed when the pipe is cut in the field to install a fitting, connect to a manhole, or otherwise adjust the
length of a pipe run. Exposed vent tubes may result in a leak path, and therefore is recommended that they
be sealed. It is important that these vent tubes, when present, be sealed whenever the pipe is cut in the
field. Please see Technical Note 5.16: Methods for Sealing Vent Tubes for instructions on sealing the vent
tube.
Technical Note
TN 5.12 HP Storm Drainage Pipe Repair Options
Introduction
ADS HP STORM for storm drainage is made of polypropylene (PP) resin making the pipe lightweight and very easy to
handle, The attributes that make the pipe easy to use can also make it easy to abuse, resulting in damaged pipe or joints.
This technical note discusses some of the products available that can be used to repair damaged PP pipe or joints in the
field.
Repair Options
One of the primary considerations in selecting a repair method is the degree of joint performance required. Watertight
repairs are generally used on pipe with watertight joints, and soil-tight repairs on pipe with soil-tight joints. This helps
keep costs in line and prevents the repair from being the weak area of the pipe system.
individually.

Mar Mac Polyseal Pipe Coupler, 12- through 60-inch (300 - 1500 mm), consists of a mastic adhesive base layer, a
cross-laminated polyethylene middle layer with a spun-bonded geotextile polypropylene cloth outer layer. The coupler
incorporates self-adhering rubberized bonding mastic and securing bands to insure a positive seal around the pipe. If
the pipe itself is damaged, the damaged area will need to be removed and a new pipe section spliced in before
installing a coupler around both ends. Polyseal Pipe Couplers are reasonably priced, especially when considering the
quality of the finished repair, and are typically used with soil-tight smooth interior thermoplastic pipe products. Note:
Mar-Mac bands shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.
Split band couplers, 12- through 60-inch (300 – 1500 mm), will
provide a soil-tight repair with or without gaskets. Split band couplers
engage the exterior corrugations and therefore can only be used for
corrugated exterior pipe. This repair method should only be used if
the damaged area is in a non-trafficked green area, is cosmetic in
nature, confined to a single corrugation, and is not defined as
structural damage. The coupler shall be centered over the damaged
area of pipe and tightened down with the nylon straps. If the
damaged area is large or significant, the damaged area is to be cut
out, and replaced with a new section of pipe. The replacement
section is to be ‘spliced’ in place using split band couplers. They are
a convenient, low-cost repair alternative, and are typically used to
repair soil-tight thermoplastic pipe products with a corrugated
exterior.
Concrete collars also provide a soil-tight repair,
dependent on the integrity of the installation. Installing a
concrete collar involves building a form around the area to
be repaired and encasing it in concrete. A geotextile is
usually wrapped around the repair area prior to pouring
the collar to keep the concrete from seeping into the pipe.
Typically, approximately 6” (0.15m) is excavated beneath
the pipe to allow for proper application of the geotextile
and concrete encasement. If the pipe itself is damaged,
the damaged area shall be removed and a replacement
pipe section spliced in prior to pouring the collar. In order
to provide a greater level of joint performance, a gasket
can be installed on the pipe in the concrete encasement.
Concrete collars are typically more costly and time
consuming than snap couplers or split band couplers but
are reasonable repair options for soil-tight smooth interior
thermoplastic pipe products. .
Slip Couplings 12- through 30-inch (300 – 750 mm),

provides a watertight repair that will meet most pressure
testing requirements, when installed correctly. The slip
coupling uses PVC bells with gaskets. The gaskets are
placed in the valleys on either side of the section to be
repaired and slip couplings are then slid over the gaskets.
Due to the exterior gasket, the slip coupling can only be
used on pipe with a corrugated exterior. PVC slip
couplings are most commonly used with watertight smooth
interior, corrugated exterior thermoplastic pipe products.
Large Diameter Repair Coupler 12- through 60-inch (300

– 1500 mm) are ideal for repairs and alterations of large
diameter pipe. Repair couplers similar to those provided LARGE DIAMETER
by Mission Rubber Company LLC, Fernco® or equal COUPLER (TYP)
may be used on HP Storm pipe. The couplers are used

by removing the damaged section of pipe, replacing it
with a new section and then sliding the coupler back
around the joint, similar to the slip coupling above. The
couplers stainless steel bands are then tightened to the
manufactures recommendations. These rubber
couplings are capable of meeting watertight field test
requirements when installed per manufacturer’s
recommendations.
Internal Repairs
NPC Internal Joint Seal, 18- through 60-inch (450 – 1500 mm), consists of an EPDM rubber seal and stainless steel bands.
The rubber seal is inserted into the pipe and positioned over the joint. A torque wrench is used to expand the bands against
the inner wall of the pipe. The Internal Joint Seal is designed to seal joints – not repair damaged pipe sections. The
damaged area of the pipe must be removed and a replacement section spliced in if necessary in order to use the Internal
Joint Seal. This system may provide a watertight joint when installed as recommended.
The manufacture should be contacted to verify the product meets the specific application requirements including test
Internal mechanical seals will slightly restrict the inside diameter of the pipe. This should be considered when assessing
the risk of debris obstruction.
Link Pipe Grouting SleeveTM, 12- through 60-inch (100 – 1500 mm), is a stainless steel grouting sleeve that is installed
with an inflatable plug. The sleeve may be used to seal a joint or repair short sections of damaged pipe. The manufacture
specified.
types of chemical grouts available and the manufacturer should be contacted to review the specific situation and any joint

Note: Thermoplastic pipe products are solely intended for the conveyance of fluids. Access into this product for
Technical Note
TN 5.14 Culvert Sliplining with HP Pipe
Introduction
It may be at times necessary, in an aging infrastructure, to rehabilitate drainage and sanitary lines by lining them with a
new pipe. An abrasive or corrosive environment can cause premature deterioration of some types of pipe. In lieu of a total
replacement, sliplining the existing pipe with a durable material may be an economical method to significantly extend the
service life. N-12® HP pipe made with polypropylene (PP), is often the product of choice to slipline deteriorated pipes
because of its resistance to aggressive environments. For installations where HP STORM or SaniTite HP will be inserted
into a newly placed casing pipe, refer to Technical Note 5.18 Lining of Casings with SaniTite HP for relevant information.
Access to the Host Pipe

The “host” pipe may be open on both ends, as in a culvert application, or it may be
accessible only through a manhole opening, as in a storm or sanitary sewer
applications. An HP product may only be used in applications in which the pipe is
installed in such a way that the pipe is not bent during installation.
Diameter of the Host Pipe

The greater of either the outside diameter of the liner pipe or coupler should be
compared to the inside diameter of the host pipe. This may be accomplished by
attempting to pull a short section (~2 feet in length) through the host pipe as a trial
run. The host pipe should be free from sediment and debris so as to not interfere
with the installation of the liner pipe. Sliplining installations may be subject to thermal
length changes and should be designed with a minimum of 10% clearance between
the pipe’s outside diameter and the host pipe’s inside diameter. It is important to
have adequate clearance between the host pipe and the carrier pipe for installation
and eventual grouting measures. The maximum outside diameters of HP pipe
products are shown in Table 1.
Table 1
Dimensions of HP Pipe Products
Inside Diam. Diam.* Inside Diam. Diam.*
12 (300) 14.6 (371) 36 (900) 41.4 (1052)
15 (375) 17.8 (452) 42 (1050) 47.5 (1206)
18 (450) 21.4 (544) 48 (1200) 53.9 (1369)
24 (600) 28.2 (716) 60 (1500) 66.6 (1692)
30 (750) 35.7 (907)
* Contact ADS for additional guidance if anticipated OD values provided may not provide adequate clearance.
Length of Installation
HP pipe joints are not designed to withstand large pulling forces. It is also important not to damage pipe ends while
pushing the liner pipe in through the host pipe. The method of installation will affect, in large part, the maximum length
that can be slip lined without damaging the pipe. Using skids, especially in a corrugated host pipe, will help minimize
resistance between the two surfaces and allow for longer installations. A push-and-pull technique keeps stress on the
joints to a minimum. Maximum pushing forces listed in Table 2 shall be adhered to.
Table 2
Maximum Push Force on HP Products
Nominal Inside Max Force Nominal Max Force
Diam. Pounds Inside Diam. Pounds
in (mm) (kN) in (mm) (kN)
12 (300) 1500 (6.7) 36 (900) 9000 (40.0)
15 (375) 2000 (8.9) 42 (1050) 11000 (48.9)
18 (450) 3000 (13.3) 48 (1200) 12000 (53.4)
24 (600) 4500 (20.0) 60 (1500) 16000 (71.2)
30 (750) 4500 (20.0)
Hydraulic Considerations
In situations where one is lining an existing pipe, careful evaluation of the current and desired hydraulics should be
accomplished. Original design calculations may be referenced; however careful attention should be given to changes in
land use which would change the calculated runoff tributary to the culvert. Once a discharge has been determined, the
required size of the pipe may be established. If original design calculations are not available, the project engineer should
complete a thorough drainage study. A culvert size can be selected based on watershed attributes, design storm,
allowable headwater, culvert entrance conditions and any other related design factors.
In many cases, where culverts are too deep to make replacement practical, slightly reduced hydraulics may be an
acceptable tradeoff to an expensive replacement. Typically, gravity flow systems are designed using Manning’s Equation
with an ‘n’ value of 0.012 for HP products. It should be noted that culverts in need of relining do not have Manning’s ‘n’
values typical of original design values. Relining with smooth interior HP pipe may actually increase the capacity of the
deteriorated culvert.
Failing culverts in need of relining may eventually deteriorate into a conduit with no structural integrity at all. For this
reason, it is important to reline with a pipe product capable of handling the loads based on expected loading conditions
and assuming no load reduction from the host pipe. Loading for highway and pavement tunnels shall be based upon a
continuous load carrying structure for the height of cover under HS-25 loading. Voids between the surrounding soil and
the host pipe shall be pressure grouted to ensure structural integrity and resistance to thermal effects. For more
information for determining the structural capacity of HP pipe, refer to the Structures section of the Drainage Handbook.
Installation of HP Storm in Host Pipe

Before the pipe is inserted into an existing culvert for relining, it is critical to inspect the existing culvert for any objects or
obstructions, which may be extending into the barrel of the existing culvert to be relined. Failure to do this may result in a
damaged liner pipe.
In applications where the host pipe or culvert is deteriorated, flat boards or skids shall be affixed to the culvert or the lining
pipe to allow the lining pipe a suitable base to slide on. Skids can be as simple as 2x4’s and it is common to place these
skids in the lower haunch areas approximately 90 degrees apart, as shown in Figure 1. Typically 2 to 4 skids are used
around the pipe. It is important that the skids be notched at the strap location in order to provide a smooth sliding surface.
Figure 1
Attachment of Skids to HP Pipe
VOID SPACE TO BE FILLED WITH
APPROPRIATE GROUT MATERIAL
HOST PIPE
SKID STRAPPING
LINING PIPE
SKIDS PROVIDE NOTCH FOR

STRAPPING
90° SKIDS 90°
SKIDS AFFIXED TO HOST PIPE. SKIDS AFFIXED TO LINING PIPE.
Insertion Forces
Once the culvert or casing is clear, the new material may be pushed
through. It is important to not exceed the maximum insertion force that
can be applied to the lining or carrier pipe, as provided in Table 2. This
will prevent the pipe joints from over insertion. For lengths of pipe that
surpass these recommend forces, see the next section on “Sanitary
Sewer Casings” or contact a local representative.
In cases where the new culvert will be two or more nominal diameters
smaller than the existing culvert, it is possible to construct mechanisms
to transport the new culvert along the existing culvert without sliding
across the invert. Although ideal for construction, many times there is
insufficient room to allow for this technique.
Grouting Procedures
When relining a culvert with HP pipe, it is recommended to fill the void space between the existing culvert and the lining
pipe with grout material. The grout material is often a controlled low strength material (CLSM), also referred to as
controlled density fill, CDF, or flowable fill. CLSM will help provide uniform support on the sides of the pipe, maintain a
consistent soil density, provide lateral support for the pipe, and eliminate point loads. For more information on flowable fill
mix, refer to Technical Note 5.02: Flowable Fill Backfill for Thermoplastic Pipe.
It is common for aging metal culverts to have

deteriorated or completely destroyed inverts. This allows
the fluid carried through the culvert to create void space
under the pipe, creating an undesired condition. The
grout material will help plug and fill any fractures or
holes in the existing culvert along with structurally
stabilizing the system from thermal effects, hydrostatic
pressure, point loads, and function as a water barrier.
To ensure proper alignment and prevent joint

separation, the pipe should be anchored against flotation
when placing the grout material. Grouting in layers thin
enough, such that they don’t float the pipe, helps
tremendously
Each layer should be allowed to set up between pours. Contractors may have other techniques that will also prevent
flotation such as the use of deadweight inside the pipe. Regardless of the method used, it is also important to avoid
applying point loads to the pipe. For more information on flotation and anchoring methods, refer to Technical Note 5.05:
Pipe Flotation.
When HP pipe, or any flexible pipe, is used as a liner, it is very important not to use excessive grout pressure. In most
circumstances, the joint, not the wall strength, will be the limiting factor for establishing a maximum allowable grouting
pressure. Including a factor of safety, the recommended maximum grouting pressure for HP pipe products is 5 psi; this
value may vary based on specific site conditions and specific products used. During the grouting operation, gauges
should be used to monitor the grout pressure exerted on the pipe system. For some applications, hydrostatic head
pressure may increase the expected pressure on the pipe from the grouting. Additional pressure may also result from the
slope and/or diameter of the pipe, elevation changes between the pipe and the gauge, and other conditions that should be
considered during the design. The sum of all pressures that will be exerted on the pipe should not exceed the
recommended maximum pressure for the application.
Technical Note
TN 5.15 Integral Bell Transition for HP Pipe Products
ADS offers a variety of joints to the marketplace. HP pipe products are manufactured using polypropylene resin and is
available in 12” through 60” with exterior corrugations (dual wall), while 30” through 60” may also be available with an
exterior shell (triple wall). The HP products are also available for storm and sanitary sewer markets. Additional
information regarding each of the products available from ADS can be found in Technical Note 1.05: Pipe Joints and
Gaskets. While HP pipe can be cut in the field, the connection method must be based on the allowable joint performance
for the project.
ADS HP pipe products have an integral bell which maintains a constant pipe outside diameter (OD). This constant OD
eliminates the need for bell holes and makes it easier to maintain line and grade during installation. The bell and spigot
design for HP products, with an elastomeric rubber gasket meeting ASTM F477, meets or exceeds the watertight testing
requirements outlined in ASTM D 3212
Connections for HP Pipe

With the variety of couplers available, connecting to an existing pipe run or a fabricated fitting may necessitate a transition
to other ADS joints. ADS fittings come standard with a plain end, welded bell end or IB bell or spigot end; the end
treatment will be based on fitting diameter and available configurations are available in the ADS Fittings Manual. Standard
large diameter or custom fittings utilizing IB joints require no additional field work for the connection.
Storm Drainage Only as specifications permit
Remove the bell or spigot end of the pipe. The spigot end on 12”-60” pipe will have mini or reduced-size corrugations. To
achieve a soil-tight joint, a split band coupler may be utilized to connect 12” - 60” dual wall pipe and a Mar-Mac® coupler
may be utilized to connect 12” - 60” dual or triple wall (where applicable) pipe. Refer to Figure 1 for common
configurations.
Figure 1
HP Integral Bell Pipe to Plain End Pipe Connection
REMOVE REMOVE
REMOVE SPIGOT INLINE BELL REMOVE SPIGOT INLINE BELL
12"-60" 30"-60"
HP PIPE HP PIPE
30"-60" HP PIPE
12"-60" HP PIPE

END PIPE SPLIT COUPLER OR END PIPE MAR-MAC
END PIPE END PIPE
MAR-MAC WRAP WRAP
Integral Bell Pipe to a Welded Bell (12” – 24”) (Welded Bell End Pipe/Fitting Connections)
To connect dual wall pipe or dual wall fittings that already have a welded bell, remove the mini corrugations from the
spigot end or the integral bell from the pipe. The welded bell can be identified easily compared to the integral bell,
because a weld seam will be present where the bell and corrugations meet. In addition to the weld seam, the OD of the
welded bell is slightly larger than the OD of the adjacent corrugations. Refer to the pictures in Figure 2. Once the mini
corrugations or integral bell has been removed, install a valley gasket (12”-24”) provided by ADS. Valley gaskets are to
be placed in the valley behind the first corrugation crown. Lettering printed on the gasket will face the joining bell. Lube
gasket and the inside of the welded bell, being sure to lube the bell’s leading edge, and insert the spigot into the welded
bell. This connection is considered watertight in accordance with ASTM D3212 when using an ADS watertight valley
gasket. Consult an ADS representative to ensure the correct gasket is ordered to meet connection performance
requirements. For watertight connections for 30” – 60” triple wall pipe, please contact an ADS representative for currently
available options.
Figure 2
INSTALL VALLEY
WELDED BELL
MINI CORRUGATIONS
VALLEY GASKET
Integral Bell Pipe to Bell-Bell Coupler Connection (12” – 24”)
Some field modifications for 12” through 24” pipe will require the use of a bell-bell coupler in conjunction with a valley
gasket. This field joint configuration follows very similarly to that described above for welded bell pipe/fitting connections.
Remove the inline bell, spigot and/or the appropriate number of corrugations needed to make the connection and install a
valley gasket (12”-24”) provided by ADS. Valley gaskets are to be placed in the valley behind the first corrugation crown.
Lettering printed on the gasket will face the joining bell. The joint will now consist of two pipes/fittings which each have a
valley gasket installed, as shown in Figure 3. Lubricate the interior leading edge of a bell-bell coupler and the valley
gaskets. Connect the pipes by inserting the valley gasket end of the pipes into the bell-bell coupler. This connection is
considered watertight in accordance with ASTM D3212, provided an ADS watertight valley gasket used. Consult an ADS
representative to ensure the correct bell-bell coupler with accompanying gasket is ordered to meet connection
performance requirements. For watertight connections for 30” – 60” triple wall pipe, please contact an ADS representative
for currently available options.
Figure 3
REMOVE BELL-BELL
INLINE BELL COUPLER
Vent Tube Sealing

The manufacturing process of corrugated plastic pipe requires the release of hot air from inside the
corrugations in order to properly form the corrugations. This hot air is allowed to escape from the
corrugations during the extrusion process via vent tubes that run the length of the pipe. Vent tubes become
exposed when the pipe is cut in the field to install a fitting, connect to a manhole, or otherwise adjust the
length of a pipe run. Exposed vent tubes may result in a leak path, and therefore is recommended that they
be sealed. It is important that these vent tubes, when present, be sealed whenever the pipe is cut in the
field. Please see Technical Note 5.16: Methods for Sealing Vent Tubes for instructions on sealing the vent
tube.
Technical Note
TN 5.16 Methods for Sealing Vent Tubes
Introduction
The manufacturing process of corrugated plastic pipe requires the release of hot air from inside the corrugations in order
to properly form the corrugations. This hot air is allowed to escape from the corrugations during the extrusion process via
vent tubes that run the length of the pipe. Vent tubes become exposed when the pipe is cut in the field to install a fitting,
connect to a manhole, or otherwise adjust the length of a pipe run. Exposed vent tubes may result in a leak path, and
therefore it is recommended that they be sealed. It should be noted that internal cuts or exposed vent tubes are not
structural concerns and the requirement to seal them depends on site conditions and project specifications. A variety of
methods can be used to seal vent tubes. This technical note will discuss two methods, spin welding and chemical
adhesives.
Spin Welding Vent Plugs

Spin welding is a technique that can be used to seal vent tubes. The spin welding method utilizes the heat produced by
friction to create a weld between the pipe and a vent plug.
To create a quality weld, the plug and the pipe must be the same material. Plugs made of either polyethylene or
polypropylene are to be used (see Figure 1). They are designed with a shank that fits into a drill, and they also have
multiple sealing segments to accommodate different vent tube sizes. The vent plugs are sold kits for the different pipe
materials. Table 1 shows the vent plug kits.
Table 1: Vent Plug Kits

Vent Plugs in Kit Minimum Maximum
Pipe
Kit Number Part Vent Tube Vent Tube
Sizes Material Quantity
Number Diameter Diameter
12
1260VPPPK through 1260VPPP Polypropylene 10 3/16-inch 7/8-inch
60-inch
12
1260VPPEK through 1260VPPP Polyethylene 10 3/16-inch 7/8-inch
60-inch
Tools Required Figure 1: Vent Plugs
Tools required for installation are a standard drill and drill bit.
The drill should be set to its highest speed and it must be able Polyethylene Polypropylene
to reach a minimum of 1500rpm. If using a cordless drill, it
should have a fully charged battery. A drill bit will only be
necessary in a case where the vent tube diameter is smaller
than the minimum diameter from Table 1 above. If the vent tube
diameter is too small, it will need to be drilled to the correct size.
Installation Instructions Figure 2: Cutting the Pipe

1. The pipe must be cut directly in the center of the valley
between corrugations (see Figure 2). Failure to do this will
result in a vent hole opening that cannot be welded shut
with the spin welding method (see Figure 3).
Figure 3: Incorrectly Cut Pipe
2. Ensure that the diameter of the vent tube meets the
minimum requirement from Table 1.
3. If the vent tube diameter is large enough, skip to step 5. If

the vent tube diameter is too small (see Figure 4), drill out
Figure 4: Small Vent Tube
the vent tube using a drill bit that corresponds to the
minimum vent tube diameter from Table 1 (see Figure 5).
4. Manually lock a vent plug into the drill chuck so that the
entire shank is held by the chuck (see Figure 6). Do not
lock the plug into the drill under power. Figure 5: Drilling Vent Tube
5. With the power off, position the tip of the plug into the vent
tube, and then start the drill.
6. With the drill at its highest speed, put slight pressure on Figure 6: Chucked Vent Plug
the drill to begin inserting the plug into the vent tube (see
Figure 7).
7. Continue letting the drill spin, and the plug will gradually
push into the vent tube. It should take about 30-seconds
Figure 7: Spin Welding
to complete a weld. Reduce pressure on the drill if the
plug appears to be inserting into the pipe too quickly.
8. When the vent plug appears to have been inserted

enough to completely seal the vent tube, continue
spinning the vent plug to the next larger segment. Stop Figure 8: Holding Drill Flush
the drill when this segment is flush with the pipe (see
Figure 8), and hold the drill in place for no less than 20-
seconds to allow the weld area to cool.
9. After the weld has cooled, squeeze the trigger of the Figure 9: Sheared Shank
drill again. If a quality weld was created, the shank of
the spin plug will shear off (see Figure 9).
10. Release the trigger and manually un-chuck the plug

shank.
Figure 10: Finishing the Weld
11. If necessary, the welded area can be cleaned up with a

sureform tool or similar scraping device (see Figure 10).
12. Visually inspect the weld, and check for looseness.
13. Repeat steps 2 through 12 for each exposed vent tube.
Sealing Vent Tubes with Chemical Adhesives

Another method of sealing vent tubes is by using a chemical adhesive along with polyolefin material. This approach
requires a specially designed 2-part adhesive, applicator gun and polyolefin material in the shape of small discs. This
method can be more cumbersome and expensive than the aforementioned procedure, but may be used when spin
welding is no longer an option, as may be the case with a very large vent tube.
1. Prepare the area to be sealed by first lightly scuffing and removing any small
flakes of plastic with the use of a medium grade sand paper or round file.
2. Using acetone or Isopropyl alcohol, thoroughly clean the area to be bonded of

any dirt, grease, or foreign debris and allow the area to fully dry prior to applying
epoxy.
3. Using an epoxy suitable for PP bonding (3M® Scotch-Weld Acrylic Structural Plastic Adhesive DP-8005 or other approved
adhesive), liberally coat a small area around the hole and thoroughly fill the hole with epoxy. A HDPE or PP disk or chip
should be placed over the hole and “glued” or bonded with the epoxy to serve as the sealing mechanism.
4. Following all application and cure times as provided by the epoxy manufacturer, a second coat of epoxy may be applied
where necessary.
5. Allow to set for 3 hours or as recommended by the epoxy manufacturer before joining to another pipe or disturbing
the area which has just been sealed. Temperature and humidity may effect set time. The long-term integrity of the
seal is dependent on the quality of the materials and the sealing technique.

ADS cannot anticipate all unique situations encountered on specific installations; however, several common
repair methods are addressed in this text. Contact an ADS representative for answers to other unique
conditions or for contact information regarding any companies listed in this technical bulletin.
Technical Note
TN 5.20 Post Installation Testing of HP Storm
Introduction
Storm sewer is often tested after or during installation to ensure a sound installation was accomplished. Types of post
installation field testing include deflection testing and joint testing. Specific testing required for the project will be found in
the project specifications. This technical note is not meant to supersede any project specification, but should be used in
conjunction with the project specification and national testing standards as it relates specifically to HP Storm pipe.
Deflection Testing
An important feature of any flexible pipe is its ability to deflect, or oval, under load without structural distress. Deflection
allows the load to be transferred from the pipe to the surrounding backfill. The result is flexible pipe can withstand very
high loads as a relatively light structure. Flexible pipe – including HP Storm – must deflect in order to mobilize the strength
of the surrounding backfill.
According to current thermoplastic design procedures, deflection is defined as a service limit. The designer, considering
all site conditions, will set this service limit in order to perform a proper design evaluation. Deflection in excess of this
service limit does not necessarily result in strength limits being exceeded, i.e. system failure. For more information on
service and strength limit states, see the Structures section of the Drainage Handbook. HP Storm can be expected to
perform satisfactorily in most applications with 5% or 7.5% deflection and so it is typical of designers to choose a service
limit in this range.
When testing for allowable deflection limits, the minimum inside diameter should be used when establishing mandrel
sizing. The minimum inside diameter accounts for the allowable manufacturing tolerances. Table 1 lists the inside
diameters that result from 5% and 7.5% deflection from the minimum inside diameter. Values listed in Table 1 should be
used for sizing mandrels for deflection testing. Mandrels may be obtained from a variety of commercial suppliers.
Table 1
HP Storm Recommended Mandrel Settings
Pipe Pipe Minimum Inside Inside Diameter
Type Diameter Inside Diameter with with 7.5%
Diameter* 5% Deflection Deflection
12 11.88 11.29 10.99
15 14.85 14.11 13.74
18 17.82 16.93 16.48
Dual Wall
24 23.76 22.57 21.98

30 29.70 28.22 27.47
36 35.64 33.86 32.97
42 41.58 39.50 38.46
48 47.52 45.14 43.96
60 59.40 56.43 54.95
* Value is the larger of ASTM F2881 and AASHTO M330. If designing to a specific standard, please
review allowable minimum diameter
It is important to understand that mandrel testing is a go/no-go test. If any line were to not pass a
mandrel, it is important to ascertain the cause. Obstructions in the line, not associated with deflection,
may influence the test. Visual inspection is recommended in the event of a no-go result.
Joint Testing
Joint testing is an important part of any gravity sewer system, both in testing for infiltration and exfiltration. Infiltration aids
to estimate the amount of sewer water that will be conveyed to, and ultimately treated by, the waste water treatment plant.

OSHA and project specifications. There are two primary national testing standards that may be applied to joint testing HP
Storm: ASTM F1417 Standard Test Method for Installation Acceptance of Plastic Gravity Sewer Lines Using Low-
Pressure Air, and ASTM F3058 Preliminary Field Testing of Thermoplastic Pipe Joints for Gravity Flow (Non-Pressure)
Sewer Lines. When either standard is specified by the project plans, one should review the standards carefully and follow
the testing procedure and safety precautions outlined. The below commentary on the ASTM testing procedures should be
considered a summary and does not replace the testing procedures outlined in their respective specifications.
pressurized and is stable at 4.0-psi, the pressure is decreased to 3.5-psi at which time the line must not lose more than
0.5- or 1.0-psi (whichever is specified by the design engineer) in the specified amount of time. Table 2 below summarizes
the minimum time that must be reached for less than 0.5- or 1.0-psi of pressure drop, depending on the diameter and
length of pipe being tested.
Table 2
Time to Pressure Drop for HP Storm (per ASTM F1417)
Length Time for Time for Length Shown, (min:sec)
Pressure Minimum
Pipe for Longer
Drop Test Time
Diameter Minimum Lengths,
(psi) (min:sec) 100 ft 150 ft 200 ft 250 ft 300 ft 350 ft 400 ft 450 ft
Time, (ft) (sec)
0.5 5:40 1.709 L 5:40 5:40 5:42 7:08 8:33 9:58 11:24 12:50
12 199
1.0 11:20 3.418 L 11:20 11:20 11:24 14:15 17:05 19:56 22:47 25:38
0.5 7:05 2.671 L 7:05 7:05 8:54 11:08 13:21 15:35 17:48 20:02
15 159
1.0 14:10 5.342 L 14:10 14:10 17:48 22:15 26:42 31:09 35:36 40:04
0.5 8:30 3.846 L 8:30 9:37 12:49 16:01 19:14 22:26 25:38 28:51
18 133
1.0 17:00 7.692 L 17:00 19:13 25:38 32:03 38:27 44:52 51:16 57:41
0.5 11:20 6.837 L 11:24 17:57 22:48 28:30 34:11 39:53 45:35 51:17
24 99
1.0 22:40 13.764 L 22:47 34:11 43:34 56:58 68:22 79:46 91:10 102:33
0.5 14:10 10.683 L 17:48 26:43 35:37 44:31 53:25 62:19 71:13 80:07
30 80
1.0 28:20 21.366 L 35:37 53:25 71:13 89:02 106:50 124:38 142:26 160:15
It may not be necessary to hold the test for the entire time period listed above when it is evident that the rate of air loss is zero or less than the allowable
pressure drop and authorized by the approving authority1.
equipment consists of two inflatable bladders, placed on each side of the joint, creating an open center cavity between
them. The bladders are inflated and then the center cavity is pressurized to 3.5 psi. The joint passes the test if the
pressure is held for 5 seconds without dropping more than 1.0-psi. For all practical purposes, this is a go/no-go test. Final
acceptance of the pipeline per this testing method shall be at the discretion of the Design Engineer. One advantage of this
type of test is the ability for the installer to quickly test the joint immediately after installation, allowing for any corrective
measures to be taken early on in the project.
Testing gravity sewer joints via water infiltration or exfiltration is a common practice. For HP Storm, this testing should be
conducted in accordance with ASTM F2487 Standard Practice for Infiltration and Exfiltration Acceptance Testing of
Installed Corrugated High Density Polyethylene Pipelines. These standards entail first observing the ground water
conditions and, if applicable, measuring the infiltration rate of the ground water through the joints. If ground water is not
applicable, then the line is filled with water and the leakage is observed through exfiltration.
Allowable Leakage
The allowable leakage rate for HP Storm is 100 gallons/in-dia/mi-pipe/day for both infiltration and exfiltration when done in
accordance with ASTM F2487.
Conclusion
ADS HP Storm is intended for gravity flow storm sewer applications and may be tested for deflection and joint tightness as
discussed in this technical document. It is important to note that the testing procedures are no different than for other
storm sewer products currently being used in the market. This document does not purport to address the safety concerns
associated with testing HP Storm. Any questions associated with testing HP Storm can be directed to your local
representative.
References
1. ASTM F1417, Standard Test Method for Installation Acceptance of Plastic Gravity Sewer Lines Using Low-
Pressure Air, ASTM, 2005
2. F3058, Preliminary Field Testing of Thermoplastic Pipe Joints for Gravity Flow (non-Pressure) Sewer Lines,
ASTM, 2016.
3. ni-B-6-98, Recommended Practice for Low-Pressure Air Testing of Installed Sewer Pipe, Uni-Bell PVC Pipe
Association, 1998
4. ASTM F2487, Standard Practice for Infiltration and Exfiltration Acceptance Testing of Installed Corrugated High
Density Polyethylene Pipelines, ASTM, 2006
5. ASTM F2881, Standard Specification for 12 to 60 in. (300 to 1500 mm) Polypropylene (PP) Dual Wall Pipe and
Fittings for Non-Pressure Storm Sewer Applications, ASTM, 2011
© 2023 Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc. TN 5.20 July 2023
Technical Note
TN 6.01 Retention/Detention System Maintenance
This document is provided for informational purposes only and is meant only to be a guide. Individuals using this
information should make their own decisions as to suitability of this guideline for their individual projects and adjust
accordingly.
Introduction
A retention/detention system is comprised of a series of pipes and fittings that form an underground storage area, which
retains or detains storm water runoff from a given area. As sediment and debris settle out of the detained stormwater, build
up occurs that requires the system to be regularly inspected and cleaned in order for the system to perform as originally
designed. The following provides the available fittings and guidelines for inspection and maintenance of an HDPE
underground storage system.
System Accessories and Fittings

Concentric Reducers
Concentric Reducers are fittings that transition between two pipes, either in line with one another or at perpendicular
angles. The centerlines of the two pipes are at the same elevation. When a concentric reducer is used to connect the
manifold pipe to the lateral pipes, most debris will be trapped in the manifold pipe.
SIDE VIEW SECTION VIEW SIDE VIEW SECTION VIEW
Eccentric Reducers
Eccentric Reducers are fittings that transition between two pipes, either in line with one another or at perpendicular
angles. The inverts of the two pipes are at the same elevations. When an eccentric reducer is used to connect the
manifold pipe to the lateral pipes, most debris will follow the flow of the storm water into the lateral pipes.
SIDE VIEW SECTION VIEW SIDE VIEW SECTION VIEW

Riser
Each retention/detention system typically has risers strategically placed
for maintenance and inspection of the system. These risers are
typically 24” in diameter or larger and are placed on the manifold
fittings.
Cleanouts
Cleanout ports are usually 4-, 6-, or 8-in diameter pipe and are placed
on the manifold fittings. They are used for entrance of a pipe from a
vacuum truck or a water-jetting device.
RISER CLEANOUT
CROSS-SECTION VIEW CROSS-SECTION VIEW
For a complete listing of available fittings and components please refer
to the ADS Fittings Manual.
Maintenance Overview of a Retention/Detention System

Maintaining a clean and obstruction-free retention/detention system helps to ensure the system performs the intended
function of the primary design. Build up of debris may obstruct flow through the laterals in a retention system or block the
entranceway of the outlet pipe in a detention system. This may result in ineffective operation or complete failure of the
system . Additionally, surrounding areas may potentially run the risk of damage due to flooding or other similar issues.
Inspection/Maintenance Frequency
All retention/detention systems must be cleaned and maintained. Underground systems may be maintained more cost
effectively if these simple guidelines are followed. Inspection should be performed at a minimum of once per year.
Cleaning should be done at the discretion of individuals responsible to maintain proper storage and flow. While
maintenance can generally be performed year round, it should be scheduled during a relatively dry season.
Pre-Inspection
A post-installation inspection should be performed to allow the owner to measure the invert prior to accumulation of
sediment. This survey will allow the monitoring of sediment build-up without requiring access to the retention/detention
system.
The following is the recommended procedure for pre-inspections:

1) Locate the riser section or cleanouts of the retention/detention system. The riser will typically be 24” in diameter or
larger and the cleanouts are usually 4”, 6” or 8” in diameter.
2) Remove the lid of the riser or clean outs.
3) Insert a measuring device into the opening and make note to a point of reference on the stick or string. (This is
done so that sediment build up can be determined in the future without having to enter the system.)
Inspection/Maintenance
A retention/detention system should be inspected at a minimum of one time a year or after major rain events if
necessary.
The following is the recommended procedure to inspect system in service:

1) Locate the riser section of the retention/detention system. The riser will typically be 24” in diameter
or larger.
2) Remove the lid from the riser.
3) Measure the sediment buildup at each riser and cleanout location. Only certified confined space entry
personnel having appropriate equipment should be permitted to enter the retention/detention System.
4) Inspect each manifold, all laterals, and outlet pipes for sediment build up, obstructions, or other
problems. Obstructions should be removed at this time.
5) If measured sediment build up is between 5% - 20% of the pipe diameter, cleaning should be
considered; if sediment build up exceeds 20%, cleaning should be performed at the earliest
opportunity. A thorough cleaning of the system (manifolds and laterals) shall be performed by
either manual methods or by a vacuum truck.
Technical Note
TN 7.01 Rainwater Harvesting with HDPE Pipe Cisterns
Introduction
For the past several years, the use of smooth interior corrugated high density polyethylene (HDPE) pipe has been a viable
alternative for the control of stormwater quality through underground systems. Typically, stormwater has either been
infiltrated through perforated pipe or detained in solid pipe and then discharged at a controlled rate to the local storm
sewer system or tributary. In both situations, the design did not provide for the potential reuse of stormwater. There is a
growing demand for the construction industry to provide for resource reuse. In some situations, the reuse is being driven
by a regulatory requirement. In many cases, the reuse of resources can provide an economic benefit. This is especially
applicable to stormwater in areas where water resources are at a premium. Water reclamation should be considered in
situations where infiltration is not feasible due to site constraints. This document provides information on the installation,
storage capacity and system layouts for rainwater harvesting systems using ADS HDPE pipe cisterns.
HDPE Pipe Cisterns

ADS HDPE N-12 pipe is the building block of our cisterns. The Specifications section of the Drainage Handbook provides
additional information on pipe dimensions and properties. The pipe has a smooth inner wall and a corrugated outer wall.
The smooth inner wall combines superior hydraulics and the ability to resist abrasion and corrosion. The corrugated outer
wall provides the strength necessary to withstand heavy traffic loads with varying cover heights. In addition to pipe, the
ADS cistern uses specially designed manifolds and other fittings to complete the pipe component of the cistern. ADS can
assist with system layout including pipe and necessary components for the cistern.
System Layout
A typical cistern layout includes at least one inlet into the system. This inlet can be on the cistern manifold as shown
below or can be done on a lateral. Further, the inlet can be accomplished via a pre-fabricated stub or with a reducer and
tee fittings in the system corner. Both inlet types are shown below. When designing system inlets, attention should be
given to the hydraulic grade line of the site to limit or prevent conveyance system surcharging.
The outlet of the cistern should be directed to a reinforced concrete manhole. The manhole should be reinforced to
limit the effects of vibration from the pump system. The outlet invert should be the same as the pipe invert elevation
to ensure that the entire system is able to drain. An underdrain should be installed within the stone backfill of the
cistern. The invert of the underdrain should be at the bottom of the stone backfill envelope. The underdrain from
the stone backfill should be directed to the outlet manhole so that the stone backfill can be completely drained.
The outlet manhole serves multiple purposes. In addition to acting as an outlet structure, the manhole also
houses a discharge pump (designed by others) to remove stormwater from the cistern. Installing a pump
within the system piping or pumping directly from piping is not recommended for hydraulic reasons. The
manhole should be located outside the footprint of the thermoplastic liner as shown in the detail below.
The outlet manhole will also include the cistern overflow. It is recommended that an overflow be
incorporated into the system in the event that the cistern is not completely emptied between storm
events. If the cistern is not completely empty and there is no overflow, the potential exists for the entire
system to be surcharged and flooding could occur. The invert of the overflow should be set at the top of
the cistern.
Lastly, the outlet manhole can also include a vent from the system. System venting is recommended to allow adequate
airflow through the cistern and equalize air pressures within the cistern. If not vented, there can be issue with cistern
pressures under some circumstances. In the sample layout shown below, the system includes a 4-inch HDPE vent line
leading from the cistern to the outlet manhole. To prevent backflow into the cistern through the vent, it is recommended
that the vent be located above the crown of the overflow pipe. The use of a vent is recommended for installations in which
the cistern is encased within the thermoplastic liner. For cisterns that are not completely encased within the thermoplastic
liner, the use of a vent is at the engineer’s discretion.
Figure 1
Example Cistern Layout
4" HDPE
VENT
INLET
INLET
OUTLET MANHOLE
WITH DISCHARGE
LIMIT OF PUMP (BY OTHERS)
THERMOPLASTIC LINER
Figure 2
Outlet Manhole Typical Detail
Ø4" HDPE CISTERN VENT,

IF APPLICABLE (INVERT
TO BE ABOVE CROWN
OF OVERFLOW PIPE)
DISCHARGE PIPE
(ØTBD BY OTHERS)
WATERSTOP
GASKET (TYP)
Ø36" HDPE STUB
24" HDPE CISTERN OVERFLOW

(INVERT TO MATCH TOP
6" MIN OF CISTERN OUTLET)
SUMP
BRACE (TYP)
NON-SHRINK
GROUT (TYP)
NON-POTABLE WATER
DISCHARGE PUMP
(DESIGNED BY OTHERS)
Ø5' MANHOLE
Storage Capacity
ADS cisterns maximize storage capacity by using pipe and stone voids together for total system storage. Table 1 lists
storage volume per pipe diameter, stone void volume per pipe diameter and total storage volume for pipe and stone
together.
Table 1
Pipe Storage Capacity
Nominal Average Stone

“X” “S” “C” Pipe Total
Inside Outside Void
Spacing Spacing1 Spacing1 Volume2 Storage
Diameter Diameter Volume3,4,5
in. in. in. in. in. ft3/ft ft3/ft ft3/ft
(mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (mm) (m3/m) (m3/m) (m3/m)
12 14.5 8 11 25.4 0.79 1.1 1.8
(300) (368) (200) (279) (645) (0.07) (0.10) (0.16)
15 18 8 12 28.9 1.2 1.4 2.6
(375) (457) (200) (305) (734) (0.11) (0.13) (0.24)
18 21 9 17 33.9 1.8 1.7 3.5
(450) (533) (230) (434) (862) (0.16) (0.15) (0.32)
24 28 10 13 40.7 3.1 2.6 5.7
(600) (711) (250) (330) (1034) (0.29) (0.24) (0.52)
30 36 18 18 53.1 4.9 3.7 8.6
(750) (914) (450) (457) (1347) (0.46) (0.34) (0.79)
36 42 18 22 63 7.1 4.7 11.8
(900) (1067) (450) (559) (1600) (0.66) (0.43) (1.08)
42 48 18 24 71.9 9.3 5.8 15.1
(1050) (1219) (450) (610) (1826) (0.87) (0.53) (1.38)
48 54 18 25 78.5 12.4 7.0 19.4
(1200) (1372) (450) (1219) (1994) (1.15) (0.64) (1.78)
60 67 18 24 90 19.3 9.7 29.0
(1500) (1702) (450) (1524) (2286) (1.79) (0.89) (2.66)
Notes:
See Figure 3 for typical cross section used in volume calculations
Bedding depth assumed 4” for 12”-24” pipe and 6” for 30”-60” pipe.
1. Based on A-profile pipe.
2. Actual ID values used in calculation.
3. Stone Porosity assumed 40%.
4. Stone height above crown of pipe is not included in void volume calculations.
5. Calculation is based on the average OD of the pipe.
Installation
For a cistern application, ADS N-12 perforated pipe embedded in a Class I crushed stone backfill is recommended. See
Figure 3 for minimum recommended cover heights for standard installations. A maximum of 1 ½” aggregate size is
preferred and the stone should be clean with no fines. The stone backfill provides two critical elements to the cistern
design. First, the stone provides necessary structural support for the system to withstand dead loads and vehicular
loading. Secondly, the stone provides a certain void volume which can be incorporated into the total storage volume that
the cistern can provide. This can help with the reduction of the cistern size and keep the overall footprint to a minimum.
Up to this point, the design is no different than the traditional ADS HDPE pipe infiltration system. The traditional infiltration
system would include the use of a geotextile to separate the stone backfill from the native material. For a cistern, a
thermoplastic liner shall be used in place of the geotextile as shown in Figure 1. The liner will maintain the water tight
integrity of the cistern and hold the stormwater in place before it is reclaimed. Because of the use of a thermoplastic liner,
installation of cisterns below groundwater is not recommended due to potential issues with buoyancy and hydrostatic
head. To prevent issues with groundwater, an underdrain can be placed under the liner so long as gravity discharge is
available. Additional consultation with a geotechnical engineer may be necessary to address groundwater concerns.
Figure 3
Typical Cistern Cross Section
Note: This is a typical cross section only. See Structures, Section 2, or Installation, Section 5, of the
Drainage Handbook for specific installation guidelines.
H AASHTO HDPE PIPE H H

(GRASS AREA) (FLEX PVMT.) (RIGID PVMT.)
UNDISTURBED
THERMOPLASTIC EARTH
LINER (BY OTHERS) X
S
CLASS I MATERIAL
PLACED AND COMPACTED
IN ACCORDANCE WITH
BEDDING (CLASS I MATERIAL
C SUITABLE = 4" MIN. FOR 12" - 24" PIPE
FOUNDATION = 6" MIN. FOR 30" - 60" PIPE
Thermoplastic Liner
ADS does not design, fabricate, install or sell thermoplastic liners. The following product details are based on information
supplied and published by thermoplastic liner manufacturers. Generally speaking, there are two liner materials that are
suitable for this application: polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and linear low density polyethylene (LLDPE). PVC liners are easy to
install making it a low cost alternative. Some PVC liners contain fillers and plasticizers. Under prolonged exposure to
sunlight, these compounds can leach from the liner. With use in a cistern application, exposure from sunlight is not a
concern since the system is located underground. The LLDPE is an inert material that is suitable for the storage of
stormwater and would be acceptable for this application. Medium and high density liners are also available but are not as
flexible as the low density product and are typically higher in cost.
For any liner, puncture resistance needs to be considered. This can be addressed by the placement of non-woven
geotextile on either side of the membrane. The liner seam, if applicable, should be watertight to maintain the integrity of
the system. Pipe “boots” need to be pre or field fabricated for locations where system piping is either entering or exiting
the cistern footprint, i.e. inlet and outlet piping. A detail depicting the liner “boot” is shown as Figure 4. The other factor
that needs to be considered when using a thermoplastic liner is the seasonal high water table. High water tables can
create excessive hydrostatic pressure and potentially damage the liner.
Figure 4
Liner Pipe Connection Detail
CISTERN LIMIT OF
2'
OUTLET THERMOPLASTIC
LINER
CISTERN OUTLET
LINER CONNECTION PIPE
CISTERN MAKE CONNECTION WITH
UNDERDRAIN FIELD REPAIR COUPLER
CISTERN UNDERDRAIN
LINER CONNECTION PIPE
CLASS I MATERIAL
PLACED AND COMPACTED
IN ACCORDANCE WITH
NOTES:
1. CONNECTIONS OF PIPE TO THERMOPLASTIC LINER SHALL

BE MADE AT THE DIRECTION OF LINER MANUFACTURER.
2. CISTERN LINER CONNECTION PIPE SHALL BE CONNECTED

DIRECTLY TO OUTLET STRUCTURE.
3. CISTERN PIPE SHALL BE CONNECTED TO LINER

CONNECTION PIPE WITH FIELD REPAIR COUPLER.
Installation of liners should be in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations. ADS recommends consulting
with the liner manufacturers for final design, installation and cost information regarding the liner component of the cistern
design.
Cistern Design
Due to the similarity of the cistern to an infiltration system, the ADS Retention/Detention Calculator can be used to size
the pipe, fittings and stone component of the cistern. The Calculator can be accessed via the ADS website at www.ads-
pipe.com.
The required bed size is indicated in the excavation section of the Calculator. The required amount of thermoplastic liner
can be calculated from these bed dimensions as follows:
((H * L * 2) + (H * W * 2) + (L * W * 2)) = required amount of liner in square feet
where:
H = height of cistern section

L = length of cistern section
W = width of cistern section
This calculation is based on a design in which the cistern is completely encased within the thermoplastic liner which is at
the engineer’s discretion. In the event that the system is not completely encased and the liner extends below and along
the sides of the cistern, the calculation is as follows:
((H * L * 2) + (H * W * 2) + (L * W)) = required amount of liner in square feet
where:
H = height of cistern section

L = length of cistern section
W = width of cistern section
Technical Assistance
Throughout cistern design, ADS can assist with a variety of technical issues on the use of our HDPE pipe and fittings,
including:
• Product performance information and suggested product usage

• Manifold pipe configuration and design
• Number and spacing of system laterals (based on provided design storage)
• Existing product modifications; custom product fabrication
• Suggestions to maximize cost effectiveness
Please contact an ADS representative for further information.
Note: The use of cisterns is not recommended as a fire suppression source due to impact of weather variations on water
supply and ultimately availability.
The ADS logo, and the Green Stripe are registered trademarks of Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc.
Sanitary Sewer Systems
ADS, Inc. Drainage Handbook Sanitary Sewer Systems ♦ 7-1
7-0 SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS

TABLE OF CONTENTS
7-1 Overview of Sanitary Sewer Systems....................................... 7-2
7-2 Sanitary Sewer Projects ............................................................. 7-2
Preliminary Investigation ............................................................... 7-2
Design Considerations .................................................................. 7-2
Construction................................................................................... 7-3
Operation ....................................................................................... 7-3
7-3 ADS SaniTite® HP Pipe................................................................ 7-3
Pipe Design ................................................................................... 7-4
Bell & Spigot Joint.......................................................................... 7-4
Fittings ........................................................................................... 7-4
Structural Design ........................................................................... 7-5
Hydraulic Characteristics ............................................................... 7-5
Durability Characteristics ............................................................... 7-5
7-4 Installation Considerations ........................................................ 7-5
Manhole and Structure Connections............................................. 7-6
Drop Manholes .............................................................................. 7-6
Service Connections and Laterals ................................................ 7-7
Horizontal Curves .......................................................................... 7-8
Casings .......................................................................................... 7-8
Thrust Restraint ............................................................................. 7-8
Groundwater .................................................................................. 7-9
Post-Installation Testing ................................................................ 7-9
7-5 References ................................................................................. 7-10
7-6 Additional Technical Resources.............................................. 7-10
Figures
7-1 Outside Drop Manhole Installation ................................................ 7-7
7-2 Stub Orientation for Connections .................................................. 7-7
7-3 Thrust Block Placement ................................................................ 7-9
© ADS, Inc., October 2016

7-1 OVERVIEW OF SANITARY SEWER SYSTEMS

Construction of new sanitary sewer systems, as well as the
separation of older combined sewers due to environmental concerns,
is a necessity for community development and growth. Being
essential to public health and overall welfare, sanitary sewers serve to
collect and transport domestic, commercial and industrial
wastewaters to a facility for treatment and disposal. For existing
combined storm and sanitary sewers, a community’s investment in a
dedicated sanitary sewer will aid environmental protection as well as
exclude storm water from the costly treatment processes.
There are a number of design considerations, including corrosion

resistance, structural strength, hydraulic characteristics, and overall
service life, that influence the selection of a pipe material. Finding a
balance between annual service costs and the system’s functionality
and durability over the service life is a critical decision when making
such a large monetary community investment.
7-2 SANITARY SEWER PROJECTS

A sanitary sewer project can be categorized into four main stages of
development: preliminary investigation, design, construction and
operation. The following briefly describes each stage of development
and its impact on the project.
PRELIMINARY INVESTIGATION
One the most critical stages of sewer development is the planning
stage. Inadequate preliminary and investigative work may adversely
affect the design or construction, compromising the successful
completion of the system in a timely and economical manner. Both
the engineer and owner must work together during this developmental
stage, though all policy and financial decisions remain exclusively with
the owner.
An engineering report is typically submitted once all preliminary work
is done. Included in the engineering report will be a review of existing
conditions as well as proposed methods and generic layouts that will
meet the project’s goals. While information tends to be relatively
broad during this stage, some specificity is necessary in order to
establish construction and operation cost estimates. Without
preliminary sizing, design data, financial planning, feasibility and the
overall consideration of all alternatives this stage cannot be
adequately completed.
DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
The design phase includes the preparation of the construction
documents by the design engineer. Plans and specifications will
provide contractors, distributors and vendors with information
necessary for bid proposal and determining suitable products. The
owner will continue to provide input and information as needed to
ensure the project meets the community’s needs, as well as review

any alternatives that are presented by the engineer.
Sanitary sewer system design has two primary considerations: the

design period for which the sanitary sewer will meet capacity
requirements and the design flow expected over the design period.
The design period for most sanitary trunk lines and interceptors is 50-
years. More rural or undeveloped areas may limit the development
period. The design period is also based on past and future water use,
population trends and current usage statistics.
The design flow is simply the quantity of water that will be conveyed
through the system. The determination of the design flow rate is
primarily dependent on the population served, population density, and
water consumption. In some communities however, inflow from non-
wastewater sources, like roof and foundation drains, may also be
included in the peak design flow. It follows intuition that construction
costs associated with sanitary sewers conveying both wastewater and
non-wastewater will be higher than costs of sanitary sewers in
communities that prohibit non-wastewater connections. Ascertaining
the peak design flow for a specific community will be influenced by
past usage, topography and political considerations, all of which will
vary regionally.
CONSTRUCTION
Once all plans have been finalized and approved by the owner, the
contactor assumes the liability of building the project per the drawings
and specifications. During this stage, the engineer often becomes a
representative of the owner, ensuring all work is done in accordance
with the contract documents. The engineer will review any submittals
from the contractor for proposed products or installation procedures
as well as troubleshoot any issues that may arise from errors in the
construction documents or if site conditions vary from the construction
documents, thereby affecting the anticipated progress of work.
OPERATION
Upon completion of construction, the owner will accept the system
and take final responsibility for operation and maintenance. The
engineer will provide all necessary operation and maintenance
information to the owner for the proper function of all parts of the
system. In some cases, the engineer or an outside consulting or
maintenance company may be contracted to assist with the operation
of the system.
7-3 ADS SANITITE® HP PIPE

The overall efficiency of a sanitary sewer system depends on a
balance of the initial construction costs and the long-term
performance of the system. Lower initial construction costs with poor
materials may result in high long-term maintenance costs, or even
replacement before the design period expires if serious issues arise.
However, high initial construction costs may put excessive burdens on

the community which can adversely affect future development.
To aid the designer in selecting a pipe material that will be suitable for
the specific project, the following provides design information specific
to ADS SaniTite HP pipe:
PIPE DESIGN
The SaniTite HP product is made from polypropylene resin which is
analogous to combining the durability of high density polyethylene
(HDPE), and the stiffness of poly-vinyl chloride (PVC) but with improved
impact resistance and less susceptibility to brittleness. SaniTite HP pipe
is available in 12- through 60-inch (300 to 1500mm) diameters.
Polypropylene products can be distinguished from other ADS pipe
products by its light grey color.
ADS SaniTite HP pipe uses the state-of-the-art design that incorporates

profile wall geometry for structural strength and a smooth inner wall for
hydraulic capacity. The 12- through 24- inch (300 – 600mm) pipe has a
corrugated exterior while the 36- through 60-inch (900-1500mm)
diameter pipe incorporate an exterior shell over the corrugations. The 30-
inch (750mm) pipe can have a corrugated exterior or an exterior shell
over the corrugations. The smooth inner wall combines superior
hydraulics with the ability to resist abrasion and corrosion. The corrugated
wall provides the strength necessary to withstand live loads associated
with heavy traffic and dead loads associated with deep burials. The outer
shell on large diameter pipe provides added stiffness and beam strength.
BELL & SPIGOT JOINT

The SaniTite HP joint features an extended bell-and-spigot joint that
promotes faster, easier installation along with increased joint
performance from the presence of two gaskets and a reinforced bell with
a polymer composite band. This joining method ensures joint alignment,
improves joint reliability, and eliminates the need for glue or secondary
joining operations. Joints provide a watertight level of performance
meeting the laboratory requirements set in ASTM D3212 with the
exception of an increased pressure of 15psi (100 kPa) with zero
leakage. In field applications, SaniTite HP pipe may be tested with an
allowable leakage rate in accordance with ASTM F2487 or F1417.
SaniTite HP pipe is intended for non-pressure, gravity flow sanitary
sewers.
FITTINGS
A large selection of fittings are available for SaniTite HP pipe,
including tees and reducing tees, wyes and reducing wyes, and as
well as reducers. Custom fabricated fittings may also be available and
will be evaluated based on the application conditions. Fabricated
fittings with an excess of 8-ft (2.4m) of cover should be reviewed by
the Engineering Services Department.

STRUCTURAL DESIGN
For evaluating SaniTite HP pipe’s structural performance, the
American Association of State Highway Transportation Officials
(AASHTO) Load Resistance and Factor Design (LRFD) method for
thermoplastic pipe is used. An explanation of the design method,
including pipe dimensional properties required for design, is available
in Section 2: Structures of this handbook. A maximum cover height
table, based on the backfill material and compaction level, for SaniTite
HP is also available in Technical Note 2.05: Minimum and Maximum
Cover Heights for SaniTite HP, included in this manual.
HYDRAULIC CHARACTERISTICS
Based on site requirements, the design engineer will determine if the
sewer will be gravity-flow or a force main. ADS sanitary sewer
products are only intended for gravity-flow conditions. The design
Manning’s “n” value for SaniTite HP is 0.012. Flow capacity charts may
be found in Section 3: Hydraulics section of this handbook.
DURABILITY CHARACTERISTICS
Another critical consideration during pipe material selection is its
durability in the corrosive environment typically found in sanitary
systems. Some designs are able to limit the concentration of
corrosive chemicals in the system through regular maintenance or
point-source control but their presence altogether is typically
unavoidable. SaniTite HP pipe is made from chemically inert and
highly durable polypropylene material which is unaffected by most
common sanitary sewer chemicals including hydrogen sulfide.
Additional information on the durability of the product is available in
Section 4: Durability of this handbook. Chemical resistance tables for
both polypropylene and available gasket materials for the joint are
available in Technical Note 4.02: Chemical Resistance of
Polypropylene and Elastomers, included in this handbook.
7-4 INSTALLATION CONSIDERATIONS

Standard installation recommendations for all ADS pipe products are
provided in Section 5: Installation of the Drainage Handbook.
Installation recommendations specific to ADS SaniTite HP pipe based
on the minimum or maximum fill height over the pipe are provided in
Technical Note 2.05: Minimum and Maximum Cover Heights for
SaniTite HP Pipe.
The selection of a suitable pipe product will also be dependent on any

special installation requirements for the system. The need for
additional fittings, structures or installation measures may increase
anticipated costs. The following addresses some common
considerations along with recommendations for the proper use of
SaniTite HP pipe.

MANHOLE AND STRUCTURE CONNECTIONS

Quite often, manhole connections will need to be watertight. Since
concrete does not readily adhere to thermoplastic material, a
compression gasket or boot connection will need to be used.
The use of flexible manhole connections will allow for some flexure at
the connection if some differential settlement occurs, but care should
still be taken to properly backfill and compact underneath the pipe at
the manhole to avoid shearing forces that may damage the pipe.
Using a short section of pipe, 3- to 6-ft (0.9-1.8m) long will also help
minimize affects of manhole settlement.
The outside diameter and profile of the pipe connecting to the

structure are critical for selecting the correct manhole gasket or boot.
Standard details are available that provide the pipe or fitting’s outside
diameter, as well as the part number of the respective manhole
compression gasket or boot connection that are supplied by other
manufacturers. Please contact your local sales representative for this
information.
DROP MANHOLES
For areas in the system where there is a significant change in grade
or elevation due to topography, a drop manhole may be used. Due to
space constrictions within the manhole and to avoid the increased
costs of larger manholes, outside drop structures are typically used.
To prevent pipe settlement when placed vertically, the entire section
should be encased in concrete to ensure adequate support of the
pipe. Figure 7-1 shows a typical outside drop manhole installation.
Based on diameter, a standard tee or wye fitting may be used to
transition to the lower section of the drop connection.

Figure 7-1
Typical Outside Drop Manhole
INCOMING
SEWER
CLEANOUT
WYE
MH
WALL
ELBOW
CONCRETE
ENCASEMENT
90° ELBOW
SERVICE CONNECTIONS & LATERALS

Sanitary sewer systems may require changing pipe materials, sizes,
elevation, or direction. Local regulations may require using a manhole
or structure to make these transitions but other options such as
fittings or adapters specifically designed for this application may also
be acceptable. Verify local requirements prior to ordering fittings,
adaptors, and other accessories and components.
If using an Inserta-Tee®, Fernco® QwikSealTM, or other field tap

connection, the stub portion should not be placed at an angle greater
than 45-degrees from horizontal. Stubs that must be oriented at an
angle greater than 45-degrees from horizontal may require flowable
fill or concrete backfill to prevent settlement into the mainline pipe.
Figure 7-2
Stub Orientation for Field Connections

HORIZONTAL CURVES
To improve hydraulics or as a cost saving measure to reduce
manholes, pipe lines may have gradual curves. A radius of curvature
can be achieved by laying straight sections of pipe and only deflecting
the joint. In order to maintain joint performance, joint articulation
should not exceed 3-degrees. Depending on project requirements,
fittings may also be used to create gradual transitions along the
pipeline. It is imperative the pipe itself shall never be bent or deflected
in order to create a radius.
CASINGS
Installations that must avoid disturbing the ground surface, whether
under a heavily travelled or protected area, or where high impact
surface loads are expected, will require the use of a casing pipe. ADS
products are not to be used during the jacking or boring operations
and should only be installed in a casing pipe that can withstand the
installation operations and final loading conditions. Other
circumstances requiring the use of a casing pipe include river
crossings, pipe crossings in close proximity, or high groundwater
pressures.
In contrast to sliplining installations where existing pipe is deteriorated

or failing, the casing pipe is installed shortly before the placement of
the sewer pipe. A horizontal bore is created using a rotating auger
within a steel casing. The casing used during boring may be left as
the final casing pipe or a different casing pipe is installed once boring
operations are complete.
The outside diameter of the sewer pipe and the inside diameter of the
casing pipe should be compared to ensure there is adequate space
for work procedures. Manufactured casing spacers or skids should be
secured to the sewer pipe in order to safely insert the pipe into the
casing pipe. Constant longitudinal support of the pipe is needed to
maintain a constant grade. Where full longitudinal support cannot be
achieved using spacers or skids, grout may be used to provide
support of the pipe and prevent flotation. For more detailed
recommendations related to installing pipe through casings, refer to
Technical Note 5.18 Lining of Casings with SaniTite HP Pipe
THRUST RESTRAINT
For gravity-flow systems additional measures may still be required to
prevent joint separation. Most commonly, a change in flow direction or
the presence of a soil with inadequate bearing strength to withstand
the load will necessitate some form of thrust restraint. Line
connections with a tee, directional changes with a bend and where
the pipeline size changes are common transitions where additional
restraint may be required.
Cast in place concrete thrust blocks are the most common

preventative measure taken. A generic example is shown in
Figure 7-3. A thrust block should not encase the entire joint;

otherwise flexibility of the joint will be limited. Concrete shall also be

poured against undisturbed earth to minimize soil consolidation.
Figure 7-3
Cast In Place Thrust Block Placement
Precast concrete blocks may also be used, but should not be placed
directly against the pipe to avoid point loads on the fitting. Backfill
should be placed between the face of the precast block and the fitting
in order to provide uniform support of the fitting.
The design of a thrust block is a function of the thrust force and the
load-bearing capacity of the soil. For gravity-flow systems, the thrust
force will vary based on the effluent velocity and pipe diameter. When
soil conditions are unknown, soil samples should be collected and
tested in order to determine the soil type. Engineering reference
manuals will provide typical soil bearing capacities based on soil type.
Burial depth can also be considered when determining soil bearing
capacity, where shallow (less than 3-ft [0.9m]) installations will lower
the soil’s bearing capacity.
GROUNDWATER
The maximum cover heights listed in Technical Note 2.05: Minimum
and Maximum Cover Heights for SaniTite HP Pipe do not account for
hydrostatic pressure due to groundwater. ADS Applications
Engineering can assist in determining the pipe’s structural
performance in accordance for LRFD Section 12 for projects where
the published assumptions are exceeded.
POST-INSTALLATION TESTING
Post-installation testing is commonplace for most sanitary sewer
installations. Thermoplastic pipes are tested for either joint integrity or
deflection, or both.
Joint integrity is tested by either pressurizing a run of pipe to

determine the leakage rate or by isolating a specific number of joints
and pressurizing only the joint to determine the leakage rate. The
project’s acceptable leakage rate will be a function of the test
pressure and test duration. Performance testing will use either air or
water to pressurize the void space in the pipe run or joint area. Refer
to the Installation section of the Drainage Handbook for additional
information on infiltration/exfiltration and air testing.

For SaniTite HP, ASTM F2487 is recommended for

infiltration/exfiltration testing, with a leakage rate of 50 gal/inch-
diameter/mile-pipe/day. ASTM F1417 is recommended for air testing.
Caution should be exercised to ensure any testing is done safely.
While an allowable leakage rate of 200 gal/in-diam/mile-pipe/day is a
common industry standard, regional leakage rates should be
consulted for the specific project.
Deflection testing of thermoplastic pipe provides a relatively quick

indicator of how well the backfill was placed around the pipe within
days of the installation. A deflection of 7.5% after 30 days is a
commonly accepted limit. Although the allowable deflection limit is
ultimately up to the design engineer, it should always be based on a
prescribed period of time, typically 30 days. Determining the allowable
inside diameter of the tested pipe is often stated in the projects
written specification but may also be based on the pipe’s initial base
inside diameter. For more information on deflection testing methods
and base diameter values of ADS pipe for deflection limits, refer to
Technical Note 5.17: Post-Installation Testing for SaniTite HP,
included in this manual.
7-5 REFERENCES
Gravity Sanitary Sewer Design and Construction (ASCE Manuals and
Reports on Engineering Practice No. 60) (WPCF Manual of Practice
No. FD-5). (1982). Virginia: American Society of Civil Engineers and
Water Pollution Control Federation.
7-6 OTHER TECHNICAL RESOURCES

ADS Technical Notes
Technical Note 2.05: Minimum and Maximum Cover Heights for SaniTite
HP Pipe
Technical Note 4.02: Chemical Resistance of Polypropylene and
Elastomers
Technical Note 4.03: Abrasion Resistance of Polypropylene
Technical Note 5.01: Recommended Use for Trench Boxes
Technical Note 5.02: Flowable Fill Backfill for Thermoplastic Pipe
Technical Note 5.05: Pipe Flotation
Technical Note 5.13: SaniTite HP Pipe Repair Options
Technical Note 5.14: Culvert Sliplining with HP Pipe
Technical Note 5.15: Integral Bell Transition for HP Pipe
Technical Note 5.16: Sealing Methods for Vent Tubes
Technical Note 5.17: Post-Installation Testing of HP Pipe
Technical Note 5.18: Lining of Casings with SaniTite HP Pipe

ADS Standard Details

Standard Detail 101F: Trench Installation Detail (SaniTite HP)
Standard Detail 205A through 205G: SaniTite HP Manhole Connections
Standard Detail 408 through 410: SaniTitie HP Tee Base Details

Sanitary Tech Notes
Sanitary Tech Notes

ADS, Inc. Drainage Handbook Technical Notes ♦ 7-1
9-0 SANITARY TECHNICAL NOTES

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section 1 – General Specifications
1.07 Manhole Adapter Guide – SaniTite HP and HP Storm Pipe
2.05 Minimum and Maximum Cover Heights for SaniTite HP Pipe for Sanitary Sewer
Section 5 – Installation
5.13 SaniTite HP Sanitary Sewer Pipe Repair Options

5.17 Post Installation Testing of SaniTite HP
5.18 Lining of Casings with SaniTite HP Pipe
 ADS, Inc., August 2023

Technical Note
TN 1.07 Manhole Adapter Guide - SaniTite® HP and HP Storm Pipe
Manhole Connection Basics

Compression Connections
• Gasket is cast into the wall of the manhole at the
precaster’s facility. Gasket cannot be field installed.
• A-LOK® Premium™ is recommended for all

connections. The Premium gasket has higher
compression than the A-LOK STM standard gasket,
which aids in sealing against the outer wall of SaniTite
HP triple wall pipe and the SaniTite HP manhole
adapter sleeve for dual wall pipe.
• A-LOK gaskets always need to connect to a smooth

surface of pipe – Nyloplast® adapter or ADS
adapter sleeves are required when using dual wall
pipe. Triple wall pipe requires no adapter.
Boot Connections:
• Gasket can be installed by the precaster or field-installed by the contractor. The precaster will form the required
hole in the structure and either the precaster or contractor will install the boot.
• Preferred manufacturers are Press Seal® (PSX Direct Drive) and Trelleborg (Kor-n-Seal®).
• Boots always need to connect to a smooth surface. You can connect to a dual wall pipe with an installed
corrugated pipe adapter (valley fill gasket) or a Manhole adapter sleeve.
Sleeve
Manhole Adapter
For HP & HDPE
12” - 24” (XX22AAPP)
Sanitary or Storm Joint
Not Available for 21”
Nyloplast® PVC
Manhole Adapter
Same OD as SDR35
12” – 24” (XX57AGHPU2) Sanitary Joint
HP
12” – 30” (XX57AGHPU) Storm Joint
HDPE 12” – 30” (XX77AGU) Storm Joint

Corrugated
Pipe Adapter
Gasket
Boot Connection Only
(XX50PS)
12” – 30” Sanitary or Storm Joint
36” – 60” Storm Joint
SaniTite HP TW to
HP Storm DW
30” – 60” Dual Wall
Storm Joint
Coordinate with plant to ensure correct gasket
for compatibility is installed prior to shipment.
CONSULT ADS SERIES 200 STANDARD DETAILS
The ADS logo, SaniTite HP, N-12 and the Green Stripe are registered trademarks of Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc.
Nyloplast® is a registered trademark of Nyloplast, Inc.
Technical Note
TN 2.05 Minimum and Maximum Cover Heights for SaniTite® HP Pipe for Sanitary
Sewer
Introduction
heights. Either may be considered "worst case" scenario from a loading perspective, depending on the project
conditions.

must have at least one foot (0.3m) of cover over the pipe crown, while 60-inch (1500 mm) pipes must have at least 24
inches (0.6m) of cover. The backfill envelope must be constructed in accordance with the Installation section (Section 5)
of the Drainage Handbook and the requirements of ASTM D2321. The backfill envelope must be of the type and
compaction listed in the Installation section of the Drainage Handbook, Appendix A-5, Table A-5-2. In Table 1 below, this
condition is represented by a Class II material compacted to 90% standard Proctor density although other material can
provide similar strength at slightly lower levels of compaction. Structural backfill material should extend to the crown of
the pipe; the remaining cover should be appropriate for the installation and as specified by the design engineer. If
settlement or rutting is a concern, it may be appropriate to extend the structural backfill to grade. Where pavement is
involved, sub-base material can be considered in the minimum burial depth. While rigid pavements can be included in
the minimum cover, the thickness of flexible pavements should not be included in the minimum cover.
of surface treatment which will be installed over the pipe zone. Please note Table 1 and 2 are based on the installation of
SaniTite HP under pavement using a uniform backfill type and compaction level, as depicted in Figure 1.
Table 1
Minimum Cover Requirements for ADS SaniTite HP with AASHTO H-20, H-25, or HL-93 Load
Diameter, ID, Cover Diameter, Cover
in.(mm) ft. (m) ID, in.(mm) ft. (m)
12 (300) 1 (0.3) 36 (900) 1 (0.3)
15 (375) 1 (0.3) 42 (1050) 1 (0.3)
18 (450) 1 (0.3) 48 (1200) 1 (0.3)
24 (600) 1 (0.3) 60 (1500) 2 (0.6)
30 (750) 1 (0.3)
Notes:
1. Minimum covers presented here were calculated assuming Class II backfill material compacted to 90%
standard Proctor density around the pipe and backfill to the crown of the pipe, as recommended in Section 5 of
the Drainage Handbook, with an additional layer of compacted traffic lane sub-base for a total cover as
required. In shallow traffic installations, especially where pavement is involved, a good quality compacted
further detail.
Maximum Cover
result when using the information presented in the Structures section (Section 2) of the Drainage Handbook. Table 2
below shows the material properties consistent with the expected performance characteristics for SaniTite HP materials
for a 100-year design life.
maximum cover limits for ADS SaniTite HP used in sanitary sewer applications are shown in Table 3 for a variety of
backfill conditions.
5) of the Drainage Handbook. Additionally, the calculations assume no hydrostatic load around the pipe, incorporate the
maximum safety factors represented in Structures section of the Drainage Handbook, use material properties consistent
with the expected performance characteristics for SaniTite HP materials, and assume the native (in-situ) soil is of
adequate strength and is suitable for installation. For applications requiring fill heights greater than those shown in Table
2 or where hydrostatic pressure due to groundwater is expected, contact an ADS Engineer.
Table 2
ADS SaniTite HP Mechanical Properties
Tensio Factored Initial 100-Year*
ASTM
Resin n Strain Compressiv Fu E Fu E
Specification
% e Strain % (psi) (psi) (psi) (psi)
Polypropylene,
Impact-modified ASTM F2764** 2.5 3.7 3,500 175,000 1,000 27,000
copolymer
*Values extrapolated from AASHTO LRFD Section 12 minimum material requirements.
**ASTM F2736 has been incorporated into the latest version of ASTM F2764.
Figure 1
ADS SaniTite HP Pipe Trench Detail (Sanitary Sewer)
Table 3
Maximum Cover for ADS SaniTite HP Pipe for Sanitary Sewer, ft (m)
Diameter Class 1 Class 2

in (mm) Compacted 95% 90%
40 28 20
12 (300)
(12.2) (8.5) (6.1)
41 29 20
15 (375)
(12.5) (8.8) (6.1)
43 29 21
18 (450)
(13.1) (8.8) (6.4)
37 25 18
24 (600)
(11.3) (7.6) (5.5)
30 21 15
30 (750)
(9.1) (6.4) (4.6)
29 21 15
36 (900)
(8.8) (6.4) (4.6)
42 32 22 16
(1050) (9.8) (6.7) (4.9)
48 33 23 16
(1200) (10.1) (7.0) (4.9)
60 31 21 15
(1500) (9.4) (6.4) (4.6)
Notes:
1. Results based on calculations shown in the Structures section of the ADS Drainage Handbook (v20.7). Calculations
2. Installation assumed to be in accordance with ASTM D2321 and the Installation section of the Drainage Handbook.
detail.
4. Material must be adequately “knifed” into haunch and in between corrugations. Compaction and backfill material is
assumed uniform throughout entire backfill zone.
7. See ADS Standard Detail STD-101F for additional details.
Technical Note
TN 5.13 SaniTite® HP Sanitary Sewer Pipe Repair Options
Introduction
ADS SaniTite HP for sanitary sewer is made of polypropylene (PP) resin making the pipe lightweight and very easy to
handle. The attributes that make the pipe easy to use can also make it susceptible to abuse, possibly resulting in
damaged pipe or joints. This technical note discusses some of the products available that can be used to repair damaged
PP pipe or joints in the field.
Repair Options
One of the primary considerations in selecting a repair method is the degree of joint performance required. For sanitary
sewer applications, a watertight repair is always necessary in contrast to storm drain repairs that may have a less
stringent joint performance. A commonly accepted industry maximum allowance specified for infiltration/exfiltration
acceptance for sanitary pipelines is 200 gal/in-diam./mile of sewer/day, though regional specifications may vary and be as
stringent as 50 gal/in-diam./mile of sewer/day.
individually.

Slip Couplings 12- through 30-inch (300 – 750 mm) , provides REPLACEMENT GASKETS (TYP)
a watertight repair that will meet most pressure testing SECTION
requirements, when installed correctly. The slip coupling uses

PVC bells with gaskets. The gaskets are placed in the valleys
on either side of the section to be repaired and slip couplings
are then slid over the gaskets. Due to the exterior gasket, the
slip coupling can only be used on pipe with a corrugated
exterior. PVC slip couplings are most commonly used with
SLIP COUPLING
watertight smooth interior thermoplastic pipe products. Note: (TYP)
This repair method cannot be used with the triple wall,
smooth exterior profile pipe.
Large Diameter Repair Coupler 12- through 60-inch (300 LARGE DIAMETER
COUPLER (TYP)
– 1500 mm) are ideal for repairs and alterations of large
diameter sewer pipe. Repair couplers similar to those
provided by Mission Rubber Company LLC, Fernco® or
equal may be used on SaniTite HP pipe.
The couplers are used by removing the damaged section of pipe, replacing it with a new section and then sliding the
coupler back around the joint, similar to the slip coupling above. The couplers stainless steel bands are then tightened to
the manufactures recommendations. These rubber couplings are capable of meeting watertight field test requirements
when installed per the manufacturer’s recommendations.
Concrete Collar 12- through 60-inch (300 – 1500 mm), provides a

water tight repair testable to most hydrostatic test with an
WATERSTOP
appropriate leakage requirement. Installing a concrete collar GASKET (TYP)
6"
involves building a form around the area to be repaired and POLYSEAL (TYP)
encasing it in concrete. A Mar Mac Polyseal Pipe Coupler is
wrapped around the repair area or joint prior to pouring the collar
to keep the concrete from seeping into the pipe. WaterStop
gaskets are installed outside of the Polyseal coupler towards the
outside edge of the concrete collar. Typically, approximately 6” ~
(0.15m) is excavated beneath the pipe to allow for proper
application of the Polyseal coupler and concrete encasement. If CONCRETE
ENCASEMENT
the pipe itself is damaged, the damaged area shall be removed
and a replacement pipe section spliced in prior to pouring the
collar. This repair option may be employed for either dual wall or
triple wall sanitary pipe.
Internal Repairs
NPC Internal Joint Seal, 18- through 60-inch (450 – 1500 mm), consists of an EPDM rubber seal and stainless steel
bands. The rubber seal is inserted into the pipe and positioned over the joint. A torque wrench is used to expand the
bands against the inner wall of the pipe. The Internal Joint Seal is designed to seal joints – not repair damaged pipe
sections. The damaged area of the pipe must be removed and a replacement section spliced in if necessary in order to
use the Internal Joint Seal. This system may provide a watertight joint when installed as recommended. The
manufacture should be contacted to verify the product meets the specific application requirements including test
Welding, 36- through 60-inch (900 – 1500 mm), is another method of internal joint repair where personnel use hand-held
welding guns to make the needed repair. Extrusion welding techniques are most commonly utilized, however other
welding methods may be used depending on the condition of the damage. Clean and dry working conditions and skilled
operators are critical to a successful repair. Contact ADS to discuss the type of damage and to assess if a welded repair
will be suitable.
Link Pipe Grouting SleeveTM, 12- through 60-inch (100 – 1500 mm), is a stainless steel grouting sleeve that is installed
with an inflatable plug. The sleeve may be used to seal a joint or repair short sections of damaged pipe. The manufacture
specified.
types of chemical grouts available and the manufacturer should be contacted to review the specific situation and any joint
Note: Thermoplastic pipe products are solely intended for the conveyance of fluids. Access into this product for
Technical Note
TN 5.17 Post Installation Testing of SaniTite® HP
Introduction
Sanitary sewer is often tested after or during installation to ensure a sound installation was accomplished. Types of post
installation field testing include deflection testing and joint testing. Specific testing required for the project will be found in the
project specifications. This technical note is not meant to supersede any project specification, but should be used in
conjunction with the project specification and national testing standards as it relates specifically to SaniTite HP pipe.
Deflection Testing
An important feature of any flexible pipe is its ability to deflect, or oval, under load without structural distress. Deflection
allows the load to be transferred from the pipe to the surrounding backfill. The result is flexible pipe can withstand very high
loads as a relatively light structure. Flexible pipe – including SaniTite HP – must deflect in order to mobilize the strength of
the surrounding backfill.
According to current thermoplastic design procedures, deflection is defined as a service limit. The designer, considering all
site conditions, will set this service limit in order to perform a proper design evaluation. Deflection in excess of this service
limit does not necessarily result in strength limits being exceeded, i.e. system failure. For more information on service and
strength limit states, see the Structures section of the Drainage Handbook. SaniTite HP can be expected to perform
satisfactorily in most applications with 5% or 7.5% deflection and so it is typical of designers to choose a service limit in this
range.
When testing for allowable deflection limits, the minimum inside diameter should be used when establishing mandrel sizing.
The minimum inside diameter accounts for the allowable manufacturing tolerances. Table 1 lists the inside diameters that
result from 5% and 7.5% deflection from the minimum inside diameter. Values listed in Table 1 should be used for sizing
mandrels for deflection testing. Mandrels may be obtained from a variety of commercial suppliers.
Table 1
SaniTite HP Recommended Mandrel Settings
Pipe Pipe Minimum Inside Diameter Inside Diameter
Type Diameter Inside with 5% with 7.5%
Diameter Deflection Deflection
12 11.90 11.31 11.01
Dual Wall
15 14.85 14.11 13.74

18 17.93 17.03 16.59
24 23.90 22.71 22.11
30 29.79 28.30 27.56
30 29.62 28.14 27.40
Triple Wall
36 35.40 33.63 32.75

42 41.31 39.24 38.21
48 47.31 44.94 43.76
60 59.30 56.34 54.85
It is important to understand that mandrel testing is a go/no-go test. If any line were to not pass a
mandrel, it is important to ascertain the cause. Obstructions in the line, not associated with
deflection, may influence the test. Visual inspection is recommended in the event of a no-go
result.
Joint Testing
Joint testing is an important part of any sanitary sewer system, both in testing for infiltration and exfiltration. Infiltration aids
to estimate the amount of sewer water that will be conveyed to, and ultimately treated by, the waste water treatment plant.

OSHA and project specifications. There are two primary national testing standards that may be applied to joint testing
SaniTite HP: ASTM F1417 Standard Test Method for Installation Acceptance of Plastic Gravity Sewer Lines Using Low-
Pressure Air, and ASTM F3058 Preliminary Field Testing of Thermoplastic Pipe Joints for Gravity Flow (Non-Pressure)
Sewer Lines. When either standard is specified by the project plans, one should review the standards carefully and follow
the testing procedure and safety precautions outlined. The below commentary on the ASTM testing procedures should be
considered a summary and does not replace the testing procedures outlined in their respective specifications.
pressurized and is stable at 4.0-psi, the pressure is decreased to 3.5-psi at which time the line must not lose more than 0.5-
or 1.0-psi (whichever is specified by the design engineer) in the specified amount of time. Table 2 below summarizes the
minimum time that must be reached for less than 0.5- or 1.0-psi of pressure drop, depending on the diameter and length of
pipe being tested.
Table 2
Time to Pressure Drop for SaniTite HP (per ASTM F1417)
Length Time for Time for Length Shown, (min:sec)
Pressure Minimum
Pipe for Longer
Drop Test Time
Diameter Minimum Lengths, 100 ft 150 ft 200 ft 250 ft 300 ft 350 ft 400 ft 450 ft
(psi) (min:sec)
Time, (ft) (sec)
0.5 5:40 1.709 L 5:40 5:40 5:42 7:08 8:33 9:58 11:24 12:50
12 199
1.0 11:20 3.418 L 11:20 11:20 11:24 14:15 17:05 19:56 22:47 25:38
0.5 7:05 2.671 L 7:05 7:05 8:54 11:08 13:21 15:35 17:48 20:02
15 159
1.0 14:10 5.342 L 14:10 14:10 17:48 22:15 26:42 31:09 35:36 40:04
0.5 8:30 3.846 L 8:30 9:37 12:49 16:01 19:14 22:26 25:38 28:51
18 133
1.0 17:00 7.692 L 17:00 19:13 25:38 32:03 38:27 44:52 51:16 57:41
0.5 11:20 6.837 L 11:24 17:57 22:48 28:30 34:11 39:53 45:35 51:17
24 99
1.0 22:40 13.764 L 22:47 34:11 43:34 56:58 68:22 79:46 91:10 102:33
0.5 14:10 10.683 L 17:48 26:43 35:37 44:31 53:25 62:19 71:13 80:07
30 80
1.0 28:20 21.366 L 35:37 53:25 71:13 89:02 106:50 124:38 142:26 160:15
It may not be necessary to hold the test for the entire time period listed above when it is evident that the rate of air loss is zero or less than the allowable pressure drop
and authorized by the approving authority1.
equipment consists of two inflatable bladders, placed on each side of the joint, creating an open center cavity between them.
The bladders are inflated and then the center cavity is pressurized to 3.5 psi. The joint passes the test if the pressure is held
for 5 seconds without dropping more than 1.0-psi. For all practical purposes, this is a go/no-go test. Final acceptance of the
pipeline per this testing method shall be at the discretion of the Design Engineer. One advantage of this type of test is the
ability for the installer to quickly test the joint immediately after installation, allowing for any corrective measures to be taken
early on in the project.
Testing sanitary sewer joints via water infiltration or exfiltration is a common practice. For SaniTite HP, this testing should be
conducted in accordance with ASTM F2487 Standard Practice for Infiltration and Exfiltration Acceptance Testing of Installed
Corrugated High Density Polyethylene Pipelines.These standards entail first observing the ground water conditions and, if
applicable, measuring the infiltration rate of the ground water through the joints. If ground water is not applicable, then the
line is filled with water and the leakage is observed through exfiltration.
For the infiltration test the ground water must be at least 2 feet above the crown of the pipe for the entire test section. If this
groundwater condition is not present, exfiltration testing should be used. Measure the groundwater elevation and determine
the average head, relative to the pipe invert, over the test section. All outlets discharging into the upstream manhole shall be
plugged. Measure the infiltration leakage at the outlet of the test section. The leakage may be small and is best measured
by timing the filling of a container of known volume or by directing the flow into a container for a specified time and
measuring the volume. Weirs may also be used to measure the flow.
Exfiltration testing is appropriate when the groundwater condition is less than 2 feet above the crown of the pipe measured
at the upstream end. All outlets discharging into the upstream end of the test section as well as the downstream end shall be
plug. At the upstream manhole the test head shall be established at a minimum of 2 feet above the crown of the pipe or 2
feet above the existing ground water condition, which ever is higher. The leakage shall be measured over a timed test
period of not less than 15 minutes and no more than 24 hours. Leakage may be measured through observation in a water
column or by adding water at a known rate to satisfy a constant water elevation.
Allowable Leakage
The allowable leakage rate for SaniTite HP is 50 gallons/in-dia/mi-pipe/day for both infiltration and exfiltration when done in
accordance with ASTM F2487
Conclusion
ADS SaniTite HP is intended for gravity flow sanitary sewer applications and may be tested for deflection and joint tightness
as discussed in this technical document. It is important to note that the testing procedures are no different than for other
sanitary sewer products currently being used in the market. This document does not purport to address the safety concerns
associated with testing SaniTite HP. Any questions associated with testing SaniTite HP can be directed to your local
representative.
References
1. ASTM F1417, Standard Test Method for Installation Acceptance of Plastic Gravity Sewer Lines
Using Low-Pressure Air, ASTM, 2005
2. F3058, Preliminary Field Testing of Thermoplastic Pipe Joints for Gravity Flow (non-Pressure)
Sewer Lines, ASTM, 2016.
3. Uni-B-6-98, Recommended Practice for Low-Pressure Air Testing of Installed Sewer Pipe, Uni-
Bell PVC Pipe Association, 1998
4. ASTM F2487, Standard Practice for Infiltration and Exfiltration Acceptance Testing of Installed
Corrugated High Density Polyethylene Pipelines, ASTM, 2006
Technical Note
TN 5.18 Lining of Casings with SaniTite® HP Pipe
In sanitary sewer, it is often necessary to use trenchless technology methods to install a casing pipe under high volume
roads, railroads or other sensitive areas where the ground surface cannot be disturbed. Methods of installing the casing
pipe will vary based on the native soil conditions, groundwater location, length of installation and the precision required
for the pipe line and grade. SaniTite HP is not designed to withstand the high compressive or tensile forces associated
with trenchless placement; however SaniTite HP pipe can be used as a carrier pipe within a casing, provided open pits
are used at each end of the tunnel operation to prevent bending of the pipe in place. When short sections of sanitary
sewer require trenchless placement, commonly a smooth-walled steel pipe with protective coating is used as the casing
pipe, with its wall thickness dependent on anticipated loading conditions as well as regional specifications. Common
placement methods for steel casings include horizontal auger boring (HAB) or pipe jacking, but the casing placement
method does not necessarily impact the carrier pipe installation, as long as adequate access is provided.
Sizing of the Casing Pipe

In some cases, the diameter of the casing pipe may be limited by the in-situ conditions,
such as proximity to bedrock or the presence of weak native soils. Where in-situ
conditions are not the limiting factor in casing sizing, the smallest possible diameter
pipe is often desired and is contingent upon the carrier pipe’s outside diameter,
additional conduits, and support/bracing system required for the carrier pipes. Table 1
provides the maximum possible pipe outside diameter.
Table 1
Dimensions of HP Pipe Products
Inside Diam. Diam.* Inside Diam. Diam.*
12 (300) 14.6 (371) 30 (750) 35.7 (907)
Triple Wall
Dual Wall
15 (375) 17.8 (452) 36 (900) 41.7 (1059)

18 (450) 21.5 (546) 42 (1050) 47.5 (1207)
24 (600) 28.2 (716) 48 (1200) 54.3 (1379)
30 (750) 35.5 (902) 60 (1500) 67.2 (1707)
* Contact ADS for additional guidance if anticipated OD values provided may not provide adequate clearance.
To ensure consistent line and grade over the life of the sanitary sewer, the pipeline is braced in the
casing to prevent movement. Bracing systems can range from field-installed skids banded to the exterior
of the pipe to manufactured casing spacers installed incrementally along the carrier pipe. The bracing
system and the diameter of the casing are dependent on each other, where a specific casing spacer
type may require a larger clearance around the carrier pipe, or vice-versa where a casing pipe diameter
may limit the type of bracing that can be used. Additional information on bracing systems and installation
is the Casing Spacers and Skids section of this document. No matter what bracing system may be used,
minimum 1-inch should be left between the inside of the casing and the outside of the bracing. This
clearance helps prevent the pipe/spacer system from getting wedged in the casing due to warped casing
pipe or imperfections caused during trenchless operations.
In the case of trenchless casing pipe installations, the casing pipe being installed is typically designed such that the live
and dead loads are carried solely by the casing pipe with no load being transferred to the carrier pipe. For cases where a
deteriorating pipe is being sliplined or the design requires a load to be carried by the sewer pipe within the casing, pipe
suitability is often evaluated as if the casing pipe were not present and fill height and live loading recommendations are
followed in the same manner as open-cut trench installations.
Installation Techniques
Often times the length of sewer section requiring a casing is less than 300ft when road or
rail crossings are relatively narrow. For these circumstances, a typical method simply
involves joining successive carrier pipe joints together outside of the casing while pushing
the carrier pipe through the casing. It is recommended that a push stub or large blocking
surface be used to push the pipe through the casing to avoid point loads damaging the pipe
end.
A second method involves passing a cable through the casing and the first stick of pipe to
pull the pipe in place. On the opposite end of the pipe a suitable cross piece is installed as
well as protection for the pipe joint (push stub). The cable is pulled through the casing by a
winch or other mechanical equipment thus bringing the carrier pipe inside the casing.
Once a majority of the first pipe is inside the casing, the cross piece is disassembled and
attached to the next pipe, joints are assembled and the operation begins again. See
Figure 2 for an illustration of this method.
Figure 2
Pulling HP Pipe in Casing
JOINT PROTECTION
(PUSH-STUB)
SKID STRAPPING
CROSS PIECE
CABLE
PROVIDE NOTCH FOR

STRAPPING
CASING
SKIDS SKIDS
Using casing spacers will help minimize the resistance between the two surfaces, possibly allowing for longer
installations. Table 2 provides the maximum recommended thrust force on the joint. While push length values are
provided for reference, specific installation conditions, including the casing pipe and spacer/blocking materials, will
impact the allowable push length.
Table 2
Maximum Push Force on HP Products
Nominal Max Thrust Push
Inside Diam., Force, Length1,
in (mm) lbs (kN) ft (m) NOTES:
Push length is provided as general design
12 (300) 1,500 (6.7) 400 (121) guidance. Allowable push lengths should be
15 (375) 2,000 (8.9) 400 (121) calculated based on the project’s installation
conditions using the maximum thrust force
18 (450) 3,000 (13.3) 400 (121) values listed in this table. The push length
24 (600) 4,500 (20.0) 400 (121) values shown account for weight of HP pipe
and a casing pipe w/ blocking resulting in a
30 (750) 4,500 (20.0) 400 (121) coefficient of static friction=0.7. Conditions or
36 (900) 9,000 (40.0) 300 (91) design values that vary from these assumptions
will impact the actual thrust force on the joint
42 (1050) 11,000 (48.9) 300 (91) and therefore the allowable push length.
48 (1200) 12,000 (53.4) 300 (91)
60 (1500) 16,000 (71.2) 300 (91)
Unlike some other pipe products where even short push lengths can cause over-homing, SaniTite HP does not require
special joint blocks to be fabricated; however, joint restraints may aid in protecting the joint only when the joint thrust
force may be high and longer installations are anticipated.
If maximum insertion forces are being exceeded, it is important to adjust the construction technique so as to not damage
the carrier pipe. One solution is instead of joining adjacent pipes outside of the casing and pushing one long section,
multiple, shorter sections are homed within the casing at the final location so as to avoid pushing the entire section of
pipe. This technique can also be utilized when pulling sections into the casing as illustrated in Figure 3. It is important to
note that access to the carrier pipe during joint assembly inside the casing is imperative for proper joint alignment.
Figure 3
Alterative Installation Method
(Used when maximum insertion forces are likely to be exceeded)
JOINT PROTECTION
(PUSH-STUB) CASING
CROSS PIECE
CABLE
Casing Spacers and Skids

Skids may be attached to the carrier pipe to provide a sliding surface between the casing
and the carrier pipe. It is important that the skids be notched where the straps are to provide
a smooth sliding surface. Typically 2 to 4 skids are placed around the pipe. These skids run
the length of the pipe, however should not be located in the spigot portion of the pipe as this
may affect joint assembly. Wood blocks should never be wedged between the carrier pipe
and the casing pipe.
Commercially available casing spacers may also be used to slide and guide the carrier pipe
into the casing. When using dual wall sanitary pipe it is important that spacers be chosen
that span at least two corrugations. Small sections of lumber may be used under the spacer
to act as a bridge for the spacer to set on. Casing spacers are typically manufactured from
polyethylene or a combination of stainless steel with polyethylene runners, but other non-
corrodible materials are available. The benefits of using manufactured casing spacers
include ease of installation with no banding tools needed, a lower coefficient of friction and
ability to glide over rough spots or welded joints that may otherwise cause binding.
The casing spacer manufacturer should be contacted for exact sizing availabilities, but in general, molded plastic spacers
provide shorter runner heights compared to stainless steel configurations. Other considerations including pipe diameter
and weight will impact casing spacer selection. Because of the lightweight of SaniTite HP, molded plastic casing spacers
can often withstand the weight expected from pipe and effluent in the system. Some casing spacer manufacturers are:
RACI (www.racispacers.com),
Cascade Waterworks Manufacturing
(www.cascademfg.com),
Pipeline Seal & Insulator, Inc (www.pipelineseal.com), and
Advance Products & Systems, Inc. (www.apsonline.com)
Spacing between spacers or skids is a function of the long term unsupported settlement of flexible pipe. Commonly in
sanitary sewer, hydraulics and prevention of depressions in the line are the primary considerations for determining an
allowable grade deviation, not necessarily product deflection limitations. As a general guideline and as specified in some
regions, the pipe grade should vary no more than 0.25-in from true grade. Based on this requirement, maximum
unsupported distances for SaniTite HP 30”-60” pipe is 7ft and for 12”-24” pipe is 4ft. This recommendation is based on
the conservative assumption that the sewer line will be flowing full for the duration of its service life. For cases where a
specific settlement allowance exists or more accuracy is desired, Chart 1 below provides anticipated long-term
settlement of the pipe under full-flow conditions based on spacer distance. If the necessary spacing cannot be achieved
or is not practical, other methods to support the pipe invert may be used, including the use of skids in between supports
or filling the void space with soil or grout material, at the discretion of the design engineer. Alternative design
assumptions, such as lower flow capacities, will impact the anticipated settlement of the pipe and maximum unsupported
length of pipe.
Chart 1
Unsupported Deflection of SaniTite HP
Closure After Pipe Installation

Any post-installation testing required for the sewer pipe should be successfully completed before any
backfilling or closure operations begin.
Filling the void space between the carrier pipe and the casing pipe shall be done at the discretion of the engineer. In
some cases, fill material may cause the load to be distributed to the carrier pipe and affect performance if not initially
accounted for in structural design. Partial fill that supports the bottom ¼ of the pipe may sometimes be used if the
invert of the pipe must be fully supported to ensure long-term grade elevation. Grout material, often a controlled low
strength material (CLSM), also referred to as controlled density fill, CDF, or flowable fill is commonly utilized, with
blown sand and gravel being other materials used to fill the void space as desired. CLSM will help provide uniform
support on the sides of the pipe, maintain a consistent soil density, provide lateral support for the pipe, and eliminate
point loads. For more information on flowable fill mix, refer to Technical Note 5.02: Flowable Fill Backfill for
Thermoplastic Pipe. It is critical measures be taken to prevent flotation to maintain adequate line and grade of the
carrier pipe. Grouting in layers thin enough, such that they don’t float the pipe, helps tremendously.
Each layer should be allowed to set up between pours. Contractors may have other techniques that will also prevent
flotation such as the use of deadweight inside the pipe. Regardless of the method used, it is also important to avoid
applying point loads to the pipe. For more information on flotation and anchoring methods, refer to Technical Note 5.05:
Pipe Flotation.
When SaniTite HP pipe, or any flexible pipe, is used as a liner,
it is very important not to use excessive grout pressure. In
most circumstances, the joint, not the wall strength, will be the
limiting factor for establishing a maximum allowable grouting
pressure. Including a factor of safety, the recommended
maximum grouting pressure for HP pipe products is 5 psi; this
value may vary based on specific site conditions and specific
products used. During the grouting operation, gauges should
be used to monitor the grout pressure exerted on the pipe
system. For some applications, hydrostatic head pressure may
increase the expected pressure on the pipe from the grouting.
Additional pressure may also result from the slope and/or
diameter of the pipe, elevation changes between the pipe and
the gauge, and other conditions that should be considered
during the design. The sum of all pressures that will be
exerted on the pipe should not exceed the recommended
maximum pressure for the application.
Once the carrier pipe has been successfully placed and tested within the casing pipe and any backfilling procedures are
complete, the ends of the casing are typically sealed to prevent infiltration. Bricks, grout or manufactured rubber end
seals are typical methods for sealing the ends of the casing pipe. For installations where a high hydrostatic load is
anticipated, a watertight seal, such as a rubber boot, may be necessary to protect the carrier pipe.
References
ADS, Inc. Drainage Handbook References ♦ 8-1
________________________________________________________________________________________________
SUMMARY OF CURRENT STANDARD

SPECIFICATIONS USED IN THIS HANDBOOK
AASHTO STANDARDS
American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials
Standards
LRFD Section 12 – Buried Structures and Tunnel Liners
M43 – Sizes of Aggregate for Road and Bridge Construction
M190 – Bituminous-Coated Corrugated Metal Culvert Pipe and Pipe-
Arches
M218 – Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized), for Corrugated Steel
Pipe
M245 – Corrugated Steel Pipe, Polymer-Precoated, for Sewers and
Drains
M252 – Corrugated Polyethylene Drainage Pipe
M274 – Steel Sheet, Aluminum-Coated (Type 2), for Corrugated Steel
Pipe
M289 – Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated Sheet Steel for Corrugated Steel
Pipe
M294 – Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe, 300- to 1500-mm Diameter
M330 – Polypropylene Pipe, 300- to 1500-mm (12- to 60-in.) Diameter
Section 26 – Metal Culverts
Section 30 – Thermoplastic Pipe
ASTM STANDARDS
American Society for Testing and Materials Standards
A536-84 – Ductile Iron Castings
A924 – General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated by the
Hot-Dip Process
C969 – Infiltration and Exfiltration Acceptance Testing of Installed Precast
Concrete Pipe Sewer Lines
D737 – Air Permeability of Textile Fabrics
D1056 – Flexible Cellular Materials – Sponge and Expanded Rubber
D1117 – Test Methods for Nonwoven Fabrics
D1149 – Rubber Deterioration – Surface Ozone Cracking in a Chamber
D1248-98 – Polyethylene Plastics Extrusion Materials for Wire and Cable

D2321 – Underground Installation for Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and

Other Gravity-Flow Applications
D2412 – Determination of External Loading Characteristics of Plastic
Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading
D2487 – Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes
D3034 – Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings
D3212 – Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible
Elastomeric Seals
D3350 – Polyethylene Plastics Pipe and Fittings Materials
D3786 – Hydraulic Bursting Strength of Textile Fabrics – Diaphragm
Bursting Strength Tester Methods
D4101 – Polypropylene Injection and Extrusion Materials
D4355 – Deterioration of Geotextiles by Exposure to Light, Moisture and
Heat in a Xenon Arc Type Apparatus
D4491 – Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity
D4533 – Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles
D4632 – Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles
D4751 – Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile
D4833 – Index Puncture Resistance of Geotextiles, Geomembranes, and
Related Products
D5034 – Breaking Strength and Elongation of Textile Fabrics (Grab Test)
D5199 – Measuring Nominal Thickness of Geotextiles and
Geomembranes
D5261 – Measuring Mass per Unit Area of Geotextiles
F477 – Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe
F481 – Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe and Corrugated Pipe in Septic
Tank Leach Fields
F667 – Large Diameter Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings
F679 – Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer
Pipe and Fittings
F794 – Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Profile Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings
Based on Controlled Inside Diameter
F810 – Smoothwall Polyethylene (PE) Pipe for Use in Drainage and
Waste Disposal Absorption Fields
F949 – Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Corrugated Sewer Pipe With a
Smooth Interior and Fittings
F1336 – Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Gasketed Sewer
Fittings
 ADS, Inc., June, 2014

________________________________________________________________________________________________
F1417 – Installation Acceptance of Plastic Gravity Sewer Lines Using

low-Pressure Air
F2306 – 12 to 60in. Annular Corrugated Profile-Wall Polyethylene (PE)
Pipe and Fittings for Gravity-Flow Storm Sewer and Subsurface Drainage
Applications
F2487 – Standard Practice for Infiltration and Exfiltration Acceptance
Testing of Installed Corrugated High Density Polyethylene Pipelines
F2649 – Standard Specification for Corrugated High Density
Polyethylene (HDPE) Grease Interceptor Tanks
F2737 – Standard Specification for Corrugated High Density
Polyethylene (HDPE) Water Quality Units
F2762 – 12 to 30 in. [300 to 750 mm] Annular Corrugated Profile-Wall
Polyethylene (PE) Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary Sewer Applications
F2764 – 6 to 60 in. [300 to 1500 mm] Polypropylene (PP) Corrugated
Double and Triple Triple Wall Pipe and Fittings for Non-Pressure Sanitary
Sewer Applications
F2881 – 12 to 60 in. [300 to 1500 mm] Polypropylene (PP) Dual Wall
Pipe and Fittings for Non-Pressure Storm Sewer Applications
F3058 – Standard Practice for Preliminary Field Testing of Thermoplastic
Pipe Joints for Gravity Flow (Non-Pressure) Sewer Lines
CSA STANDARDS
B182.8-11 – Profile Polyethylene (PE) Storm Sewer and Drainage
Pipe and Fittings
B182.11-11 – Standard practice for the installation of thermoplastic

drain, storm, and sewer pipe and fittings
B182.13-11 – Profile Polypropylene (PP) Sewer Pipe and Fitings for

leak-proof sewer applications
BNQ STANDARDS
1809-300/2007 – General Technical Specifications – Drinking Water
And Sewer Lines
3624-110/2006 – Polyethylene (PE) Pipe Fittings- Semi-Rigid or

Flexible Pipes for Surface Water Evacuation, Soil, Drainage and
Culverts- Characteristics and Test Methods
3624-115/2007 – Polyethylene (PE) Pipe and Fittings- Flexible Pipes

For Drainage- Characteristics and Test Methods

3624-120 – Polyethylene (PE) Pipe and Fittings- Smooth Inside Wall

Open Profile Pipes for Storm Weser and Soil Drainage-
Characteristics and Test Methods
3624-913-2013 – Polypropylene (PP) Pipe and Fittings- Certification

Protocol
COE STANDARDS
US Army Corp of Engineer Standards
02215-86 – Geotextiles Used as Filters
IAPMO STANDARDS
International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials Standards
PS63-2004a – Plastic Leaching Chambers
SCS STANDARDS
Soil Conservation Service Standards
606 – Subsurface Drain
 ADS, Inc., June, 2014

________________________________________________________________________________________________
The following reference material may prove helpful in gaining additional

information on polyethylene and storm drainage systems.
American Iron and Steel Institute. Handbook of Steel Drainage and
Highway Construction Products. New York:AISI, 1971.
American Railway Engineering Association. Manual for Railway
Engineering. Washington D.C.: AREA, 1984.
American Society of Civil Engineers. Structural Plastics Design Manual
(ASCE Manuals and Reports on Engineering Practice No. 63). New
York: ASCE, 1984.
American Society of Civil Engineering/Water Pollution Control
Federation. Gravity Sanitary Sewer Design and Construction. New York:
ASCE/WPCF, 1982.
Agricultural Research Service. “Structural Design Procedure for
Corrugated Plastic Drainage Tubing - Technical Bulletin No. 1466.”
Washington D.C.: United States Department of Agriculture, 1973.
Atkins, Harold N. Highway Materials, Soils, and Concrete. Reston, VA:
Reston Publishing Co., 1980.
Katona, Michael G. “Allowable Fill Heights for Corrugated Polyethylene
Pipe.” Transportation Research Board, 1987.
Katona, Michael G. “Minimum Cover for HDPE Corrugated Pipe - Phase
1.” Corrugated Plastic Tubing Association, 1988.
Katona, Michael G. “Minimum Cover for HDPE Corrugated Pipe - Phase
1 and 2.” Corrugated Plastic Tubing Association, 1989.
Spangler, Merlin G. and Handy, Richard L. Soil Engineering. New York:
Harper and Row Publishers, 1982.

adspipe.com
800-821-6710
© 2023 Advanced Drainage Systems, Inc. #10599 12/23 MH

January 2024 Drainage Handbook

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

January 2024 Drainage Handbook

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

January 2024 Drainage Handbook

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Water Management

 ADS, Inc., January 2024

Arc TM Septic Leaching Chamber Specification ..................................................................................... 44

 ADS, Inc., January 2024

N-12® ST IB PIPE (ASTM F2648) SPECIFICATION

 ADS, Inc., January 2024

N-12® WT IB PIPE (PER ASTM F2648) SPECIFICATION

Field Pipe and Joint Performance

 ADS, Inc., January 2024

N-12® ST IB PIPE (PER AASHTO) SPECIFICATION

Build America, Buy America (BABA)

 ADS, Inc., January 2024

N-12® WT IB PIPE (PER AASHTO) SPECIFICATION

Field Pipe and Joint Performance

Build America, Buy America (BABA)

 ADS, Inc., January 2024

N-12® MEGA GREENTM ST IB PIPE SPECIFICATION

 ADS, Inc., January 2024

N-12® MEGA GREENTM WT IB PIPE SPECIFICATION

Field Pipe and Joint Performance

 ADS, Inc., January 2024

N-12® WT SERIES 35 PIPE SPECIFICATION

Build America, Buy America (BABA)

 ADS, Inc., January 2024

N-12® PLAIN END PIPE (PER ASTM F2648) SPECIFICATION

 ADS, Inc., January 2024

N-12® PLAIN END PIPE (PER AASHTO) SPECIFICATION

Build America, Buy America (BABA)

 ADS, Inc., January 2024

N-12® MEGA GREEN PLAIN END PIPE SPECIFICATION

 ADS, Inc., January 2024

LANDMAX® RETENTION/DETENTION PIPE SYSTEM SPECIFICATION

Watertight (WT IB):

 ADS, Inc., January 2024

Additional installation requirements are provided in the Drainage Handbook Section 6

TYPICAL RETENTION/DETENTION CROSS SECTION

FILTER FABRIC UNDISTURBED

Technical Note 6.01 Retention/Detention System Maintenance

Technical Note 7.01 Rainwater Harvesting with HDPE Pipe

Standard Detail 701 Retention-Detention System (Plan View)

Standard Detail 702 Retention-Detention System (Cross-Section)

Standard Detail 703 Retention-Detention System (Riser & Cleanout)

Standard Detail 704 Flowable Fill Installation (Nyloplast Riser)

All references are available for download at www.adspipe.com

 ADS, Inc., January 2024

HP STORM 12”- 60” PIPE SPECIFICATION

Field Pipe and Joint Performance

Build America, Buy America (BABA)

 ADS, Inc., January 2024

SANITITE® HP 12”- 60” PIPE SPECIFICATION

Field Pipe and Joint Performance

Build America, Buy America (BABA)

 ADS, Inc., January 2024

N-12® LOW HEAD PIPE SPECIFICATION

Field Pipe and Joint Performance

Build America, Buy America (BABA)

 ADS, Inc., January 2024

 ADS, Inc., January 2024

SINGLE WALL PIPE SPECIFICATION

 ADS, Inc., January 2024